$% w CORNEL] KEY T l U L ■■Kb LIBRARY OF CONGRESS. ©fa p Shelf UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, CORNELL'S KEY TO BIBLE STUDY OR THE BIBLE TAUGHT AS A SCIENCE. WITH A SERIES OF Introductory Bible Lessons, DESIGNED FOR Sunday Schools, Normal Glasses and Institutes. ACCOMPANIED BY AN Illustrated Biblical Index, 24 by 34 Inches, NEATLY BOUND AND MOUNTED ON ROLLER. " Understandest thou what thou readest?" Acts, viii : 30. By C. V, D. CORNELL. - — ; — Millport, N. Y. 1881. ,c b1 Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1880, by C. V. D. CORNELL, In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington, D. C. Printed and Bound i>y E. R.Andrews, Electrotyped by James Lean* Rochester. N. Y. Rochester, N. y. TO ALL THOSE WHO DESIEE A KNOWLEDGE OF GOD'S EEYEALED WILL, AXE A SHAEE IX THE INHERITANCE, IS THIS WORK INSCRIBED BY THE AUTHOR. PREFACE. IN the last prayer of Jesus for his disciples, he says: "This is life eternal, that they might know Thee, the only true God, and Jesus Christ, whom thou hast sent." (John, xvii: 3.) To have an intelligent understanding of that record which reveals the true God, and the qualification to teach it to others, should be the ambition of every disciple. In this small work the reader must not expect to find all that it is necessary to know in order to be a good Bible student. This is not the object of the author. But it is to lay out and present what the frame-work of a building is to the structure when completed, and thereby lead the student to a systematic ac- quaintance with this great temple of God's wisdom. Should one ask: How can I qualify myself for a Sunday school teacher? how would we answer the question? This question has been asked many times during the last century, since the organiza- tion of Sunday schools, and it has received the one universal answer, namely: " Read your Bible. " The Ethiopian Eunuch was reading his Bible when overtaken by Philip. As they entered into conversa- tion, Philip asked the question: " Understandest thou what thou readest? " Listen to the reply: " How can I, except some one guide (instruct) me? And he desired Philip that he should come up and sit with him." (Acts, viii: 30, 31.) It was "at the same Scripture " (Isa. ch. liii) that Philip ' ' began and preached unto him Jesus. " The reading alone did not satisfy this earnest inquirer after truth any more than it answers the earnest inquirer after knowledge which will qualify him to be an efficient Sunday school worker. Where is the earnest and devoted child of God who, if he has not asked another, has asked himself the question: How can I qualify myself to be an instructor or a laborer in the vineyard of my Master? A desire on the part of young Christians to teach does not qualify them for the work; but it is the first thing necessary in making an efficient teacher, for it is this desire that prompts or calls for the qualification. The young Christian, thirsting after knowl- edge, after asking the question, says to us: " Come up and sit " with VI PREFACE. us. And if we answer the question, we must commence from the question, as Philip did from " the Scripture." For many years we have been obliged to hear this question, with no possible means of answering it. Here we saw there was a felt want of a satisfactory solution to this very important inquiry. It was twenty-five long years before the author received the first conception of how it might be answered. But soon after the first came the second, of which the following work is the result. That the Scriptures designed there should be • teachers there is no doubt, for Paul tells us there were various gifts dispensed in his day. In his letter to the church at Ephesus he says : "And he (Christ) gave some, apostles; and some, prophets; and some, evangelists; and some, pastors and teachers; " the object of which was " For the per- fecting of the saints, for the work of the ministry, for the edifying of the body of Christ." (Eph. iv: 11, 12.) It seems to us that, the office of teacher is a very important one ; and if so, it is our duty to qualify ourselves. In the course of my Sunday school work for the last thirty years, more frequent than all others have I heard this excuse when requested to take a class: "I am not qualified." In answer to this I could but reply: Why don't you qualify yourselves? It is then we hear the reply of the Eunuch: " How can I except some one instruct me." Now this ends the controversy until some method or system is introduced to answer this great demand. Over thirty years ago I asked myself this question : Why may not the Bible be taught on the same plan as other sciences? When we look on these years past and see the improvement that has been made in the development of all the sciences, they having been brought down to the comprehension of a child, it seems to us that the Bible only has been left in the background. We do not say by this that there has been no improvement in the system of Bible teaching; far from that, for the International Series are a decided advance upon the old seven verse system. But I do say that this is not equal to the advance made in the sciences; and I would not be far from the truth if I should say that Biblical science of to-day is where mathematics and geography were thirty years ago, and will there remain until some system is introduced and adopted to bring it to the front. To say that the Bible is not a scientific work — that it has not a scientific arrangement in the order of its several parts — would be to reflect discredit on its Author, and rob him of those great attributes of order and design which belong to him. There was for a time a sacred or hallowed influence which seemed to PREFACE. Yll surround the Scriptures, and forbade the thought of reducing it to a science ; but this gradually disappeared with the growing desire to meet the great want of the age. The views presented in this introductory work are the result of a long experience in Sunday schools and conventions. Two motives prompted me in pursuing this task: first, my own felt want; and second, the demand on the part of others. The labor expended in the preparation of the Illustrated Index, and this volume as a Key, in connection with the series of Introductory Lessons, was very great. It has formed almost a daily subject of thought for twenty- five years. Many of the lessons have been revised four and five times. The criticism of Biblical scholars may reveal imperfections, but this method of teaching the Bible is the result of practical experience with the author. He now presents it completed, but not claiming perfection. The author's design has been to prepare a work which, while easily understood and complete in scope, would, like the dictionary, be consulted whenever occasion required it. Information as gathered from a great number of volumes is usually not accessible to those by whom it is most needed. Hence the need of works in a con- densed form. Thus two objects have been kept in view in the preparation of this work, first, completeness, and second, brevity, so that the teacher or ordinary Bible reader might not be obliged to read volumes in order to know God's revealed icill. (See Chap. XXXVII.) A system is presented in this work for the special guidance of the teacher in imparting a knowledge of the Bible in our Sunday schools: first, the external, or history of the Bible (as presented in an intro- ductory lesson), preparatory to the study of the internal; and second, the internal, a revelation of God's will. This is not intended for infant class instruction, but for the adult student. In view of the great demand on the part of thousands in our land for help, I have attempted to supply this demand, introducing this great Bible science, in simple yet progressive manner, so easy to be understood that the child who can read may comprehend. I now offer the work to all Bible students, and especially to Sunday scJujoI teachers, with the prayer that it may be the means whereby many may obtain eternal life. If, by the blessing of God, it does this, the author will feel more than paid. C. V. D. CORNELL. Millport, IS". Y. Ylll PREFACE. INTRODUCTION TO LESSONS. The series of graded lessons presented in this work is intended to supply the felt want of qualifying Sunday school teachers for their work. The advantages of this sj^stem over the old are : First. In the old there is little opportunity for thought; the mind is constantly required to grasp something before it, like reaching after something in the dark. But in these lessons the thoughts are required to go back and digest the lesson (as will be seen in the Suggestions to Teachers) ; for the complete understanding of these lessons comes only to the mind as thought is brought to bear upon them. For instance, suppose the Bible student reads a chapter requiring fifteen minutes of time ; which is the most profitable to that student, to give that chapter just read another fifteen minutes of careful thought, or to push forward in continuous reading? The answer is obvious. Second. The student is made acquainted with many things which are absolutely necessary to an understanding of the Bible, which no system ever before adopted, viz: the definition and abbreviation of words used; correct pronunciation of words; the chronology of the Bible; the time, place and circumstance which called forth each book; also a brief historical account of the several writers. The history of the Bible is brought out; its original construction, its age, how preserved unchanged, its translation into the languages of the earth, its division into chapter and verse, etc., etc. And again, its being taught as any and every other science, introducing it to the pupils in the most simple and easy manner, acquainting them with such matter which leads them, step by step, from the most simple into the more advanced stage of Biblical knowledge. The lessons are so arranged as to meet both the wants of the private student and the demands of normal classes and institutes. Each lesson is topical, and is intended. to be illustrated on the black- board. Each blackboard lesson is given and introduced in the work, with its accompanying questions and notes, in its appropriate place. There is great benefit derived, aside from the valuable mate- rial contained in the lessons, in leading the pupils to do their own thinking, and to use their own hands in all the operations required. This work may be studied and used as a text-book, and the Biblical Index as a map, to place before the eye the entire analysis of the Bible as presented in full in our work. PREFACE. IX SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. In order to become teachers the student must become familiar with the topics, and should study the directions given. By close attention to this, much may be accomplished ; without it, little. The teacher -who uses merely the suggestive questions here given, in order to lessen the labor of study or thinking, will fail, as they are only presented as aids to an honest effort. The power of any method lies in its suggestiveness, giving direction to the thoughts; for the teaching of to-day (says De Graff) is an art as well as a science. These lessons are not intended to occupy a portion of the time usually allotted to the Sunday school for other lessons; but it is to be the lesson, occupying one-half hour or more, under the leadership of the superintendent or conductor. The leader should master each lesson well before coming into the presence of his class. Each lesson having from five to seven topics (except Introductory and Interim), the conductor should bring out each lesson within the space of one hour. The student is required to have a Reference Bible, which has many marginal notes and the dates; also a blank book, 4 by 6 inches in size, and containing at least thirty leaves, and with it a good lead pencil. Each left hand page of this blank book is intended for the blackboard lesson, to be put down by the student as brought out by the conductor, and precisely in the same form. The conductor, with crayon in one hand and copy of the black- hoard lesson in the other, before the board, will ask such questions as are found below the blackboard illustration, and such others as may suggest themselves on the topics in question. If the questions are such as may be answered by reference to the Bible, and are not known to the class, state where they may be found, and be sure that «ach member of the class finds them. By this means they will become familiar with the Bible. Place the same on the board, writing or printing the answers as attractive as possible, which can be done by a little practice. Require everything that is placed on the board, so far as possible, to be produced by the pupils. See that each one places the same in their blank book. The opposite or right hand page of this blank book is intended for noting down " Gems of Thought " (which is the title of the page), as brought out by the conductor in each lesson. Under this title (Gems of Thought) the student is required, during the interval of each lesson, to recall from board illustration, and such other matters of X PREFACE. interest as brought out by the conductor, and write them down.* For thus is he not only learning to think, but also to transfer his thoughts to paper. Before proceeding to the next lesson, the conductor should call out from the student some of these "Gems" as a review of former lessons. f The conductor should review every time before entering a new lesson; and, so far as it is possible, review from the beginning, until the pupil is perfectly familiar with every topic developed. Let the student also be furnished with Labels for Reference Bible, which are furnished by the author of this work. These labels are to be put in place by the student, as required in each of the lessons. For instance, in the third lesson we have the two " Great Grand Divisions," named Old and New Testament. Now insert these tags or labels in their respective places, at the top of the Reference Bible. In like manner the other divisions, as called for in the lessons follow- ing. The names of the different books of the Bible are placed in the front of the page, in their respective places, beginning with " Gen." and ending with "Rev." See notice on last page. The following is from De Graff's School Room Guide : "LAWS of teaching. 1. Know thoroughly and familiarly whatever you attempt to teach. 2. Gain and keep the attention of your pupils, and excite their interest in the subject. 3. Use language which your pupils fully understand, and clearly explain every new word required. 4. Begin with what is already known, and proceed to the unknown by easy and natural steps. 5. Excite the self-activity of the pupils, and lead them to discover the truth for themselves. 6. Require the pupils to re-state fully and correctly, in their own language, and their own illustrations, the truth taught them. 7. Review, review, review — carefully, thoroughly, repeatedly. Note. These laws underlie and control all successful teaching. Nothing need be added to them; nothing can be safely taken away. ♦The conductor should insist on carrying into effect this suggestion, for it is a matter of great interest to the student. + The author has been surprised, in giving the lessons, at the development of thought In children from eight to ten years of age. PREFACE. XI Be cheerful and smile often. A teacher with a long face casts a gloom over everything. Do not try to teach too much; better a little and teach it well. Review each lesson, or much will be lost." AUTHORS CONSULTED IN THE PREPARATION OF THIS WORK. The author acknowledges his indebtedness to friends who have aided in the work r and also to the following authors. Some of the articles quoted were collected several years prior to the thought of preparing this work, hence have not the name of the author. I have made free use of the views advanced by these authors, and claim no credit in anything except the method as applied to Biblical instruction. Henry's Comprehensive Commentary and Supplement. Scott's Commentary: Improved London Edition. History of the English Translation of the Bible: by Mrs. H. C. Oonant. Help to Read the Bible : by B. E. Nicholls, M. A. Dr. Win. Smith's Old and New Testament Histories: Student's Series. Home's Introduction to the Study of the Bible. Cottage Bible and Family Expositor: Rev. Wm. Pattern.- Kitto's Illustrated History of the Bible. Why Four Gospels: D. S. Gregory, D. D. Bible Antiquities: J. W. Nevins, D. D. Conybeare and Howson's Life and Epistles of Paul. Douay Bible. (Catholic version.) C. H. M.'s Notes on Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus and Numbers. The Gospel Treasury: Robert Mimpriss. Encyclopedia of Religious Knowledge : Rev. J. Newton Brown. Prophets of the Restoration: Rev. T. V. Moore, D. D. The Works of Flavius Josephus. The Psalms: Revised by T. J. Conant. Genesis : Revised by T. J. Conant. The Pictorial Bible Commentator: Ingraham Cobbin, V. D. M. Smith's Bible Dictionary. Complete Works of Andrew Fuller. Hand of God in History: Rev. H. Reade. Sunday School Geography: G. A. Starkweather. Coleman's Historical Text Book and Atlas. Osborn's Biblical Atlas. Bible Atlas and Gazetteer : American Tract Society. GENERAL SUBJECTS OF CHAPTERS. Xlll FOUR INDICES. This work is indexed for practical use in four different ways : First. By general subjects in thirty-seven (37) chapters. Second. By general and particular subjects in thirty-seven (37) chapters, four hundred and seventy-one (471) sections or subjects treated. Third. By an index of the twenty-three (28) Blackboard Lessons and the subject of each. Fourth. By an alphabetical index of all general and particular subjects. See page 365. GENERAL SUBJECTS OF CHAPTERS. CHAPTER. PAGES. I. History of the Bible, 1-35 II. The Bible Opened, _.. 36-41 III. Illustrated Biblical Index, 42-47 IV. Grand Divisions of the Bible, 48-53 V. Old Testament Divisions, 54-59 VI. New Testament Divisions, * 60-65 VII. Sub Divisions: Genesis, 66-71 VIII. Exodus, 72-74 IX. Leviticus,.. 75-78 X. Numbers, 79-82 XL Deuteronomy, 83-87 XII. Sub Divisions: Joshua, 88-91 XIII. Judges, 92-95 XIV. Ruth, 96-97 XV. 1st Samuel, .' 98-100 XVI. 2d Samuel, , 101-103 XVII. 1st Kings, ... 104-108 XVIII. 2d Kings {Jon. Ill, Eos. 112, Am, 115, Joel, 117, Isa. 119, Mi. 123, Nah. 125, Zeph, 126), 108-129 XIV GENERAL SUBJECTS OF CHAPTERS. CHAPTER. XIX. XX. XXI. XXII. XXIII. XXIV. XXV. XXVI. XXVII. XXVIII. XXIX. XXX. XXXI. XXXII. XXXIII. XXXIV. XXXV. XXXVI. XXXVII. PAGES. 1st Chronicles, 129-1 35 2d Chronicles (Im. 142-145, Jer. 147, Hob. 150),. 136-151 History and Prophecy just Before and After the Destruction of Jerusalem (Jer. 152-154, Lam. 155, Oba. 156, Eze. 158),. - 152-160 History and Prophecy During the Captivity (Dan. 161, Isa. 164), 161-167 Return from Captivity (Ezra, 168, Hag. 172, Zech. 174, Esth. 176, Neh. 180, Mai. 182),.... 168-191 Devotional Books (Job, 192, Psa. 195, Prov. 198, Eccl. 1 99, Song of Sol. 200), . 1 92-208 The Interim (400 years), 209-228 The World's Preparation for Christianity, 229-235 New Testament, -- 236-243 Matthew, 244-249 Mark, 249-255 Luke, 256-266 John, 267-281 Acts: Church History (1 These. 286, 2 Thess. 288, 1 Cor. 290, 2 Cor. 293, Gal. 295, Rom. 298),-. 281-302 Acts: Church History, Continued (Phile. 303, Col. 305, Eph. 306, PMU. 308, 1 Tim. 312, Tit. 314, 2 Tim. 315, Heb. 318), 303-327 General Letters (Ja. 328, 1 P. 330, 2 P. 332, 1 Jn. 333, 2Jn. 336, 3 Jn. 336, Ju, 337), 327-339 Future: Revelation, 340-353 Illustrated Index Concluded, 354-356 Abstract of Title to Heavenlv Inheritance, . 357-364 TABLE OF CONTENTS. XV TABLE OF CONTENTS. GENERAL AXD PARTICULAR SUBJECTS. PAGE. PREFACE,." v Introduction to Lessons, viii Suggestions to Teachers, ix Authors Consulted, xi General Subjects of Chapters, xiii Table of Contents, xv List of Blackboard Lessons, _ xxv Chap. I. History of the Bible. Pabt I. SECTION. PAGE. 1. Names of the Bible, 1 2. Bible Lands, 1 •3. Ancient Books, 3 4. Sealing of Books, 4 5. Divisions of the Bible, 4 6. Punctuation, 5 7. Age of the Bible, 6 8. Preservation of the Bible, 7 9. Unchanged Condition, ... 8 10. History of the English Translation, 9 11. Our English Bible, 12 12. Bible Societies, 13 13. Bible Printed in the United States, _ 14 Part II. 14. The Tradition of the El- ders, _ 14 SECTION. PAGE. 15. The Apocrypha, 16 16. The Old Testament Manu- script, 17 17. The New Testament Man- uscript, 18 18. Ancient Versions, 20 19. History of the Canon, 23 20. Inspiration of the Bible, . . 23 21. Accuracy of the Old Tes- tament, 24 22. Prophecy from God, 25 23. Originality "of the Bible,.. 25 24. The Writers of the Bible, 27 25. -Rules of Interpretation, .. 29 26. Two Questions, 32* Lesson I and II, 33 Chap. II. The Bible Opened. 1. The Bible Taught as a Science, 36 2. Two Grand Themes, 36 3. Two Great Questions, 37 4. Two Great Parts, 38 5. The Word Testament De- fined, 3S 6. Juxtaposition of Old and New Testaments, 38 7. The Great Object, 39 Lesson III , 40 XVI TABLE OF CONTENTS. Chap. III. Illustrated Bibli- cal Index. 1. Object of this Work, .... 42 2. Illustrated Biblical Index, 43 3. Two Great Grand Divi- sions, 44 4. Dates of Old and New Tes- taments, 44 5. Sphere or Globe, . 45 6. Illustrations, . . 45 7. Meridian Line, 47 8. A Beautiful Illustration,.. 47 9. Three Old Testament Grand Divisions, _ . . 47 10. Number of Books, 47 Chap. IT. Grand Divisions of the Bible. 1. Historical: First Old Tes- tament Grand Division, 48 2. Poetical : Second Old Tes- tament Grand Division, 49 3. Prophetical: Third O. Tes- tament Grand Division, 49 Lesson IV, 51 *4. Historical: First New Tes- tament Grand Division, 52 5. Epistolary: Second N.Tes- tament Grand Division, 52 6. Apocalyptic: Third N.Tes- tament Grand Division, 53 Lesson V, . . 53 Chap. V. Old Testament Divi- sions. 1. Old Testament: Historical, 54 ('/) Law,. 54 (b) Executive, 55 2. Poetical, 55 (a) Job, 56 (A) Psalms,. 56 {c) Proverbs, .'. 56 (d) Ecclesiastes, 56 (e) Song of Solomon, 57 3. Prophetical, 57 (a) Major Prophets, 5? (b) Minor Prophets, 59 Lesson VI, 59 Chap. TI. New Testament Di- visions. 1. N. Testament: Historical, 60 (fit) Life of Christ, 61 (b) Church History, 61 2. Epistolary, 61 (a) Doctrinal, . 62 (b) Supplement, 62 3/ Apocalyptic, 63 Lesson VII, 65 Chap. VII. Sub-Divisions of the Bible. 1. Sub-divisions or Names, . . 60 2. Explanations, 67 3. Reflections, 67 4. The Law, 68 5. GENESIS, 68 6. History of Mankind, 69 7. Church History, 69 8. The Writer,. 70 9. Prophecies and Types, .;. 70 10. Scientific View of Creation, 70 11. Outline of Genesis, 71 12. Conclusion, 71 Chap. VIII. Exodus. 1. EXODUS, 72 2. Moses the Writer, 72 3. Outline of Exodus, 73 4. Reflections, 73 5. Prophecies and Types 73 6. Conclusion, 71 TABLE OF CONTEXTS. XV11 Chap. IX. Leviticus. 1. LEVITICUS, 75 2. Laws of Sacrifices and Of- ferings, - 75 3. The Writer of Leviticus, . 75 4. Subjects of the Book, 75 5. Festivals, etc., 76 6. Institution of Public Wor- ship, _ 76 7. Types, 76 8. Tables Weights, etc. , 76 5. Jewish Times and Festi- vals, 78 Chap. X. Numbers. 1. NUMBERS, 79 2. A Diary, 79 3. General Outline, 79 4. Number of Israel, .. 79 5. Particular Outline, 80 6. Tribes in Camp (111.), .... 81 7. A Prophecy, 83 Chap. XI. Deuteronomy. 1. DEUTERONOMY, 83 2. Where Written, 83 3. A History of Five Weeks, 84 4. The Repetitions, 84 5. A Rehearsal, 84 6. When to be Read, 84 7. General Outline, 85 8. Great Value of the Penta- teuch, 86 Lesson VIII, 87 Chap. XII. Sub-Divisions. [CONTINUED.] 1. The Executive, 88 2. Sacred History, 88 3. The Compilers, 89 4. Genuineness of this His- tory, 89 5. This History Very Ancient, 89 6. JOSHUA 90 7. Church Established in Ca- naan, 90 8. Government Theocratic, . _ 90 9. Doctrine of the Future State, 91 10. General Divisions, 92' 11. Prophecy Fulfilled, 92 Chap. XIII. Judges. 1. JUDGES, 92 2. Province of Judges, 93 3. The Writers, 93 4. Names of the Judges, 93 5. Chronology of the Book,. 94 6. General Survey, 94 7. Outline of Judges, 94 8. A Link in History, 95 Chap. XIT. Ruth. 1. RUTH, 96 2. Flight into Moab, 96 3. Return to Judea, 96 4. Design of the Book, 97 5. Boaz Mighty in the Law, . 97 6. Comforting Reflection, ... 97 Chap. XT. I Samuel. 1. SAMUEL, Volume I, ... 98 2. The Writer, 98 3. A Word to the Reader,.. 98 4. General Divisions, 99 5. Outline of 1 Samuel, 99 6. Eulogy on Samuel, _. 100 7. Samuel as a Prophet, ... 100 XV111 TABLE OF CONTEXTS. Chap. XVI. II Samuel. 1. SAMUEL, Volume II,-- 2. David and the Psalms, . _ 3. General Divisions, ... 4. Outline of 2 Samuel, 5. Supplement to 2 Samuel, 6. Importance of this His- tory, 101 101 102 102 103 103 Chap. XVII. I Kings. 1. HISTORY OF THE KINGS, Vol. I, 104 2. General Divisions, 104 3. Outline 1 Kings, Part I (Ch. i-xi), 105 4. The Reign of Solomon, _ 105 5. Outline 1 Kings, Part II (Ch. xii-xxii), 106 6. Remarks on the Kings, . . 108 Chap. XVIII. II Kings. 1. HISTORY OF THE KINGS, Vol. II, ---_ 108 (a) Outline 2 Kings, Chap, i-xiv, 109 2. Prophecy of JONAH, ..111 (a) First Mention of Him, 111 (b) His Prophecy, 112 (c) Outline, ... 112 ((?) Type of Christ, 112 3. Prophecy of HOSEA, .. 112 (a) Particular Prophecies, 113 (b) Divided into Dis- courses, 114 4. Prophecy of AMOS, 115 (a) His Use of Imagery,.. IK! {b) Outline, 116 5. Outline 2 Kings, Contin- ued (Chap, xv), 117 6. Prophecy of JOEL, .... 11,7 A Bad Slate of Things, 118 (b) Outline, 118 7. Prophecy of ISAIAH,.. 119 (a) General Analysis, 119 (b) Prophecies of Christ, . 120 8. Outline Isaiah, Part I (Chap, i-v), 121 9. Outline 2 Kings, Contin- ued (Chap, xvi), 122 10. Prophecy of MICAH,... 128 (a) His Predictions, 123 (b) Divisions, . 124 11. Outline 2 Kings, Contin- ued (Chap, xvii-xix), _ . 124 12. Prophecy of NAHUM,_. 125 13. Outline 2 Kings, Contin- ued (Chap, xx, xxi),___ 126 14. Prophecy of ZEPHANI- AH, ._ 126 (a) Object of the Proph- ecy, 126 (b) Outline, ..%'.. 127 15. Outline 2 Kings, Contin- ued (Chap, xxii-xxv),. 127 16. Conclusion of Kings, -.. 129 Chap, XIX. I Chronicles. 1. CHRONICLES, Vol. I,. 129 2. Three General Parts, 131 3. Outline Part I (Ch. i-ix), 131 4. Outline Part II (Ch. x),_. 132 5. Outline Part III (Ch. xi- xxix), 133 Chap. XX. II Chronicles. 1. CHRONICLES, Vol. II, 136 2. Two General Parts, 136 3. Outline Part I (Ch. i-ix), 137 {a) Outline Part II (Ch. x-xxxvi), 138 4. Prophecy of Isaiaii, Part II (Ch. vi-xii) 142 TABLE OF. CONTENTS. XIX SECTION. PAGE. (a) Outline, 142 5. Outline 2 Chronicles, con- tinued (Ch. xxix-xxxi), 142 6. Prophecy of Isaiah, Part III(Ch. xiii-xxiii), ... 143 7. Prophecy of Isaiah, Part IV (Ch. xxiv-xxxv), . . 144 8. Outline 2 Chronicles, con- tinued (Ch. xxxii), 145 9. Prophecy of Isaiah, Part V (Ch. xxxvi-xxxix), _ _ 145 10. Outline 2 Chronicles, con- tinued (Ch. xxxiii), 146 11. Prophecy of JEREMI- AH, . 147 (a) Prophecies Respecting Christ, 147 {b) Two General Parts, . . 148 (c) Part I, Sections I-V,- 148 (d) Part II, Sections I-II, 149 12. Outline 2 Chron. contin- ued (Ch. xxxiv, xxxv), 149 13. Prophecy of HABAK- KUK, 150 (a) Outline, 150 (b) Concluding Remarks,. 151 14. Outline 2 Chronicles, con- tinued (Ch. xxxvi), ... 151 15. Conclusion to Chronicles, 151 €hap. XXI. History and Pro- phecy Just Before and After the Destruction of Jerusa- lem. 1. Outline Jeremiah, Sec.V, Part I (Ch. xxxii-xliv), 152 2. Outline Jeremiah, Sec. I, Part II (Ch. xlvi-li),.. 153 3. Outline Jeremiah, Sec. II, Part II (Ch. lii), 154 SECTION. PAGE. 4. LAMENTATIONS OF JEREMIAH, 155 5. Prophecy of OBADIAH, 156 (a) Who the Edomites were, 156 (b) The Prophecy Ful- filled, 157 6. Prophecy of EZEKIEL, 158 {a) Divisions of the Proph- ecy, 158 {b) Outline Part I (Ch. i- xxiv), 158 (c) Outline Part II (Ch. xxv-xlviii), 1 59 (d) Character of the Pro- phecy, 159 (e) The Ten Lost Tribes, . 160 Chap. XXII. History and Prophecy During the Cap- tivity. 1. Prophecy of DANIEL,.. 161 (a) Chronology of this Book, ..'. 162 (b) Two General Parts, .. 162 (c) Outline Part I: Histor- ical, 163 (d) Outline Part II: Pro- phetical, . 164 (e) Daniel as a Writer, . _ . 164 2. Prophecy of Isaiah, Part VI,... 164 (a) Outline Isaiah, contin- ued (Ch. xl-lix), 166 Chap. XXIII. Return from Captivity. 1. EZRA: Continued His- tory of the Jews, 168 2. Three General Parts 169 XX TABLE OF CONTEXTS. SECTION. PAGE. 3. Outline Ezra, Part I (Ch. i,ii),PartII(Ch.iii-v), 169 4. Introduction to the Resto- ration Prophets (Eag- gai, Zechariah and Mai- achi), 170 5. Prophecy of HAGGAI,. 172 (a) General Divisions, 172 (b) Explanation of this Prophecy, -- - 173 (c) Characteristics of the Prophet, 173 6. Prophecy of ZECHARI- AH, 174 (a) Four General Parts, ._ 174 (b) Analysis, 174 7. Outline Ezra, Part II, continued (Ch. vi),.-..- 176 8. Outline Ezra, Part III (Ch. vii), 176 9. ESTHER: Historical, .- 176 (a) Special Providence Il- lustrated, .. 177 (b) Anal} r sis, 179 10. Outline Ezra, Part III, continued (Ch. viii-x), 180 11. NEHEMIAH: Continu- ed History of the Jews, 180 {a) Outline (Ch. i-xiii), .. 181 12. Prophecy of MALACHI, 182 (%) Peculiarity of this Prophecy, 183 (b) Divisions of this Pro- phecy, . . 183 (c) Analysis, 183 13. Diagram of the Kings and Prophets, 184 Lesson IX and X, .185 Lesson XI, 188 Lesson XII and XIII,... 189 Tabular View of the Prophets 191 Chap. XXIY. Devotional. 1. JOB: "Patience," 192 {a) Three General Parts,. 192 {b) Analysis, 193 (c) Depository of Patriar- chal Religion, 193 2. PSALMS: " Sacred Hymns," 195 {a) Adaptation to Wor- ship, . . 195 (b) Messianic Character,. 196 (c) Five Collections, 196 3. PROVERBS: "Maxims," 198 {a) Design of this Book, , 198 (b) Five General Parts, .. 199 4. ECCLESIASTES:' 'Hap- piness," 199 {a) For the Young, 200 5. SONG OF SOLOMON, 200 (a) A Poem, 201 Lesson XIV, 202 6. Chronology of Old Testa- ment Historical Books, 203 Chap. XXT. The Interim. 1. Inter-Biblical History, .. 209 2. Political History of the Jews, 210 3. The Four Periods, 211 First Period, 211 Second Period, 212 (I) The Samaritan Oppo- sition, 212 (II) Highpriests, . 213 (III) The Septuagint Tran- slation, 214 (IV) Histoiy under High- priests, 214 Third Period, 216 (I) Judas Maccabeus 216 (II) John Ilyrcanus, 217 TABLE OF CONTENTS. XXL SECTION. PAGE. Fourth Period, 217 (I) The Design of Herod, 218 (II) The Jews Disap- pointed, 218 (III) Extent of the Reign of Herod,... ..- 219 (IV) Herod's Public Ad- ministration, 220 (V) Herod's Temple,.... 220 (VI) Herod's Successor, . - 221 4. Moral History of the Jews 221 (a) State of Religion, 222 (b) New Religious Centre, 222 (c) The Great Expecta- tion, 223 5. Synagogue System, 224 6. Three Prevailing Lan- guages, 225 Lesson XV, 227 Chap. XXVI. The World's Preparation for Chris- tianity. 1. The Fullness of Time,-. 229 2. 1st, By Centralization, ._ 229 (a) The Boundary, 229 {b) Conquest, 230 3. 2d, By Civilization, 230 («) The Roman Art, 231 (&) The Grecian Schools, . 232 4. 3d, By Demoralization, _ _ 233 (a) Prayer for Deliverance 234 (b) Prince of Peace, 234 Lesson XVI, 235 Chap. XXVII. New Testament. 1. Preface, 236 2. Grand Divisions, 238 3. Historical, 239 4. Introduction to the Four Gospels, 239 SECTION. PAGE^ (a) Luke the Historian, _. 240 {b) Theory of the Origin, 240 (c) Gospel for the World, 240 (d) Races of the World,.. 241 (e) Preaching to the World 241 (/) Demand for Perma- nent Records, 241 (g) Adequacy, 242- Chap. XXVIII. Matthew. 1. Introduction to Mat- thew's Gospel, 244 («) The Promise, 244 {b) Character and Needs of the Jews, 244 2. General Divisions, .. 246 3. Matthew's Use of the Scriptures, 24$ 4. Omissions of the First Gospel, 247 5. Additions of the First Gospel, 248 Chap. XXIX. Mark. 1. Introduction to Mark's Gospel, 249 2. Witnesses, 251 3. Character and Needs, of the Romans, 251 4. General Divisions, 252 5. Roman Adaptation, 253 6. Omissions of the Second Gospel, 254 7. Additions of the Second Gospel, 255 Chap. XXX. Luke. 1. Introduction to Luke's Gospel, 256 2. Character and Needs of the Greeks, 257 XXI 1 TABLE OF CONTEXTS. SECTION. PAGE. 3. General Divisions, 260 4. Greek Adaptation, 260 5. Omissions of the Third Gospel, 262 6. Additions to the Third Gospel,. 263 7. Children's Gospel, 264 8. Woman's Gospel, 264 9. Gospel of the Poor, 265 10. Conclusion, 266 Chap. XXXI. John. 1. Introduction to John's Gospel, .- 267 2. Origin and Design, 267 3. Character and Needs of the Christian, 269 4. The Authorship, — 270 5. General Divisions, 272 6. Christian .Adaptation,... 272 7. Omissions of the Fourth Gospel, 273 8. Additions of the Fourth Gospel, 274 9. Christian Doctrines, 275 10. Conclusion : Four Gos- pels Needed, 276 11. The Elements Common to the Four,... 277 12. The Elements Peculiar to Each,... 278 Lesson XVII, 280 Chap. XXXII. Acts: Church History. 1. Introduction to the Acts of the Apostles, 281 2. Two General Parts, 283 {a) Analysis of the Four Particular Parts, 283 3. The Apostle Paul, 284 SECTION. PAGE. 4. Outline of Acts, Part IV, 285 5. Introduction to 1st THES- SALONIANS, 286 {a) Paul in Thessalonica, 286 (b) Reasons for Writing, . 287 (c) Outline of Paul's First Letter, 288 6. Introduction to 2d THES- SALONIANS, 288 {a) Why Paul Wrote again 288 (b) Outline of Paul's Sec- ond Letter, 289 7. Outline of Acts, Part IV, continued, 289 8. Introduction to 1st COR- INTHIANS, 290 {a) City of Corinth, 290 (b) Reasons for Paul's Writing, 290 (c) Outline of Paul's First Letter, 292 9. Outline of Acts, Part IV, continued, 293 10. Introduction to 2d COR- INTHIANS, 293 (a) Object of Paul's Sec- ond Letter, 293 {b) Outline of Paul's Sec- ond Letter, 295 11. Introduction to GALA- TIANS, 295 (a) Reasons for Writing, . 296 (b) Three General Parts, . 297 12. Introduction to RO- MANS, 298 {a) Where Written, 298 {b) Object in Writing, ... 298 (c) Three General Parts, 300 (<7) Conclusion, 301 13. Outline of Acts, Part IV, continued, 301 TABLE OF CONTENTS. XX111 SECTION. PAGE. 14. When and Where Paul Wrote the Following Letters,... t 302 Chap. XXXIII. Acts : Church History (continued). 1. Introduction to PHILE- MON, 303 («) Outline, 305 2. Introduction to COLOS- SIANS,. 305 {a) Outline, 305 3. Introduction to EPHE- SIANS, 306 (a) Outline, 307 4. introduction to PHILIP- PLANS, 308 (a) Outline, 309 5. Preface to Paul's Last Three Pastoral Letters, 310 6. Introduction to 1st TIM- OTHY, . 312 {a) Outline, 313 7. Introduction to TITUS, . 314 {a) Outline, 315 8. Introduction to 2d TIM- OTHY, 315 (a) Paul's Last Imprison- ment, .. 315 (b) Paul's Last Letter, .. . 317 (c) Outline, 317 id) Paul's Last Request, . . 318 9. Introduction to HE- BREWS, -. 318 {a) The Author, 318 {b) Where and When Written, 319 (c) To Whom Addressed, 320 d) The Great Object, ... 320 e) Outline,' 320 SECTION. PAGE. (/) Hebrews a Supple- ment,. 321 Lesson XVIII, ....323 Lesson XIX and XX,... 325 Chap. XXXIV. General Let- ters. 1. Preface to General Let- ters, 327 2. Introduction to JAMES, 328 (a) Analysis,. 329 3. Introduction to 1st PE- TER, 330 {a) Where Written, 330 (b) General Characteristic, 331 (c) Analysis,.. 331 4. Introduction to 2d PE- TER, 332 (a) When Written, 332 (b) Analysis, 332 5. Introduction to 1st JOHN 333 (a) The Author, 333 (b) The Design, 334 (c) Leading Thought, ... 334 (d) Analysis, 335 6. Introduction to 2d JOHN, 336 (a) To Christian Mothers, 336 7. Introduction to 3d JOHN, 336 (a) To Whom Addressed, 336 8. Introduction to J UDE,.- 337 {a) The Design, 337 (b) Sure Punishment of the Wicked, 338 (c) Last Admonition, 389 Lesson XXI, .339 Chap. XXXV. Future : Revel- ation. 1. Introduction to REVEL- ATION, 340 (a) The Writer, 340 XXIV TABLE OF CONTENTS. SECTION. PAGE. {b) To Whom Addressed, 341 (c) The Object, 341 2. Three Golden Topics, ._ . 341 (a) Introduction Topic I, 341 (I) Outline Topic I, 342 (b) Introduction Topic II, 342 (I) Outline Topic II, ----- 343 3. Introduction to Topic III, 343 (a) From Pentecost to Christ's Second Com- ing, 344 4. Six General Parts, 345 (a) Outline Part I: The Seven Seals Opened,.. 345 (&) Part II: The Seven Trumpets Sounded, . . . 346 (c) Part III: Three Ene- mies, the Dragon, the Beast, the False Proph- et, Warring Against the Church (Ch. xii-xiv),. 346 {d) Part IV: The Seven Vials Poured Out (Ch. xv-xvi), 347 (e) Part V: The Three Enemies of the Church Overthrown (Ch, xvii- xx), 347 SECTION. PAGE. (/) Part VI: The New Heavenly Jerusalem, (Ch. xxi, xxii), 347 5. Purpose of this Prophecy, 348 6. Conclusion, _.. 348 7. New Testament Chron- ology, 349 Lesson XXII, 352 Chap. XXXTI. Illustrated Index Concluded, 354 Chap. XXXYII. Abstract of Title to the Heavenly Inheritance. 1. The Inheritance De- scribed, 357 2. The Inheritance Imper- ishable, 358 3. The Title to this Inherit- ance, 358 4. The Adoption and Heir- ship, 359 5. Surety of Possession, _._ 360 6. Is the Inheritance Real?. 360 7. Signatures and Witnesses, 361 Lesson XXIII, 363 LIST OF BLACKBOARD LESSOKS. XXT LIST OF BLACKBOABD LESSONS. PAGE. I — <_fuMecJ: <$0€dfotu 0/ me &$i'o/e, Part I, - 33 {Age, Preservation, Translation, &c.) II — C/afaecf: iffita&tu e/ me <£$*/&, Part II, - 33 {Manuscript, Inspiration, Interpretation, &c. ) III — tstevteef ; kJico Z^ieat T^iana ^ZJtvt'dtondj 40 {Old and New Testaments.) IV — Cfttwec/: <_//rtee 0, <_/. Tfiand Q/jivtaiend, 51 {Historical, Poetical, Prophetical. ) V — f the times. The letters used were all capitals: FORGODSOLOVEDTHEWORLDTHATHEOAYEm NLYBEGOTTE^SOKTHATWHOSOEVERBELIEV ETHIXHIMSHOrLDXOTPEElSHBrTHAYEEVEEL ASTIXGLIEE. John iii: 16. It was no easy task f<»r a person not long instruct very much v read the Bible well and intelli- gibly in the public assemblies, without adopting for 6 HISTORY OF THE BIBLE. [Part I. guide some marks of distinction for private reading, pre- paratory to its use in the public service." — Carpenter. "The divisions made in the fifth century were very dif- ferent from those now in use, which consisted in setting just so many words in one line as were to be read, at the conclusion of which a pause was observed, and thereby to better disclose the sense of the writer. THAT THE AGED MEN BE SOBER GRAVE TEMPERATE SOUND IN THE FAITH THE AGED WOMEN LIKEWISE IN BEHAVIOR AS BECOMETH HOLINESS NOT FALSE ACCUSERS NOT GIVEN TO MUCH WINE TEACHERS OF GOOD THINGS It is clear that this mode of writing occupied too much space. This was gradually improved, but did not arrive at anything like perfection until long after the invention of printing, which came not into general use until the fore part of the fifteenth century." — Carpenter. The above will give to some extent the amount of labor expended on the Scriptures to bring it down to our under- standing. This, with the labor of translating it into English, witli the cost to those engaged in the work, of their fortunes, their liberty and their lives, ought to cause our hearts to go out in gratitude to God for the Bible, and in thankfulness that these things are not to be endured in our day. With a knowledge of this, we should prize the Scriptures; for now, not only the learned scribe or doctor of law may read it, but the child unlearned. § 7. Age of the Bible. The Bible contains the oldest books in the world ; the first portions of it, which are the foundations of the rest, having been written 3,300 years; Ch. I: § 8. PRESERVATION OF THE BIBLE. 7 which is 1,000 years earlier than any other history which we have. The oldest profane historians whose writings have reached our times were cotemporary with Ezra and Nehemiah, the last of the historians of the Old Testament. Between them and Moses, who wrote the first five books of the Bible, there is an interval of 1,000 years. The poems of Homer and Hesiod are somewhat more ancient than the history of Herodotus, but they were written nearly 600 years after the time of Moses. This fact will appear more remarkable if we consider some points in the history of the Jews. § 8. Preservation of the Bible. The Jews, who had the care of these books (Rom. iii: 1, 2), at different periods in their history were a very despised and perse- cuted people. See an account of their treatment from the Midianites, Judges vi : 2-6 ; and from the Philistines, 1st Sam. xiii: 20, etc. During their seventy years of captivity in Babylon their temple was burnt; the very ark in which the original copy of the law was kept was destroyed ; then all the glory of the Jewish worship perished, and their city being laid waste continued in that state for more than 100 years. But even in this captivity we have traces of the preserva- tion of the Scriptures : Dan. ix : 2 ; Neh. viii : 1. In all these fiery trials, which lasted for years, the Scriptures were preserved. The constant disposition of the Jews to idolatry before the captivity, was calculated, humanly speaking, to endanger the safety of their sacred writings ; for there was not only an attempt to destroy them, but also to destroy the prophets of the Lord. So far indeed did the attempt succeed, that in a subsequent period of their history, Josiah, king of Judah, and Hilkiah, the highpriest, were destitute of an 8 HISTORY OF THE BIBLE. [Part I. authentic copy of the Scriptures, until the latter found it in the house of the Lord. 2d Kings xxii : 8; also M Chron. xxxiv : 14. § 0. Unchanged Condition of the Bible. The Bible has been preserved unaltered. A copy of the five books of Moses, called the Pentateuch, was made by the Samaritans more than 500 years before Christ, which copy agreed perfectly with that of the Jews. This people became the rooted enemies of the Jews, so that any agree- ment between the two copies could not be considered as the work of design. Three hundred years before Christ these sacred writings of the Jews were translated into the Greek language from the Hebrew. Great numbers of them were distributed throughout the world, great care being taken in this translation to have it done correctly. These writings now became fossilized, so that any change on the part of either Jew or Greek would have been easily detected. Before these translations were extinct they became the basis of other translations, the subsequent ones always diligently compared with the former. The Greek language probably was never better under- stood than it was 300 years after Christ, when both the Old and New Testaments were translated anew in thai language, a few copies of which are now extant,* and are held as choice fossils in that dead language. (See "Cata- com hs of Rome" page 16.) * Within the last twenty years, Teschendorf lias discovered, at Mount Sinai, a manuscript called Sinaitic, which competent judges believe to date from A. D. 350; and the great Vatican copy is thought to be older. The great Alexandrian manuscript was brought to England in 1638. These, with a flood of other documents, including the more ancient Syriac, Latin anil Coptic versions, go far to prove the unchanged condition of our Bible. Ch", I: § 10.] HISTORY OF THE ENGLISH TRANSLATION. 9 On comparing the Samaritan Pentateuch with the Greek translation of the Septuagint made 300 years before Christ, and that with the Greek translation of 300 years after Christ, we find they substantially agree with our present Bible. As additional proof of this, our Lord declared the Old Testament of his day to be the word of God : Mark, vii : 13. He also adopted the threefold division (Luke, xxiv : 44) of Law, Prophets and the Psalms. It has ever been believed, by both Jew and Christian, that the Old Testament which existed in our Savior's time has been handed down to us uncorrupted and unchanged. As before the coming of our Lord the enmity which existed between the Jews and Samaritans was overruled to the preservation of the Old Testament unaltered, so, since the time of Christ, the enmity between the Jews and Christians, and the divisions of Christians among them- selves, have prevented any change or corruption of the New Testament ; as no change could be made by one which would not be readily discovered by the other. § 10. History of the English Translation. Some may suppose the Bible was originally written in the English language ; but this is not the fact. The New Testament was written at least 400 years before the English language had an existence, and the Old Testament earlier yet by 1900 years. It will suffice here to give a brief account of the dates, the persons, their trials, and the work of translating the Bible into the English language. "We have," says Nicholls, "accounts of various parts of the Bible being translated into Saxon, Avhen that lan- guage was spoken in England." The Psalms were translated by Adhelm, the first bishop of Sherborne, A. J). 706 ; the four gospels by Egbert, bishop of Lmdisfern, who died A. D. 721. 1(1 H1STOKY OF THE BIBLE. [Part I. The venerable Bede, an English historian of great learn- ing and deep piety, about the year 730 translated various parts, it not the whole, of the Bible into Saxon. King Alfred translated the Psalms, and Elfric, arch- bishop of Canterbury, parts of. the Old Testament, about A. D. 995. English translations of the Bible were also made in the 13th and 14th centuries. But of the complete English translations of the Bible, the first was Wickliff's Bible, about A. D. 1380. This was before printing was invented; transcripts therefore were obtained with difficulty, and copies were very scarce. Before Wick- liff's translation, the price of a Bible in Latin, an unknown tongue to all but the learned, was as much as the laboring man's wages for fifteen years, and equal to $1,500 of our money." That amount seems much when compared with the present price. A good copy of the American Bible Society's Bible can now be purchased for twenty-five cents, and a Testament for five cents.* " In 1390, the thirteenth year of Richard II, a bill was brought into the House of Lords for the purpose of suppressing its publication ; but through the influence of John of Gaunt, Duke of Lancaster and the king's uncle, it was rejected. The followers of Wickliff were Mien encouraged to publish another and a more correct translation. But in the year 1408, in a convocation held at Oxford by archbishop Arundel, it was decreed that no one should thereafter translate any text of the Holy Scrip- tures into English by way of a book or tract, and that no hook of this kind should be read that was composed in the latter years of John Wicklirf, or since his death. This led the way to greai persecution; and many persons were * Even after Wickliff 's copy was finished the value of a New Testament was £2 His. (id., equal in purchasing value to $150 of our money now. — Gilly's Protestant Forefathers. Oh. I: §10.] HISTORY OF THE ENGLISH TRANSLATION. 11 punished severely, and even with death, for reading the Scriptures in English.'' Tyndale's New Testament, A. D. 1526. This was the first printed edition of any part of the Scriptures into English. He took the precaution of printing it on the continent; but Tonstall, bishop of London, and Sir Thomas More, Lord Chancellor, succeeded in buying up and burn- ing almost the whole edition. This enabled Tyndale fo publish an improved edition. He also translated parts of the Old Testament. In the year 1531, at the instigation of Henry VIII and his council, he was imprisoned, and, after a long confine- ment, strangled, A. D. 1536, by order of the German Emperor, at Yillefont, near Brussels, and his body was reduced to ashes. Miles Coverdale's Bible, A. D'. 1535. Coverdale, after- wards bishop of Exeter, published a translation of the Bible and dedicated it to King Henry VIII. This was the first English Bible allowed by royal authority, and a copy of it was by royal proclamation ordered to be place'd in the choir of every parish church, to enable every man to read therein. Traverner's Bible, A. D. 1539. This was a kind of intermediate work, being a correction of Matthew's Bible, printed two years previous. The Great Bible, A. D. 1539. This was a revised edition, corrected by Cranmer and Coverdale, and so called because printed in large folio. There were several editions of it, particularly one in 1540, for which Cranmer wrote a preface showing that " Scriptures should be had and read by the lay and vulgar people." Hence this edition of 1540 is called "The Cranmer Bible." During the seven years reign of Edward VI no new ver- sions were executed, though eleven editions were printed of both the Old and New Testament. 12 HISTOKY OF THE BIBLE. [Part I. The Geneva Bible, A. D. 1500. Cbverdale, John Knox, Christopher Goodman^ and other English exiles, who had taken refuge in Genera, published this translation, the New Testament in 1557, and the remainder of the work in 1500. To it was added a note favoring the peculiar doctrines of Calvin. The Bishops' Bible, A. D. 1568. This was by Arch- bishop Parker, and was so called because he, with other learned persons, eight of whom were bishops, published this translation. This was in the reign of Queen Elizabeth. " The Rhemish Xew Testament,.A. D. 1572. This trans- lation into English was published by the Romanists, at Rheims, in France. They retained many Eastern, Greek and Latin words, and introduced so many difficult expres- sions that they contrived to render it unintelligible to the common people ; but shortly after published The Douay Old Testament, A. D. 1609-10. Cardinal Allen is under- stood to have had a principal share in the work. The Rhemish New Testament and Douay Old Testament form fhe present English Catholic Bible." — Nicholls. § 11. Our English Bible. The next and best of the authorized translations is the King James Bible, the one now in general use. it was begun in the spring of 1607, in the reign of dames I, and finished in about three. years. Fifty-four of the most learned men in the universities and other places were commissioned to undertake the work of trans- lation; but seven of these having from illness and other causes relinquished their task, the work was performed by forty-seven. After long expectation and great desire of the nation, the present translation of the Bible came forth in the year Hill, over 270 years ago. The divines employed took great pains m conducting the work; for they Qot only Ch. I: § 12.] BIBLE SOCIETIES. 13 examined the original text, but also compared together all the existing translations, both ancient and modern. An account might also be given of the dates and trials of translating this Book of Grod into the tongues of other nations. Suffice it to say, trials and difficulties were met and mastered, though not at such cost of life and treasure as the English translation. Within a few years there have been several individual translations of the Bible; and still more recently a revision by the '•'American Bible Union," organized in 1851 in New York, which succeeded in publishing the New Testa- ment complete, and also portions of the Old Testament. § 12. Bible Societies. " The American Bible Society was organized in the city of New York, in May, 1816, by a convention of delegates from different parts of the country. It had been preceded by a large number of local and inde- pendent societies, the oldest of which was that established in Philadelphia in 1808. But the most of these were cheerfully enrolled as auxiliaries of The American Bible Society, which became a national society. Its business is conducted by a Board of Managers, con- sisting of thirty-six laymen of various Christian denomin- ations. Its work is benevolent and unsectarian. At the close of its sixtieth year its total issues of Bibles and Testaments and integral portions of the Scriptures were 33,125,760; its expenditures in this work having exceeded seventeen millions of dollars. The British and Foreign Bible Society was founded in 1804. At the close of its seventy-first year it had extended its operations to almost every country in the world, and had put into circulation nearly 74,000,000 copies of the Bible and of integral parts of the Bible, in above two hun- dred languages and dialects, and had expended nearly eight 14 HISTORY OF THE BIBLE. [Part II. millions sterling ($40,000,000), in translating, printing, and disseminating the Scriptures."* § 13. The Bible Printed in the United States. " The first Bible printed in the United States or on the Continent of America, was in native Indian; the New Testament in 1661 and the Old in 1663, by Rev. John Eliot. They were published in Cambridge, Mass. The second was in German; published at Germantown, near Philadelphia, by Christopher Sower, in 1676. The first American edition of the Bible in English was printed by Kneeland and Green, at Boston, in 1752; but to avoid persecution from those who had a patent from the King, they were obliged to reprint the whole title page of the English copy. The next edition was by Robert Aitken, of Philadelphia, in 1781-2. He sent a memorial to Congress, praying for their patronage. His memorial was referred to a committee, who obtained the opinion of the Chaplain of Congress as to its general accuracy, and thereupon a resolution was passed, September 12th, 1782, recommending it to the people of the United States." — Nicholls. Part II. § 14. The Tradition of the Elders. There is a work among the Jews called the Talmud, to which reference is made in the New Testament, which they hold as tradi- t ionary Scriptures. About the year A. I). 180, Jehoda, a Jewish Rabbi, wrote out the received traditions of the fathers. This work of Jehoda is called the Mishna; and the commentary upon it is called the Gamara; and these taken together * The above was copied from a pamphlet published by the Ameri- can Bible Society in connection with their Exhibition at Philadelphia, in 1876. It contains also specimens of their translations into one hundred and sixty-four languages and dialects. Ch. I: § 14. ] THE TRADITION" OF THE ELDERS. 15 constitute the Talmud, which was more highly reverenced by the Jews than the Old Testament. That traditions are not to be received as divine authority, is sufficiently clear from our Savior's language as found in Mark vii : 1-13. It was believed by the Jews that there were added to the law a great mass of interpretations and commentary, which it was believed God had communicated to Moses, from whom it had been orally transmitted, until at last it was reduced to writing. The triviality and irksomeness of the requirements these imposed, abundantly justified Christ's words: "Ye have made the commandments of God of none effect by your traditions." (Matt, xv: 6.) " Incessant and elaborate washings were prescribed. An Qgg laid on the day .following the Sabbath could not be eaten, because no food must be prepared on the Sabbath. The wearing of nailed shoes on the Sabbath was an infringement of the law against bearing burdens on the holy day. And the disciples of Jesus were charged with Sab- bath breaking when they plucked the ears of corn, because the act was deemed ' a little harvest. ' " — Examiner and Chronicle. While it contains much that is worthless and silly, it has many proverbs and legends which are worth the while to read. The following is one of the legends and a few of the proverbs found in the Talmud. NOAH AND HIS VINEYARD. While Noah was planting his vineyard the Devil came to him and says: What are you doing here? Noah says, Planting a vineyard. The Devil says, What is the use of a vineyard? Says Noah, The fruits either dry or fresh are sweet and good, and the wine gladdens the heart. Then says the Devil, We will plant it on shares. So he brings a lamb, a lion, a hog, and a monkey, and sacrifices them, and mingles their blood with the soil. |() HISTORY OK THE BIBLE. [Part II. Wherefore if a man only cats, he is gentle as a lamb; if he drink* the wine, lie thinks lie is a lion, and falls into mischief; if he drinks habitually, he becomes disgusting, like the hog; if he gets drtlnh, lie jabbers and jumps and is silly, like the monkey. A FEW OF THE PROVERBS. To the wasj) men say: Neither thy honey nor thy sting. Solid wood burns with little noise, but thorns make a great crackling. Is the lamb rash who feeds among the wolves? Not if he trusts the good shepherd. He who enjoys too much of this world, is in danger of losing the next. Hypocrites steal leather, and make shoes for the poor. Woe to him who builds a big door, and has no house be- hind it. Weep not with the joyous, nor laugh with the sad; wake not with the sleeping, nor sleep with the waking. § 15. The Apocrypha. The Apocrypha sometimes hound with the Bible, is a collection of ancient hooks. They are not found in any catalogue of canonical writings made in the first four centuries after Christ. Philo never quotes them as he does the Scriptures; Josephus expressly rejects them; the Jewish chnrch never received them as pari oi the canon; Christ and the apostles never quote them; and Malachi said no other messenger would come t ill the second Elijah. All external evidence is against their inspiration. And as for internal evidence: — 1st. None of the Apocryphal writers claimed Divine authority; and some virtually dis- owned inspiration. See 2 Mac. ii: 23; also xv: 38. •id. The hooks contain statements at variance with history . are self contradictory . and opposed to the doctrines and precepts of Script are. Cll. I: £ 16-] OLD TESTAMENT MANUSCRIPT. 1? They never formed a part of the rule of faith; yet the Council of Trent (A. D. 1545) gave them canonical author- ity. The writings are of value, however, for historical purposes, illustrating the progress of knowledge among the Jews; their tastes, manners, customs, religious character, their government; some books explain prophecies; others show the fulfilment of prophecies; and some passages ex- press high and noble sentiments. § 10. The Old Testament Manuscript. We have now gained some knowledge about this book. We have traced its history through the English translation; how it lias been preserved, what changes have taken place in writing, in book-making, and seen the unchanged condition of the Bible contents amid these' changes. Now, as we open this Bible we do not find the manu- scripts (MSS.) in the author's hand writing, nor his auto- graph at the close of his work; so our next line of study will be to examine the genuiness of this book, and see upon what foundation its authority rests. This will lead us to examine the text, the versions, and the evidences of the Bible, and to inquire who are the writers. The following on " The Bible Text" and ••The Ver- sions."" was prepared for this work by Eev. James P. Thorns. I. The Old Testament Text. The Old Testament was written in Hebrew, on papyrus or vellum. Our present Hebrew text is a copy of copies, and is called Masoretio from the scholars at the Jewish academy at Tiberias, on the Sea of Galilee, who were called Masorites. There was a like school at Babylon. From the fourth to the tenth centuries. A. D., thevdid much bv way of collecting MSS. transcribing the Scriptures, writing traditions called Mishna, and commentaries called Gamara. 18 HISTORY OF THE BIBLE. [Part II. II. The Number of Hebrew Manuscripts. In the museums and libraries of the world there are hundreds of Hebrew manuscripts. De Rossi collated 734 Hebrew MSS. , and Dr. Kennicott collated 630 more. Of these MSS., 102 contain all the Old Testament; 490 Genesis; 549 the five Mezilloth (Ruth, Solomon's Songs, Lamentations, Esther and Ecclesiastes); 495 The Psalms; 172 Ezra and Nehe- miah; 211 Chronicles. The most MSS. are of the book of Esther. III. Date of Manuscripts. The existing Hebrew MSS. were most of them written before A. D., 1200. One is thought to belong to the tenth century, another to the eighth, and one is dated 580, A. D. Greek MSS. of the Old Testament (Septuagint) are as early as the fifth and fourth centuries (331 A. D.) IV. Various Readings. In these hundreds of MSS. the text is so much alike that the different readings do not essentially change the meaning. Of 864 different readings, all are in regard to vowel points, and one to the division of a verse. What difference does it make whether Savior is spelled " ior," or " our," or labor " or," or "our"? Or where the verse is divided in the lines? The errors are like grains of sand in a loaf of bread. The most corrupt MSS, extant do not change a principle or doctrine of the Bible. § 1 7. The New Testament Manuscript. I. The Greek Manuscript. All the books of the New Testament were written before 100 A. D. II. No Apostolic Manuscript. There is no trace of Aposto- lic originals or New Testament MSS. of the first three centuries. The oldest New Testament MSS. date from Oon- stantine (331 A. D.) These MSS. are copied from MSS. prior to 331, A. I). The New Testament was written on papyrus, Ch. I: § 1?.] THE NEW TESTAMENT MANUSCRIPT. li> vellum, or parchment, in volumes; so that few MSS. have all the books of the New Testament. III. The Number of Manuscripts. The number of MSS. of the New Testament or parts of it, is about 1,500. 27 MSS. contain all the New Testament. The volume, of the Gospels has 34 Uncial (capital letters) and 601 Cursive (running hand) MSS; that of the Acts and Catholic Epis- tles, 10 Uncials, and 229 Cursive; that of Pauline Epistles, 14 Uncial, and 283 Cursive; that of the apocalypse, 4 Un- cial, and 102 Cursive. Beside these there are many dupli- cate MSS. and MSS. of select parts of the Gospels and Epistles. IV. Date of MSS. A MS. with division of chapters and verses is not earlier than the twelfth century A. D. ; a MS. on cotton not earlier than the eleventh century; a Cursive MS. is not earlier than the tenth century; inclined uncial MSS., with interrogations, or commas, than the ninth ; MSS. punctuated, pointed, or with ornamental initials, than the eighth; uncial MSS. divided into lines, accented with Euthalian titles, or subscriptions, than the fifth ; and MSS. with Eusebian canons, than the fourth century (315-340, A. D.). But the oldest MSS. may not be of the greatest value; for a twelfth century MS. may be a copy from a fourth century MS., while a MS. of the ninth may be copied from a MS. of the same century. V. Various Readings. More than 1000 MSS. have been collated, and 50 of these MSS. are from 1000 to 1500 years old. In these, Bible critics have found about 50,000 various readings. These are chiefly in orthography or arrangement of words; not fifty change the sense, and not one changes a principle. Of the immortal classics, there are only 15 MSS. of Herodotus extant, and of Plato there are not 30 MSS. 20 HlSTOKY OF THE BIBLE. [Part II. extant, and not one of these 1000 years old. This is true of all the classics. The texts of Milton and Shakespeare arc mutilated, though these poets have only heen dead 200 years. God's eye has been upon these Bible MSS.. and they have been kept pure through all the changes of the ages. A standing proof of the purity and accuracy of the present Bible text is seen in the fact that the Jew agrees with the Christian in the letter of the Old Testament, and the Romanist with the Protestant in the letter of the New Testament. VI. Version MSS. The Bible was earl} T translated from these MSS. into other languages. These translations are called versions, and MSS. of such versions are still extant. Besides the most important versions given in the next article, there are extant MSS. belonging to the ninth cen- tury of Slavonic. Georgian MSS. of the sixth century, Armenian MSS. of the fifth century, and Ethiopic and Coptic of the fourth century. § 18. Ancient Versions of the Bible. Ancient versions are translations from the old Bible manuscripts (MSS.), many of which MSS. have been lost or destroyed. These versions, therefore, furnish another source of evi- dence to sustain the genuineness of the Scriptures. I. The Septuagint (The LXX). This is a Greek version. a translation of the Old Testament from the Hebrew. This translation was made at Alexandria, in Egypt, by <>nlcr of the king (Philadelphus), by seventy Jews, about B. ( '. 278. It was in use in the time of Christ, as we have more than 300 quotations from it in the New Testament. For a long period it was used as the Old Testament in the Christian church. This Septuaginl is now used in the Greek and Oriental churches. II. The Peshito. This is the Syriac version of both the old and New Testaments. It is a translation from the Ch. I: § IS.] AJSTTENT VERSIONS OF THE BIBLE. %1 Hebrew, made in the first century A. D., at Edessa, It is called Peshito, because simple, literal, verbal. It embraces none but the canonical books, and is valuable for its antiquity and the clearness and strength with which it enunciates some disputed Messianic passages. The Syro-Hexaplar version is a translation of the Sep- tuagmt into Syriac, by Paul of Tela, about 600 A. D. III. The Samaritan Pentateuch. The Samaritan Pen- tateuch is rather a revision than a translation of the Hebrew text. There are now 18 MSS. of this Pentateuch. The origin and date of this version are unknown. Some place it at the founding of Gerizim Temple, B. C. 341, and by Manasseh ; others put it as late as the second or third century A. D. This version is not considered of any great critical value. IV. The Targums. These Targums are Chaldee (Ara- maic) paraphrases of parts of the Old Testament. The Hebrew language was then dumb, and these Targums are formed chiefly on the Septuagint. Of these, the Penta- teuch of Onkelos, avIio died before the ruin of Jerusalem, is the oldest and best. Onkelos is thought by some to have been a disciple of Gamaliel, the teacher of Paul. This Pentateuch of Onkelos is supposed by others to date about 60 B. 0. There are 141 MSS. of it. The Targum on the Earlier and Later Prophets, by Jonathan Ben-Urriel, supposed to date about the time of Christ's death, is next in value. V. The Vulgate. The Vulgate is a Latin version of the Scriptures. In the second century A. D. there was a Latin version of the Scriptures Avhich originated in North Africa. The Old Testament part was translated from the LXX : and in Italy this version was called the Old Latin, or Italic. This version, Jerome (A. D. 382) undertook to revise and correct, and completed the Old Testament. But still later he began to make a Latin version directly 22 HISTORY OF THE BIBLE. [Part II. from the Hebrew. This last translation of Jerome, on which he spent twenty years, is called the Vulgate. It is made up in part from the old Italic version, in part from Jerome's revised version, and in part immediately from the Hebrew, and was completed in A. D. 405. It, how- ever, chiefly follows the Septuagint. The Vulgate became the Scriptures to all the Latin churches -at the close of the seventh century, and is to-day the authority with Romanists. VI. The Talmud. The Talmud is a digest of Jewish traditions, and a compendium or ritual law. It was writ- ten in Hebrew, and dates about A. D. 200. It has two parts: 1st. The Mishna, or text of the "Second Law;'* 2d. The G-amara, or commentaries of later date, about A. D. 500. There are two, the Jerusalem Talmud and Babylonish Talmud, named from the two schools. VII. Quotations in Writings of the Fathers. The early divines are called "Fathers," and in their extant writings are very numerous and accurate quotations from the Bible. From the quotations of the Fathers and writers (180) who lived between the second and fifth centuries, and whose works are now extant, the entire New Testament could be recovered, if the original MSS. were destroyed. And if the MSS. of the Old Testament were destroyed, the entire Old Testament could be produced from the Targums and early versions. VIII. Conclusion. We have, then, three independent sources by which we may test the genuineness of the writings of the Bible : Lst. There are in our libraries to-day more than 1000 Hebrew MSS. of the Old Testament, and more than 1500 Greek MSS. of the New Testament. 2d. These five chief versions, or translations of the MSS. into other Languages, which are given above, with many more thai might have been added. Ch. I: § 20.] INSPIRATION OF THE BIBLE. 2$ 3d. The quotations from the Church Fathers, who lived between 100 and 600 A. D., whose writings are now extant. These three sources of evidence agree as to the purity and correctness of our present Bible text. § 19. A History of the Canon. That all the books- of the Bible were in existence as early as the second century we are assured : I. From the writings of Josephus, the Eabbi; the Apos- tolic Fathers who lived 100-200 A. D. ; writings still extant. II. The Heretics in the Church at that period, in attack- ing the Canon, mention the books of the Bible, and thus testify to their existence in the second century. III. The Enemies of Christianity, outside the Church evidence the books of the Canon at this time. IV. The Apologists, in defending the Bible, recognize the books in this era. V. The Persecutions of the Church in this period sus- tains the same fact. Therefore we have a genuine Bible text that has come down to us from A. D. 100; and we have the identical record as the writers first gave it. § 20. Inspiration of the Bible. Being assured that we have a genuine copy of the original writings, we are pre- pared now to consider the claim of the Bible to Divine Inspiration. The following evidences are an outline from "Normal Class Manual," by Dr. A. Hovey. That the Bible has a Divine origin is seen: I. By the accuracy of statement in secular matters in the New Testament. Christianity and the New Testament were nearly con- temporaneous. The books of the New Testament were all written before A. D. 100, the time in which the New Testament events took place. Christianity as a historical religion took its rise in Palestine about 30 A. D. 24 HISTORY OF THE BIBLE. [Part U. II. The New Testament references to Nature. (a.) To natural scenery: hills, mountains, valleys, lakes, etc. (/>.) To natural productions; vines, olives, figs, palms, lilies, etc. (c.) To well knoAvn animals; horses, oxen, sheep, foxes. sparrows, etc. III. The New Testament references to people. (a.) The mixed people in Palestine; Jews, Greeks, Ro- mans, etc. (b.) To sects; Pharisees, Sadducees, Herodians; and views of each. (c.) To Killers (often named); kings, tetrarchs, govern- ors, priests, etc. IV. The New Testament references to customs. (a.) Products of labor ;/ houses, prisons, towers, ships, coins, etc. (b.) Habits of people; religious, social; fishers, soldiers. publicans, etc. (c.) Diseases; as fever, leprosy, palsy, lunacy, etc. This vast number of references in the New Testament to secular matters, all being correct, shows that the writers were divinely directed in writing. § 21. The Divine Origin of the Bible is also seen in the Accuracy of Old Testament in Secular Mat- ters. I. Books of Old Testament were written during a period of 1200 years, ending B. C. 400. II. Many books full of historical allusions; as Kings, Est her. Ezra. III. Many topographical allusions: lands, boundaries, etc. IV. r ldie many writers, the long period, the various cul- ture, the varied fortunes of the dews in L 500 years, make the accurate record very remarkable, and proves that the Old Testament writers were divinely directed in. writing. Ch. I: §21.] RELIGIOUS TEACHING OF THE BIBLE. 25 § 22. Prophecy shows the Bible to he from God. I. It is incredible that predictions, such as are in the Bible, could have been made without Divine illumination. II. Predictions concerning: (a.) Nations; as Egypt, Edoni, Syria, Judea. (b. ) Cities ; as Ninevah, Babylon, Tyre, Sidon, Jerusa- lem, etc. (c. ) Persons ; as Cyrus, John the Baptist, Jesus Christ. These predictions, minute in detail, having been literally fulfilled, show the Bible to have Divine origin. § 23. The Originality and Consistency of the Bible's Religious Teaching show it to be from God. I. Bible Doctrines of God are Perfect. 1st. Writers do not speak of God as mere Force, or Law, acting blindly, without choice. 2d. They speak of God as personal, thinking, willing, loving. 3d. That He is the Supreme Huler of the Universe. 4th. That He is righteous, loving justice and judgment, and hating iniquity. 5th. That God is benevolent, so "loving the world that he gave his only begotten Son, that whosoever believeth in him should not perish, but have everlasting life." All the writers of the Bible agree in the doctrine of God, a doctrine consistent with Reason, Conscience and Feeling; and this doctrine of God shows the inspiration of the Bible. II. The Bible tea rites the Sinfulness of Man. 1st. That by disobedience man has brought upon him- self the evils and guilt of his fallen condition. 2d. That sin is universal in the race ; that all men are culpable, and under the penalty of sin. 3d. While conscience reaffirms this truth, the speculative understanding protests against it; yet all the sacred writers 26 HISTOBY OF THE BIBLE. [Part II. agree throughout as to the sinfulness of man, thus showing they were inspired by God. III. The Bible a Unit as to the Way of Salvation. 1st. The writers all agree as to the justice and law of God, yet set forth His infinite love and grace. 2d. The Old Testament writers, in sacrifices and types, give pictures of Christ as a sacrifice for sin. Lev. xvi; Is. liii. 3d. The New Testament writers present Christ as the sinners' substitute. Heb. chapters, ix, x. 4th. The writers all agree in experience; as, contrition for sin, trust in God, love for God, holiness and truth. The unity of sentiment in so many writers, in such a long period, on so great and difficult subjects, shows that God spoke by them, as the Bible affirms. IV. The Character of Christ in the New Testament shows the Bible to be from God. 1st. The Gospel records could never have been, if Christ had not existed. Christ's character is faultless iu thought, aim, feeling and action; holy. 2d. While Christ was human in the broadest sense, he was superhuman. He was Divine as well as human. His Divine character is seen in His love, wisdom and power (over the forces of nature, diseases, death, demons). He was God-man. 3d. Four writers cannot depict such a character. The Jews were expecting a different Messiah; they could not imagine such a character and depict it in the daily events of life. 4th. Therefore the Gospels are trustworthy historical records, and teach that Christ did live, and promised the inspiration of the Holy Spirit to the Apostles. And the grounds for believing the fulfilment of this promise are as good as that Christ lived. Therefore, by the inspiration of God the Apostles wrote the Xew Testament, and both endorsed the Old Testament Oh. I: § 24.] WRITERS OF THE BIBLE. 27 and teach that Christ did the same. Hence, from the accuracy of the Bible in secular matters, the fulfilment of many of its predictions, the originality and consistency of its religious teaching, and the character of Christ — upon such pillars as these the inspiration of God's word stands. The Bible is the Book of Cod to man. "The law of the Lord is perfect, converting the soul; the testimony of the Lord is sure, making wise the simple; the statutes of the Lord are right, rejoicing the heart; the commandments of the Lord are pure, enlightening the eyes; the fear of the Lord is clean, enduring forever; the judgments of the Lord are true and righteous altogether." How important, then, that we should understand what God's word teaches. Says Dr. A. H. Strong, D. D., in an article on the Method of Inspiration : "The Bible is, in all its parts, the word of God. Hence each part is to be judged, not by itself alone, but in its connection with every other part. The Scriptures are not to be interpreted as so many merely human productions by different authors, but also as the work of the Divine mind. * * * * Seemingly trivial things are to be explained from their connection with the whole. One history is to be built up from the several accounts of the life of Christ. One doctrine must supplement another. The Old Testament is part of a progressive system, whose culmination and key are to be found in the New. The central subject and thought which binds all parts of the Bible together, and in the light of which they are to be interpreted, is the person and work of Jesus Christ." § 24. The Writers of the Bible. The Bible was not written by one person, but by many, of different sta- tion, abilities and education. Moses wrote the Pentateuch, "was learned in all the wisdom of the Egyptians," and brought up as the son of Pharaoh's daughter. 28 HISTORY OF THE BIBLE. [Part II. David and Solomon were kings; Daniel was a minister of state ; Ezra was a priest and a scribe ; Amos was a herdsman; Matthew was a taxgatherer; Lnke was a physi- cian; Paul was a learned lawyer; Peter and John were fishermen, "unlearned and ignorant men." These persons lived at different times and could not have intercourse with each other. David wrote about 400 years after Moses ; Isaiah about 250 years after David: Matthew more than 700 years after Isaiah, and 400 years after Malachi, the last of the writers of the Old Testament. Between Moses, who wrote the first, and John, who wrote the last of the sixty-six books which form our pres- ent Bible, there was an interval of 1600 years. This agreement of the writers is remarkable. One framed laws, as Moses ; another gives ' an abstract of the history of the Jewish nation, as Joshua ; another of a private family, as that of Ruth; David and others wrote the Psalms; Solomon the Proverbs; Isaiah, Jeremiah and others give us the prophecies; the four evangelists. Mat- thew, Mark, Luke and John, the life of Christ in its four phases; Paul and others letters, in which we find the doc- trines of Christ; and John, in the Revelation, closes up the book with the history of the Christian church from its organization to the second coming of Christ and the end of the world. In comparing the Old and New Testaments, we perceive a striking contrast as to the for /ns of religion between that inculcated by Moses and our blessed Lord. The Law, as given by Moses, abounded in ceremonies, and was adapted to the peculiar circumstances of the nation of the Jews; while the system which the writers of the New Testament have given contains but few ceremonies, and those very simple in character, admitting of universal application. Acts, ii: 8-11; also Mark, xvi: 15. [Ch. I: § 25. rules or interpretation. 29 How wonderful that two systems, at first sight so dis- similar, should be found to agree on all material points ! Surely these men "spake as they were moved by the Holy Spirit/' and thus they are infallible teachers and writers. But none of these writers claim sinlessness of character. On the contrary they confess their sins. One has said: "Infallible teachers are those who set forth by voice or pen the will of God in the best manner practicable, whose teaching the reason of man has no right to modify or reject, but only to ascertain and obey.'* The Holy Spirit so took possession of these teachers while giving instruction, whether oral or written, that they were taught what and how they should write or speak. They were not so directed in the affairs of life : and yet these writers were good men, and many of them eminently godly. A study of the writers shows the unity amid diversity, the harmony among variety in the Bible, all the more wonderful; and proving that "all Scripture is given by inspiration of God, and is profitable for doctrine, for re- proof, for correction, for instruction in righteousness; that the man of God may be perfect, thoroughly furnished unto all good works." § 25. Rules of Interpretation. The subject of Bible interpretation can only be briefly treated here; though much might be said upon it. Horsley says: "The most illiterate Christian, if he can but read his English Bible, and will take the pains to read it in a right manner, will not only attain all that practical knowledge which is essential to salvation, but, by God's blessing, he will become learned in everything relating to his religion, in such a degree that he will not be liable to be misled either by the refuted arguments or the false as- sertions of those who endeavor to engraft their own opinions upon the oracles of God." 30 HISTORY OF THE BIBLE. [Part II. I. Three Rules. The three following rules embrace much in their application: 1st. Ascertain the sense of a passage from the words in their general usage, in the sentence, and in the context. 2d. Study the design and scope of the writer, with the occasion, circumstances, and scenery of the writing. 3d. Compare Scripture with Scripture in passages con- taining the same word or phrase in similar sense, or speaking of the same thing, or having a like thought to justify a comparison. II. Dr. Hovefs Rules. In a condensed form these are the rules of Dr. A. Hovey, of Newton Theological Semi- nary. 1st. Personal qualities are more important than rules, viz : fairness of mind, love of truth and patience in study. 2d. Study the general style of the sacred record. The style is not scientific, but popular; it is prose and poetry. 3d. Consider the object and quality in a given book. 4th. Study the circumstances in which a book was written. 5th. Consider the relation of a given paragraph to the whole book. 6th. Study the meaning of particular words and phrases. 7th. Examine other statements of the same writer on the topic treated in a given passage. III. Prof. M. B. Riddle's Rules. 1st. Read the Bible copiously with the single aim to know the meaning of the writer. 2d. Pray God to give grace to accept and apply that meaning when found. This is practically the illumination of the spirit. 3d. Begin with the plainer passages, reserving the more obscure ones until greater skill is acquired. Ch. I: § 25.] RULES OF IJNTERPRETATiOJS'. 31 4th. Remember the responsibility that attends the right of private judgment. He who has not trusted himself to Christ cannot interpret the Scriptures. Not to have personal trust in Him as there made known is to be too much out of harmony with the Book to interpret it in its most important aspect; as a Book which makes men "wise unto salvation." IV. The Frame of Mind for Bible Study. Too much importance cannot be placed upon the frame of mind for Bible study. 1st. Neither knowledge of language or science, or his- tory can take the place of piety in a student of the Word of God. Hawthorne says: "Christian faith is a grand cathedral with divinely pictured windows. Standing without you see no glory, nor can possibly imagine any; standing ivithin every ray of light reveals a harmony of unspeakable splendors." 1 Cor. ii: 14. 2d. Patience is needed in Bible study. The rich mines, of God's grace are not on the surface; there must be patience in the mining processes before the pure gold is secured. 3d. A reverence for the supreme authority of God's Word is necessary to a right understanding of it. A love of the truth gives the student candor in investigation, a consciousness of ignorance on such great themes as the Bible treats, a conviction of their authority over conscience, and a sense of humility that led one to exclaim, " 0, the depth of the riches, both of the wisdom and the knowledge of God; how unsearchable are his judgments, and his ways past finding out." Rom. xi: 33. 4th. Prompt obedience to the truth is necessary to un- derstanding the Bible. "If any man will do his will, he shall know of the doctrine, whether it be of God." John vii : 17. Judicial and spiritual blindness follow disobedience to known truth. Only in obedience to the truth and spirit 32 HISTORY OF THE BIBLE. [Part II. of God can the mind of the spirit of the Word be known. Following the spirit He will guide you into all truth by the Word of God. §• 26. Two Questions. Now two questions may arise in our minds. First: — Who are qualified? or in the language of Paul, " Who is sufficient for these things? " In answer we would say, certainly not he who, in attempting to qualify himself, should begin with the study of the Book of Kevelation or the Gospel by John; for we find that Jesus who is our great teacher did not so. We have very plain examples to the contrary. For instance, in his conversation with the dis- ciples while on their way to Emmaus, he began where the Scriptures begin. "And beginning at Moses and all the prophets, he expounded unto them in all the Scriptures the things concerning himself." Luke xxiv: 27. Again, be particular to notice the order of his teaching in verse 44; " all things must be fulfilled, which were written in the law of Moses, and in the prophets, and in the Psalms, concern- ing me." Now the psalms, as will be seen, are to the law and the prophets what the Gosj^el of John is to the three preceding ones, a supplement. We would consider it supremely ridiculous if we should send our child to school who is ignorant of mathematics, and the teacher should decide that the child should commence with cube root or fractions. Now we ask, is it any less so when we commence the study of " God's written will to men?" Second: — How may we qualify ourselves? It is the ob- ject of this little book, with the Illustrated Index, to answer this question, and to introduce a system which, by the blessing of God, may supply the great felt want of this age. Ignorance of the Bible prevails everywhere, and will so long as children are born ignorant. And it is equally true of all classes, the high and the low, the rich and the poor; hence there will ever he a demand for I fathers of the Word. Oh. I, §§ 1-26.] LESSON" I AND II. LESSON I AND II. lyu^ec/: tgptdfe'tw. 0/ me . 43. fflilte in Vniied ifiadeo. Part II 44. $fbacU4wwA k 45. ^jicaukha. 46. 0ld $fttAamm4 oManmt 4*1. qffew ffle$4amen4 oMwmWiiUb. 4&. <^lndtn4 Yetoiom. 40. §ht (gancn. 20. ^mktta4lon. 24. gtccuuicu. 22. ©PioftAecu. 23. Ouamaliiu. 24. Ww4w. 25. ^n4et/ji/be4a4icw>. 2(0. £fwo 3ue*4iom. 34 HISTORY OF THE BIBLE. [Part I. SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. Part I. Note. The teacher should before asking any question, first and always write upon the board the title of the lesson and the subject. Let the introductory remarks be about the subject of the lesson, bringing out the necessity of some knowledge of the "History of the Bible." The questions here given are only a few of the many which will suggest themselves upon a study of Chapter I, Part I. What is the name of the book in hand? Note. Write Bible in the centre of the board, and have class also in centre of left hand side of page of blank book. This must be strictly adhered to, that each pupil be kept up fully to the work. Whenever there is a mark or word placed on the board, the teacher should see that each pupil note the same; also that every pupil find every reference or date. What is the definition of the word? (Ch. I: § 1.) Note. After the answer to the question, it is then placed on the board, and used as a catch word by the pupil in noting down gems of thought. What is the extent of Bible lands? (Ch. I: § 2.) Note. Here use some good map. What city is considered as the centre ? Ans. Jerusalem. Which way from Jerusalem is the Dead sea? Damascus? etc. How were ancient books constructed? (§ 3.) Note. It would be well for the teacher to make of heavy Manilla paper, a roll (or scroll). After giving a description of it, call for references found in Jer. xxxv : 2 ; Psalms xl : 7 ; Isa. xxxiv : 4. Was the roll commonly written on both sides? Ezek. ii: 9,10. How were they sealed? (§4.) Isa. xxix: 11; Rev. v: 1, 2. Note. Now place on the board the catch word. Follow this plan throughout. • What of its divisions into chapters and verses? (§ 5.) What of its punctuation? (§ 6.) The Bible: What is it? Ch. I: §§ 7-26.] lessor i and ij. 35 2 Tim iii: 16; 2 Peter i: 21. When were the earlier por- tions of it written? (§ 7.) Who had the care of these rolls (books)? (§ 8); Eom. iii: 1, 2. How were these preserved unchanged? (§ 9.) What of its translation into English? and cost? (§ 10.) What of our present version? (§11.) What of Bible Societies? (§ 12.) What of its being printed in the United States? (§ 13.) Note. Review from the blackboard. Pakt II. What of the tradition of the Elders? (§ 14.) What of the Apocrypha? (§15.) What of Old Testament manu- scripts? (§ 16.) New Testament manuscripts? (§ 17.) What of ancient versions? (§18.) What about the ancient canon of the Scriptures? (§ 19.) What about the inspira- tion of the Bible? (§ 20.) What about the accuracy of the Old Testament in secular matters? (§ 21.) What does the prophecy of the Bible show? (§ 22.) What do writers say of the originality of the Bible religion? (§ 23.) What may be said of the writers of the Bible? (§ 24.) What are some of the rules of interpretation? (§ 25.) Who are qualified to teach the Bible? (§ 26.) How may we qualify ourselves? Luke xxiv: 17. Note. Review from the blackboard. 36 THE BIBLE OPENED. CHAPTER II. THE BIBLE OPENED. § 1. The Bible Taught as a Science. Probably no one desiring a knowledge of the Bible has not felt the want of some illustration, whereby the understanding might be aided through the sense of sight; also some system intro- ducing the student, by some primary or introductory steps, into this great laboratory of wisdom. The Bible is not a scientific book any more than a flower garden is a system of botany; yet we may discover relations, arrangement, order, system in God's flowers, and so we may in God's Book. § 2. Two Grand Themes of the Bible. Jesus when closeted with his disciples in that upper room, after spend- ing several hours with them in giving instruction and encouragement, as he was about to leave them, offers a prayer to his Father for them asking Him to give them eternal life, and then states in the prayer what eternal life is, as follows: " This is life eternal, that they might know Thee, the only true God, and Jesus Christ, whom Thou hast sent." John xvii: 3. We have here two grand themes presented to us in this passage. The first is to know God, and the second to know Christ. Now the question may arise in our mind how may Ave best get a knowledge of God? There are many ways that we may study Him, especially as the God of nature; yet no one will get anything like a thorough knowledge of God, of His attributes and His dealings with men through this moans. AW 1 are obliged f<> go to the Old Testament. Now what mav he said of God as found in Ch. II: § 3. TWO GKEAT QUESTIONS. 3? the Old Testament may also be said of Christ as found in the New. Hence we have two " Grand Themes;" the first treating of God, giving us a knowledge of Him as found only in the Old Testament; and the second telling us all about Christ and what he has done ior us, as found only in the New Testament. Is it possible then for us to be able to understand the New Testament without first having some knowledge of the Old? or vice versa? True, the Old Testament does treat of Christ, but it is in types and shadows. He is spoken of as the shadoiv of good things to come, which is developed only in the New. § 3. Two Great Questions. We find in the book of Job — which is supposed to have been written prior to the pentateuch — that when in conversation with his three friends there were raised two very important questions; first, "How shall man be just with God?" Ch. ix: 2; and the second is, "If a man die, shall he live again?" Ch. xiv: 14. There is much involved in this first question. We find a solution of it only in the New Testament as brought out in Paul's letter to the Romans, the golden topic of which is " Justification by faith. " (Bom. v: 1.) See Index. The second great question was, "If a man die, shall he live again?" The subject of the future, or anything be- yond this life, is considered as very sparingly taught in the Old Testament. And it is so especially when we read it independent of the New Testament, the grandest theme of which is the "Resurrection of the dead." 1 Cor. xv: 13, 14. " But if there be no resurrection of the dead, then is Christ not risen: But if Christ be not risen, then is our preaching vain, and your faith is also vain. " In the Old Testament the question is raised, and in the New it is answered. 38 THE BIBLE OPENED. § 4. The Two Great Parts. Hence we have two great and grand themes presented as found in the two " Great Grand Divisions," viz. Old and New Testaments. See Illustrated Index. It is said of other things, " There is much in a name." Certainly there is no subject of greater importance to us than is found in the above names or titles. § 5. The Word Testament Defined. A man may concoct a will in his mind and execute it himself, or in other words, dispose of his own property during his life- time; there is no heirship involved in this; but if he com- mits his will to writing it is then intended that another is to execute it, and not until after his death. Now the moment it is committed to writing, it becomes his will and testament. What is included in this writing or instrument becomes a ivitness to his will; and at his death the property becomes subject to his heirs. Now what God proposes to give us is eternal life (just what was lost in Adam's transgression), or restore us to position as before the fall. God in His eternal councils is represented as having a will and purpose, and saw fit to have it committed to writing, as found in our Bible. Hence it is God's written will. Will the reader ask himself or herself the question, am I an heir? Am I following out the requirements of this will of our Father? In a certain sense, the New Testament may be considered a supplement to the Old. § 6. 'juxtaposition of the Old and New Testa- ment. In the Old is found a record of the introduction of sin in the world, and the expulsion from Eden ; in the New is found the remedy for sin, and the restitution to paradise and favor with God. In the Old is found prophecies; in the New is recorded their fulfillment. In the Old types are shown as; in the Ch. II: § 7. THE GREAT OBJECT. 39 New antitypes. In the Old are seen " shadows of good things to come;" in the New the substance. In the Old is found nought but death; in the New "life and immor- tality are brought to light." In the Old "they were gathered to their fathers;" in the New is Christ shown to be "the resurrection and the life." In the Old is found the law that is " a schoolmaster to bring us to Christ f in the New we find the Christ. In the Old we are taught how God hates sin; ("The day thou eatest thereof thou shalt surely die;") and in the seventeenth chapter of Levi- ticus is prefigured the great day of atonement; in the New is a record of that atonement having been accomplished in the sufferings of Christ; the claims of God honored as re- gards the above sentence. In the Old is darkness as compared with the New Testament: "In Him was life; and the Life was the light of men." John i: 4. In the Old Testament we are told that we are sinners; in the New how we may become saints. Then should not we ask ourselves a few very serious questions? How stands our account with God? Are we willing to cease trying to save ourselves and accept of what Christ has done for us? " There is none other name under heaven given among men, whereby we must be saved." Let our better judgment answer. We have thus far only looked at the general characteris- tics of the "Two Great Grand Divisions" of the Bible. There is no less truth in the thousand and one particular things as brought out in searching the Scriptures. That there are two grand parts which go to make up the great and grand whole is evident; for when referring to 2d Cor. iii : w r e find not only the theme, but names of each part or great grand division. § 7. The Great Object. It is evident to the careful student of the Bible, that the great object for which it was given to man was, to present Jesus Christ as the Savior of the world to the glory of God. Phil, ii: 11. 40 THE BIBLE OPENED. LESSON III. ,, $n4eum, J^oo " (i }Wu44en ^few §edamm4, WO " g/. S.\ ^l $ooh, 66: 0. §. S(j; qjjt. §. Sx(j = ^. SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. Note. Before introducing this lesson, review the former, and ascertain how many have written gems of thought. Then proceed in the following order: First, write on the board the caption — "Lesson III." See that every pupil does the same. Then write, ' ' Subject : Two Gr. Gr. Divisions. " Into what study do we enter to-day? (Chap. II.) Can there be any objection to teaching the Bible as a science? (Ch. II, § 1.) How many distinct themes are found in the Bible? (§ 2.) What is that of the 0. T. ? What is that of the N. T.? John xvii: 3. Which book of the Bible is supposed to be the oldest? (§ 3.) What two great questions are found in Job? Where is the first found? (See Job ix: 2.) What is the second? (Job xiv: 14.) Where in the N. T. do we find the answer to the first question? (Rom. v: 1.) Where to the second? (1 Cor. xv; 13, 14.) Is it possible then to have a correct understanding of the N. T. without some knowledge of the Old? Into how many general parts may the Bible be divided ? ■(§ 4. ) What may we for convenience call them? See Index. What is the name of the first? The second? (2 Cor. iii: r,, 14.) Define the word Testament? (§ 5.) Note. Make bracket and write God's Written WiU. Oh. II. LESSOR III. 41 How many years of history are there in the Old Testa- ment? (Ch. Ill, §4.) Note. Have class find dates — Gen. Ch. i, also Malachi — and they have the answer, 3600. How many in the New? What do we understand by the letters B. C, as found in all Old Testament dates? What by A. D. ? How many years between the Old and New Testaments? See date of Mai. and Matt. Ans. About 400 years. What name shall we give this interval ? Note. This is an important item, and reference will be made to it again. How many books are found in the Old Testament? Note. See second page reference Bible. Have class count them and repeat them in concert, and pronounce them correctly. How many in the New Testament? Note. Place the multiple sign between the figures indicating the number in Old Testament (3x9), and the product gives the number in the New. How many in both the Old and New Testament? Chap, iii: § 10. By what name is the Old Testament frequently called? Note. Define the word. See Chap, iii : § 4. Does it ever refer to the New Testament? (Acts xvii: 2.) Does the word occur in the Old Testament? (Dan. x: 21.) Note. Review from blackboard, The Illustrated Biblical Index may now be placed before the class. The teacher should acquaint himself with Chap, iii: and present it as an introduction to the above lesson. £2 ILLUSTRATED BIBLICAL INDEX. CHAPTER III. ILLUSTRATED BIBLICAL INDEX. § 1. The Object of This Work. The object of this work, which is intended as a guide to Bible Study ac- companied by the "Illustrated Biblical Index," is to pre- sent a system so simple in its arrangement that the child may comprehend and follow it, yet far reaching enough to answer the earnest desire of the more advanced and mature scholar. The Bible is one of the many sciences which go to make up a store of knowledge such as we should have, such as we must have, in order to fulfill our mission for which God created us. The question is, how can such a knowledge best be obtained? AVe answer: Treat the Bible just as we do any other study. For instance, geography, in its primary or introductory lessons, is presented to the pupil in the form of a Globe. You show the child different places indicated upon the globe. In order that these different localities may be retained in the memory, the globe is divided, first into hemispheres. Then each hemisphere is further divid- ed into continents, with their various subdivisions, as Europe, Asia, and Africa, making up the Eastern Conti- nent; North and South America the Western Continent. Division after division is thus made until the pupil is able to clearly indicate the exact location of any particular place. Here, then, we have a course marked out whereby this particular branch of study may be mastered. So we find some system followed in the acquisition of all the other sciences except the Bible. Shall the Bible be the only Ch. Ill: § 2. ILLUSTRATED BIBLICAL iSTDEX. 43 exception? We propose that it shall not. As in geography and other branches, we would teach the Bible by means of object lessons. As all the knowledge we have acquired on any subject has been received through one or more of the five senses, we propose in the study of the Bible likewise to call into use as many of these senses as possible. The time is coming, and not far distant, when Sunday School teachers must have some qualifications for the responsible position they occupy other than simply the in- clination or disposition to teach. It is difficult to see just how this can be obtained until some system of instruction is employed as a standard, whereby teachers may qualify themselves. The reader will now observe the Index, where we find noted the several divisions into which the Bible is divided. The student will readily perceive that the marks indicating divisions are only where a particular subject ends and a new subject begins; and the divisions, as we here find them, are as natural as the divisions of the continents when only separated by a narrow isthmus. § 2. Illustrated Biblical Index. First, then, we notice the name — "Illustrated Biblical Lntdex." • Early in the history of this country there could be seen guide-boards at almost every crossing of the roads leading from one place to another. Upon these the traveler could read the number of "miles to" such and such a place; .also there could be seen the Index hand, with its finger pointing in the direction of the place where the traveler is expecting possibly to meet with loved ones. Many have said to me: "The Bible is a grand, but con- fused mass.'' Now what we propose to do is, to place these "landmarks " at such points that the traveler heavenward bound may, bv their aid, be helped on his journey. 44 ILLUSTRATED BIBLICAL INDEX. Before us is seen an illustration of a Bible, open at the place which divides what is termed the "Old" from the "New Testament." § 3. The Two Great Grand Divisions. These are what we now propose to call the two " Great Grand Divisions." From either side of this open Bible are seen what appear to be radiations of light; and just beneath we find a reference to Psalm cxix: 130; '* The entrance of thy word giveth light." " Thy word is a lamp unto my feet, and a light unto my path." Psalm cxix: 105. "That (Jesus) was the true Light, that lighteth every man that cometh into the world. He was in the world, and the world was made by Him." John i: 9, 10. "Now as the sun is a beautiful and appropriate symbol of Christ, so the moon strikingly reminds us of the church. The light of the moon is not her own; so it is with the church." C. H. M. " Ye (Christians) are the light of the world. A city that is set on an hill cannot be hid." Matt, v: 14. Light therefore is a symbol of knowledge. § 4. Dates of the Old and New Testaments. We now notice also on the opposite pages of this open booh. " Yeaks 4000 B. C.;" and "Yeabs 100 A. D." While it may be difficult to settle many points of time in chronology, yet it is conclusive that from Adam to Christ was about 4000 years; while the New Testament chronology covers only about 100 years. Old Testament history is marked B. C, i. c, before Christ; while A. D., i. e., in the year of our Lord, refers to New Testament chronology. " The Scriptures" refer to the writings of the Old Tes- tament. Thus were they called in the time of t lie A postles, as found in Acts xvii: 11, where it says, " These were more Ch. Ill: § 6. ILLUSTKATIONS. 45 noble than those in Thessalonica, in that they received the word with all readiness of mind, and searched the Scrij)- tures daily, whether those things were so" (referring to the Berean Christians); the New Testament not having- then been written.* There also may be seen a portion of the fourth chapter of the prophecy of Malachi, which is the '"end" of the Old Testament. § 5. Sphere or Globe. Upon this open Bible we also find resting a sphere, or globe, with parallel and longitudinal lines. Between the parallel lines are found the several divisions, viz: 1st. " Great Grand Divisions;" 2d, "Grand Divisions;" 3d, "Divisions;" and 4th, Sub- divisions, or names of the books of the Bible, from Genesis to Revelation. Above the equatorial line are found, in the several zones: First — "The Golden Chain of Topics" of each sub- division or book. Second — The name of the writers, or supposed writers, of each book, with the date. And lastly — "References to Christ," as found in the several books. These references show how the Old Testa- ment is linked to the New, and the New Testament to the Old as well ; and how impossible it is to understand the New Testament without first having some knowledge of the Old. § 6. Illustrations. Take, for instance, the reference given concerning Christ as found in Gen. xxii: 18: "And * The book of the Acts of the Apostles covers about thirty-five years of history, from 33 A. D. to 68; while the above incident occurred about A. D. 48. By referring to dates of the New Testa- ment books, as found in the fifth Zone of the Index, we find that Matthew's Gospel only was written; New Testament history was be- ing made up at this time. 46 ILLUSTRATED BIBLICAL INDEX. in thy seed shall all the earth be blessed." Underneath will be seen the figure 1. Now go over to the New Testa- ment side of the sphere and find the corresponding figure, 1, and above it will be found a reference to Gal. iii: 16. Read: "Now to Abraham and his seed were the promises made. He saith not, And to seeds, as of many; but as of one, And to thy seed, which is Christ." Again, take the reference corresponding to figure 2, on the left hand side of the globe; Exodus, xii: 7: "And they shall take of the blood, and strike it on the two side posts and on the upper door post of the houses wherein they shall eat it. " Thus the passover was instituted as a re- membrance of their deliverance from bondage. Now turn to figure 2 on the right. We are referred to Matt, xxvi : 28 : "For this is my blood of the new testament, which is shed for many for the remission of sins." 1st Cor. xi: 25, 26: "This do ye, as oft as ye drink it, in remembrance of me. For as often as ye eat this bread, and drink this cup, ye do show the Lord's death till he come." Turn to another reference in the Old Testament division, indicated by figure 5; Exodus, xvii: 6: "Behold, I stand before thee there upon the rock in Horeb; and thou shalt smite the rock, and there shall come water out of it, that the people may drink." Now look at the corresponding figure (5) in the New Testament division; 1st Cor. x: 4: "And all did drink the same spiritual drink; for they drank of that spiritual Rock that followed them; and that Bock was Christ." See how beautifully one illustrates the other ! The above are but a few of the many passages which serve as explanations. To be able to see the intimate relation there is between the Old and New Testaments, it is necessary to know, first, that the Old is constantly pointing forward to the New: and second, thai the New 1ms not less than 850 Ch. Ill: § 10. NUMBER OF BOOKS. 47 references to the Old Testament, 300 of which are verbal quotations. § 7. The Meridian Line. Notice again, all the matter on the left of the ' ' Meridian " line pertains to the Old Testament; while that on the right refers to the New Testament, except where the " Index Hand" is seen. § 8. A Beautiful Illustration. We have here also, in the sphere as seen resting on the book, this beautiful thought illustrated: That all the light or knowledge of God we are able to gain emanates from the Bible, and tenters in Christ. § 9. Three Old Testament Grand Divisions. We now turn to the zone in' which is found the "Grand Divisions." We notice that the Old Testament Great Grand Division is divided into three parts, viz: "Histokical," "Poeti- cal" and "Prophetical." The first, or historical, i. e., that which pertains to the history of persons, places or things, contains seventeen books, Trom Genesis to Esther inclusive; the poetical, five; and the prophetical, seventeen books. § 10. Number of Books. Now notice the numbers, 17, 5 and 17. We find that 17+5+17=39, the whole number of books in the Old Testament. Now place the multiple sign between these two figures, 3 and 9 (3x9), and the product equals the number of books in the New Testament, i. e., 27. 48 GRAND DIVISIONS OF .THE BIBLE. CHAPTER IV. GRAND DIVISIONS OF THE BIBLE. § 1. Historical : First Old Testament Grand Division. The reader may ask for some illustrations showing that this first Old Testament "Grand Division'' is "Historical." We have but to read the first chapter of Genesis and we there have a description of how the earth was made, and the sea, and all that in them is, and Adam, the first of our race. Turn to the third chapter, and we are taught how sin was introduced into the world; and in the thirteenth verse of the same chapter the promise of a Savior or Redeemer from sin. In the sixth and following chapters we have an account of Noah and the flood; and commencing with the twenti- eth, to the end, is found the history of Abrahan^ Isaac, Jacob and the twelve patriarchs; the book ending with the interesting history of Joseph and his brethren, leaving them in Egypt. The book of Exodus opens with an account of their preparations for leaving Egypt, and proceeds with their departure for Canaan, etc. Joshua speaks of himself as the executor of the law previously given; while the Judges refer to the organiza- tion of the people for self government. In Ruth is given the origin of the family of the kings. And in Lsi and 2d Samuel — which may be considered as the first and second volume of the same work — Is found the history of the kings of Judah and Israel down to the lime of their captivity; while 1st and 2d Kings speak of God's dealings with (hem. Oh. IV: §3. PROPHETICAL. 4 ( .> And lastly,, in Esther is the narration of a special provi- dence of God in rescuing the nation of the Jews from a decree of death from the Persian king. Old Testament history covers a space of 3600 years. § 2. Poetical : Second Old Testament Grand Division. We now turn to the second Old Testament "Grand Division," viz: "Poetical." These books are five in number, namely: Job, Psalms, Proverbs, Ecclesiastes and Song of Solomon; a collection of writings claiming the most remote antiquity, and containing subjects of the most inspiring and devotional character, exhibiting speci- mens of fine poetic art. In giving the name Poetical to this grand division, it is not to be understood that this form of Hebrew T verse is not found elsewhere in the Bible. The blessing of the sons of Jacob, the songs of Moses and Miriam, and the 32d and 33d chapters of Deuteronomy were written in this same style. Mneteen-twentieths of the seventeen books which comprise the "Prophetical" were written in poetry. But they do not partake so much of a devotional character as the above. The Hebrew poets Avere men inspired of God; and among them were kings, lawgivers and prophets. § 3. Prophetical: Third Old Testament Grand Di- vision. The third and last of the Old Testament " Grand Divisions" is the k ' Prophetical." "Prophecy is interwoven with every part of the Bible, from Genesis to Kevelation; but this part is distinguished from the rest of the Old Tes- tament by being called * The prophets;' partly because, though history is slightly introduced, its leading object is prophecy; and partly because, in the progress of God's revelation to man, these writings hold, in the gradual de- velopment of evangelical truth, an intermediate place between Law and the Gospel. The prophets were raised up. not only to prepare by their predictions for the coming of 50 GBAND DIVISIONS OF THE BIBLE. the Messiah, but also as preachers to their respective genera- tions. They throw great light on the historical books of the Old Testament considered as a religious history." — NicholU. "The prophets had a practical office to discharge as pastors and ministerial monitors of the people of God. To ' show Jacob his transgression, and Israel his sins,' was a part of the commission they received. They spake — being filled with the holy spirit — the mind of the spirit. The writings of the prophets, tl^e most sublime and beautiful in the world, from their not being generally un- derstood, lose much of that usefulness and effect which they are so well calculated to produce on the souls of men. Many prophecies are somewhat dark till events explain them."' — Henry. The prophecies are, with the exception of the last (Malachi), episodes in the historical part of the Old Testa- ment; as Elijah and Elisha, who prophesied in the days of Ahab, king of Israel. At the same time Jehoshaphat was king of Judah. Again, Isaiah prophesied, as he says. during the reigns of Uzziah, Jotham, Ahaz, and Hezekiah. kings of Judah. Is. i: 1. Ch. IV. LESSON IV. 51 LESSON IV. CstevpecJ; ^jAt&s (P/a ^/et foment T^iand S//WU40H4. id. <§$k4olvcal ; Wemiktiwe. I fytd. Poetical; iPoeity. 3d. iPiohlwiical ; Revelation. ^k |V x 4tA. 'fen. ~ fgdh. ffloofo, 4*[ 2d. U—ff. &. " 5 3d. $a. — (dial. " 4f SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. Note. Ascertain who have written gems of thought, and then review on the divisions of the Bible from the Index. The introduc- tory remarks on the lesson should always be on the subject. Into how many distinct parts may we divide the Old Testament Or. Or. Division? Note. Place on the board the figures 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3. What may we for convenience call them? (Ch. IV: § 1.) What shall we call the first 0. T. grand division? Why so called? What one word may we use in defining it? Note. Illustrate by relating some historical incidents. What is the name of the first hook in this 0. T. errand i o division? Note. The class should count them, and give the names, so that they become familiar with them. Draw a curved line from figure 1 to its corresponding figure below. What is the name of the first and last books ? What are the abbreviations? How many books? Note. Each answer is to be placed on the board in its order. 52 GRAis T D DIVISIONS OF THE BIBLE. What is the name of the second 0. T. grand division? (Ch. IV: § 2.] Why so called? Note the definition of the word. What is the name of the first book? The last? Note curved line. How man}? etc. What is the name of the third 0. T. grand division? (§ 3.) Why so called? What single word may we use to define it? Note. Draw curved line. The first book? Abbreviation? Last book? How many? How many books in the three 0. T. grand divisions? Note. Conclude with review from the board. § 4. Historical: First New Testament Grand Division. We now pass over the meridian line to the New Testament side of the sphere, and we find here like- wise three " Grand Divisions/' the same number as in the Old Testament, named as follows: Historical, Episto- lary, and Apocalyptic* First: " Historical;" so named as before stated, and as will be seen when it is again divided in the zone above. This Grand Division contains five books, Matt, to Acts, in- clusive. § 5. Epistolary: Second New Testament Grand Division. Second: "Epistolary,'' or pertaining to letters, as also seen in zone above, containing twenty-one letters, or books, from Romans to Jnde, inclusive. These were written in days when there was doubtless intimate commu- nication by letter between cities and provinces, by posl roads, or " Appian way."* as they are called — a line of com- pact pavement as first constructed by A p pi us (Maud ins. * This word is used here on account of its frequent use by all writers on this book. If so then it is necessary for the student to understand its meaning. Webster says: "It is derived from the Latin word apocalypsis, to uncover, to disclose." Oh. IV: § 6. lessor v. 53 These ways or roads were also built and used for trans- mitting armies from one part of a province to another. . The common practice of letter writing may be seen- by referring to 2d Cor. iii: 1; 1 Cor. vii: 1. § 6. Apocalyptic: Third New Testament Grand Division. Third: "Apocalyptic;" this word is defined in zones above, and contains only one book — "Revelation." LESSON V. fh4. <$$iUo%wal : Wvmildvi id. Igfi'tidolaiy : SSeiim. , sd. <$lfcccaluji4ic : JFudwu ^k i\ v - hi. qAH.oM. — o$c?L. ffioofo, 5 Jcl. Slew. —fade. " /f sd. ohewltdion, u / SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. Note. Review the Gems of Thought and Divisions of previous lesson. Into how many parts may the N. T. Gr. Gr. Division be divided? (Ch! IV: § L) See Index. What shall we call the first? What is the definition of the word? What one word can you give embodying the definition? Find the first book in this part, and give the name. The abbreviation. * Note. Draw the curved lines. 54 OLD TESTAMENT DIVISIONS. The last book? How many books? Note. The names to be given in concert. What is the name of the second N. T. Grand Division? (§5.) What is the definition of Epistolary? What is the name of the first book? The last? How many books? Note. Class name the books in concert ; also give the abbrevia- tions. State some item of interest as found in this section. What is the name of the third N. T. Grand Division ? What is the definition of Apocalyptic? (Foot note § 4.) Note. Class find the books comprising this Grand Division. How many books in this part? How many books in the three grand divisions of the New Testament? Note. Review from the blackboard. CHAPTER V. OLD TESTAMENT DIVISIONS. § 1. Old Testament : Historical. We will now return to the Old Testament "Historical." We find that this is made up of two parts or "Divisions," viz: "Law" and "Executive." See second zone. (a.) Law. First, "Law,"* containing the five books of Moses, or the Pentateuch,! from Genesis to Deuteronomy * Law is a rule of action, a precept or command, coming from a superior authority, which an inferior is bound to obey. The term as here used is intended to signify the five books of Moses. Law may be further defined by the word Statute. "A statute is a partic- ular law drawn out in form, and particularly and distinctly enacted and proclaimed." — Webster. f Ho called from a Greek word, signifying five books. They were written by Moses in one continuous work, and still remain in that form. ph. V: §2. poetical. 55 inclusive. The Savior refers to this division in Luke, xxiv : 44. This was that which was read in the syna- gogues; and a copy of it was deposited in the side of the ark to preserve it from injury. Deut. xxxi: 26. In the Law is found a continuous history of the world, from the creation to the death of Moses, a period of about 2550 years. (b.) . Executive. Second, "Executive," so called because the Law passed from the hands of the lawgiver, Moses, to Joshua, the executor of that law, to which the children of Israel were afterwards subject. It contains twelve books, from Joshua to Esther inclusive. In this division we find the Twelve Tribes now united under one government, and Joshua is appointed the execu- tor, or judge, he being the first of the subsequent fourteen. Moses, being both lawgiver and judge, was the first, while Samuel was the last. In them was invested authority; hence they became the Authoritative. This style of government lasted nearly four hundred years, when, by request, God gave them a king. The reign of kings continued for about 500 years, or up to the Babylonian captivity, which lasted TO years. From their return from the captivity to the coming of Christ was about 500 years, during which time they were governed by highpriests. Through all these ages and changes there was an authoritative who kept before the people this law of Moses. In passing from one division to another it will be observed there is a marked change of subject. § 2. Poetical. In passing into the "Poetical," we find no division, but we change its name in the next zone above to "Devotional," thus giving an inkling of the nature of the books. They are just what the devout child of God loves to read. There are five of them, from Job to Song of Solomon inclusive. 56 OLD TESTAMENT DIVISION'S. (a.) Job. This book has "Patience" as its theme. If overcome with trials and feel we lack patience, we read Job. Reference is made to this book by the Apostle James (v: 11), where he says: "Behold, we count them happy which endure. Ye have heard of the patience of Job, and have seen the end of the Lord; that the Lord is very pitiful, and of tender mercy. " (b. ) Psalms. These are a collection of " Sacred Hymns, " and were used in the temple worship as hymn and prayer books are now used in the devotional part of our services. Hooker says: "What is there necessary for man to know which the Psalms do not teach? Let there be any grief or disease incident to the soul of man, any wound or sickness named, and there is in this treasure house a present remedy at all times to be found." (c.) Proverbs ("Maxims"). Of the Proverbs, Bishop Hopkins says: "Other parts of the Scriptures are like a rich mine, where the precious ore runs along in one con- tinued vein; but this is like a heap of pearls which, though they are loose and unstrung, are not the less excellent and valuable. " (d.) Ecclesiastes. "The subject of this book is Happi- ness. Its chief object is to correct one of the commonest and most fatal of all delusions, that of supposing the things of this world to be sufficient for our happiness, and pursuing them as our chief good; and also to direct us to true happiness. It especially instructs us that knowl- edge is not our true happiness, but, as Bishop Butler remarks, 'another end is appointed to direct our lives to; an end which the most knowing may fail of, and the most ignorant arrive at.' And the author sums up the purpose of the whole hook in these remarkable words: • Let us hear the conclusion of the whole matter: Fear God, and keep his commandments; for this is the whole duty of man. Oh. V: § 3. prophetical. 57 For God shall bring every work into judgment, with every secret thing, whether it be good, or whether it be evil/ Ch. xii: 13, 14." — Mcholls. (e.) Song of Solomon. This book seems to represent, under an "Allegory," the mutual love which exists between Christ and his church, which is represented as the Bride, the Lamb's wife. There are many passages in other por- tions of the Scriptures Adhere similar figures are used, in both Old and New Testaments. See Hos. ii: 14-23; Matt, ix: 15; 2 Cor. xi: 2; Eev. xix: 7-9, and xxi: 2-9. § 3. Prophetical. We have now passed through the ••Poetical," and have noted the central thought in each book. As Ave pass on and enter the book of Isaiah, or "Prophetical," Ave find an entire change in the subject matter. The Prophetical is diA T ided into tAvo parts, viz: "Major," or greater, and " Minor," or lesser prophets. The Major contains five books. Isaiah to Daniel inclusive; the Minor twelve, Hosea to Malachi inclusive. (a.) Major Prophets. This distinction of the prophets into greater and lesser alludes: First: To the size Of the books. The prophecies of Isaiah and Ezekiel contain each one- fifth more reading matter than all the minor prophets combined; and the writings of Jeremiah nearly one-third more; Avhile the prophecy of Daniel but a little less. Second: They were given under a peculiar stress of cir- cumstances, as will be seen by the following: Gregory, in speaking of the Jewish Dispersion, says: •'The story of the DiAdne judgments Avhich followed the apostasy of the chosen people is familiar. The Divine wrath did not delay, but fell upon Solomon. At his death the vast empire of David had already shrunk to its original narroAv limits, and the Lord declared that even Avhat re- b8 OLD TESTAMENT DIVISIONS. mained should be rent from his successors. Jeroboam, when he had drawn off the ten tribes in revolt, established the idolatrous worship as the religion of the state. And from that time Israel, or the ten tribes, made haste to destruction, in spite of the many warnings and judgments of God. The blow fell when Shalmaneser, king of Assyria, took Samaria, razed it, destroyed the kingdom of Israel, and carried the captives away to Halah and Habor (Chebar). Judah followed in the idolatry of Israel, and a little more than a century later the people were carried away captive to Babylon, save a remnant that fled into Egypt. The prophetic activity reached its height during the decline and captivity. It was then that the sins against the covenant needed most to be rebuked. Early in that period appeared Elijah and Elisha, who wrought more miracles than any prophet since the days of Moses and Joshua. Just before the overthrow of Israel, Isaiah flour- ished in Judah, cotemporary with Hosea in Israel. It is obvious, moreover, that in the captivity the hopes of the Messiah needed to be kept most clearly before the people. Still more earnestly, therefore did the prophets ply their vocation among the captives of Judah and Israel, directing them in the working of God's purposes; Jeremiah with the remnant in Egypt, Ezekiel among those by the river Chebar, and Daniel at the court of the great eastern monarch. " Here we find them weighed down with oppression, strang- ers in a strange land, disheartened and weeping over their once happy home. Now desolated as it was by the feet of strangers, this was once their happy home; the beautiful temple their place of worship; the city of Jerusalem their beloved city. It was "Beautiful for situation, the joy of the whole earth, is Mount Zion, on the sides of the north, the city of the great King." Psalm xlviii: 'I. Oh. V: § 3. LESSON" VI. 59 When asked to. sing one of these songs of Zion, they answered: "How shall we sing the Lord's songs in a strange land? If I forget thee, Jerusalem, let my right hand forget her cunning! If I do not remember tlfee, let my tongue cleave to the roof of my mouth; if I prefer not Jerusalem above my chief joy." Psalm cxxxvii: 3-6. (b.) Minor Prophets. The "Minor" (lesser) may be so considered when contrasted with the above. LESSON" VI. OS** $fi/>doucal, «4. SBl aw ia4u4e ffioofa, @xecu4we : ^uihouiaivw, 42 \diml, | 3d. Szvoiional. S 42 SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. Note. Review all the divisions. What is the name of the first 0. T. Grand Division? {See Index.) How many books does it contain? Into how many general parts may it be divided? (Ch. v, § 1.) Note. Make a bracket and place the figures 1st and 2d. What may we call them ? Define the word Law. What two words may be used to define this part? What is the name of the first book? What is the abbreviation? Name 60 NEW TESTAMENT DIVISIONS. the last book. The abbreviation. How many books in this division? By whom was this Law written? Did our Savior speak of this division? (Luke, xxiv: 44.) Where and he>w was it preserved? How many years of history in these five books? What are they sometimes called? Ans. Pentateuch. Define the word. What is the name of the second 0. T. Division? (Ch. V: §1, b. ) What one word can be used to give an idea of the character of this part? Note. The teacher is to continue the subject of this division as above. W^hat is the name of the second 0. T. Grand Division? (Ch. V: § 2.) Note. Give the names, character, number of books, etc.; then proceed to state how these books are devotional in their character, for what they were intended, and how used. First, Job; Jas. v: 11. Second, Psalms, etc. The last Gr. Gr. Division (Prophetical, Ch. V, § «S) may be treated as the first, with the same style of questions, bringing out the blackboard illustration. The subjects are found in their respective places in the Key. Conclude with review from the blackboard. CHAPTER VI. NEW TESTAMENT DIVISIONS. § l. New Testament: Historical. We will pass again over the " Meridian' 1 line to the New Testament side of the sphere. We find the New Testament " Historical " divided into two parts; first, the " Life of Christ," from Matthew to John, inclusive. Second, " Church History/' found only in the book of Acts. Oh. VI: § 2. EPISTOLARY. 61 (a.) Life of Christ. The four evangelists present four peculiar phases of his life, viz: Matthew treats of the "Kingship" of Christ:" Mark presents him as the "Ser- vant;" Luke exhibits his "Humanity;" and John his "Divinity.''" Matthew wrote for the " Jew," Mark for the " Soman," Luke for the "'Greek,'' and John, thirty-four years later, for the " Christian." (b.) Church History. That the evangelist Luke was the author of the Acts, is affirmed by the voice of antiquity, as also by internal evidence. "His long attendance on Paul," says Henry, "as well as his having been an eye- witness of many of the occurrences he records, renders him a most respectable and credible historian. " This history closed about A. D. 68, covering a space of about 3J years. Says Scott, "There are here given us the only history of the manner in which the most extraordinary revolution that ever took place in the moral and religious state of the world was first begun. Jerusalem, Caesarea, Antioch, and even Ephesus, all the great and celebrated cities, nay. Rome itself, the proud capital of the world, were among the places that felt its power and were affected by its influence. " § 2. Epistolary. We next enter the "Epistolary" (letters) Grand Division, containing twenty-one books or letters. Of these we find Paul wrote fourteen, or two- thirds of them. Now we propose to call these fourteen "Paul's Pastoral Letters:" thus named from the nature of the matter contained in them, having been written to the pastors, or to the churches that had been previously organ- ized by him. The remaining seven letters or epistles are termed " Gen- eral Letters;" so named by Origen, one of the Church Eathers, who wrote in the early part of the third century. 62 XEW TESTAMENT DIVISIONS. (a.) Doctrinal The fourteen letters of Paul are •'Doc- trinal;" so called since they are explanatory of the teaching of Christ. Macknight observes: " While the inspired epistles of the other apostles deserve to be read with the utmost attention, on account of the explication of particular doctrines and facts which they contain, and the excellent precepts of piety and morality with which they abound, the epistles of Paul must be regarded as the grand repository in which the ivhole of the gospel doctrine is lodged, and from which the knowledge of it can be drawn to the greatest advantage." (b.) Supplement. The seven remaining books or " Gen- eral Letters," James to Jude, inclusive, may be considered as a " Supplement" to Paul's fourteen letters, since they are a further illustration of the doctrines therein taught. We extract the following from 0. H. M.'s note* on Gen- esis: "And here I may remark the beautiful harmony between St. James and St. Paul on the subject of justifica- tion. The intelligent and spiritual reader, who bows to the important truth of the plenary inspiration of the Holy Scriptures, knows full well that on this question it is not with Paul or James we have to do, but with the Holy Ghost, who graciously used each of these honored men as the pen to write his thoughts, just as I might take up a quill pen or a steel pen to write my thoughts; in which case it would be preposterous to speak of a discrepancy be- tween the two pens, inasmuch as the writer is one. Hence it is just as impossible that two divinely inspired penmen should clash, as that two heavenly bodies, while moving in their divinely appointed orbits, could come into collision. But in reality, as might be expected, there is the fullest and most perfect harmony between these two apostles; in- deed on the subject of justification, the one is the counter- part or exponent to the other. St. Paul gives us the Ch/Tl: §4 apocalyptic, 63 inward principle; James the outward development of that principle. The former presents the hidden life; the latter the manifested life. The former looks at man in relation to God; the latter looks at him in his relation to man. Now we want both." James says, " Faith without works is dead." § 4. Apocalyptic. Apocalyptic pertains to a prophecy or an unfolding of the future history of the Christian church; hence its name, "Revelation." * Before leaving this subject let us take our 'Bible and find the reference as seen under name of this division (Rev. xxi: 1-4), and see what inducement there may be to living a holy life. John says: "And I saw a new heaven and a new earth: for the first heaven and the first earth were passed away; and there was no more sea. And I, John, saw the holy city, new Jerusalem, coming down from God out of heaven, prepared as a bride adorned for her hus- band. And I heard a great voice out of heaven, saying: Behold, the tabernacle of God is with men, And he will dwell with them, and they shall be his people, And God himself shall be with them, and be their God. And God shall wipe away all tears from their eyes; And there shall be no more death, neither sorrow, nor crying, Neither shall there be any more pain: For the former things are passed away." The Bible opens with man in paradise, happy, pure, in holy communion with God. It closes with man — such as are redeemed with the blood of Christ — seen in the new and heavenly city, giving honor and ascribing power to Jesus, the Lamb. The same Jesus who suffered ignominy, shame and death in this world is now reigning. * The word Revelation is the translation of the Greek title to the book Apocalypsis; that is, " uncovering" or "•unveiling." 64 STEW TESTAMENT DIVISION'S. Ascriptions of Praise. The same who wore the crown of thorns is now wearing the crown of glory; and in the ascriptions of the redeemed it is said: "And they sang a new song, saying: Thou art worthy to take the book, and to open the seals thereof : For thou wast slain, and hast redeemed us to God by thy blood, Out of every kindred, and tongue, and people, and nation; And hast made us unto our G-od kings and priests : And we shall reign on the earth. " Key. v: 9-10. To this was added a chorus, in which the angels joined with the redeemed. "The number of them was ten thousand times ten thousand, and thousands of thousands; saying with a loud yoice : Worthy is the Lamb that was slain, To receive power, and riches, and wisdom, And strength, and honor, and glory, and blessing." And to this was added yet additional ascriptions of honor and glory by " Every creature which is in heaven, and on the earth, and under the earth, and such as are in the sea, and all that are in them, heard I saying: Blessing, and honor, and glory, and power, Be unto him that sitteth upon the throne, And unto the Lamb forever and ever! And the four beasts (living creatures) said, Amen. And the four and twenty elders (the representatives of the redeemed under the patriarchal and apostolic dispensa- tions) fell down and worshipped him that liveth forever and ever." Rev. v: 11-14. Cli. VI. LESSOR VII. LESSOR VII. 65 Cruviecf: : un/Uemem woi /die \ ffliduit. lev-, xxi : i=4. $>ookb, SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOT^S. Review. Call out the several divisions. How many grand divisions are there in the New Testa- ment? What is the name of the first? See Index. Num- ber of hooks? Names? Abbreviations? Into how many general parts may the Historical be divided? Note. Draw bracket, and 1st, 2d. What may we call the first? (Ch. VI, § 1, a.) How many hooks? Of what do they treat? The first? Second? Third? Fourth? Note. Call out the writers, for whom written, etc. What shall we call the second division? •(§ 1, b. ) Who is the writer? What is the name of this book of history? Of what is it a history? Ans. The organization of the Christian church. When did this history close? From 66 SUB-DIVISIONS OF THE BIBLE. what citv did it emanate? What great cities were consid- ered as centers? What is the name of the second New Testament grand division ? Into Iioav many parts may this division be divided? Ans. Two. (§ 2.) Name the first, Why so called? The second? Why so called? What is the lead- ing characteristic of Paul's Pastoral Letters? Axs. Doc- trinal. What of the General Letters? (§ 2. &.) What is the name of the third New Testament grand division? To what does this allude? Ans. Future. (Rev. xxi:l-4.) See CL VI : §4. Note. Much of interest may be drawn from this section. See that every member of the class has the labels properly arranged at the top of the page designating the several divisions, and close with review from the blackboard. CHAPTER VII. SUB-DIVISIONS OF THE BIBLE. § 1. Subdivisions or Names. We are now about to pass again to the Old Testament side of the sphere. This the reader will observe is the fourth time, as will be seen on the "Illustrated Index," as follows: First: Bringing out the "Great Grand Divisions." of which there are two, the names of which are The Old and The New Testament. Second: The "Grand Divisions," of which there are six, three of which are found in the Old and three in the New Testament. Ch. VII: § 3. REFLECTIONS. 67 Third: The "Divisions." Of these we find there are ten, the Old Testament being divided into five and the New into five. Fourth: We now bring ont the Subdivisions, or names of all the books of the Bible, with the Golden Topic or Link in each book, which form * ' The Golden Chain of Topics." Of these subdivisions there are 66; 39 in the Old and 27 in the New Testament. We will find also in this zone, not only the names of the books, but the number of chapters in each book, showing their comparative size. § 2. Explanations. I. Golden Tojncs. The first zone above the equatorial line contains the Golden Topic of each of these sixty-six (66) books. II. Writers of Books. In the next zone above is found the names of the writers of these books, with either the date of the incident recorded or the close of the writing of each, as found in the American Bible Society's Bible, which adopted the Biblical Chronology as arranged by Archbishop Usher. f III. References to Christ. In the upper zone are found one or more references to Christ. These zones, however, will be treated in their respective places in this work. § 3. Reflections. As we now enter into the more minute study of the great lessons as brought out in the several books, we are led to exclaim with Paul: "'Who is sufficient for these things?'' "This is holy ground." We feel not only to remove our hats, as in the presence of some one who is our superior, but to take the shoes from off our feet. We are taught that the Bible is ''God's written will to men." We venture only so far as God may be pleased to reveal himself. "We know there is nothing in Scripture without its divine meaning; and it is tmr privilege as well as our duty 68 G EXES IS. to seek to know the meaning of all that our God has graciously written for our learning. This, we believe, can only be reached by humble, patient, prayerful waiting on Him. The One who has penned the Book knows perfectly the scope and object of the Book as a whole, and of each division of the Book in particular. This will have the effect of checking the unhallowed flights of the imagina- tion. The Spirit of G-od alone can open Scripture to our souls. 'God is our interpreter' in revelation as well as in providence; and the more we lean on Mm in true self- emptiness, the deeper insight we shall have both of his Word and his ways." — G. H. M. on Numbers, p. 04. § 4. The "Law." We now pass to the first Old Testament ^Division — The Law. We find it divided into five parts or "Subdivisions," viz: Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus, Numbers and Deuteronomy. The object, in what may be said in regard to the several books of the Bible, is that the reader may have a clearer understanding of them. And in order to understand them the student must study these five books diligently, and indeed master them, for they are a key to the following portions of the Scriptures, which cannot be understood without it; they are the foundation upon which the other Scriptures rest. They are to the Old Testament what the four gospels are to the New Testament. § 5. Genesis. {See Chronology, (It. XX IV: ■ 6.) Written by Moses for the Hebrews, B. C. 1401. GOLDEN" TOPIC, " ORIGIN. " "There is a majestic sublimity in the introduction to this book. No apology, preamble or account of the writer: you are introduced at once into the very heart of things. No vain conjectures about what was before time, nor why things were done thus and thus; but simply so it was." — Andrew Fuller. Ch. VII: § 7. CHUKCH HISTORY. 69' While it may be difficult to ascertain what may be the most prominent topic of some of the books of the Bible, there certainly can be no very great difficulty as to this one; we need but define the word Genesis, which means generation or Origin. (See Index.) In it, then, we have a history of the origin, or begin- ning. It relates to the creation of the earth and man; and it gives us an account of how sin was introduced into the world, and the remedy provided against it. The time of the writing of this book was about 1491 B. C. Nicholls says: "This book, from the first page of which it has been truly said, that a child may learn more in one hour than all the philosophers in the world learned with- out it in one thousand years. This book is the foundation of all history, for we are indebted to the tenth chapter for all that we know about the origin of nations; yet it is remarkable Iioav much larger a part of it is occupied with the history of one family than with all the other inhabitants of the earth." § 6. History of Mankind. The general history of mankind before the flood extended over a period of 1656 years, and, including an account of the creation of the world, occupies only seven chapters; the general history of mankind after the flood, during a period of 427 years 3 occupies only four chapters; while the particular history of Abraham and his descendants, consisting principally of the details of the life of a few individuals, and treating only of a period of 286 years, occupies thirty-nine chapters. § 7. Church History. The reason is, that the Bible is not merely the history of men, but a history of the church of God ; hence we have the names of those who directly or indirectly constitute that church. Genesis contains the history of about 2369 years, embracing the period from the creation to the death of Joseph. 70 GENESIS. § 8. The Writer. As to the writer of this book there is no doubt, as it is universally ascribed to "Moses." (See Index.) It is cited thirty-three times in the Scriptures; and in it are found many lessons of faith and trust in God, showing us that even in that remote period the coming of a Savior was expected. §9. Prophesies and Types. Nicholls says: "Collect the prophecies concerning Christ, Ch. iii: 15, etc. This promise or covenant of grace was renewed to Noah, vi: 18, and again to Abraham, who was born only two years after the death of Noah. It was promised to Abraham that ; all the nations of the earth should be blessed in his seed,' xxii: 18 (see Index), and 'that seed is Christ,' Gal. iii: 16. Thus was the gospel preached to Abraham." There are also many types relating to Christ found in this book. For instance, Abel, Noah, and the offering of Isaac by his father, showing the love of God to us, in the great sacrifice of his son. § 10. Scientific view of Creation. We will now give a brief outline of this book, first, of the six days crea- tion, and then of the subject-matter of the book as a whole. According to the most distinguished teacher of science referred to in the following outline, the account. of the creation recognizes two great eras, as inorganic and organic, consisting of three days each; each era opening with the appearance of light, that of the first being Cosmical, that of the second Solar, for the special uses of the earth, as follows : "I. INORGANIC ERA: 1st Day, — LIGHT, cosmical. 2d Day. — The earth divided from the fluid around it. oj -rv j 1. Outlining of the land and water. 2. Creation of vegetation. Ch. VII: § 11. outline or genesis. 71 II. ORGANIC era: 4th Day.— LIGHT from the sun. 5th Day. — Creation of the lower animals. rthDay.-P- Ok J (2. Cn y 1. Creation of mammals. Creation of man. — Dana." §11. Outline of Genesis. " I. Gen. Chap, i and ii, contains the accoiint of the creation of the earth and man. II. Chap. iii. The primeval state and fall of man. III. Chap. iv. History of Adam and his descendants, with the progress of religion and the origin of the arts. IV. Chap. v. Genealogies, age and death of the patri- archs, until Noah. V. Chap, vi-viii. The general defection and corruption of mankind, the deluge, and preservation of Noah and his family in the ark. VI. Chap. ix. The history of Noah and his family sub- sequent to the time of the deluge. VII. Chap. x. The repeopling and the division of the earth among the sons of Noah. VIII. Chap. xi. The building of Babel, the confusion of tongues, and the dispersion of mankind. IX. Chap, xii-1. The lives of Abraham, Isaac, Jacob, and Joseph." — Carpenter. § 12. Conclusion. " The book of Genesis closes with the death of Jacob and Joseph. But before the scenes shut up, we have graphic and expanded views of the fate of the twelve tribes of Israel, in the prophetic blessings of their dying father; of which those relative to Judah are to us far the most interesting, as they point to Him, in whose work all the plans and promises of Jehovah center and 72 EXODUS. are accomplished. Says Sir William Jones: 'This volume independent of its divine origin contains more sublimity and beauty, more morality, more important history, and finer strains of poetry and eloquence, than can be col- lected from all other books, in whatever language or age they may have been composed.'" — Cottage Bible. CHAPTER VIII. EXODUS. § 1. Exodus (See Chronology, Ch. XXIV: § 6), written by Moses at Sinai, for the Hebrews, B. C. 1491. GOLDEX TOPIC "DEPARTURE." Says Nicholls: " The title of this book is peculiarly ap- propriate. Exodus means Departure (see Index), and this book contains the account of the departure of the Israelites out from Egypt; an event which is th& foundation of their whole history as a nation, and which is more fre- quently referred to than any other in their subsequent history." § 2. Moses the Writer. This book is also univer- sally ascribed to -Moses, and is cited as his work by David. Daniel, and others of the sacred writers. Forty-four references are made to this book by Christ and his Apos- tles. It embraces- the history of about L45 years, from the death of Joseph to the erection of the tabernacle in the wilderness of Sinai. The time Avhen this book was composed is not clear, though we know it must have been written soon after the commencement of the tabernacle worship, H'Hi B. C. Ch. VIII: § 3. OUTLINE OF EXODUS. 73 § 3. Outline of Exodus. The very general topics of this book are as follows : I. Exodus, Chap. i-vi. The oppression of'the Israelites in Egypt, and the raising up of Moses their deliverer. II. Chap, vii-xiil. The deliverance by the ten plagues, and the institution of the Passover. III. Chap, xiv-xv. The passage through the Red Sea, and song of triumph. IV. Chap, xvi-xviii. The miraculous supply of food and water. Amalek overcome, and visit of - Moses' father-in-law. V. Chap, xix-xxiii. The Law given at Mount Sinai. VI. Chap, xxiv-xxxv. The directions for making the tabernacle and its appointments, and the institution of the priesthood. VII. Chap, xxxvi-xl. Building of the tabernacle. § 4. Reflections. One of the leading features in the book of Genesis, which must not be lost sight of, is the call of Abraham when God said to him, " Get thee out of thy country,*' etc., Ch. xii: 1-3. There we find the origin of a people who are to be peculiarly his; a distinct and isolated people, who are to be under his immediate superintend- ence, educating them so that in the course of time they may be prepared, or made ready, to receive the oracles of God. To accomplish this it required 500 years, which brings us down to the giving of the law on Sinai. § 5. Prophecies and Types. In this book as In Genesis we find prophecies and types of Christ. Let us turn to Ch. xvii: 6 (see Index) : "Behold I stand before thee there upon the rock in Horeb: and thou shalt smite the rock, and there shall come water out of it. that the people may drink." Now let us turn to 1st Cor. x: 4, and get the New Testament interpretation of the above passage* " They drank of that spiritual Bock that followed thenu and that Bock was Christ." 74 • EXODUS. Manna is a type of the "Bread which cane down from heaven," John 6: 51, for nourishing the immortal soul'mto eternal life. The Red Sea was a type of baptism. 1st Cor. x: 1, 2. Nicholls, in referring to the passover as a type of Christ, says: "It is a remarkable circumstance that Christ — our passover — was sacrificed for us, and our deliverance from the bondage of sin completed, in the same month, and on the same day of the month, that the Israelites were deliv- ered from the bondage of Egypt. Man did not intend this." Compare Matt, xxvi: 5, with Acts xiii: 27. • There was also a law-giver: Christ has given laws to the church; and so Moses was a type of Christ in giving laws to the children of Israel. These are but a few of the many types of Christ pre- sented. Says Henry: " There are more types of Christ in this book than in any other book of the Old Testament. " § 6. Conclusion. " Moses, having in the book of Genesis described the creation of the world, the origin of the nations, and the repeopling of the earth, details in the book of Exodus the commencement and nature of the Jew- ish Church and Polity, which has been termed a Theocracy, in which Jehovah appears not merely as their creator and Lord, but as their king. Hence this, with the following books of Moses, are not purely historical; but contain not only laws for the regula- tion of their moral conduct and the rights and ceremonies of their religious worship, but judicial and political laws relating to government and civil life. A part of these have been detailed in this book, and an account given of the erection of a superb royal palace, the tabernacle, in which Jehovah was pleased to dwell, or manifest his special presence by the Shekinah, or glory. appearing between the cherubims. The stupendous facts connected with these events are fully attested by every suc- ceeding writer of Ihe sacred Scriptures.*' — Cottage BibU. Oh. IX: §4. THREE SUBJECTS OF THE BOOK. 75 CHAPTER IX. LEVITICUS. § 1. Leviticus (See Chronology, Oh. XXIV: § 6), written by Moses for the Hebrews at Sinai, B. C. 1491. GOLDEN TOPIC "DUTIES OF LEVITES?" "The book of Exodus closes with G-od's taking solemn possession of the tabernacle: the book of Leviticus treats of the services enjoined there; or in other words, the rites and ceremonies of the Jewish religion. The descendants of Levi were set apart to instruct the people in the knowl- edge of these rites, and to conduct the religious worship of the Jews; and this book is called Leviticus, or the Duties of Levites, because it contains the rules which would enable them to discharge their duties." — Nicholls. § 2. Laws of Sacrifices and Offerings. " There is nothing historical in this book except the account; Oh. viii-ix, of the consecration of the priesthood; Ch. x: of the punishment of JSTadab and Abihu; and Ch. xxiv, of Shel- omith's son. All the rest is taken up with the laws which (lod gave to Israel concerning the sacrifices and offerings, meats, drinks, and divers washings, by which God set that people apart for himself, all of which ' were shadows of good things to come.* " — Henri/. § 3. The Writer of Leviticus. This book is cited as the work of Moses in 2d Chron. xxx: 16, Daniel ix- 13, and as an inspired writing in 2d Cor. vi: 16, and 1st Peter i: 16. § 4. Three Subjects of the Book. " The rites and ceremonies contained in this book are reducable to the three following general heads: I. Sacrifices; all of which had a typical reference to Christ, and especially to his atonement. 76 LEVITICUS. II. Purifications from legal uncleanness. These repre- sented the necessity of inward purity of the heart, and man's need of the Holy Spirit to purify the soul. III. Solemn Festivals, calculated to unite their tribes in one nation; to keep them separate from other nations; . to promote among them piety." — Xicliolls. § 5. Festivals, etc. The chief of these were, the daily sacrifices; the weekly Sabbaths; the monthly feasts of the new moons. And the following were the annual ob- servances: the feast of the Passover; the feast of Pentecost; the feast of Trumpets; - the great day of Atonement; and the feast of Tabernacles. § 6. Institution of Public Worship. " This book records the transactions of but one month, but the facts it mentions are peculiarly appropriate to its subject, viz, the public worship of God, by which especially his great name was to be honored. These facts are, the consecration of Aaron and his sons to the priesthood; the punishment of Nadab and Abihu; and the stoning of the blasphemer. The first instructs us in the importance God attaches to his worship; the second show r s in an awful manner the sin- fulness of those who interfere with it; and the third is a solemn warning of the danger of taking his holy name in vain." — Nicholls. § 7. Types. The institution of high priesthood typi- fied Christ, the great High priest. The books of Leviticus and Hebrews should be read together, as they mutually illustrate each other. It. will be seen that the law as found in Leviticus is a shadow of good things to conn. But observe particularly the services on the great day of atonemenl as found in Ch. xvi, and how it is explained in Hebrews Oh. ix. § 8. Tables of Weights, Measures, and Moneys, mentioned in the "Bible. The following is extracted Oh. IX: §8. WEIGHTS, MEASURES AND MONEYS. 7? chiefly from the second edition of Dr. Arbuthnot's Tables of Ancient Coins, Weights, and Measures: 1. Jeivish Weights reduced to English Troy Weights. lbs. oz. pen. gr. The gerah, one-twentieth of a shekel, Ex. xxx: 13, 12.000 The bekah, half a shekel, Ex. xxxviii: 26, 4 13.2&5 The shekel, Gen. xxiv: 22; Amos viii: 5, 9 2.571 The maneh, 60 shekels, Ezek. xlv: 12, 2 3 6 10.285 The pound, mina, 100 shekels, 2 Chr. ix: 16; 1 K. x : 17, 3 9 10 17.142 The talent, 3000 shekels, Ex. xxxviii: 25, 26, 113 10 1 10.285 2. Scripfu re Measures of Length reduced to Eng. Measure. yds. feet. inch. A finger or digit, Jer. lii: 21, 0.912 A palm or hand-breadth, 1 K. vii: 26; com. Jer, lii: 21, 3.648 A span the longer, Ezek. xliii: 13, _■_ __'_ -10.944 A common span, half a cubit,. 9.000 A common cubit, two spans, 1 6.000 A sacred cubit, Ex. xx v: 10, 1 9.888 A fathom, the Greek orguia, Acts xxvii: 28, 6 0.810 A measuring reed, Ezek. xl: 3, 5, . 10 11.328 The measuring line, Zech. ii: 1, 48 1 11.040 A furlong, or stadium, one-eighth of a Roman mile, 202 8.625 A furlong, or stadium, one-tenth of an Eastern mile, 243 7.200 A Roman mile, Matt, v: 41, ...-_.._ ._ 1617 2 9.000 A Sabbath day's journey, Acts i: 12, 1215 3 0.000 3. Scripture Liquid Meas. reduced to English Wine Meas. gals. qts. pts. A log, Lev. xiv: 10, 12, 15, 21, 24, 0.833 A firkin, John ii: 6, according to Cumberland, 3 1.125 A hin, Ex. xxix: 40; Lev. xix: 36; Ezek. xlvi: 5, , U, 1 1 0.000 A bath, equal to the ephah, Ezek. xlv: 11; Lu. xvi; 6, 7 2 0.500 A firkin, John ii: 6. the bath according to Campbell 7 2 0.500 A cor, equal to the homer, Ezek. xlv; 14, 75 2 1.000 4. Scripture Dry Measures reduced to English Corn Meas. pecks, qte. pts. A cab, 2Kings, vi: 25, _._■ 3.000 A measure, the chcenix, Rev. vi: 6, 1 0.166 An omer, one-tenth of an ephah,Ezek. xvi, 36, 2 1.100 A measure, the seah, lji. xviii: 32; 2 K. vii: 1, 16, 18, _. 1 1.000 An ephah, ten omers, Ex. xvi: 36, 3 1 1.000 A half-homer, the letech, Hos. hi: 2 16 0.000 A homer, or cor, ten baths, Ezek. xlv: 14; Lu. xvi: 7, 32 1.000 5. Scripture Moneys reduced to United States Moneys. dols. cts. m. A mite, lepton, Mark xii: 42, 0.500 A farthing, kodrantes, Mark xii: 42, 1.000 Afarthing, assarius, Matt, x: 29, 1 5.000 A gerah. one-twentieth of a shekel, Ex. xxx: 13, 2 8.000 A penny, denarius, Matt, xviii: 28; xx: 2; xxii; 19, 15 4.700 A bekah, or half -shekel, Ex. xxxviii: 26, 28 0.000 A shekel of the sanctuary, Lev. v: 15, 56 0.000 A piece of money, stater. Matt, xvii: 27, .. . 70 3.700 A dram, tne Persian daric, 1 Chr. xxix: 7; Ezr. viii: 27, 3 51 8.600 A shekel of gold, Num. vii: 14, 8 88 4.000 A pound or mina, Luke xix: 13, 15 21 4.000 A maneh, the Hebrew mina, Ezek. xlv: 12 27 81 3.000 A talent, Matt, xxv: 15, 912 75 0.000 A talent, 60 manehs, 1668 78 0000 A talent of gold, Ex. xxv: 39; 1 Chr. xxix: 7, 26452 30 0.000 78 LEVITICUS. Hours of the Day. The day, reckoning from sun-rise, and the night from sun-set, were each divided into 12 equal parts, called the 1st, 2d, 3d, 4th, etc., hour. Watches. The first watch— From sun-set to the third hour of the night. The second or middle watch— From the third hour to the sixth. The third watch, or cock-crowing— From the sixth hour to the ninth. The fourth or morning watch— From the ninth hour to sunrise. § 9. Jewish Times and Festivals. Correspond- ing with the months of Months of the Hebrew Months. Sacred Year. Civil Year. Festivals. 1. Ahib, or Nisan. Exod.xii: 2,18; xiii: 4. Esth. iii: 7; Neh. ii: 1. March. April. 1st. 7th. 14. Paschal Lamb killed. 15. Passover. 16. First fruits of barley harvest presented to the Lord. 21. Passover ended. 2. Zif , or Iyar. 1 Kings vi: 1. April. May. 2d. 8th. 3. Si van. Esth. viii: 9. May. June. 3d. 4th. 9th. 6. Pentecost. First fruits of wheat presented to the Lord. 4. Tamus, Tammuz, or Thamuz. June. July. 10th. 5. Ab. July. August. 5th. 11th. 6. Elul. Neh. vi: 15. August. September. 6th. 12th. 9. Temple taken on this day by the Chaldeans, and af- terward by the Romans. 7. Tifri, Tisri, or Ethanim. 1 Kings viii: 2. September. October. 7th. 1st. 1. Feast of Trumpets. 10. Day of Atonement. 15. Feast of Tabernacles. 22. Last day of it. 8. Marchesvan, or Bui. 1 Kings vi: 38. October. November. 8th. 2d. 9. Cisleu, or Chisleu. November. December. 9th. 3d. 25. Feast of the Dedication of the temple. 10. Tebath. Esth. ii: 16. December. January. 10th. 4th. 11. Sebat, Zech. i: 7. January. February. nth. 5th. 12 and 13. Adar. Esth. iii: 7. Ve-Adar or the second Adar, is added here, when ne- cessary. February- March. 12th. 6th. 14 and 15. Feast of Purim. Esth. ix: 18-81. Ch. X: § 3. GENERAL OUTLINE. 79 CHAPTER X. NUMBEKS. § 1. Numbers. (See Chronology, Ch. XXIV: § 6.) Written by Moses for the Hebrews, B. C. 1451, in the land of Moab. GOLDEN TOPIC, " CENSUS TAKING." " This name is given to this book because it contains an account of the numbering of the children of Israel, the first of which took place in the beginning of the second year after their departure out of Egypt; the second in the plains of Moab, at the conclusion of their journey in the wilderness. This book comprehends a period of about 38 years; bat the most of the events related in it happened in the first and last of those years." — Nicholls. § 2. A Diary. The whole of the book may be con- sidered as a diary, and is the most ancient booh of travels ever published. The route taken by the Israelites, under the direction of their inspired leader, has been traced out by modern travelers; and many places here mentioned still bear the same name, and correspond exactly in their geo- graphical situation. § 3. General Outline. The following is a general outline of the history: I. The consecration of the tabernacle and the Levites. II. The journeyings and encampments of the Israelites. III. Their murmurings and rebellions. IV. Various laws are repeated and new ones given. § 4. Number of Israel. When Jacob went 'down into Egypt with his family, it will be remembered that they numbered only 70 souls ; but notwithstanding the 80 NUMBERS. oppression and cruelties that were practiced upon them, when they left it and crossed the Red Sea into the wilder- ness they numbered more than two million. What a wonderful increase was there in the course of 218 years! The people are indeed "as the stars of heaven in multitude." At the conclusion of the sojourn in the wilderness an- other census of the twelve tribes was taken, and directions given for the division of the, land of Canaan, which they are about to enter. We find their number about the same as when they first came out from Egypt . Those who thus came out had so murmured and sinned against God that he had resolved they should never be put in possession of the land of Canaan, but that their children only should have it. These would then know how true was the word of God, when, at the end of 38 years, they should find there were but hvo left out of this large number, now amounting to 625,850 males above 20 years of age. We find that reckoning is made only of those "that are able to go forth to war in Israel." § 5. Particular Outline of Numbers. The follow ing is a specification of particular subjects: I. Chap. i-ii. "Census Taken," and the tribes placed in order around the tabernacle. II. Chap, iii-iv. Numbering of the Levites, and the as- signment to their several work. III. Chap. v-vi. Laws concerning trespasses, jealousy and the Nazarites. IV. Chap, vii-viii. Dedication of the tabernacle, and con- secration of the Levites. V. Chap. ix-x. The cloud, and the order of march. VI. Chap, xi-xii. The sending of quails, and Miriam's leprosy. VII. Chap, xiii-xiv. Twelve spies sent up to search the land, and the people murmur at their report. Oh. X: §6. THE TRIBES IN CAMP. 81 VIII. Chap. xv. Law of meat and drink offerings. IX. Chap, xvi-xvii. The rebellion, and the budding of Aaron's rod. X. Chap, xviii-xix. The charge to the priests and Levites, and the law of purification. . XI. Chap, xx-xxi. The smiting of the rock, and setting up of the brazen serpent. XII. Chap, xxii-xxv. The story of Balak and Balaam. XIII. Chap, xxvi-xxvii. " Census Taken " in the plains of Moab, and the law of inheritance. XIV. Chap, xxviii-xxx. The law of offerings and vows. XV. Chap, xxxi-xxxii. The enemies of Israel on the east of Jordan are overcome. XVI. Chap, xxxiii-xxxiv. The forty-two journeys, and the division of the land of Canaan. XVII. Chap, xxxv-xxxvi. The cities of the Levites, the cities of refuge, and the provision for securing the possession to each tribe. § 6. The Tribes in Camp. The accompanying plan presents the order of the tribes in their tents round about the tabernacle. When they broke camp, the first and second divisions marched forward in the order of their respective tribes, Judah taking the lead and bearing the standard of their division; then the Levites, bearing the tabernacle; and then the third and fourth divisions in the order of their tribes. 82 NUMBERS. NORTH p go 157,600 Men. Fourth Grand Division. Asliur, 41,500. Simeon, 59,300. Dan, 62,700. Naphtali, 53,400. • II Merarites, ¥§ 3,200. pq W J O c .S o CO CD < ft! — CO 5* f°" (X » [> P3 CD w PC PQ < H CO g 2,750, o8 o? Kohathites. ~ ^ JeS Reuben, 46,500. lL^. CO o =" O 8Q -3 ' © SS o ^ CDi © ?5 Gad, 45,650. 151,450 Men. Second Grand Division. SOUTH. Ch. XI: § 2. WHERE WRITTEN. 83 § 7. Prophecy. This book contains one signal predic- tion relative to the Messiah, ch. xxiv: 17-19. "Balaam's prophecy of the Star of Jacob points to the ( Bright and Morning Star' which through the tender mercy of God was to visit us; and his mention of the sceptre points to the spiritual kingdom of Him who must reign till 'He hath put all enemies under his feet.' 1 Cor. xv: 25." — Nicholls. CHAPTEE XL DEUTERONOMY. § 1. Deuteronomy. (See Chronology, Ch. XXIV: §6.) Written by Moses for the Hebrews, in the land of Moab, B. C. 1451. GOLDEN TOPIC, "LAW REHEARSED." Deuteronomy means " Law Kehearsed," so called because it contains a repetition or rehearsal of the law. It also contains additions, omissions, and fuller explanations. The omissions are such as pertain to the duties of the Levites. The additions are such as refer to their entering the prom- ised land. The explanations are such as apply it to the heart, and not so much to the outward life. It is the fifth book of the writings of Moses, and is in fact a commentary on the previous four books. § 2. Where Written. From a comparison of chap, i: 5, with xxxiv: 1, it appears to have been written by Moses in the plains of Moab, a short time before his death. It is cited as his work in 2 Ohron. xxv: 4, and Dan. ix: 13, and is often quoted as an inspired writing by Christ and his apostles. SH. DEUTERONOMY. § 3. A History of Five Weeks. It embraces a his- tory of about five weeks. It enforces obedience by the strongest exhortations; and was no doubt intended for the benefit of those born in the wilderness, and who conse- quently were not present at the giving of the law on Sinai. § 4. The Repetitions. The variations in expression observable in the repetition of the law have been considered as an intimation that its spirit, rather than its letter, is that which is to be regarded. § 5. A Rehearsal. "In this book may be found the pathos and sublimity of religion, in a strain not to be surpassed in any part of the Old Testament. It contains a rehearsal and republication of the law hy the great prophet of it himself, with a survey of the wonders of Egypt and the wilderness, the past acts of God's mighty arm, working in terror and in mercy, and a terrific insight into the future plagues of the apostate people. It also helps us to trace the progressive scheme of Scrip- ture; for in its doctrinal character and use it may be set above the simpler and earlier promulgation of the law, as recorded in Exodus.'' — Carpenter. The book of Leviticus would instruct them in the form of their worship ; this book may be considered as teaching them with what spirit they should perform it. The general outlines of it, if not the whole hook, were to be written upon stones, plastered, and set up on their entering the promised land, as a solemn memento of the terms on which they should enter and retain it. Chap, xxvii: 2-8. § 6. When to be Read. It was to be read publicly by the priests every seventh year, at the feast of tabernacles, in the hearing of all the people. Chap, xxxi: 9-13. The importance of having a knowledge of it will be seen by the Saviors quotations; Compare Matt, iy: 4, 1, 10, with Dent, viii: :{; \ i: 1C. 13. Ch. XI: § 7. GENERAL OUTLINE OF DEUTERONOMY. 85 Not only was it to be read m public every seven years, but it was to be taught by the parents every day to the children. "And thou shalt teach them diligently unto thy children, and thou shalt talk of them when thou sittest in thy house, and when thou walkest by the way, and when thou liest down, and when thou risest up" Deut. vi: 7. By comparing the law given in Chap, xxi: 22-23, with Gal. iii: 13, we see how clear is the allusion to Christ, who was made a curse for us, being hanged on a tree. * § 7. General Outline of Deuteronomy. I. Chap, i-iii. Rehearsal of the transactions in the wilder- ness. II. Chap. iv. Exhortations to obedience to the laws of God. Ill: Chap. v-xi. Rehearsal of the moral law. IV. Chap, xii-xvi. Rehearsal of some parts of the cere- monial law. V. Chap, xvii-xviii. Rehearsal of judicial laws, promise of the Great Prophet, and covenant between Jehovah and the Israelites. VI. Chap, xix-xxvii. Laws of cities of refuge, of war, divorce, etc. VII. Chap, xxviii. Wonderful prophecy of the destruc- tion of Jerusalem by Nebuchadnezzar, 600 B. C, and also by Titus, 70 A. D. VIII. Chap, xxix-xxx. Exhortations to obedience on their arrival in Canaan. IX. Chap. xxxi. Moses' charge to Joshua, and the deliv- ery of the law to the Levites. X. Chap, xxxii, The song of Moses. XL Chap, xxxiii. The blessing of the twelve tribes. XII. Chap, xxxiv. Moses views the land, dies, and is buried; his age, and the thirty days' mourning; Joshua succeeds him; eulogy. * The reader should find both references and read them carefully. 86 DEUTERONOMY. § 8. Great Value of the Pentateuch. The coming of the Savior is more particularly foretold in the preceding books. The preparation which the prophecies in these five books made for the coming of Christ remarkably appears in the expectation of the Samaritans, who admit- ted no other books as inspired than the Pentateuch. As a proof of this, let us turn to John, iv: 4-42, and read care- fully, noting what is said in verse 4, "Samaria;" 29, "the Christ;" 39, "many believed;" 42, "we have heard our- selves." "Finally: The treasury of wisdom and knowledge which is amassed in these jive books has enriched the whole civilized earth, and, indeed, greatly promoted that very civilization. They have been a kind of text booh to almost every writer on geology, geography, chronology, jurispru- dence, political economy, theology, poetry and criticism, from the time of Moses to the present day. Books to which the choicest writers and philosophers in pagan antiquity have been deeply indebted, and which were the text books of all the prophets ; books from which the flimsy writers against divine revelation have derived their natural religion and all their moral excellence; books written in all the energy and purity of the incomparable language in which they are composed; and lastly, books which, for importance of matter, variety of information, dignity of sentiment, accu- racy of facts, impartiality, simplicity and sublimity of narration, tending to improve and ennoble the intellect, and ameliorate the physical and the moral condition of man, have never been equaled, and can only be paralleled by the Gospel of the Son of God! Fountain of endless mercy, justice, truth and beneficence! How much are thy gifts and bounties neglected by those who do not read this law, and by those who, having read it, are not morally improved by it, and made wise unto salvation 1 " — Baqster. Cb. XL LESSON VIII. 87 LESSON YIII. un. Met, ».g . M(jJ n it uqo (( it uqo n tt U54 a it U5i /. ^enem : Sua 2. IgxoduA : Wekaliww. J ^ Is. SBtwtku* : Su4i& o{ SBcvifa. ^S 5 1§ *• (^uwibtte ■' (gemAub §akiny. 5. Wmit/ionomu : Saw- @Hehea>t6ed. u irvndadfsuch. SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. Note. Review the several divisions, the parts of each, and the names. See Index. What is the name of the first Old Testament Division ? Ans. Law. Into how many parts is it divided? What are they called? (Ch. VII: § 1.) Note. Place on the board bracket and figures 1, 2, 3, etc. What is the name of the first Old Testament Subdivi- sion ? The second ? Third ? etc. What is the Golden Topic of Genesis? (§ 5.) By whom was this book written? (§8.) When written? Where? Note. It is supposed by some to have been written by Moses, while attending the flocks of his father-in law, in the land of Midian. What is the name of the second subdivision? (Ch. VIII: §1.) The writer? When written? Date? Outline? (§3.) What is the name of the third subdivision? (Ch. IX: § 1.) By whom written? For whom was it written? Where ? What is the Golden Topic ? Into how many general parts is it divided? (§4.) Note. Give the subject of each part. #8 SUBDIVISIONS OF THE BIBLE. What is the name of the fourth subdivision? (Ch. X: § 1.) By whom written? Where? Note. Bring out the four parts of the outline. (§ 3.) What is the name of the fifth subdivision? (Ch. XI: § 1.) When and where written? Golden Topic? General outline? (§ 7.) Note. State distinctly each part, and review from the blackboard. CHAPTER XII. SUBDIVISIONS OF THE BIBLE. [continued.] See Index. § 1. The Executive. This division of the Old Tes- tament is altogether historical. It contains a history of the Jewish church as well as the nation, beginning from the first settlement in the land of Canaan, and extending to their re-settlement in the same land after the captivity in Babylon. It covers a period of over 1000 years, from the death of Moses to the reformation of Nehemiah. § 2. Sacred History. Sacred history djffers from every species of ordinary history in this, that, while the latter records events and details facts simply, the former combines them with the event as coincident with the pur- poses of God. It is evident from a clos,e examination of these historical books, that they arc a collection of authentic records, as ,kept by the priests or other publicly appointed persons. The events which comprise them were generally recorded while the matter was fresh in the memory, and by persons who lived in the period to which they refer. Cll. XII. § 5. THIS HISTORY VERY ANCIENT. 89 § 3. The Compilers. The work of collecting and revising has been attributed to Nehemiah and Ezra. As regards the .authority of. these books, it ought to be suffi- cient for us to know that, in their present form, they have been attested by Christ and his apostles. While the twelve tribes were united under one govern- ment their history was one in point of view; but when a separation took place, as it did at the close of the reign of Solomon, under the designation of "Judah and Israel," then the kingdom of Judah, from which the Messiah was to descend, was the chief object of attention with the sacred historians. They treated of the events which trans- pired in Israel when especially connected with what con- cerned Judah. § 4. Genuineness of this History. These writings, like all other parts of the Scriptures, have every mark of genuine and unaffected truth. Many incidents are related and interwoven with accounts of other nations, yet no inconsistencies have ever been detected. "One would naturally expect to find a different state of things than is found in this history, which, alas ! is a melancholy representation of their sins and miseries; for the law made nothing perfect; that was to be done by the bringing in of a better hope. And yet if we compare the history of the Christian church with its constitution, we shall find the same cause to wonder, so many have been its errors and corruptions; for neither does the gospel make anything perfect in this world, but as still in the expecta- tion of a better hope in the future state." — Henry. § 5. This History Tery Ancient. The history in which we are entering commenced at least 1000 years before Herodotus (B. C. 445), who is called the father of profane history. Says Henry: " It is ancient history, far more ancient than was ever pretended to come from any other hand. Homer, the most ancient genuine heathen 90 JOSHUA. writer, who lived in the beginning of the Olympiads, near the time of the founding of the city of Rome by Romulus (753 B. C), was about the time of the reign of Hezekiah, king of Judah." We now proceed to notice these executive historical books, in the order which we find them placed in our Bible. § 6. Joshua. {See Chronology, Ch. XXIV: § 6.) Supposed to have been written by Joshua in Canaan, B. C. 1426. GOLDEN TOPIC, f * CO JS QUEST." This book records the "Conquest" of Canaan by Joshua. It is not certain whether this book received its name from Joshua as the author or as the hero of it. It is reasonable to believe that Joshua would keep minutes of events in which he was so much interested. Dr. Clark observes: "The book of Joshua is one of the most important writ- ings of the Old Covenant, and should never be separated from the Pentateuch, of which it is at once both continu- ation and completion. Between this book and the five books of Moses there is the same analogy as between the four G-ospels and the Acts of the Apostles." § 7. The Church Established in Canaan. The Pentateuch contains a history of the great Jetvish legislator (Moses), and the laws on which the Jewish church should be established. The book of Joshua gives an account of the establishment of that church in the land of Canaan. The four gospels give an account of the transactions of Christ, the great Christian legislator, and of those laws on which his church should be established and by which it should be governed. The Acts of the Apostles give an account of the actual establishment of that church, accord- ing to the predictions and promises of its great founder. § 8. Government Theocratic. The Hebrew govern- ment, as established by Joshua, was a Theocracy: that is. Gil. Xll: § 9. D0CTE1XE OF THE EL'TURE STATE. 91 God himself was the Supreme G-oyernor of the nation. So Christ is to be the Supreme Governor of his church under the gospel dispensation. The Hebrew government, though divine, appears to have been founded in covenant between God and Israel as regards their rewards and punishments. These were all temporal, and necessarily so, as nations have no existence in a future state. This does not prove, however, that they had no knowledge of a future life, the revelation of which is progressive. § 9. Doctrine of the Future State. -The doctrine of the future state among the Hebrews (as the progress of truth generally is) was like the rising of the sun, which ' shineth more and more unto the perfect day. ' It is im- possible to account for the faith and piety of the early patriarchs on the supposition that they had no knowledge of the future state. Could Abel or Noah walk with God, as they are repre- sented to have done, under the impression that the moment of death should separate them from him forever? Could Abraham, Isaac and Jacob die in the faith, as the author of the epistle to the Hebrews, in chap, xi, informs us they did, without any assurance of a hereafter? Could Moses 4 esteem the reproach of Christ greater riches than air the treasures of Egypt,' because 'he had respect to the recom- pense of reward,' when his whole life was a series of afflictions, when he was not even suffered to set his foot within the promised land, had he not looked for a better country, even a heavenly? Indeed, the apostle has fully decided the question by telling us that God hath 'prepared them a city. ' What city was prepared for these venerable patriarchs except that New Jerusalem, to which we all aspire? Kev. iv: l-4."—Mcholls. See Job, xix: 26; Ps. xlix: 15; Isa. xxvi: 19; Dan. xii: 2. ■ 92 JUDGES. § 10. General Divisions of Joshua. The book seems to divide itself into four parts, which comprehend the histor}' of thirty years. I. Chap. i. God's confirmation of Joshua. II. Chap, ii-xii. Account of the conquest of the land of Canaan. III. Chap, xii-xxii. Division of the land to the tribes. IV. Chap, xxiii-xxiv. Joshua's last address, death and burial. § 11. Prophecy Fulfilled. One leading idea of the book seems to be God's fulfillment of the promises to Abraham, Isaac and Jacob, that they should possess the promised land. "The name of Joshua is the same as Jesus, a Savior. Canaan is a type of heaven. The triumphs'through faith of the Israelites under Joshua may be considered as typical of the final triumph of the church and of every true Chris- tian through Jesus, the captain of our salvation; while the destruction of the Canaanites is an emblem of that which awaits the world of the ungodly at the judgment of the great day." — Nicholls. CHAPTER XIII. JUDGES. § 1. Judges. (See Chronology, Chap. XXIV: § 6.) Supposed to have been written by the high priests. GOLDEN TOPIC, "GOVERNMENT." This history begins with the death of Joshua and reaches to that of Samson, and treats of the establishment of '^Government." See Acts, xiii: 20. Ch. XIII: § 4. NAMES OF THE JUDGES. 93 After the death of Joshua, the Israelites were governed by magistrates who ruled under the general designation of judges; and the book which contains the history of these rulers is called The Book of Judges. There were fourteen of these persons whom God raised up, not in regular suc- cession, but from time to time, to govern Israel intermediate between Joshua and the kings. In reading this book, it should be borne in mind that these men sometimes acted under divine direction in exe- cuting judgment; for if this be lost sight of it will be impossible to approve of their conduct on some occasions. Some of them were called of God, iii : 9, and others elected by the people, xi: 5-6. § 2^ Province of the Judges. The term judge was originally applied to those whom Moses, by the advice of his father-in-law, appointed to assist him in hearing and redressing the complaints of the people. The judges here mentioned were not only magistrates, but some of them were prophets and military chiefs and avengers of the people. § 3. - The Writers. The writers of Judges are un- known; but it is generally supposed to have been the high priests. § 4. Names of the* Judges. Strictly speaking, Moses may be reckoned as Israel's first judge, and Joshua, his successor, the next, of whom we have account in previous books ; but Moses was also lawgiver and prophet, and Joshua's mission was the conquest and settlement of the country. We have, then, 1, Qthniel, who was raised up to deliver Israel from the hands of Chushan; 2, Ehud, who delivered them from the Moabites ; 3, Shamgar ; 4, Deborah ; 5, Gideon, who conquered the Midianites ; 6, Abimelech; 7, Tola; 8, Jair; 9, Jephtha, who made a rash vow; 10, Ibzan; 11, Elon; 12, Abdon: .13, Samson : 04 JUDGES. 14, Eli, who was also high priest. Samuel was both judge and prophet; but is reckoned as prophet, and was the first in the continued succession of prophets that ended in Malachi. Acts, iii: 24. § 5. Chronology of the Book. The first sixteen chapters seem to follow nearly in chronological order the course of events from the death of Joshua to the death of Samson, a period of more than three hundred years; but the last fiye chapters contain distressing incidents, which form a sort of appendix to the former part of the history. § 6. General Survey of Judges. The teaching of the book is clearly reflected when viewed in its threefold aspect, viz: I. The condition of the Israelites between the death . of Joshua and Othniel. II. The league with the Canaanites. III. The result of the league. . The leagues of the Israelites with the Canaanites resulted in that people becoming thorns in their sides, and subject- ing them to many grievous oppressions. § 7. Outline of Judges. " The last part of the book is removed from its proper place, the chapters having been carried forward in order, probably, 'that the thread of the narrative might not be interrupted. In the following analysis they are inserted in the order of history: I. Chap, i-ii: 10. Interim after the death of Joshua, (28 years). II. Chap, xvii, xviii. Introduction of idolatry among the tribes. III. Chap, xix, xxi. History of the Levite and the war among the tribes. IV. Chap, ii: 11; iii: 7. The intermixture of the Israel- ites with the Canaanites. Ch. XIII: §8. A LINK IN HISTORY. 95 V. Chap, iii: 8; iv. Servitude and deliverance of the Israelites. VI. Chap. v. Triumphant song of Deborah and Barak. VII. Chap, vi-viii. Subjugation of the Israelites by Midian, and their deliverance by Gideon. VIII. Chap. ix. Usurpation and death of Abimelech. IX. Chap, x: 1-6. Administration of Tolah and Jair. ,X. Chap, x: 7; xii: 7. Oppression by the Philistines and Ammonites, and their deliverance by Jephtha. XI. Chap, xii: 8-15. Administration of Ibzan, Elon and Abdon. XII. Chap, xiii-xvi. Oppression by the Philistines ' and deliverence by Samson." — Carpenter's Guide. § 8. A Link in History. "The book of Judges forms an important link in the history of the Israelites. It furnishes us with a lively description of a fluctuating and unsettled nation; a striking picture of the disasters and dan- gers which prevailed without magistracy; ' when the high- ways were unoccupied, and the travelers walked 'through byways;' when a few prophets were appointed to control the people, and ' every one did that which was right in his own eyes. ' It exhibits the contests of true religion with super- stition; and displays the beneficial effects which flow from the former, and the miseries of impiety. It is a remarka- ble history of the long suffering of God toward the Israelites, in which we see the most signal instances of his justice and mercy alternately displayed. The people sinned and were punished; they repented and found mercy. These things were written for our warning; none should presume, for God is just; none need despair, for God is merciful. " — Home, 96 RUTH. CHAPTER XIV. ETJTH. § 1. Ruth. {See Chronology, Chapter XXIV: § 6). Supposed to have been written by Samuel, B. C. 1063. GOLDEN TOPIC "ORIGIN OF DAVID'S FAMILY." This book may be considered a historical appendix to the book of Judges, which precedes it; and an introduction to the two volumes of Samuel which follow it, as their chief subject is David. The book of Ruth contains the " Origin of David's Family," and also- his descent from Judah; or the origin of a line of kings, as given by Matthew. The author is unknown, but probably was Samuel; and the time is supposed to have been when Gideon was called to the office of judge. Then Israel was grievously oppress- ed by the Midianites, who invaded the land, stripped them of their corn, and created an artificial famine; the only famine mentioned during the administration- of the judges. See Judges vi : 4-6. § 2. The Flight into Moab. The narrative may be abridged in a few words: Elimelech, an inhabitant of Bethlehem, accompanied by his wife and two sons, was driven by famine from the land of Israel to sojourn in the land of Moab, where, he died. His two sons marry Moabit- ish women, Ruth and Orpah. In the course of ten years both of the young men die; and Naomi, accompanied by one of her daughters-in-law, returns to Judea, where peace and plenty were restored. § 3. The Return to Judea. On their way Naomi persuades Ruth and Orpah to go back to their relatives in Moab, to which the latter reluctantly consents; but Ruth positively refuses to Leave her mother-in-law. At length, Ch. XIV § 4. DESIGN OF THE BOOK. 07 through the leadings of Providence, Ruth becomes known to Boaz, a rich land owner of the tribe of Ephraim, who was related to Elinielech, her deceased father-in-law. To him she is shortly married, and becomes the mother of Obed; "and Obed begat Jesse, and Jesse begat David." Ch. iv: 22, See also Matt. ch. i. § 4. Design of the Book. " The design of Ruth is to lead us, 1 — Into the true doctrine of Providence; it shows how conversant God is about our private concerns, and teaches us ' in all our ways to acknowledge God. ' 2. — To lead us to Christ, who descended from Ruth. 3. — In the conversion of Ruth, the Moabitess, we have also a type of the calling of the Gentiles into the fellowship of the Messiah. " — Henry. Henry further says: "There is scarcely a chapter in all the sacred history, that stoops so low as this, to take cog- nizance of so humble a person as Ruth, a poor Moabitish widow; so humble in action as her gleaning corn, in a neigh- bor's field, and the minute circumstances thereof. But all this was in order to her being grafted into the line of Christ, and taken in among his ancestors, that she might be a figure of the espousals of the Gentile church to Christ. Is. liv: 1. § 5. Boaz Mighty in the Law. Of the rich Boaz the Chaldee reads, mighty in the luiv. If he was both it was a most rare and excellent conjunction; to be mighty in wealth, and mighty in the Scriptures too, is to be mighty indeed. He was the grandson of Nashan, prince of Judah in the wilderness, and son of Salmon, probably a younger son, by Rahab, the harlot of Jericho." § 6. A Comforting Reflection. This little history teaches us that good people, like Naomi, may be very much afflicted for a time, yet God will be their comfort. Ruth's sacrifice of family and friends for God, and her subsequent prosperity and honor, teach God's special care over those who trust in him. 98 I SAMUEL. CHAPTER XV. I SAMUEL. § 1. Samuel : Yolume I. (See Chronology, Chap. XXIV : § 6.) The first twenty-five chapters are supposed to have been written by Samuel, and the remainder by Nathan and. Gad. GOLDEX TOPIC, "ISRAEL'S AND JUDAITS KINGS." The two books of Samuel are also called the First and Second Books of the Kings, or first and second volumes of the four books which contain the history of "Israel's and Judah's Kings." The first two volumes bring out the complete establishment of the kingdom; while in the fol- lowing books is found, in connection with the history of the kings, that which may be particularly attributed to God, or God's dealings with men. This first volume contains the account of the change of government from judges to kings, and includes a period of 80 years, from the birth of Samuel, the last of the judges, to the death of Saul, who was the first of the kings. § 2. The Writers. This book derives its name from the prophet Samuel, by whom at least the fore part, as far as the twenty-fifth chapter, was probably written. The last part, with the book following, is ascribed to Nathan and Gad (see 1 Chron. xxix: 29). As to this there is no difference of opinion. § 3. A Word to the Reader. There is so much of interest in this book that it is difficult to make an outline; for we know not where to begin or end. We will only present a few topics; not that these topics are of greater interest than others, but the leading ones. A careful Oh. XV: § 5. OUTLINE OF I SAMUEL. 99 reading of this book will be of. profit, as in this and the following book are many exhibitions of the attributes of God in his dealings with men. § 4. General Divisions of 1 Samuel. The book seems to divide itself into three general heads or divisions: I. Chap, i-viii. An account of Eli's fall, and Samuel's rise and good government. II. Chap, ix-xv. Samuel's resignation, and Saul's advance- ment and wicked reign. III. Chap, xvi-xxxi. The choice of David as king; his struggle with Saul; Saul's downfall, and David's as-* cendancy to the throne. § 5. Outline of 1 Samuel. I. Chap. i. Contains an account of the birth of Samuel. II. Chap, ii: 1-10. The song of Hannah. III. Chap, ii: 11-36. The mal-administration of Eli's sons. IV. Chap. iii. The call of Samuel, and the denunciation against Eli's house. V. Chap. iv. The capture of the ark, and the death of Eli. VI. Chap. v-vi. The chastisement of the Philistines, and the restoration of the ark. VII. Chap. vii. The people repent, renounce their idols, and defeat the Philistines. VIII. Chap, viii-ix. The people ask and obtain a king. IX. Chap. xii. Samuel protests his integrity to the assem- bled people, and exhorts them to obedience. X. Chap, xiii-xiv. Sanies wars with the Philistines. XI. Chap, xv.- His war with the Amalekites, and his rejection from the throne. XII. Chap. xvi. The anointing of David, and his intro- duction to Saul. XIII. Chap, xvii : 1-54. David's victory over Goliath. XIV. Chap, xvii: 54-xxvii. Saul persecutes David. 100 I SAMUEL. XV. Chap, xxviii. Saul consults the witch of Endor. X\ 7 L Chap, xxix-xxxi. Saul's defeat ; his death and burial. § 6. Eulogy on Samuel. We should neTer lose sight of Samuel as a most admirable character. Observe his piety, his obedience to Eli, and his' strict regard for the truth. He is earnest and persevering as a minister, lead- ing men to repentance. As a judge he feared God, was unselfish, and always sought the good of others. Those who gather a knowledge of his life will observe that ' ' He lived to the noblest of purposes — the glory of God and the good of his country. He died full of years and of honor, and was universally lamented. " — Stackhouse. § 7. Samuel as a Prophet. ''Samuel was the most famous prophet after Moses, distinguished like him for his frequent intercessions, and the first of that succession of prophets, the great subject of whose predictions was Christ. Luke, i: 32. The book discloses a grand display of Christ, who is (1 Sam. ii: 10) here for the first time in Scripture spoken of as the Messiah, or Anointed, and also as a king- before that office was established among the Israelites. 'Who does not see,' says St. Austin, 'that the spirit of Hannah prophesied of the Christian religion, the city of God, whose king and founder is Christ. This is indeed the chief import of the hymn. ' Compare Hannah's song with that of Mary, Luke, i: 46-55." — Nichotts. In conclusion, let us bear in mind that the first king of Israel was not left without a prophet of God, with whom he could advise; and more, he could not say he was not advised. And so it was with nearly all the subsequent kings. For instance. Samuel was prophet to Saul, Nathan to David, Elijah to Ahab, etc. Gil. XVI: § 2. DAVID AX J) THE BOOK OF PSALMS. 101 CHAPTER XVI. II SAMUEL. § 1. Samuel : Volume II. (See Chronology, Chap. XXIV: § 6.) Written by Nathan, B. C. 1030. GOLDEN TOPIC, " ISBAEl's AXI) Jt'DAH'S KINGS. " This book derives its name from the prophet Samuel; it was written by Nathan. It bears an exact resemblance to the preceding history, and is likewise connected with the history which follows it — I and II Kings. It comprises a period of 38 years of David's reign. It is very important that the reader should acquaint himself well with the history of this king, in order that he may have a better understanding of other portions of Scripture, particularly the Psalms. § 2. David and the Book of Psalms. He wrote many of them when meditating on the various circum- stances of his life. For instance, in recounting the many mercies and blessings of God, his heart was filled with love and gratitude, and inspired to pen the 103d Psalm, where he says: " Bless the Lord, my soul!" At other times, when* thinking of his sinfulness in the sight of a just Grod, his heart humbled and penitent, he is made to cry out in the language of the 51st Psalm: "Have mercy upon me, God, according to thy loving kindness." And at other times still he is meditating on his early pastoral life of a shepherd boy, and the many dangers attending it; possibly thinking of the time when, in defense of the flock, he is obliged to beard the lion, which he slays, and thus brings security to the innocent sheep ; it was probably when reflecting upon these things that his heart goes out in 102 U SAMUEL. exultant praise to God, and he exclaims, in the language of the '23d Psalm: "The Lord is my shepherd, I shall not want." It is hoped the student will not fail to read these Psalms in this connection. § 3. General Divisions of 2 Samuel. This Second Book of Samuel, in its more general character, divides itself into two general heads. I. David establishing himself at Jerusalem as the seat of government. II. The subduing of the Philistines, Moabites, Ammon- ites, Edomites, Amalekites, and the Assyrians; extending his kingdom to the utmost bounds of the land, which had never before been possessed by them; thus fulfilling the promise made to Abraham. Gen. xii: 2. § 4. Outline of II Samuel. I. Chap. i. Contains David's^lamentations over Saul and Jonathan. II. Chap. ii-v. His subjugation of the house of Saul, and his own confirmation in the kingdom. Verse 8 to end: His victories over the Jebusites and Philistines. III. Chap, vi-viii. He fetches the ark from Kirjath- jearim, and purposes to build the temple, but is not permitted. IV. Chap, viii-x. His victory over the Philistines, Moab- ites and Ammonites. V. Chap, xi-xii: 25. His sin with Bathsheba, and the birth of Solomon. Verse 26 (ch. xii) to end: He takes Kabbah. VI. Chap, xiii-xviii. His domestic troubles, and flight from Jerusalem. VII. Chap, xix-xx. His return to the capital, and quel- ling of the insurrection. VIII. Chap xxi. The punishment of the sons of Saul, and war with the Philistines. Ch. XVI: § 5. SUPPLEMENT TO LI SAMUEL. 103 IX. Chap, xxii-xxiii: T. David's psalm of thanksgiving and last words. Verse 8 to end: Catalogue of his mighty men. X. Chap. xxiv. His offence of numbering the people, his penitence and sacrifice. £ 5. Supplement to II Samuel. {See Chronology, Chap. XXIY: $ 6.) This book is incomplete, and re- quires 1 Chron., chap, xxii-xxix. to supplement it. These chapters bring out incidents connected with making ar- rangements for building the temple, which are not found elsewhere. The reader will readily see the connection. Chap. xxii. Preparations for building the temple. Chap, xxiii-xxvii. Order of service, i officers and divisions. Chap, xxviii. David presents the plan. Chap. xxix. Gifts for the temple : David's prayer of thanksgiving. By noting the dates, as found in all reference Bibles, it will be seen that these chapters fill up an interim in the history chronologically. They form a complete historical chain, and fill up the space between the books of Samuel and the books which follow. § 6. Importance of this History. "The books of Samuel connect the eham of sacred history, by describing the circumstances of a very interesting period. They describe the Jewish church a.> established by David, and point out his typical relation to Christ, and are considered as a key to the Psalms." — Bagster. Thus we conclude the second volume of these very inter- esting historic books: as they have a close connection with what follows in Bible history. 104 I KINGS. CHAPTER XVII. I KINGS. § 1. History of the Kings : Volume I. {See Chron- ology, Chap. XXIV : § 6.) Written by the high priests. golden topic, "god's attributes.'' See Index. The two books of Samuel are sometimes called the first and second books of the kings; while the two which bear the name of kings would be the third and fourth, or a continuation of the same history. The authors of these last named books cannot be ascer- tained with certainty; but they were doubtless, like the former, compiled from the authentic records kept by the scribes and recorders, who were contemporary with the eyents; 2 Sam. yiii: 1?; 2 Kings, xviii: 18. It is generally supposed that Nathan was the compiler, and are univer- sally accepted as a correct account of persons, incidents and places referred to. This first book embraces a period of 126 years, referring first to David's old age and the anointing of Solomon, Ins son, as king of Israel, and extending to the death of Jehoshaphat, king of Judah. § 2. General Divisions. This book may be divided into two general heads: I. The long and successful reign of Solomon, as found m the first eleven chapters. II. In the remaining eleven chapters an account of the division of the kingdom; the tribes of Judah and Benjamin forming the kingdom of Judah, under the reign of Reho- boam, son of Solomon; and the remaining ten tribes under Jeroboam, son of Nebat, retaining the old name of Israel. Ch. XVII: § 3. outline, i kixgs, part i. 106 § 3. Outline : I Kings, Part I. The following is an outline, the design of which is particularly to bring out the two general divisions: first, the reign of Solomon; and secondly, the reign of the kings after the revolt; and more especially the names, designating those who reigned over Judah from those who reigned over Israel, and the partic- ular prophet sent to these several kings. Chap. i-ii. David's old age; Solomon declared king; David's charge to Solomon; his death. Chap, iii-iv. Solomon's choice of wisdom, and his pros- perity. Chap. v. Solomon's contract with Hiram for material to build the Temple. Chap. vi. Building of the Temple. Chap. vii. Ornaments and vessels of the Temple finished^ Chap. viii. Dedication of the Temple. Chap. ix. God's covenant with Solomon. Chap. x. Queen of Sheba visits Solomon. Chap. xi. Idolatry of Solomon, the result, and his death. § 4. The Reign of Solomon. The most distin- guished feature in the reign of Solomon was the building and dedication of the temple, and God's taking possession of it. Says Bishop Home: "Let us imagine to ourselves a building where scarce anything appeared less valuable than silver and gold; a building of which God himself condescended to be the Architect, and had therefore in the design and execution all the perfection that Infinite Wisdom could give it. Before this building, let us think we see the nation of the Israelites assembled, encircling their king seated upon an exalted throne of burnished brass, with all the ensigns of majesty and royalty ; whilst, amid the harmony of different kinds of instruments, with the voices of the 106 I KINGS. whole people joining in a grand chorus of praise and thanksgiving, the glory of Jehovah, or a body of light above the brightness of the sun, descends from heaven and fills the temple. The imagination can hardly reach this grand picture. This is the scene described by the sacred writer in 2 Chron. v: 11-14." Let us not think that He is less present with us than He was with Israel. Is the Christian church less favored than the Jewish church was? Have we lost anything by the incarnation of the Son of God? Surely not. For He (the Son) hath declared: " Where two or three are gathered together in my name, there am I in the midst." Matt, xviii: 20. " Seeing then that we have a great high priest that is passed into the heavens, Jesus, the Son of God, let us come boldly unto the throne of grace, having boldness to enter into the holiest by his blood." Heb. iv: 14; x: 19. AlsoEph. ii: 21, 22. The fall of Solomon should teach us that the very highest endowments possessed by man are not sufficient to preserve one from falling into the gravest sin and folly, and that the way of the transgressor is always hard. § 5. Outline: I Kings, Part II. Chap. xii. Rehoboam succeeds Solomon; the rebellion; the kingdom divided. Judah and Benjamin form the kingdom of Judah; the remaining ten tribes form the kingdom of Israel, under Jeroboam, son of Nebat, made king at Shechem. JUDAH. Ch. xiii. Rehoboam, king 17 years. He refuses to grant the people's request; the re- bellion follows. Prophet, Shemaiah. ISRAEL. Ch. xiii. Jeroboam, king 22 years. His hand is with- ered; the disobedient prophet slain. Prophet, Ahijah. Oil. XVII: §5. OUTLIKE, I KINGS, PART II. 107 JUDAH. Ch. xiv. Shishak, king of Egypt, carries away the treas- ures. Abu am, son of Rehoboam, king 3 years. Ch. xv. Asa, king 41 years. His good reign. Ch. xvi. 26th year of Asa. 31st year of Asa. 38th year of Asa. ISRAEL. Ch. xiv. The king's son is sick; he sends his wife to the prophet Ahijah. Nadab, son of Jeroboam, king 2 years. Ch. xv. Baasha, king 24 years. His wicked reign. Prophet, Jehu. Ch. xvi. Elah, son of Baasha, king 2 years. Zimri, king 7 days. Omri, king 12 years, 6 in Tirzah and 6 in Samaria. Ahab, son of Omri, king 22 years; takes Jezebel to wife. Ch. xvii. Elijah the proph- et; his prophecy of drouth; fed by the ravens and the poor widow; raises the widow's son to life. Ch. xviii. Elijah meets, with Ahab; Elijah's sacrifice; priests of Baal slain; the prophet obtains rain. | Ch. xix. Elijah flees ; is miraculously fed; goes to Horeb, where he hears a still small voice; returns to Israel; anoints Jehu king of Israel; and calls Elisha the prophet, who follows him. | Ch. xx. Samaria besieged by Benhadad, king of Syria, but is defeated by Ahab, who was reproved by a prophet. Ch. xxi. Jezebel's scheme to destroy Naboth; Elijah prophecies the death of Ahab and Jezebel. 108 ii kings. JUDAH. Ch. xxii. Jehoshaphat, king 25 years; his alliance with Ahab against the Syri- ans; he refuses an alliance with Ahaziah. Jehoram reigns 8 years. ISRAEL. Ch. xxii. Death of Ahab. Ahaziah, his son, king 2 years. He did evil in the sight of the Lord, and walk- ed in the way of his father. § 6. Remarks on the Kings. The characters of the kings of Judah referred to may be thus briefly given: David, the devout; Solomon, the wise. After the revolt: Rehoboam, the simple; Abijah, the valiant; Asa, the upright; and Jehoshaphat, the religious. The reigns of these kings were long, when compared with the wicked kings of Israel. The number of the good was nearly equal to that of the bad; but the reigns of the good were generally long, and the bad short. Chap, xvi: 15. We now pass to the second volume of the history of the kings. CHAPTER XVIII. II KINGS. § 1. History of the Kings: Tolunie II. (8& Chronology, Chap. XXIV: § 6.) Written by the high priests. GOLDEN TOPIC, "GOD'S ATTRIBUTES." This book is a continuation of the preceding, and con- tains the contemporary history of the kingdoms of Israel and Judah during a period of 308 years, from the time of Ch. XVIII: § I. OUTLINE OF II KINGS. 109 Elijah to the destruction of Jerusalem. The following is an outline of the history of the kings of Judah and Israel up to the fifteenth chapter. (a.) Outline of II Kings, Chapters I-XIV : JUDAH. Ch. i. Jehoshaphat reigns. ISRAEL. Ch. i. Ahaziah reigns ; harmed by a fall, sends for Elijah, who prophecies his death; two companies sent to Elijah destroyed, while the the third is saved; Ahaziah's death. Jehoram king 12 years. | Ch. ii. Elisha follows Eli- jah to Bethel, Jericho, and passes oyer Jordan on dry ground; the horses and chariot of fire take Elijah up into heaven; Elisha's return through the Jordan to Jericho; he heals the waters of Jericho ; bears destroy the children that mock him. Ch. iii. Jehoram, with the help of the kings of Judah and Edom, smites Moab, by prophecy of Elisha. Ch. iv. Elisha multiplies the widow's oil; raises the Shunammite's son; heals the pottage. Ch. y. Naaman, by the re- port of a captive Hebrew maid, goes to Samaria and is healed by Elisha; the prophet's servant, Gehazi, tells a lie and is smitten with leprosy. Ch. vi. Iron made to swim by Elisha; he discloses to the king of Israel the secret counsel of the king of Syria; the Syrian army smitten with blindness, led to Samaria, fed- and returned to their master; siege of Samaria and famine. Ch. vii. Elisha prophecies plenty in Samaria; flight of the Syrians. 110 II KINGS. JUDAH. Ch. viii. Jehoram's wick- ed reign; Edom's reyolt. Ahaziah, son of Jehoram, reigns one year; joins Israel against Hazael, king of Syria. Oh. ix. Ahaziah joins Je- horam against Jehu; flees when Jehoram is slain, and dies in Megiddo. ISRAEL. Ch. viii. The Shunam- mite's land restored; Elisha prophecies the death of Ben- hadad, king of Syria; Hazael reigns in his stead; Jehoram wounded. Ch. ix. A young prophet anoints Jehu king of Ra- moth-Gilead, who reigns 28 years; he kills Jehoram in the field of Naboth; Jezebel, wife of Ahab, is thrown from a window, killed, and eaten by dogs, as Elijah prophecied. Ch. x. The seventy sons of Ahab slain by command of Jehu; also forty-two of the brethren of Ahaziah, king of Israel; he destroys the house and worshippers of Baal; he follows in the sins of his predecessors; Hazael smites the coasts of Israel; Jehu dies; his son Jehoahaz reigns in his stead. Ch. xi. Athaliah, queen of Judah six years; she de- stroys all the royal seed except Jehoash (or Joash), who was saved by his aunt, Jehosheba ; by arrangement of Jehoiada, the priest, Jehoash is crowned at the age of 7, and reigns 40 years; Athaliah is slain. Ch. xii. Jehoash reigns well all the days of Jehoiada, the priest; he orders the temple repaired; diverts Hazael, king of Syria, from Jerusalem, by giving him the gold, silver and treasures belonging to the temple; he is then slain by his own servants. Amaziah reigns in his stead. Ch. xiii. Jehoahaz, son of Jehu, king of Israel; a wicked reign of 17 years; he dies; Oh. XVI11 § 2. PROPHECY OF JONAH. Ill JUDAH. ISRAEL. is succeeded by his son Jehoash (Joash ver. 14), 16 years. The seat of government is still at Samaria. Elisha proph- ecies Israel's victories over Syria; he is taken sick and dies; Israel invaded by the Moabites; Jehoash recaptures the cities taken by the Syrians. Oh. xiv. Amaziah, son of Joash, reigns 29 years; he sends messengers to Jehoash, king of Israel; war was the result; he is slain by a con- spiracy. There was no king for eleven years. Azariah (also called Uz- ziah), son of Amaziah, king 52 years, Ch. xiv. Jehoash defeats the king of Judah; Jerusa- lem is destroyed, and her gold, silver, treasure and ves- sels of the temple carried to Samaria. Jeroboam II, king 41 years. Jonah prophecies concern- ing the coasts of Israel; the fulfillment. Zechariah king, son of Jeroboam. Outline continued, see § 5. § 2. Prophecy of Jonah. (See Diagram, Chapter 13.) golden topic, "to nineveh." See Index. Jonah was the son of Amittai, a native of Geth-hepher, in G-alilee. He is said to have prophesied concerning Jeroboam II, that he should restore the coasts of Israel; which prophecy, not now extant, was perhaps delivered in the reign of Jehoash, the father of Jeroboam II. It is difficult to decide whether his prophecy concerning Nineveh was delivered before or after the prophecy referred to; but it does decide the question of placing him at this place in the history we are now pursuing. (a.) First Mention of Him. The first mention we have of Jonah is in 2 Kings, xiv: 25. He is considered the most ancient of all the prophets whose writings have been XXIII: 112 HOSEA. handed down to us. He appears as a prophet to the Gentiles, being sent to Nineveh, which soon after this became the capital of the great Assyrian Empire, a city equally distinguished for its magnificence and corruption. Nineveh at this time is supposed to have been much larger than Babylon, and the chief gentile city of the world. Assyria is frequently mentioned in the 15th and following chapters of 2 Kings. It is necessary that the reader should first read this prophecy as an episode in the history, ena- bling him better to understand what follows. (b. ) His Prophecy. Jonah's prophecy is a simple narra- tive, containing nothing poetical except his thanksgiving ode in the second chapter, which is most beautiful and sublime. He preaches to a people having 600,000 young children who know not their right hand from their left. It is supposed that Jonah was the writer of this book. (c. ) Outline. Chap. i. Jonah sent to Nineveh ; flees to Tarshish ; being overtaken by a storm, he is thrown into the sea, and swallowed by a fish. Chap. ii. For his prayer he is delivered out of the belly of the fish. Chap. iii. Jonah sent again; preaches to the Ninevites; the)' repent. Chap. iv. Jonah repines at God's mercy; he is reproved by the type of a gourd. (d.) Type of Christ. The prophet was swallowed up by a great fish; our Savior was admitted into the jaws of death, and for the same length of time. In this instance he is a sign of Christ. See Matt, xii: 39, 40. § 3. Prophecy of Hosea. (See Diagram, Chapter XX III: §13.) GOLDEN TOPIC, ''AGAINST ISRAEL." Of Hosea's parentage we have no certain information, except that he was the son of Beeri. He prophesied Ch. XVIII: § 3. PKOPHECY OF HOSEA. 113 during the reigns of Uzziah, Jotham, Ahaz, and in the third year of Hezekiah, kings of Judah; and during the reign of Jeroboam II, king of Israel. He was no doubt an Israelite who lived in Samaria, 'or within the borders of the ten tribes, as his predictions are chiefly against them. Huetius observes that "Many passages- in Jeremiah and Ezekiel seem to refer to, and to be borrowed from, Hosea, who wrote a good while before them. As Jer. vii: 34; xvi: 9; xxv: 10: and Ez. xxvi: 13, speak the same with Hosea, ii: 11. So Ez. xvi: 16, etc., is taken from Hosea, ii: 8. Thus one prophet confirms another." He is supposed to have prophesied during a term of 80 or 90 years. (a.) Particular Prophecies. Among other prophecies, Hosea foretells: 1. The captivity and dispersion of Israel. Chap, v: 7; ix: 3, 6-11: x: 5. 6: xiii: 16. 2. The deliverance of Judah from Sennacherib. Chap. i: 7. See 2 Kings, xix: 35. 3. The present destitute condition of the Jews is por- trayed. Chap, iii: 4. 1. The restoration, and union with the Gentiles in the kingdom of Christ. Chap, i: 10, 11; iii: 5. See Rom. ix: 24-26. 5. The call of the Savior out of Egypt. Chap, xi: 1. See Matt, ii: 15. 6. His resurrection on the third day. Chap, vi: 2. See Matt, xxviii: 6. T. The assurance of the resurrection from the power of death and the grave. Chap, xiii: 14. See 1 Cor. xv: 35. Prophecies are referred to by our Lord (Matt, ix: 12, 13; xii: 7): by Matthew (ii: 15; compare Hosea, xi: 1); and by Paul ( Rom. ix: 25, 26; 1 Cor. xv: 4; compare Hos. vi: 6). 114 HOSE A. (b.) Divided into Discourses. "The prophecy contains fourteen chapters, and may be divided into five discourses, not including the title (ch. i: 1), viz: DISCOURSE I. I. Chap, i: 2-11. Under the figure of the supposed infi- delity of the prophet's wife is represented the spiritual infidelity of the Israelites, a remnant of whom, it is promised, shall be saved. II. Chap, ii: 1-11. They are exhorted to forsake idolatry. III. Chap, ii: 11-23, and iii. Promises are then intro- duced, on the general conversion of the twelve tribes to Christianity, and the purposes of God toward the ten tribes, under the figure of the })rophet taking back his wife on her repentance. DISCOURSE II. Chap, iv-vi: 1-3. A reproof of the cruelty and idolatry of Israel, against which the inhabitants of Judah are exhorted to take warning; interspersed with promise of pardon. DISCOURSE III. I. From chap, vi: 4, to vii: 10. The prophet's exhortation to repentance proving ineffectual, God complains by him of their obstinancy. II. Chap, vii: 11-16, and viii. Israel will be carried into captivity into Assyria by Sennacherib, notwithstand- ing their reliance on Egypt. DISCOURSE IV. I. Chap, ix, x. The captivity and dispersion of Israel. II. Chap. xi. Israel further reproved for idolatry, yet they shall not be utterly destroyed; and their return to their own country is foretold. III. Chap, xii, xiii: 1-8. Renewed denunciations arc made on account of their idolatry. Ch. XVIII: § 4. prophecy of amos. 115 DISCOURSE V. I. Chap, xiii: 9-16. After further denunciations of pun- ishment, he intermixes promises of restoration from captivity. II. Chap, xiv: 1-3. The prophet further exhorts Israel to repentance, and furnishes them with a beautiful form of prayer adapted to their circumstances. III. Chap, xiv: 4-9. Foretells their reformation from idol- atry, together with the subsequent restoration of all the tribes, and their conversion to Christ." — Home's Introduction. § 4. Prophecy of Amos. (See Diagram, Chapter XXIII: §13.) GOLDEN TOPIC, "CAPTIVITY OF ISRAEL." This prophecy must drop in at this point for two reasons : first, it says he prophesied during the reign of Uzziah ; and second, we read of the fulfillment of a portion of this prophecy in the subsequent history, 2 Kings, xviii: 9. Amos was contemporary with the prophet Hosea. He was not educated in the schools of the prophets, founded by Samuel, but was called to the prophetic office when a herdsman and gatherer of Sycamore fruit. He lived in Tekoa, in the territory of Judah, and was sent to prophecy against : I. The surrounding nations, as follows: 1. The Syrians (ch. i: 1-5), which see fulfilled in 2 K. xvi: 9. 2. The Phillistines (i: 6-8); recorded as accomplished in 2 K. xviii: 8; Jer. xlvii: 1-5; and 2 Chron. xxvi: 6. 3. The Tyrians (i: 9, 10). 4. The Edomites (i: 11, 12, compared with Jer. xxv: 21; xxvii: 3, 6). 5. The Ammonites (i: 13-15). 6. The Moabites (ii: 1-3). 116 AMOS. II. To both Israel and Judali (from ch. ii: 4, to ix: 10). "Hear this word that the Lord hath spoken against you, children of Israel ! against the whole family which 1 brought up from the land of Egypt." Oh. iii: 1. III. Their desolation and restoration (chap, ix: 11-15; compare Acts, xv: 13-16). (a.) His Use of Imagery. As Archbishop Newcome observes: "He borrows many images from the scenes in which he is engaged; but he uses them with skill, and gives them tone and dignity by the eloquence and grandeur of his manner.'' "The same celestial Spirit/' says Lowth, "actuated Isaiah, and Daniel in the court, and Amos in the sheepfold, occasionally employing the natural eloquence of some, and at other times making them eloquent." It was Amos who said, in answer to Amaziah, the prophet of Baal, when told to flee from Bethel, "I was no prophet, neither was I a prophet's son; but was a herdsman. The Lord took me as I followed the flock." (b.) Outline. Chap. i-ii. A prophet of Judah, who prophesied against Syria, Philistia, Tyre, Edom and Amnion; God's wrath against Moab, Judah and Israel; he complains against their unthankf illness. Chap. iii. The necessity of God's judgments against Israel, and the publication of it; lie will visit the altars of Bethel. Chap. iv. Israel and Judah reproved for oppression, idol- atry and incorrigibleness. Chap. v. An exhortation to obedience and repentance ; God rejects their hypocritical service. Chap. vi. Israel's desolation. Chap. vii. God's judgments of grasshoppers and fire ; Amos, in Bethel, is admonished to flee to Judah. Chap. viii. Illustrations of the certainty of Israel's end. See chap, iii: 1. Chap. ix. Prophecy of the restoration of Israel. Ch. XVIII: § 6. PROPHECY OF JOEL. 117 § 5. Outline : II Kings, Chapter xv. {Continued from § 1, a.) JUDAH. Ch. xv. Uzziah's good reign; he dies a leper. Jotham, son of Uzziah, king; has a good reign of 16 years ; is succeeded by Ahaz, who reigned 16 years at Je- rusalem. ISRAEL. Ch. xv. Zachariah, son of Jeroboam II, reigned only 6 months; slain by Shallum, who usurped the throne and reigned 1 month; was slain by Menahem, who reigned 10 years; he was an evil king. Pekahiah, son of Menahem, reigned 2 years ; Pekah slays him and reigns 20 year,-. Tiglath-pileser, king of Assyria, takes certain cities of Israel captive to Assyria. Hoshea, the son of Elah, slew Pekah and reigned 10 years.* Outline continued, see § 9. § 6. Prophecy of Joel. (See Diagram, Chapter XXIII: § 13.) GOLDEN TOPIC, "TERRIBLE JUDGMENTS." Concerning the family, condition and pursuit of this prophet, nothing is known for a certainty. He is supposed to have delivered his prophecies soon after Hosea com- menced his ministry; and to have addressed Judah, on account of the frequent mention of Judah and Jerusalem; and is generally supposed to have lived in the reign of Uzziah; and to have predicted the overthrow of Judah by the Chaldeans, at the time when Uzziah was confiding in * Here is affixed the prophecy of Joel, which should be read in this connection. Also that portion of the prophecy of Isaiah which was uttered during the reign of Uzziah finds place here, with a preface which should be well studied, noting the several parts, I, II, III, etc. Note the number of chapters in each part. Chapters i-vi should be read in this connection. . 118 JOEL. his military power, "and his heart was lifted up to de- struction.". 2 Chron. xxvi: 16. (a.) A Sad State of Things. The prophet begins with a historical account of a most terrible devastation of the land, by the combined forces of four of the most destruc- tive insects, viz: the palmer worm, the locust, the canker worm and the caterpillar; and in connection with this a most scorching drought. Knowing the destructive feature of each of these enemies of mankind, the prophet gives us a most vivid picture of the desolation of the land, an account of which is not found elsewhere. After the pre- sentation of this terrible picture which was before their eyes (see ch. i : 16), the prophet exhorts the people to repentance, comparing the nation to men under the influ- ence of intoxicating liquor, stupid, unconscious and asleep. He says: "Awake, ye drunkards," etc.; and he exhorts them to fasting and. prayer. He calls upon them to pro- claim "a solemn assembly, gather the elders and all the inhabitants of the land into' the house of the Lord your God, and cry unto the Lord;" and in connection with this promises the favor of God to those who would be obedient. Such was the condition of the people at the time when this prophecy was uttered. (/;. ) Outline. The principal events which seem to be prefigured and predicted in this book of Joel are as follows: I. The invasion of the Assyrian hosts under Sennacherib (fulfilled 2 K. xix; also Isa. xxxvi), under the symbol of locusts, chap, i: 1-4; and the destruction of Jerusalem under Titus, chap, ii: 30. Compare Matt, xxiv: 29. II. The gospel dispensation; the outpouring of the Holy Spirit which accompanied it, chap, ii: 28-30. Compare Acts, ii: 17-21. III. The destruction of their enemies, and the glorious state of the Christian church which is to follow it ; chap. in. Ch. XVIII: § 7. PROPHECY OF ISAIAH. 119 § 7. Prophecy of Isaiah. (See Diagram, Chapter XXIII: § 13.) GOLDEN TOPIC, "EVANGELIST." Of Isaiah's personal history little is known, though he was so eminent a man, and prophesied during a period of fifty or sixty years. He was a man of contrite spirit (chap, vi: 5), and felt a deep commiseration for his own people (xxi: 3), and for the heathen (xvi: 9), thus showing that mind to be in him which was in Christ Jesus (Phil, ii: 5). Isaiah means Good news of Jehovah, hence he has been called "The Evangelist." (a.) General Analysis. The contents of this book of Isaiah may be divided into six parts: Part I. See § 8. Chap. i-v. Contains a general description and state and condition of the Jews in several periods of their history, with prophecies of the promulgation and success of the gospel, and the coming of the Messiah to judgment. These predictions were delivered during the reign of Uzziah, king of Judah. Part II. See Ch. XX: § 4. Chap, vi-xii. Comprises the predictions delivered in the reigns of Jotham and Ahaz. Part III. See Ch. XX: § 6. Chap, xiii-xxiii. Contains various predictions against the Babylonians, Assyrians, Philistines, and other nations with whom the Jews had intercourse. The prophecy in this and the two following parts was delivered during the reign of Hezekiah. Part IV. See Ch. XX: § 7. Chap, xxiv-xxxv. Contains a prophecy of the great calamities that should befall the people of God, of his 120 ISAIAH. merciful preservation of a remnant of them, and their restoration to their OAvn country; and their conversion to the gospel, and the destruction of anti-Christ. Part V. See Ch. XX: § 9. Chap, xxxvi-xxxix. Comprises the historical part of the book of Isaiah, according to 2 Chron. xxxii: 32. It relates the invasion of Sennacherib, and the destruction of his army in answer to Hezekiah's prayer; Hezekiah's sickness. his miraculous recovery, and the prolongation of his life fifteen years. Part VI. Chap, xl-lxvi. Contains a series of prophecies delivered toward the close of the reign of Hezekiah; some say during the Babylonian captivity. (See Ch. XXII: § 2.) The chief subject of them is the restoration of the church. The redemption from Babylon is employed as an image to shadow, forth redemption by Christ; Isaiah so connecting the two events as scarcely ever to treat of the former without introducing some allusion to the latter. Isaiah's writings (Part VI) contain a view of the gospel dispensation, from the birth of the Messiah to that glorious period when the kingdoms of the world shall become the kingdoms of God and of his Christ.* (b.) Prophecies of Christ. "Thus are foretold: The divine nature of Christ (ch. vii : 14; ix: 6); his human descent (xi: 1); his threefold character of prophet (xlii: 1, 6, 7; xlix: 1), priest (liii: 12), and king (ix: 6, T; xxxii: 1, 2). His coming is to be proclaimed by the Bap'tist (xl: 3, 4. with Matt, iii: 3, etc.); his appointment to preach (Ixi: 1, 2); his miracles (xxxv: 5, 6); the rejection of his per- sonal ministry (vi: 9-12, with Matt, xiii: 14; also liii: 3): his suffering for our sins (1: G; liii: 4-11); his death and burial, with remarkable circumstances attending them (liii: * See introduction of Part VI of Isaiah's prophecy, Ch. XXII: £2. Ch. XVIII: §8. PROPHECY OF ISAIAH. 121 10-12); his victory over the grave (xxv: 8; liii: 10-12); the rejection of the Jew (lxv: 2-7); the call of the G-entile world (xlix: 5-12: lxv: 1); the increase of his kingdom, (ix: 7; xi: 4-10; lix: 16, etc.). The office of the Holy Spirit is also noticed (lxiii: 10, 11, 14); while it is shown that the full manifestation of his office and influence was reserved for the times of the gospel (xxxii: 15; xxxv: 6; xliv: 8)." — Nicholls. In reading this and every other hook of the prophets, particular attention should be paid to those sins which call forth the indignation of God, that we may avoid them. We are now better prepared to enter into the more care- ful study of these writings. * § 8. Prophecy of Isaiah During the Reign of ITzziah, King of Juclah. Outline to Part I, Chap. I-V. See § 7, {a). CHAPTER I. This first chapter is intended for a sort of preface to the whole book, and was probably the first sermon or prophecy published; and Calvin thinks these predictions were affixed to the door of the temple, that all might read them. Verse 2. The children of G-od. having rebelled, become a sinful nation. 5. Their corruption and desolation; a very small remnant saved. 10. He reproves them for their whole service. 16. He exhorts to repentance with promises and threatenings. 25. Promised grace on account of the remnant. f 28. Threatened destruction of the wicked. * The reader should read frequently and become familiar with the article on Rules of Interpretation. See Ch. I: § 25. f "The calamities of Ahaz, Sennacherib's invasion, the distress which it occasioned (2 K. xviii: 13-17), its surprising event, and Hezekiah's reformation, were accomplished in this prediction; and so were the Babylonish captivity (2 K. xxv), the redemption of the captive Jews (Neh. yii), and the consequent adherence to the wor- ship of Jehovah." — Scott. 122 II KINGS. CHAPTER II. "This chapter, with chapters three and four, form one distinct prophecy, delivered about the close of UzziarT* reign, to Judah and Jerusalem. " — Scott. Verse 1. Isaiah prophesies the coming of Christ's king- dom. (Luke, xxiv: 46, 47.) 6. Wickedness is the cause of God's forsaking. 10. Exhortation to fear God. CHAPTER III. "Isaiah, in this chapter, goes on to foretell the desola- tions of Judah and Jerusalem for their sins, both that by the Babylonians (2 K. xxv), and that complete ruin by the Romans, A. D. 70." — Henry. Verse 1. Great confusion caused by sin. 9. The impu- dence of the people. 12. The oppression of the people. 16. Judgments on the pride of the women. CHAPTER IV. Verse 1-6. A prophecy of Christ, the Branch, and the blessings to flow from him. CHAPTER V. Verse 1. In this parable God represents his care for his people, and their ungratefulness. 8. Woe upon cov- etousness. 11. Woe upon lasciviousness. 18. Woe upon impiety and injustice. 20. The execution of God's judg- ments. * § 9. Outline II Kings, Chapter xvi. (Continued from § 5.) JUDAH. Ch. xvi. Ahaz king. Re- 1SRAEL. Ch. xvi. Pekah king. zin, king of Syria, joined by the king of Israel, comes up to war against Jerusalem. Ahaz requests the king of Assyria to join him in defence * "This animated description," says Scott, "seems to predict tin invasion of Nebuchadnezzar, king of Babylon. B. C. 588. See 2 K xxv. Ch. XVIII: § 10. PROPHECY OF MICAH. 123 against Israel; sends him presents; he consents; they take Damascus and slay the king. Ahaz spoils the temple; his death. Hezekiah, his son, reigns in his stead 29 years. Outline continued, see §11. § 10. Prophecy of Micah. (See Diagram, Chapter XX 111: § 13.) . golden topic, "Christ's kingdom." Micah, the sixth of the minor prophets, was a native of Morasthi, a small town in the southern part of Judah. We learn from the introduction to his predictions (ch. i: 1) that he prophesied in the reigns of Jotham, Ahaz and Hezekiah (Jer. xxvi: 18), kings of Judah; consequently he was contemporary with the prophets Isaiah, Joel, Hosea and Amos. He began to prophesy a little after Isaiah, confirming his predictions, both against Judah and Israel. Scott says: "What we find here in writing is but an abstract of the sermon he preached during the reign of these kings. The date of chapter three is fixed in Jeremiah to the reign of Hezekiah (Jer. xxvi: 16-19); but nothing further is known with certainty concerning the time when Micah's predictions were delivered." (a.) His Predictions. One of his predictions is related to have saved the life of Jeremiah. (Ch. iii: 12; compare Jer. xxvi: 18-24.) He foretells in clear terms the invasion of Shalmaneser (ch. i: 6-8; fulfilled 2 K. xvii: 4-6); and that of Senna- cherib (ch. i: 9-16; fulfilled 2 K. xviii: 13); the cessation of prophecy (ch. iii: 6-7); and the final destruction of Jerusalem (ch. iii: 12); also of Assyria (ch. vii: 8-10). He speaks of the promulgation of the gospel from Mount Zion; its beneficial effects (ch. iv: 1-8; compare Isa. ii: 2-4): and the birth-place of Christ (ch. v: 2: compare Matt, ii: 6; also John, vii: 42). 124 II KINGS- . (b.) Divisions. "Three sections, omitting the super- scription, are introduced by the same phrase, 'Hear ye,' and represent three natural divisions of that prophecy: (I) ch. i-ii; (II) ch. iii-v; (III) ch. vi-vii. The following chronological arrangement may be adopted, thus: PAR"? I. Chap, i, was delivered in the contemporary reigns of Jotham, king of Judah, and of Pekah, king of Israel. PART II. Chap, ii-iv: 8. Certain predictions delivered in the reign of Ahaz of Judah, and Pekah and Hoshea of Israel. TART III. Chap, iv: 9, to the close of the prophecy, during the reign of Hezekiah.'* — Dr. Smith. § 11. Outline II Kings, Chapter xvii-xix. (Con- tinued from § 9.) JUDAH. ISRAEL. Ch. xvii. Hoshea's wick- ed reign. Shalmaneser, king of Assyria, after a three years' siege, takes Samaria, and carries Israel away captive into Assyria,* and places them in Holah, and in Habor by the river Gozan, and in the cities of the Medes. The colonization of Samaria by Babylonians and others, verse "-24. \ Ch. xviii. Hezekiah puts down idolatry in Judah; Sen- nacherib, king of Assyria, invades the land: blasphemous speech of Rabshakeh; Hezekiah threatened. Ch. xix. Sennacherib's letter to king Hezekiah, Heze- kiah's prayer; Isaiah's prophecy and its fulfillment. Outline continued, sec § 13. Ch. xvii. Hezekiah king. * This was the third and complete captivity of Israel. f This people, in tin- days of the Savior, were called Samaritan-. Oh. XVIII: s< 12. prophecy OF Nurr.vi. 125 g 12. Prophecy of Nahum. (See Diagram, Chapter XXIII: § 13.) GOLDEN TOPIC, "THE COMFORTER, " Nahum, the Elkoshite. His persona] history is quite unknown. The site of Elkosh, his native place, is dis- puted, some placing it in Galilee, and others in Assyria,' among the captiv.es of Israel. The date of this prophecy can be determined with as Little precision as the birthplace of its author. It is most probable that Nahum flourished in the latter half of the reign of Hezekiah, There is no doubt that he was an Israelite from the imagery u^t\ in chap, i: 4, 5. His name signifies "Comforter," and he was raised up to console Israel; the purpose of his vision being to comfort them in their captivity. Nahum's prophecy relates exclusively to the destruction of the niagnificenl city of Nineveh, which event had been predicted by Jonah nearly one hundred years before. Says Davison: "This book will be best understood by'being read as a continuation or supplement to the prophecy of Jonah." The predictions were remarkably fulfilled about one hundred years Later by the Medes and Chaldeans, B. C. (512; and so complete was its overthrow that the site •on which the greai city stood is a mere conjecture. The prophet Zephaniah, who began to prophesy just before the fall of Nineveh, also refers to its destruction in chap, ii: 13-15. The book of Nahum is divided into three chapters; but it is one continuous poem of unrivalled sublimity. A prophecy respecting Christ is found in chap, i: 15. Com- pare Isa. lii: 7; also Rom. x: 15. 126 ZEPHANTAH. § 13. Outline II Kings, Chapters xx-xxi. {Con- tinued from § 11.) JUDAH. ISRAEL. Captive rn Assyria. Ch. xx. Hezekiah, warn- ed of his death, in answer to prayer has his life lengthened 15 years; its truth is con- firmed by a miracle; Isaiah prophesies of the Babylonian captivity. Ch. xxi. Manasseh began to reign at 12 years of age> and reigned 55 years; his wicked reign, death and burial. Amon reigned in his stead 2 years, in Jerusalem; he is slain by his servants. Josiah, his son, is made king by the people of the land, and reigned 31 years. Outline continued, see § 15. §14. Prophecy of Zephaniah. (See Diagram, Chap. XXIII: §13.) GOLDEN TOPIC, 44 CAPTIVITY OF JUDAH." This prophet was " The son of Cushi, the son of Geda- liah, the son of Amariah, the son of Hizkiah." He traces his pedigree to the fourth ancestor. Hizkiah is supposed to be the celebrated king Hezekiah. We learn from the commencement of his prophecy, that he delivered his predictions in the reign of Josiah, king of Judah; and no doubt before the reformation of that king, which took place in the 18th year of his reign. (a. ) Object of the Prophecy. He was contemporary with Jeremiah, and prophesied with the same object in view, stimulating King Josiah to his great work of reformation in view of God's judgments in the impending "Captivity of Judah." He describes the desolation of Nineveh with remarkable accuracy. See chap, n: 13-15. Compare Nahum, chap, ii-iii. Ch. XVIII: § 15. OUTLIKE II KINGS. 127 His style is poetical; and the general tone of the last portion (chap, iii: 8-20) is supposed to refer to the. coming of the Messiah, but without special reference to him in person. There is a prophecy referring to Christ in chap. i: 7. Compare Matt, xxii: 2-14. (b.) Outline. Chap. i. A prophecy of God's severe judgments again it Judah and Jerusalem for their various sins. For fulfillment see 2 K. xxiii-xxv. Chap. ii. Prophesies of the destruction of Gaza, Ashke- lon, Ashdod, Akron, Moab, Amnion, Ethiopia, Assyria and Nineveh for their sins. Chap. iii. A sharp reproof against Jerusalem for her sins; captivity foretold (fulfilled 2 K. xxv); the promise of restoration (fulfilled Ezra and ISTehemiah); condi- tion after the return from captivity (fulfilled Ezra, iii: 10-13). §15. Outline II Kings, Chapter xxii -xxv. {Con- tinued from § 13.) JUDAH. ISRAEL. In captivity. Ch. xxii. Josiah was eight years old when he began to reign; he repairs the temple. Hilkiah, the priest, finds the book of the covenant; Huldah, the prophetess, speaks peace to Josiah, and fortells the destruction of Jerusalem.* Ch. xxiii. Josiah causes the book of the covenant to be read, which Hilkiah found in the house of the Lord; all come together, renew the covenant, and destroy all that pertains to idolatry ; he keeps the passover. Josiah is slain by the king of Assyria, at Megiddo; is brought to * Thus was fulfilled the prophecy of the man of God spoken of in l Kings, xiii: 1, 2. 128 II KINGS. Jerusalem and buried. Jehoaiiaz, son of Josiah, reigned in his stead only three months; was imprisoned by Pharaoh- nechoh, king of Egypt, who made Jehoiakim king, and put him under tribute; he reigned 11 years. Ch. xxiy. Jehoiakim pays tribute to Nebuchadnezzar; he rebels; bands of surrounding nations are brought up against him in judgment against Judah for the innocent blood shed by Manasseh, according to prophecy; his death. Jehoiachix, his son, succeeded him, and reigned wickedly three months. Nebuchadnezzar takes Jerusalem captive, carries away the king, his family, officers and the craftsmen to Babylon, leaving only the poorest sort of the people of the land. Zedekiah is made king by the king of Babylon over the remnant left at Jerusalem, and reigned 11 years. He rebelled against Nebuchadnezzar. Ch. xxv. Nebuchadnezzar, after two years' siege, takes Jerusalem; Zedekiah flees to the plains of Jericho, where he is captured and brought before the king of Babylon; was judged to have his sons slain and his eyes put out, after which he was bound in chains and carried to Baby- lon, where he died. Verse 8. Nebuzar-adan, the king's captain, burns the temple, Zedekiah's house, and all the houses of the great men; also breaks down the walls of the city. He carries away most of the people, leaving only the poor of the land as husbandmen; spoils and carries away the treasures of the temple, and carries all the officers to Riblah, where they are slain. 22. Gedaliah chosen governor by the king of Babylon, but soon is slain by Ishmael; and through fear of the Chaldeans, all the people, great and small, flee into Egypt. 27. Jehoiachin, after 31 years imprisonment, is released by Evil-merodach, king of Babylon and successor to Nebuchadnezzar, H. C. 562. Ch. XIX: § 1. CHRONICLES* VOL. I. 129 § 16. Conclusion of Kings. "The events detailed in these books are of themselves very interesting. The account of the wisdom of Solomon; the rash and impolitic conduct of his son Eehoboam; the disobedient prophet; the widow of Zarephath; Elijah and the prophets of Baal; Benhadad's pride and defeat; Elijah's ascension to heaven; Elisha's succession to his ministry, and the series of mira- cles he performed; the panic and flight of the Syrians; the predicted death of Ahab and Jezebel and their children: are all pregnant with instruction. We perceive in these impressive histories the characters and the qualities of men painted with the utmost fidelity, and the attributes of God displayed with great effect. The particulars and circumstances are sketched out with a brief and lively description, and the imagination lingers with pleasure in filling up the outline presented to our view." — Bagster. We now close this history to enter into the "Review from Adam," as found in First and Second Chronicles. CHAPTER XIX. I CHRONICLES. § 1. Chronicles : Volume I. Written probably by Ezra, B. C. 525. golden topic, "review from adam." See- Index. "These books were written after the return of the Jews from the Babylonish captivity, and are called Chronicles because they contain an abstract, in the order of time, of the whole sacred history to the period when they were written, including about 3466 years. 130 . r CIIRONK LES. One leading object of the writer, who was probably Ezra, appears to have been to point out from the public records, still preserved, the state of the different families before the captivity, that at their return they might again possess their respective inheritances. That the worship might be conducted as before, he enters minutely into the duties, genealogies, families and orders of the priests and Levites; and to stir the Jews to a holy zeal for restoring the temple and its service." — Nicholls. Anciently they formed but one book in the Hebrew Bible. They contain many repetitions of things found in the Kings, and may by some be thought needless; but in sacred things " precept must be upon precept, and line upon line." "To me," says Paul, "to write the same thing is not grievous, but for you it is safe." Phil, iii: 1. These repetitions must not be deemed superfluous, but as a "Review from Adam" down along the ages to the time when this less bulky volume could be circulated among the tribes as a hand book, concise, and just adapted to their wants; for in the reinstating and reorganizing them as a nation in their native land, probably very few of those who were carried away captive 70 years previously lived to return. * These books are of no less value to us, in giving us a concise account, as a revieiv of what we have read in the hooks which precede them, refreshing our memories of many incidents that have gone from us, and calling forth nezo thoughts, and arranging them in chronological order. We must not lose sight of this point, that a rule or system adapted to the acquisition of any science is appli- * There were but very few copies of the Scriptures then in exist cure; for previous to the captivity, and during the first part of the reign of Josiah, for the space of 30 years they were not read. And now, after the lapse of nearly a century, and on their return, the demand called forth these books now under consideration. Oh. XIX: § 3. OUTLINE PART I. 131 cable to the Bible. Then let us adopt every available means within our reach to get a knowledge of that which offers to secure to us eternal life. John, xvii: 3. § 2. Three General Divisions. The history com- prised in this book covers 2988 years. It may be divided into three parts: I. Chap. i-ix. G-enealogies, with historical sketches in- termixed. II. Chap. x. A brief account of the life and death of King Saul. III. Chap, xi-xxix. An account of the reign of David, Saul's successor, concluding with his preparations for build- ing the temple. § 3. Outline Part ■ I (Ch. i-ix). Genealogies, with historical sketches intermixed. Chap, i: 1. Record from Adam to Noah. See Gen. x: 2. 5. Family record of the three sons of Noah. See Gen. xi: 10. 24. Family record of Abraham. 29. Family record of the sons of Abraham. 43. Eecord of the kings and dukes of Edom. See Gen. xxxvi: 15-19. Chap, ii: 1. Family record of Israel (Jacob). Ch. 1: 34; also Gen. xxxii: 28. 12. And Boaz begat Obed, and Obed Jesse. Ruth, iy: 18-22. 13. Family record of Jesse. 1 Sam. xvi: 11. Chap, iii: 1. Family record of David, king of Israel. 11. His line to Zedekiah, the last king of Israel. See 2 K. xxiv: 17. 1-7. Family record of Jeconiah (Jehoiachin). 2 K. xxiv: 6-8. Chap, iv: 1; Family record of Judah, son of Jacob. See Gen. xlix: 8. 39. Conquest of Gedar; and the last of the Amalekites conquered by 500 sons of Simeon. 132 I CHRONICLES. Chap, v: 1. Line of Reuben, who lost his birthright. 9. His habitation and record in the days of Jothani, king of Judali, and Jeroboam II, king of Israel. 26. Taken captive with the Gadites and the half tribe of Manasseh, by Tilgath-pilneser (or pileser). Chap, yi: 1. Family record of Levi, giving the line of priests to the captivity. 16. Record of the families of Gershom (compare Gen. xlvi: 11; also Ex. vi: 16), Merari and (v. 33) Kohath, who had charge of the singing until the temple was built by Solomon, when they waited on their office according to their order. Chap, xxiii: 3-33. 49. Family record of Aaron and his sons, and their office. Ex. xxviii. 54.. Designation of cities as dwelling places of the Levites. Josh, xxi: 3-8. Chap, vii: 1. Family record of the sons of Issachar, Benjamin, Naphtali, Manasseh and Ephraim. N~u. xxvi: 35. 28. Habitations of Ephraim and Asher. Chap, viii: 1. Family record of Benjamin and the chief men. Jud. xx: 15-16. 33. Record of Saul and Jonathan, sons (descendants) of Benjamin. 1 Sam. xiy: 51, 49. Chap, ix: 1. Concluding remarks on the previous chap- ters. The eighth chapter should end with this verse. 2. The first settlement in the land after the captivity. 3. The first who dwelt in Jerusalem. 10. The first of the priests and Levites, and their service. 39. Repetition of chap, viii: 33-38. "This repetition." says Scott, ••seems to have been intended merely as an introduction to the ensuing history." g 4. Outline Part II (Ch. x). A brief account of the life and death of Saul. Chap, x: 1. Saul's overthrow by the Philistines. 4. Saul and his armor bearer murder themselves. 13. Saul's deatli Cli. XIX: § 5. outline paet in. 133 attributed to asking counsel of a witch. 1 Sam. xxviii: 7. 14. David, son of Jesse, made king. Note. This chapter, except the last two verses, is a mere tran- script of the last chapter of the first book of Samuel. § 5. Outline Part III (Ch. xi-xxix). An account of the reign of David, and his preparation to build the temple. Chap, xi: 1. David anointed king in Hebron. 2 Sam. v: 1-5. 4. Moves his throne to Jerusalem. 10. Cata- logue of David's mighty men. 2 Sam. xxiii: 8-39. Chap, xii: 1. Warriors who came to David at Ziklag. 1 Sam. xxvii : 2-6. 23. Warriors who come to David at Hebron from all parts of the kingdom, 250,000 or more valiant men. Chap, xiii: 1. David, with princes and people and great solemnity, fetches the aek from Kirjath-jearim. 1 Sam. vii: 1-2. 9. ITzza is smitten for presumption. 2 Sam. vi: fr-7. 13. The ark carried aside and left at the house of Obed-edom. 14. His house greatly blessed. Gen. xxx: 27. Chap, xiv: 1. The kindness of Hiram, king of Tyre, to David. 2 Sam. v: 11. 2. David's prosperity; he takes more wives. 8. David's hvo victories over the Philistines. 2 Sam. v: 25. 12. David's great fame. Chap, xv : 1. David builds a tent for the ark at Jerusalem. 2. He orders the priests and Levites from Obed-edom. 16. David appoints the singers and players on instru- ments; also porters, or doorkeepers. Chap, xvi: 1. The ark brought into the tent prepared, and sacrifice offered. 8. Psalm of thanksgiving. 37. Da- vid appoints ministers, porters, priests and musicians, to attend continually on the ark. Note. Verse 8-22 contain the first 15 verses of Ps. cv. Verse 23-33 contain the whole of Ps. xcvi, with some slight variation. 134 I CHRONICLES. Chap, xvii: 1. David proposes to build a house for the Lord. 2. The prophet Nathan's message respecting it. 16. David's prayer. Compare 2 Sam. vii: 18. Chap, xviii: 1-17. David's victories. Compare 2 Sam. viii. Chap, xix: 1 to end. The Ammonites and Syrians de- feated. This chapter corresponds with 2 Sam. x: 6. Chap, xx : 1. Kabbah is besieged by Joab, spoiled by David, and the people tortured. 4. Three giants are slain in three battles with the Philistines. Note. " This chapter goes on with the narrative in the 11th and 12th chapters of the second book of Samuel; and it is remarkable that the important episode of David's sin in the matter of Uriah, his reproof, and his repentance, are entirely omitted; and this book of Chronicles passes immediately from the 1st verse of the 11th to the 20th verse of the 12th chapter. It omits also the crimes of Amnon and Absalom, David's song, and passes to the 18th verse of the 21st chapter of the 2d book of Samuel, the last five verses of which, with some variations, conclude this chapter." — Cottage Bible. Chap, xxi: 1. David, tempted by Satan, forces Joab to number the people. 6. He repents. 9. And makes choice in the three judgments of pestilence. 14. David repents, and Jerusalem is spared. He purchases Oman's (Araunah in 2 Sam. xxiv: 18) threshing floor, builds an altar, and sacrifices unto the Lord.* Note. This chapter is nearly a repetition of 2d Sam. xxiv. The following seven chapters have already found a place as an appendix to 2d Samuel, and before the 1st book of Kings; but it no less follows as links in the history we are now pursuing, showing how complete is the review, as set forth in the preface to this book. Chap, xxii: 1. David designates this threshing floor as the place to build the temple, and makes preparations for it. * It will be remembered that this threshing floor which David pur chased is the same place— Mount Moriah — where Abraham offered his son Isaac, (Jen. xxii; 2; and where afterwards Solomon built the temple. See Dent. xii: 0-7. Ch. XIX: § 5. OUTLINE PART ITI. 135 6. Charge to his son Solomon. IT. David's charge to the princes of Israel. Chap, xxiii: 1. Solomon made king. 2. The number and distribution of the Levites. T. The families of the Gershomites. 12. The sons of Kohath. 21. The sons of Merari. 24. The several offices of the Levites. Chap. xxiv. Aaron's sons divided by lot into twenty-four courses. Chap. xxv. Number, office and division of the singers. Chap, xxvi: 1. Division of the porters, or gate keepers. 13. Gates assigned by lot. 20. Levites appointed to have charge of the treasures. 29. Appointment of officers and judges. Chap, xxvii: 1. The appointment of a captain to serve each month. 16. And a prince for each tribe. Xu. vii: 2. 25. David's several officers. Chap, xxviii: 1. David assembles all his appointed offi- cers, and exhorts them to fear God. 11. He gives Solomon the pattern and gold and silver for the temple. 22. David's charge to Solomon. Chap, xxix: 1. By David's example the people are made willing to contribute of theis treasures. 10. His thanks- giving and prayer. 20. All the people bless the Lord, and make Solomon their king; "and he sat on the throne of the Lord instead of David, his father, * * * and all Israel obeyed him." 27. David, his father, "reigned over Israel forty years; seven years reigned he in Hebron, and thirty-three years reigned he in Jerusalem. And he died in a good old age, full of days, riches and honor." 136 II CHRONICLES. CHAPTEK XX. II CHRONICLES. § 1. Chronicles : Yolume II. This book is a con- tinuation of the jn-eceding one. In some respects it agrees with the books of Kings, and many references may be made to them. There are, however, some things men- tioned in this book that are not found in the Kings. The histories of Jehoshaphat and Hezekiah, and many other things there mentioned, are here more fully and clearly explained, as will be seen as we pass along. This book opens with Solomon haying assumed the responsibilities of the throne and the kingdom, and con- tains a history of the several kings of his race, who reigned in succession until the time of the captivity. It covers a space of 480 years, and concludes with an intimation of the decree of Cyrus for the restoration of the Jews and the rebuilding of the temple. § 2. Two General Parts. This book very naturally divides itself into two general divisions. I. The reign of Solomon and the building of the temple (ch. i-ix). II. The reigns of the kings of Judah after the revolt (B. C. 975), and the destruction of Jerusalem (ch. x-xxxvi). That this second part of these records may be better un- derstood, we give the following more definite analysis, with the date of the beginning of each reign: Chap. i-ix. The history of the kingdom of Israel under Solomon, B. C. L015. Chap, x-xii. Accession of Rehoboam to the throne, B. C. 975. Gil. XX: § 3. O.UTLIJ^E PART I. 13? Chap, xiii-xvi. The reigns of Abijali and Asa, kings of Judah, B. C. 957. Chap, xvii-xx. The reign of Jehoshaphat, B. C. 914. . Chap, xxi-xxiv. The reigns of Jehoram and Ahaziah, and the usurpation of Athaliah, B. C. 889. Chap, xxv-xxvii. Reigns of Amaziali, Uzziah and Joth- am, B. C. 839. Chap, xxviii. The reign of Aliaz, B. C. 712. Chap, xxix-xxxii. The reign of Hezekiah, B. C. 727. Chap, xxxiii. The reign of Manasseh and Anion, B. C. 698. Chap, xxxiv-xxxv. The reign of Josiah, B. C. 611. Chap, xxxvi: 1-21. The subsequent reigns to the desola- tion of Jerusalem and the temple, or the final captivity, B. 0. 588. 22 to end. The edict of Cyrus, B. 0. 538. § 3. Outline Part I (Oh. i-ix). The reign of Solo- mon, and the building of the temple. Chap, i : 1. Solomox strengthened in his kingdom. 7. His choice of wisdom. 1 K. iii: 5-15. 13. Solomon's wealth and commerce. Chap, ii: 1. Solomon's laborers for the building of the temple. 3. He sends to Hiram, king of Tyre, for timber and skillful workmen. 1 K. v: 1. 11. Hiram's friendly answer. 18. The work requires 3600 overseers. Chap, iii: 1. The place and time of building the temple. 3. The dimensions and ornaments. 1 K. vi. 11. The cherubim placed in it. 14. The vail and pillars. 1 K. vii: 21, 22. Chap, iv: I. The altar of brass, and the molten sea. 1 K. vii: 23. 6. The ten lavers, candlesticks and tables. 9. The courts, and the instruments of brass'. 19. The instruments of gold. Chap, v: 1. The temple finished, and treasures deposited in it. 2. The ark is deposited in the most holy place. 13& 11 CHRONICLES. 11. The Levites sing praises to God, and the clond tills the temple. Ex. xl: 4, 35. Chap, vi: 1. Solomon, having hlessed the people, hlessed God. 12. Solomon's prayer at the dedication of the tem- ple. 1 K. viii: 12. Chap, vii: 1. Solomon's prayer answered. 4. His sotemn .sacrifice. 8. Having kept the feast of tabernacles, he dis- missed the people, 12. The Lord appears to Solomon by night and makes a covenant with him. 1 K. ix. Chap, viii: 1. Solomon's other buildings. 1 K. ix: 10. 7. All the heathen nations who dwell in the land pay tribute. 11. He brings his wife to her house. 12. Solo- mon's yearly sacrifice. 14. He appoints the places of the priests and Levites. 17. Solomon's ships bring gold from Ophir ($10,939,050). Chap, ix: 1. The Queen of Sheba admires the wisdom of Solomon. 1 K. x. 13. "His annual revenue in gold over $14,300,000,000. "— A Clark. 15. His targets, throne of ivory, vessels, presents, chariots and horses, and his trib- utes. 29. * Solomon's reign of 40 years and death. (a.) Outline Part II (Ch. x-xxxvi). The reigns of the kings of Judah after the revolt. Chap, x: 1. Israelites hasten to Shechem to crown Reho- boam king. Jeroboam asks to have the taxes reduced. 6. Rehoboam, accepting the advice of the young men in preference to that of his father's counsellors, answers roughly. 16. The ten tribes revolt, and Rehoboam flees. Note. This chapter is copied almost verbatim from 1 K. xii. Chap, xi : 1. Rehoboam prepares an army to subdue Israel. 2. He is forbidden by Shemaiah the prophet. 5. He builds * ' 'In the book (v. 29). It appears by this that the prophets were also historians, who gave an account of what passed in their times; out of this work this short history was extracted. * * * These three did join to make one book, out of which it is probable Ezra took many things." — Patrick. !'ll. XX: § 3. OTJTLINE PART II. 13t> and fortifies several cities. 13. The priests and Levites, being cast off by Jeroboam, resort to Jerusalem, with other pious Israelites. 18. Family record of Rehoboam. Chap, xii: 1. Rehoboam forsakes the Lord, and is pun- ished by Shishak. 1 K. xiv: 21-25. 5. He and the princes, repenting at the preaching of Shemaiah the prophet, are delivered from destruction, but not from spoil. 13. The reign and death of Rehoboam. Chap, xiii: 1. Abijah now reigns, and makes war with Jeroboam. 4. He shows the justice of his cause. 13. The battle; God delivers Judah. 21. Family record of Abijah. Iddo is prophet. Chap, xiv: 1. Asa becomes king; he destroys idolatry. 6. Asa strengthens his kingdom. 9. Zera, son of Shishak,' king of Egypt, makes war with Asa and is defeated. Chap, xv : 1. The prophet Azariah; his prophecy. Asa, with Judah and Israel, make a solemn covenant with Grod. 16. Asa removes his mother from being queen, for idolatry. 1 K. xv : 13. 18. Asa enjoys a long peace. Chap, xvi: 1. Baasha, king of Israel, builds Ramah for a defence. 2. With the aid of Benhadad, Asa destroys Ramah. 7. Prophecy of Hanam against Asa; he is put in prison. 11. The reign and death of Asa. 1 K." xv: 24. Chap, xvii: 1. Jehoshaphat's good reign. T. He sends Levites and priests to teach the people.* 10. His enemies fear him. 12. His greatness; his captains and armies. * "In these verses we have an account of a remarkable ministry established by Jehoshaphat, in which three classes of men were employed: I, the princes; II, the Levites; III, the priests. We may presume the princes instructed the people in the civil law, the Levites in the temple service and ritual law, and the priests instructed them in the nature and design of their religion. Against such a people, in- structed in such principles, no enemy could be successful." — BagsUr. 140 II CHRONICLES. Chap, xviii: 1. Jelioshaphat becomes rich; joins Ahab, king of Israel against Kamoth-gilead.* 8. The prophet Micaiah is brought before both kings. 13. The prophecy of Micaiah against the false prophets. 28. They go to battle, and Ahab, king of Israel, is slain. Note. This chapter corresponds with 1 Kings, xxii: 2-31. Chap, xix: 1. Jelioshaphat, returning home from the battle, meets Jehu, and is reprimanded by him. 6. The king's instructions to the judges, priests and Levites. Chap, xx : 1. Jelioshaphat, in his fear, proclaims a fast. 5. The king's prayer. 14. The prophecy of Jaliaziel as- sures the king of a signal deliverence, which is received with thankfulness. 22. The great overthrow of the ene- mies of Judah. 26. The people bless God at Baracha and ♦ return home. 35. He joins Ahaziah in sending ships to Tarshish; they are wrecked, according to the predictions of Eliezer. Chap', xxi: 1. Jehoram takes the throne, and slays his brothers. 5. His wicked reign. 2 K. viii: 16-22. 8. Edom and Libnah revolt, because the king had forsaken the Grod of his fathers. 12. A prophecy in writing against him from Elijah. 16. The Philistines and Arabians oppose him. 18. He dies without' regrets and is buried, but not m the sepulchre of his fathers. Note. In verse 2 we read : "Jelioshaphat, king of Israel." But we know he was not king of Israel, but of Judah; hence here is a mistake by the transcribers. The Arabic, the Syriac and the Vulgate read, King or Judah. Chap, xxii: 1. Aiiazia if s wicked reign. 2 K. ix: 10-27. 5. He joins Jorum, king of Israel, and is slain by Jehu. lo. A thaliah murders the royal family and usurps the throne. * "Jelioshaphat took Athaliah, the daughter of Ahab, to be wife to his son Joram (2 K. viii: 18); which fatal connection was highly displeasing to God, and Jelioshaphat was severely reproved for it by Jehu the prophet. Ch. xix: \-'3."—Bagster. Ch. XX: § 3. outline part ii. 141 Chap, xxiii: 1. Jehoiada, the priest, sets things in order and makes Joash king. 2 K. xi: 4 to end. 12. Athaliah is slain. 16. Jehoiada, the priest, restores the worship of God. Chap. xxiv: 1. Joash reigns well all the.days of Jehoiada, the priest. 4. He orders the temple repaired. 15. Jehoi- ada's death and burial. 17. Joash falls into idolatry; slays Zechariah the prophet. 23. The king is plundered by the Syrians, left sick, and slain by his servants. Chap, xxy: 1. Amaziah began his reign well. 2 K. xiv: 1-20. 5. Israelites are hired to fight against the Edomites, and dismissed at the word of a prophet. 11. He overthrows the Edomites. 13. The Israelites, offended at being dis- missed, take spoil on their way home. 14. Amaziah serves the gods of Edom, and rejects the advice of the prophet. 17. The king, not willing to take advice of Joash, is van- quished and Jerusalem spoiled. 25. His reign, and death by conspiracy. Chap, xxvi: 1. Uzziah becomes king, and reigns well while under the advice of the prophet Zechariah. 16. Be- ing lifted up with pride, he attempts to burn incense in the temple, and is smitten with leprosy. 22. Jotham, his son, succeeds him, whose acts were recorded by Isaiah the prophet. Chap, xxvii: 1. Jotham's good reign. 5. He subdues the Ammonites. 7. His reign and death. 2 K. xv: 1-7. Chap, xxviii: 1. Ahaz, reigning wickedly, is greatly afflicted by the Syrians. 6. Great slaughter in Judah, and many captives taken by the Israelites; captives are sent home by the counsel of Obed, the prophet. 16. Ahaz sends in vain to Assyria for aid. 22. In this dilemma he plunges into idolatry. 26. He dies and is succeeded by Hezekiah. Note. The greater part of this chapter has been anticipated in the sixteenth chapter of Second Kings. Outline 2 Chron. continued, see § 5. 142 II CHRONICLES. § 4. Prophecy of Isaiah, Part II (Ch. vi-xii). Having studied well the incidents connected with the reigns of Jotham and Ahaz, we are now prepared to read that portion of Isaiah's prophecy which was Avritten dur- ing these reigns. This portion commences with the sixth chapter and ends with the twelfth, and comprises Part IL See Preface to Isaiah, Part II; Chap. XVIII: § 7. (a. ) Outline. Chap. vi. Isaiah's vision of the divine glory, and the prophecy respecting the Jews. Chap. vii. Deliverence promised to Ahaz, which is typi- cal of salvation by Christ. Chap. viii. The subjection, both of Israel and subse- quently of Judah, to the Assyrian power. Chap. ix. A prophecy of the blessings of Messiah's king- dom, and judgments denounced against the impenitent. Chap. x. Judgment against all oppressors, particularly Assyria, from whom Israel is promised deliverance. Chap. xi. The j)eaceable kingdom of Messiah; the return of the Jews; and the calling of the Gentiles. Chap. xii. The song of triumph in God's salvation. §5. Outline II Chronicles, xxix-xxxi. {Con* tinned from § 3.) Chap, xxix: 1. HEZEKIAH reigns well. He opens the door of the temple, and exhorts tin 1 priests and Levites to set things in order for the worship of God. 11. They sanctify themselves* (1 Chron. xxiii: 12-21), and cleanse the temple and its service. 20. Hezekiah offers solemn * We here find the necessity of reading and becoming familiar with the record of the families, as found in the first nine chapters of First Chronicles; for if the reader forms an acquaintance with these several families, and with the work they are called to perform in the temple service, he will be enabled to understand what is meant when reference is made to them elsewhere in the Bible. Ch. XX: § 6. PROPHECY OF ISAIAH, PART III. 143 sacrifices, wherein the Levites were more forward than the priests. Chap, xxx : 1. Hezekiah proclaims the solemn feast of the passover. 13. The .assembly destroy the altars of idol- atry, and keep the feasts fourteen days. 27. The priests and Levites bless the people. Chap, xxxi: 1. The people forward to destroy idolatry. 2. Hezekiah orders the courses of the priests and Levites, and provides for their work and maintenance. 5. The people bring their offerings and tithes. 11. Hezekiah ap- points officers to dispose of the tithes. Outline continued, see § 8. § 6. Prophecy of Isaiah, Part III. (See Preface, Chap. XVIII: § ?.) Part III comprises chapters xiii- xxiii. The following is an outline: Chap. xiii. Judgments denounced against Babylon. Ful- filled by the Medes; Dan. v: 28-31. Chap. xiv. God's mercy to Israel; song of triumph over their enemies (Babylon). Fulfilled Dan. v: 30. Palestina (Philistines) threatened. Chap. xv. Lamentable state of Moab. 2 K. xvii: 25. Chap. xvi. M-oab exhorted to obedience. Chap. xvii. Oracle of Damascus (fulfilled 2 K. xvi: 9) and Israel. Compare verses 12-14 with 2 K. xix: 35. Chap, xviii. (Very obscure. ) Supposed to relate to Egypt and Israel. Chap. xix. An oracle concerning Egypt. Note. "The fulfillment of this prophecy is supposed to be brought about by intestine wars. He likewise intimates (ver. 18) the spread of the Jewish religion in Egypt and Syria under Alexander and his successors." — Bishop Lowth. Chap. xx. A type prefiguring the shameful captivity of Egypt and Ethiopia. Chap. xxi. The fall of Babylon (fulfilled Dan. v: 5, 6), Dumah (Edom) and Arabia (obscure). 144 ISAIAH. Chap. xxii. The prophet's lament of the invasion of the Jews by the Assyrians. 2 K. xviii. Prophecy concerning Shebna and Eliakim. 2 K. xviii. 37. Chap, xxiii. Miserable overthrow of Tyre by Xebuchad- nezzar. (Josephns Ant. Book, 10: sec. vii.) The return of the Jews, v. 17, 18. § 7. Prophecy of Isaiah, Part IT. (See Preface, Chap. XVIII: § 7.) Part IV contains chapters xxiv- xxxv, as follows: Chap. xxiv. The divine judgments on the land of Israel. Note. " Whether the desolation here spoken of was that occa" sioned by Shalmanezer, Nebuchadnezzar or the Romans is not certain. Perhaps it may have a view to all three. " — Rev. Wm. Patton. Chap. xxv. A prophetic ode of thanksgiving for the de- liverance referred to in the previous chapter. Chap. xxvi. Another song of praise for God's favor to his people in temporal and spiritual blessings. Chap, xxvii. God's care for his people represented by the care of a husbandman over his vineyard. Chap, xxviii. God's judgments against both Israel and Judah, but intermingled with mercy." Chap. xxix. God's judgment on Jerusalem (Ariel). The invasion by Sennacherib. 2 K. xxv. Note. "The subject of this and the four following chapters is the invasion of Sennacherib; the great distress of the Jews while it continued; their sudden and unexpected deliverance by God inter- posing in their favor; the prosperous state of the kingdom uiuk j r Hezekiah; interspersed with severe reproofs, and threatenings for their hypocrisy, stupidity, infidelity, etc"— Bishop Lowih. Chap. xxx. God's people threatened for tlu-ir reliance OH Egypt; and the awful destruction of the Assyrian army in the valley of Hinnom. 2 Chron. xxxii. Chap. xxxi. This chapter seems to be an abridgment of the preceding one. Ch. XX: § 9. prophecy of isaiah, part v. 145 Chap, xxxii. The prophetic blessings of Christ's king- dom. Chap, xxxiii. God's judgments on the enemies of his church, and the privileges of the godly. Chap, xxxiv. The church avenged of her enemies. Chap. xxxv. Blessing enjoyed at the coming of Christ. Note. " The last two chapters form one prophecy, an entire and beautiful poem consisting of two parts, and hence the chapters. " — Bishop Lowth. Outline continued. se< j g 9. § 8. Outline II Chronicles, xxxii. (Continued from § 5. ) Chap, xxxii: 1. Sennacherib invades Judah; Hezekiah fortifies himself and encourages the people. 9. The blas- phemies of Sennacherib by messenger and letters. 20. Hezekiah and the prophet Isaiah pray, and in answer the angel destroys the hosts of the Assyrians. 25. Hezekiah grows proud, and is humbled by God. 27. His reign and death; he is succeeded by Max ass kit. Outline continued, see £ 10. § 9. Prophecy of Isaiah, Part Y. (See Preface? Chap. XV III: § 7.) At ttiis point the Bible student should read Part Y (Historical) of the prophecy of Isaiah if he would continue the history of this king; for in the 32d verse of chapter xxxii we read: "Xow the rest of the acts of Hezekiah, and his goodness, behold, they are written in the vision of Isaiah the prophet, the son of Amoz, and in the book of the kings of Judah and Israel.'* Consult also the preface to this prophecy, which introduces the leading topics and gives the chapters in which they are found, and this will prepare the mind to receive it intelli- gently. Part Y contains chapters xxxvi-xxxix. "We may safely conclude that this was part of that history of Hezekiah's 140 ir CHRONICLES. reign which Isaiah wrote, as referred to in 2 Chron. xxxii: 32."—Lowth. ^fany of Isaiah's predictions relate to and are fulfilled in the events recorded in these four chapters ; hence it is proper that the history containing them should be inserted here, thus keeping it fresh in the memory, enabling them, and us as well, to apply the predictions to the events to which they refer. "The key of prophecy is to be found in history. The exact fulfilling of this prophecy ought to serve to confirm the faith of God's people in other prophecies, the accom- plishment of which is' at a greater distance. This is the same story, almost word for word, as found in 2 Kings, xviii, beginning with the 13th verse, and end- ing with chapter xxi. But it was so memorable an event that it was worthy to be twice fully recorded, and afterwards an abridgment as found in 2 Chron. xxxii.'" — Henry. We pass by this part without further note of its contents; but we say to the student, be sure to read it slowly and thoughtfully, and compare this account with the same event recorded in 2 Kings. Outline Isaiah continued, see § 2, Chop. XXII. § 10. Outline II Chronicles^ xxxiii. {Continued from § 8.) Chap, xxxiii: 1. Manasseh's wicked reign. 10. He is carried captive to Babylon. 12. In answer to his prayer he is released; he now seeks to put down idolatry. IS. Re- view of his acts; his death; is succeeded by his son Amon. 21. Anion, reigning wickedly, is slain by his servants. 25. Anion's murderers are slain, and JosiAH is made king. Note. For corresponding history, see 2 K. xxi. We have come to the times and the prophecies of Jeremiah, and deem this a lit place to introduce this prophet. Outline continued, see £ 12. Ch. XX: § 11. PROPHECY OF JEREMIAH. 147 § 11. Prophecy of Jeremiah. (See Diagram, Chap. XXIII: § 13.) goldex topic, "weeping prophet. ? ' (Captivity.) "Jeremiah was a priest, set apart to the prophetic office from his birth (ch. i: 5), and was expressly addressed by the word of God at the early age of fourteen years. He was called to his office nearly at the same time with Zeph- aniah, in the thirteenth year of Josiah, king of Judah, and continued to exercise it about forty years, during the reigns of the wicked sons of that pious king, to whom he fearlessly prophesied concerning their wickedness." — Gray's Key to the Old Testament. He was suffered to remain in Judea when Zedekiah and the nation generally were carried away captive by Nebu- chadnezzar to Babylon; but after the murder of Gedaliah, the governor whom Nebuchadnezzar had placed in Judea in the room of Zedekiah, Jeremiah with others was forced to flee into Egypt. Chap, xliii: 3-7. In his character he is presented as a bright example of the strictest fidelity in reproving sin, united with the deepest compassion for the sinner. This gives a peculiar feature, both to his character and his writings, which has led to his being called the "weeping prophet." Chap, ix: 1. His native place was Anathoth. m the land of Benjamin, some four miles southeast of Jerusalem. His prophecy reaches from the thirteenth year of Josiah, B. C. 629, to the eleventh year of Zedekiah, B. C. 586 (ch. i: 3); and afterwards lie prophesied in Egypt, whither he fled with the remnant of his people. (a.) Prophecies respecting ( 'hrist. "01 the prophecies in this book more immediately pointing to Christ, the follow- ing may be noticed: Chap, xxii: 5, 6, foretells the mediatorial kingdom of the Messiah, who is called the Lord, or Jehovah, our Eight- 148 JEREMIAH. eousness. The title of Jehovah is elsewhere given to the Messiah by the prophets. Isaiah, xl: 10; xlviii: 17; Hosea r i: 7; Mal.'iii: 1. Chap, xxxi: 31-34; xxxiii: 8, clearly and forcibly describe the efficacy of Christ's atonement, the spiritual character of the gospel, and its excellence in giving, not only pardon, but holiness. See Heb. viii: 8-13; x: 14, etc. For the fulfillment of the prophecies respecting the return of the Jews, read Ezra and Nehemiah." — Nicholls. (b.) Two General Parts. The absence of any chrono- logical order in the present structure of this book is obvious. We have, however, two great parts: I. Chap, i-xlv. Prophecies delivered at various times, mainly to Judah, or connected with Jeremiah's personal history. II. Chap, xlvi-li. Prophecies connected with other na- tions. Chapter Hi, taken largely though not entirely from 2 K. xxv, may be taken as a supplement to this prophecy, or as an introduction to the Lamentations. (c.) Part I, Sections I-Y. Looking more closely into each of these divisions, we have the following sections: Section I. Chap, i-xxi. Containing probably the substance of the book, and including the prophecies from the thirteenth year of Josiah to the fourth of Jehoiakim. •Section II. See Chronology, Chap. XXIV: §6. Chap, xxii-xxv. Shorter prophecies delivered at different, times against Judah and the false prophets: xxv: 13, 14, evidently marks the conclusion of a series of prophecies. Section III. Chap, xxii-xxviii. Two great prophecies of the fall of Jerusalem and Babylon, and the history connected with them. Chapter xxv belongs to the earlier, and chapters xxvi-xxvii to the later period of the prophet's work. Ch. XX: § 12. OUTLINE II CHRONICLES. 149 Section IV. Chap, xxix-xxxi. The message of comfort for the exiles in Babylon. Section V. Chap, xxxii-xliv. The history of the last two years before the capture of Jerusalem, and of this prophet's work in them, and in the period that followed. Note. The position of chapter xlv, unconnected with anything before or after it, may be accounted for on the hypothesis that Baruch desired to place on record a remarkable passage in his own life, and inserted it where a direct narrative of his master's life «nded. The same explanation applies to chapter xxxvi. (d.) Part II, Sections I-IL Section I. Chap, xlvi-li. The prophecies against foreign nations, ending with the great prediction against Babylon. Section II. Chap, lii was added after the prophet's death. It is a short historical account of the taking of Jerusalem, and may be considered as a supplement, or an introduction to the Lamentations. Part I of this prophecy, which includes the first four sections, should be read in this connection. §12. Outline II Chronicles, xxxir - xxxv. (Con- tinued from § 10.) Chap, xxxiv: 1. Josiah's good reign; he destroys idol- atry, and orders the repair of the temple. 14. Hilkiah, the priest, finds a book of the law of Moses; the king sends for Huldah, the prophetess. 23. She prophesies of the destruction of Jerusalem; but it is not to be fulfilled until after Josiah's time. 29. Josiah has the law read in the .assembly, and renews the covenant with God. Chap, xxxv : 1. Josiah keeps a solemn passover. 20. He angers Necho, king of Egypt, and is slain. 25. Jeremiah .and others lament him. Outline concluded ^14. 150 HABAKKUK. § 13. Prophecy of Habakkuk. (See Diagram, Chap. XXIII: % 13.) GOLDEN TOPI.C, " AGAINST THE CHALDEANS." Of tlie prophet Habakkuk we have no certain informa- tion. It is evident that he prophesied in Judea, before the captivity, and probably, as Archbishop Usher supposes, in the reign of Jehoiakim; being contemporary with Jere- miah a few years before the final destruction of Jerusalem. Of all the nations that had most afflicted the Jews, the chief were the Edomites, Assyrians and Chaldeans; and three of the prophets were raised up for the purpose of pronouncing the destruction of these three nations: Oba- diah against the Edomites (see preface to Obadiah); Xahum that of the Assyrians (or Nineveh), avIio had carried away the ten tribes into captivity; and now Habakkuk against the Chaldeans (or Babylon), who completed the captivity of the twelve tribes of Isiael in the final destruction of Jerusalem by Nebuchadnezzar, B. C. 588. "The writings of this prophet stand high in the class of Hebrew poets. The beautiful connection between the parts of this prophecy, its diction, imagery, spirit and sublimity, cannot be too much admired." — Abp. Xeiccome. He is frequently quoted in the New Testament. Com- pare ch. i: 5. with Acts, xiii: 40, 41; and ch. ii: 3, 4, with Rom. i: 17; Gal. iii: 11; and Heb. x: 37, 38. (a.) Outline. This book is divided into three chapters. The following is an outline: Chap, i: 1. The burden of soul the prophet lias for the sins of the people. 5. Shows the vengeance of their ene- mies, the Chaldeans, who shall possess their land. 12. The prophet now bursts forth with a sublime plea thai God will not utterly cast off his people. Chap, ii: 1. The prophet awaits with faith and patience an answer. 5. Various judgments against the Chaldeans Cli. XX: § 15. conclusion to chronicles. 151 (Babylonians),, for covetousness. cruelty, drunkenness, and for idolatry. Chap. iii. Habakkuk's prayer. He trembles in contem- plating the majesty of God. (b.) Concluding Remarks. The last chapter is also a psalm, and may hare been written for use in the temple service, and thus kept before the minds of the people. The first two chapters may have been first publicly pro- claimed; but if so. lest it be forgotten, the prophet is ordered to write it on tables, or tablets, which were com- monly hung up in public places (as our advertising cards), being written in large and bold characters, and so legible that it might be read while running (see chap, ii : 2). Calvin says this was the usual custom, in keeping the prophecies before the people, that they may not be forgotten, after having been first publicly proclaimed. § 11. Outline II Chronicles, xxxri. (Continued from § 12.) Verse 1. Jehoahaz succeeds Josiah. his father; he is defeated by Pharaoh and carried into Egypt. 5. Jehoia- kim succeeds, but reigning ill, is carried bound into Egypt. 9. Jehoiachin succeeding, reigns ill: he despises the prophets, and rebels against Xebuchadnezzar. 14. Jerusa- lem, for the sins of the priests and the people, is wholly destroyed. 22. The proclamation of Cyrus. Ezra, i: 1. Xote. "Verse 22 and the following verse are supposed to have been written by mistake from the book of Ezra, which begins the same way. These verses belong to a period 70 years later." — Bagster For history corresponding, to this chapter, see 2 Kings, from chap, xxiii : 30, to end of the book. § 15. Conclusion to Chronicles. These books have been held in low estimation and much neglected by Bible students and commentators, because they say that they contain few things which are not to be found in the pre- 152 HISTORY AND PROPHECY. ceding books. This, to some extent, is true; but it is equally true that they supply many circumstances omitted in the former accounts, with supplementary additions, and are written with a particular view, which was: (I) to sep- arate God's people, from the mixed multitude that returned from Babylon; (II) to ascertain the lineage of Judah, from which the Messiah should come ; and (HI) to re- establish them on their ancient footing. CHAPTER XXI. HISTORY AIS T D PROPHECY JUST BEFORE AXD AFTER THE DESTRUCTION OF JERUSALEM. § 1. Outline Jeremiah's Prophecy : Section V of Part I. (See preface to Section F, Chap. XX: §11.) The following is an outline of this section: Chap, xxxvii. The Chaldeans having left Jerusalem to meet the Egyptians, Zedekiah counsels with Jeremiah, whom he east into prison. Note. The date of this chapter is ascertained by its introduction. In point of time it comes before the thirty-second and thirty-third chapters of this book. Chap, xxxii. Jeremiah's prayer in prison; the captivity confirmed; and promises of a gracious return. Chap, xxxiii. The prophet still in prison; gives further promises of restoration, and of extraordinary prosperity under the reign of the Messiah. Chap, xxxiv. Prediction against Zedekiah and the dis- obedient Jews. Ch. XXI: § 2. outline jeremiah's prophecy. 153 Chap. xxxy. The temperance principles of the-Kechab- ites; God blesses them; they are a pattern of obedience for the Jews. Chap, xxxvi. Jeremiah's prophecy is written in a book; a portion read to the king, and then burned by him; after- wards it is rewritten. Chap, xxxviii. Jeremiah is taken out of the dungeon; his conference with the king; he is privileged to dwell in the court of the prison until the fall of Jerusalem. Chap, xxxix. Jerusalem is taken; Zedekiah is sent to Babylon, blind; Jeremiah is set at liberty. Chap. xl. Jeremiah, being liberated, goes to Gedaliah, the governor; and so do the dispersed Jews. Chap. xli. Ishmael murders Gedaliah and many of the people, and flees to the Ammonites, with a number of the Jews; but the latter are rescued from him by Johanan. Chap. xlii. Jeremiah is earnestly entreated to enquire of the Lord; he prophesies safety in Judea. Chap, xliii. His prophecy is discredited; he, with others, are carried down into Egypt; conquest of Egypt foretold. Chap. xliy. Jeremiah speaks of the desolation of Judah; he prophesies against them; he speaks of yieir obstinancy, ef the destruction of Egypt from the same cause; a rem- nant of Judah escape. Note. Some suppose that the discourse contained in this chapter was delivered 17 or 18 years after the capture of Jerusalem; and if so, it was written in Egypt, for the captives there. Chap, xlv may be considered as an episode. § 2. Outline Jeremiah's Prophecy: Section I, Part II. (See preface to Section I, Chap. XX: § 11.) This section comprises chapters xlvi-li. Chap. xlvi. Two distinct prophecies: (I) against Egypt; (II) against Babylon. Chap, xlvii. The destruction of the Philistines. 154 HISTORY AND PROPHECY. Chap, xlviii. The judgment against Moab (a son of Lot); their restoration. Chap. xlix. Judgments against the Ammonites (descend- ants of Benammi, son of Lot by incest); against Edom (descendants of Esau); against Damascus (Syrians); against Kedar and Hazor (Arabs, Ishmaelites); and against Elam (east of Persian Gulf, and eldest son of Shem), with prom- ise of their restoration. Chap. 1. The judgment against Babylon (Chaldeans); and the redemption of Israel (v. 4, 17, 34). Chap. li. The severe judgments continued against Baby- lon,* for the revenging of Israel; Jeremiah delivers this prophecy to Seraiah, to be first read, then cast into the Euphrates, in token of the perpetual sinking of Babylon. § 3. Jeremiah's Prophecy : Section II, Part II. (See preface to Section II, Chap. XX: §11.) This. section includes the remaining chapter, lii. The preceding chap- ter concludes with the words, "Thus far are the words of Jeremiah," and they inform us that this chapter was not written by him. Indeed, it contains little more than a literal copy of a part of the twenty-fourth chapter, and nearly all of the- twenty-fifth, of the second book of Kings. The object of collecting these passages into this chapter evidently was to furnish the captives, who had no Bibles and concordances to refer to as we have, with a series of facts necessary to the understanding of the preceding prophecies, and to give light- on the Lamentations which follow, serving as a key to them. * This prophecy was written in Jerusalem by Jeremiah, and was sent to the captives in Babylon by the hand of Seraiah, who went there as ambassador for King Zedekiah in the fourth year of his reign. Seraiah is directed to read it to his countrymen in captivity: "Then thou shalt read all these words." This was in 594 B. C, or 5G years before the taking of Babylon by Cyrus. Ch. XXI, §4. LAMENTATIONS OF JEREMIAH. 155 The following outline is 25resented: Verse 1. Zedekiah rebels. 4. Jerusalem is besieged and taken. 8. Zedekiali's sons are killed and his eyes put out. 12. Nebuchadnezzar burns and spoils the city. 24. He carries away the captives. 31. Eyil-merodach takes Jehoi- achin out of prison, and treats him kindly. § 4. Lamentations of Jeremiah. GOLDEN TOPIC, "EXPRESSIONS OF SORROW." The Lamentations are "Expressions of Sorrow," and are composed after the manner of funeral liymns* They express, with most pathetic tenderness, the prophet's grief for the desolation of Jerusalem, the captivity of Judah, and the miseries associated with famine. "The use of this book was no doubt great to the pious Jews in their sufferings, furnishing them with language to express their natural grief, and helping to preserve in them a lively remembrance of their desolated Zion; and as well for their children, who did not see it, who were in captivity. This poem affords the most elegant variety of affecting images that ever, probably, were collected into so small a compass. " — Henry. Dr. Smith divides the chapters chronologically as follows: Chap. i. During the siege. 2 K. xxv: 1-3. Chap. ii. After the destruction of the temple. 2 Chron. xxxvi: 17-20. Chap. iii. During his own confinement in the dungeon. Jer. xxxvii: 11-16. Chap. iv. After the capture of Zedekiah. 2 K. xxv: 6-7. Chap. v. (A prayer.) After the final abandonment of the city. 2 K. xxv: 26. *■ We find in 2 Chron. xxxv : 25, that Jeremiah wrote lamentations upon the death of King Josiah, which may have been used at the funeral, or sung in memoriam. This elegy has not reached us, but seems to have been long preserved among his countrymen. 156 HISTORY AND PROPHECY. § 5. Prophecy of Obadiah. (See Diagram, Chap. XXIII: §13.) GOLDEN TOPIC, "AGAINST THE EDOMITES." Nothing of the personal history of this prophet is known. Archbishop Newcome and others suppose that he nourished between the final destruction of Jerusalem (B. C. 588) and the destruction of Idumea, which took place a few years afterwards. He was contemporary with Jeremiah, whose prophecy respecting Edom is very similar to that of Oba- diah. Ver. 5; compare Jer. xlix: 7, 8. "This, book," says Dr. Smith, "ma}', from internal evidence, be placed between B. C. 586 and B. C. 583. It is remarkable for its closing prediction of the coming 'day of Jehovah.' 'Saviors shall come up on Mount Zion to judge the mount of Esau; and the kingdom shall be the Lord's/" The book contains but one chapter, which begins with representing God as calling the nations "Against the Edomites," demanding their utter destruction, and declar- ing that all their strongholds should not save them. The following are a few of the many references which show the ill treatment of the Jews by the Edomites: 2 Chron. xxviii: 17, with Ez. xxy: 12, 13, and Obadiah. (a. ) Who the Edomites tvere. The Edomites were of the posterity of Esau, the twin brother of Jacob, the sons of Isaac. Esau married two wives of the Canaanites, and there were born unto him eleven sons, who inter-married with the Horites. At length they swallowed up the sur- rounding nations, and the Israelites endured the crudest bondage from them. They were governed by eight kings, and were a powerful nation. About the time of the travels of the Hebrews in the wilderness, they united under one king, through fear of this wandering multitude. Many years after, in their prosperity, they gave some insult, to Ch. XXI: § 5. prophecy of obadiah. 15? David, who turned his victorious armies against them, and 18,000 were slain m the valley of salt. After this they were governed by deputies under the king of Judah. After being subject to tbe Israelites for about 150 years, they threw off the yoke and set up a king of their own. This revolt transpired during the reign of Jehoram, B. C. 890. (b.) The Prophecy Fulfilled. This prophecy, according to Usher, began to be fulfilled about five years after the destruction of Jerusalem, in B. C. 582. About this time the Chaldeans, under Nebuchadnezzar, with whom they had been in alliance against Judah, ravaged Jdumea, and dispossessed the Edomites of a great part of Arabia Petraea, of which they never recovered full possession. " The Jews, after their return from the 70 years captivity, under a decree of Cyrus, extended over and took possession of their land. Darius Hystaspes (B. C. 500) ordered them to deliver up to the Jews that part of their country which they had siezed. About B. C. 154 Judas Maccabeus put about 40,000 of them to the sword, and sacked their capital; and later, B. C. 130, John Hircanus entirely conquered them, and obliged them to incorporate with the Jewish nation. Just before the destruction of Jerusalem by Titus, A. D. TO, a body of Edomites deserted the Jews, and went off laden with booty; since which their name has perished from among men.'' — JosepMis. Thus were they rewarded for insulting their brethren the Jews; and while at this day we see the Jews subsisting as a distinct people, Edom is no more. Agreeably to the words of this prophet, he has been "cut off forever." " Thus the prophecy appears to have been very literal in its fulfillment." — Bagster. 158 HISTORY AND PROPHECY. § 6. Prophecy of Ezekiel. (See Chronology, Chap. XXIV: § 6; also Diagram, Chap. XXIII: § 13.) GOLDEN" TOPIC, "ENCOURAGEMENT." Ezekiel was the son of Buzi, and the great prophet during the Babylonian captivity. Like his predecessor, Jeremiah, he was a priest. He was taken in the captivity of Jehoia- kim, eleven years before the destruction of Jerusalem. He was among the Jewish exiles who settled on the banks of the river Chebar.* Chap, i: 1. We learn from an incidental allusion in chapter xxiv: 18 — the only reference which the prophet makes to his personal history — that he was married, and had a house (viii: 1) in the place of exile, and that he lost his wife by a sudden and unforeseen stroke. His mission lasted about twenty-two years. Nothing is known of his death. (a.) Divisions of the Prophecy. "The book may be divided into two parts, of which the destruction of Jeru- salem marks the turning point. Part I, chapters i-xxiv, contain predictions delivered before that event, and Part II, chapters xxv-xlviii, after it, as will be seen from chapter xxiv: 2."— Dr. Wm. Smith. The eminent German commentator, Haverneck, further divides the book into nine sections, as follows: (b.) Outline Part I. I. Chap, i-iii: 15. The call of Ezekiel to the prophetic office. II. Chap, iii: 16-vii. The general carrying out of the commission. * This river, according to Calmet, is the same as Habor, mentioned in 2 Kings, xvii: 6. If this is correct, ho prophesied to a remnant of the captives of Israel, who were taken captive by Shalmanezer 125 years before. We are disposed to adopt this theory, from the fre- quent reference to Israel, and then to Judah. See chap. iv:5, 6. The reader will observe the frequent use of the term house of Israei. Oh. XXI: § G. PROPHECY OF EZEKIEL. 159 III. Ohap. viii-xi. The rejection of the prophet because of their idolatry. IV. Chap, xii-xix. The sins of the age rebuked. V. Chap, xx-xxiii. The nature of the judgment, and the guilt that caused it. VI. Chap. xxiv. The meaning of the now commencing judgments. (c.) Outline Part II. VII. God's judgments denounced on seven heathen na- tions: Ainmon, xxv: 1-7; Moab, 8-12; Edom, 12-14; the Philistines, 15-17; Tyre, xxvi-xxviii : 19; Sidon, 20-24; Egypt, xxix-xxxii. Note. This section in the middle of the book (xxv-xxxii) contains a group of prophecies arranged regardless of the time when they were delivered, which is intentional, as elsewhere in Scripture, on the part of the writer or compiler. VIII. Chap, xxxiii-xxxix. Prophecies, after the destruc- tion of Jerusalem, concerning the future condition of Israel. IX. Chap, xl-xlviii. The glorious consummation; the new temple; its worship and glory. (d.) Character of the Prophecy. "The predictions of Ezekiel are marvelously varied. He has instances of vision (viii, xi), symbolical actions (iv: 8), similitudes (xii, xv), parables (xvii), proverbs (xii: 22; xviii: 1), poems (xix), allegories (as xxiii, xxiv), and open prophecies (as vi, vii, xx, etc.)." — Dr.Wm. Smith. The chronological order is followed throughout (the date of the prediction being constantly referred to), except in the section devoted to prophecies against heathen nations (xxv-xxxii), where it is several times abandoned. EzekiePs prophecy was largely for the " Encouragement " of Israel. In the vision of the resurrection of dry bones, it was intended, no doubt, to revive their hope; and it may be considered as an earnest of a general restoration here promised to the whole house of Israel. 160 HISTORY A^D PROPHECY. This prophet, like Jeremiah, who made yokes and bonds to illustrate and enforce his prophecies, also uses many illustrations, or object lessons, to enforce that which he designed for their instruction. See chap, iv: 1, which occurred, says Scott, while he was shut up in his own house, and unable to speak to the people (iii: 22). The prophet is here ordered to predict by this sign what would powerfully strike the fancy and affect the mind (even the most stupid), the siege of Jerusalem, with its forts, batter- ing rams, etc. "This shall be a sign for the house of Israel." iv: 1-3. (e.) The Lost Ten Tribes. "The ten tribes composing the kingdom of Israel were taken captive into Assyria by Tiglath Pileser, about 740 B. C. See 2 K. xvii: 6. Many have been the conjectures with respect to their fate; some authors maintaining that they became totally extinct ; others that they exist to this day in some unknown part of the earth. Yet to others it seems more probable that they, and the captives of the tribes of Judah and Benjamin, amalgamated during the Babylonian captivity; and they returned together as one people, under the edict of the Persian king. To this conclusion the reader will be brought, who attentively examines the bearing of the following passages: Neh. xi: 3, xii: 47; Ezra, iii: 1, vi: 16, viii: 35, x: 5; Eze- kiel, xxxvii: 16-28. On no other principle is it easy to account for the amount of the population which is stated by Josephus as existing m Palestine at his time." — Am. Bap. Mag., Oct. 1834. Note. The reader will now turn to the prophecy of Ezekiel and read it carefully; and when doing so, bear in mind the above sugges tion. Read each section distinctively, observing where each one begins and ends, and note the subject. Oh. XX.LL: § 1. prophecy of daniel. 161 CHAPTER XXII. HISTORY AFD PROPHECY DURING THE CAPTIVITY. § 1. Prophecy of Daniel. {See Chronology, Cha]). XXIV: § 6; also Diagram, Chap. XXI 11 : § 13.) GOLDEN TOPIC, "HISTORY AND PROPHECY." Daniel was not, like Jeremiah and Ezekiel, a priest, but like Isaiah, of the tribe of Judah, and probably of the royal family. He was carried to Babylon in the fourth year of Jehoiakim, king of Judah, in the year B. (J. 60-4 (t. e., eight years before Ezekiel), and probably about the eighteenth year of his age. He was placed in the court of Nebuchadnezzar, and was afterwards raised to great rank and power in the courts, both of the Babylonish and the Persian princes. He died at a very advanced age, haying prophesied during the whole period of the seventy years captivity. His last vision, respecting the succession of the kings of Persia, was written in his 90th year, and the third year of the reign of Cyrus. He was a man of deep piety and wisdom, even in his early life, which is attested of him by Ezekiel, xiv: 14-20, and xxviii: 3. He is characterized as one who spent much time in prayer. Much may be learned by observing the occasion when the prophetic vision is seen by these men of God. Thus the glorious display of the great work of redemption was made to Daniel when in the act of prayer, deeply bewailing his sins. Compare Dan. ix: 4. 21, etc.. with Isaiah, lvir 15. The book of Daniel was written in the darkness of the most terrible captivity the people of God evei suffered: "By the rivers of Babylon, there we sat down; yea, we 162 HISTORY ASTD PROPHECY. wept when we remembered Zion. We hanged our harps upon the willows in the midst thereof." Ps. cxxxvii: 1, 2. Its prophecies extend from the first establishment of the Roman Empire, more than 500 years B. C, to the general resurrection. The fulfillment of some of the prophecies give us the greatest assurance that the rest will be fulfilled, and at the same time affords an unanswerable proof that the Bible is the Word of God. (a.) Chronology of this Booh. Though we cannot settle the chronology of this book, we may say that it covers the whole 70 years of the captivity in Babylon, commencing with : I. B. C. 604 The first captivity under Jehoiakim. II. B. C. 580. The three Hebrew children cast into the furnace. III. B. C. 569. The derangement of Nebuchadnezzar. IV. B. C. 538. The writing on the wall. Y. B. C. 537. Daniel cast into the den of lions. VI. B. C. 534. He is exalted in the realm in the third year of Cyrus (ch. x: 1), at which time he is supposed to have been 94 years old. This great age, and the honor shown him, are supposed to have been the reasons for his not returning to Judea. To place this book in order of time, and where it may give the Bible student the greatest advantage in under- standing it, we have decided, from its historic nature, to let it precede the historical account as given in Ezra. (b.) Two General Parts. This book consists of both " History and Prophecy," and may be divided into two parts : PART I. "This comprises chap. i-vi. It is chiefly historical, comprising: (I) the education of Daniel and his three friends, their advancement and trials issuing in their great Ch. XXII: § 1. PROPHECY OF DANIEL. 163 honor; (II) the punishment of Nebuchadnezzar; and (III) the fall of Babylon. PART II. This includes chap, vii-xii. This part comprises: (I) various j)rophecies respecting the four great monarchies of Assyria, Persia, Greece and Home,* to be succeeded by the establishment of Christianity; (II) the division of the empire of Alexander into four, and the Roman into ten kingdoms; (III) the persecution of the Jews by Antiochus Epiphanes; (IV) the desolation of Jerusalem and of the sanctuary; (V) the power of Anti-Christ; (VI) the distinct assurance of the resurrection of the just and the unjust." — Nicholls. (c.) Outline Part I: Historical. {See § 1, b, part I.) Chap. i. The captivity of Jehoiakim, and the promotion of Daniel and his companions. Chap. ii. Nebuchadnezzar's dream forgotten; his demand of both the dream and its interpretation of the wise men; they failing to comply, Daniel relates and interprets the dream; and he and his three friends are promoted. Chap. iii. Nebuchadnezzar's image worshiped; the three friends of Daniel refusing, are cast into the fiery furnace; they are miraculously delivered. Chap. iv. Nebuchadnezzar's dream of a great tree; it is interpreted by Daniel, and is fulfilled. Chap. v. Belshazzar's feast; his death, and the end of the Babylonian empire. Chap. vi. Conspiracy against Daniel; he is cast into the den of lions, but is saved by an angel. * "These four empires had a particular relation to the people of God, who were subject to them in their turn. They were, therefore, particularly predicted, and we have in them, without the intermixture of others, a line of prophecy extending from the reign of Nebuchad- nezzar to the full and complete establishment of the kingdom of the Messiah." — Bp. Newton. 164 HISTORY AX J) PROPHECY. (d.) Outline Part II: Prophetical. (See § 1, b, part II) Chap. vii. Daniel's vision of the four beasts; vision of God's kingdom, and its interpretation. Chap. viii. Vision of the ram and the lie-goats; the 2300 days of sacrifice; the vision interpreted. Chap. ix. The prophet considers the duration of the captivity; he makes confession of sins; he prays for the restoration of Jerusalem; Gabriel informs him of the 70 weeks. Chap. x. Daniel's vision of the Son of God ; being troubled, he is comforted by the angel. Chap. xi. The overthrow of Persia by the king of Grecia; leagues and conflicts betAveen the kings of the north and south; invasion and tyranny of the Romans. Chap. xii. The general resurrection foretold; Daniel in- formed of the times. (e.) Daniel as a Writer. "Daniel, as a writer, is simple, and so conscientious that he relates the very words of the persons whom he introduces as speaking. His narratives and descriptions are simple and natural; and, in short, he writes more like a historian than a prophet. His predic- tions are extraordinary. They include the general history of the world, as well as the church of God under the Jewish and Christian dispensations, from the time in which he lived down to the end of time; and he alone of all the prophets foretells the exact time when the Messiah should appear and finish the work of redemption." — /)/•. Pat ton. § 2. Prophecy of Isaiah, Part TI. (See preface to Part 17. Chap. X VIII: § 7.) This part includes chapters xl-lxvi, and pertains to the prophecies in Babylon. (See Chronology, Chap. XXIV: §6.) Dr. Wm. Smith, speaking of Isaiah, says: "Thelast 27 chapters are supposed by many critics to have been written in the time of the Babylonian captivity, and are thereioie Oh. XXII: § 2. prophecy of isaiah. 165 ascribed to a * later Isaiah. ■ It is evident that the point of time and situation from which the prophet here speaks is that of the captivity of Babylon (compare lxiv: 10, 11); bnt this may be adopted on a principle which appears to characterize vision, viz: that the prophet sees the future as if presents" From Homes of God's People, p. 359, by Rev. TV. L. Gage, we extract the following: "Strictly speaking of this book, it seems to be not one book, but two; the first thirty-nine chapters being written during the reigns of Uzziah, Joth- am, Ahaz and Hezekiah, and the last twenty-seven by some unknown writer, who wrote apparently during the captivity. in a poetical light, however, the part by the ' Great Un- known.' as Ewald calls him, appears to be as rich and beautiful as that which is from the hand of Isaiah himself: and as some of the Psalms not written by David, but by unknown Hebrew poets, are as poetical as those which came from his royal hand, so it is with the mysterious author of the closing chapters of the book of Isaiah.*' "At this chapter (xl) begins the latter part of the proph- ecy of this book, which is not only divided from the former by the historical chapters, but seems to be distinguished from it in scope and style. In the former part, the name of the prophet was frequently prefixed to the particular sermon, besides the general title; as eh. ii: 1, eh. vii: 3, ch. xiii: 1. But this is ail one discourse, and the prophet not once named. The former consisted of many woes, hut this of many blessings. There the distress 'God's people were m was by the Assyrian, and their deliverance chiefly prophesied of: but that is here spoken of as a thing past- See ch. lii: 4. He furnished them with precious promises, for support and comfort in their trouble; and we may well imagine of what great use to them the glorious light of the prophecy was in that cloudy and dark day, and how much it helped to dry up their tears by the rivers of Babylon. 166 HISTORY AND PROPHECY. But it looks yet further, and to greater things. Much of Christ and gospel grace we meet with in the former part of the book, but in the latter part much more; and as if designed for a prophetic summary of the Xew Testament, it begins with that which begins the gos- pels: 'The voice of one crying in the wilderness' ch. xl: 3, and concludes with that which concludes the book of Rev.: 'The new heavens and the new earth/ ch. lxv: 22." — Henry. We have therefore concluded to let this concluding part of Isaiah's prophecy fill up the interim between the destruc- tion of Jerusalem and their deliverance from captivity. The reader will understand how well adapted it is to the circumstances of the people for whom it was intended. The following is an outline. (a.) Outline Isaiah, Continued; Chap. XL-LIX. Chap. xl. Predictions of the return of Judah from cap- tivity, and the coming of the Messiah. Chap. xli. God expostulates with his people about his mercies and promises, and the vanity of idols. Chap. xlii. A prophecy' of the Messiah, and Christ's mission to the Gentiles. Chap, xliii. God comforts his people by a prophecy of the destruction of their enemies, the Babylonians. Chap. xliv. Promises of God's spirit; an exposure of the folly of idol makers; an exhortation to praise the God of power. Chap. xlv. God calls Cyrus to deliver his people, and encourages him to trust in Him. Chap. xlvi. The idols of Babylon could not save them- selves, nor their worshipers. Chap, xlvii. God's judgment upon Babylon and Ohaldea, for their pride and boldness. Chap, xlviii. Israel reproved for not heeding the admon- itions of God's prophets. PROPHECY OF ISAIAH. 16T Chap. xlix. The Messiah, being rejected by the Jews. his mission is directed to the Gentiles. Note. Yer. 3: O Israel. "This cannot," says Bishop Lowth, "be. Isaiah; but it may apply to Messiah, who, in correspondence with the import of the name, 'As a prince had power with God and pre- vailed.' Compare Gen. xxxii: 28, and Hos. xii: 3, 4, with Heb. v: 7. Hitherto the subject of the prophecy has been chiefly confined to the redemption from the captivity, but here he is introduced in person declaring the full extent of his commission.'' Chap. 1. God justifies his own conduct. The Messiah predicts his own sufferings. Chap. li. Jews and Gentiles are directed to put their trust in Christ. Chap. lii. Zion roused from her stupor by the glad tid- ings of salvation. Chap. liii. The rejection, sufferings and death of the Messiah. See Acts, viii: 30, 31. Chap. liv. The Jewish church called to rejoice in her great accession of converts from the Gentiles. Chap. lv. A display of the fulness, freeness and excel- lence of the blessings of the gospel. Chap. lvi. Exhortation to piety, and judgments on wicked rulers. Chap. lvii. Blessed death of the righteous: idolaters re- proved; promise of happiness to the penitent. Chap, lviii. The hypocrisy of the Jews reproved; a word of encouragement to the penitent. Chap. lix. Wickedness of the people. The consequences- of sin. and the promise of the Eedeemer. See v. '20--21.* * I will now leave the reader to follow -out the reading of this very interesting prophecy after the manner introduced, not forgetting that it bears directly upon their deliverance from bondage, and also pre- figures the coming of Christ. 1(58 RETURN FROM CAPTIVITY. CHAPTER XXIII. RETTTKN FROM CAPTIVITY. § 1. Ezra: Continued History of the Jews. (See Chronology, Chap. XXIV: § 6.) golden topic, "god's providence.'* See Index. Having disposed of all the early prophets, and arranged them in their proper place chronologically, we are now ready to pursue the historical account of the Jews. This account is continued by Ezra, who was a priest, and who is supposed to have revised all the books of the Bible then extant, disposing them in their proper order, and settling the canon of Scripture for his time. See Poole*. This book gives us the history of 79 years, being a con- tinuation of the history of this people from the time at which the Chronicles conclude, which was written by the same hand. It begins with a repetition of the last two verses of Chronicles, which is attributed to an oversight of the transcribers. This history harmonizes most strictly with the prophecies of Haggai and Zechariah, which should be read in connection. "It is to be observed/' says Watson, "that between the dedication of the temple and the departure of Ezra, that is. between the sixth and seventh chapters of this book. there is an interval of about fifty-eight years, during which nothing is here related concerning the Jews, except that, contrary to God's command, they intermarried with the Gentiles." Ezra, like the Chronicles, consists of journals kept from tune to time, which were afterwards strung together, and either abridged or added to. as the case required, by a later Ch. XXIII: § 3. OUTLINE OF EZRA. 169 hand. This later hand in the book of Ezra was his own, as appears in the last four chapters. § 2. Three General Parts. This book consists of three parts, as follows: PART I. Chap. i-ii. Relates the return of the Jews from their captivity in Babylon, particularly informing us upon what encouragement and in what numbers they came. PART II. Chap, iii-vi. Gives an account of the rebuilding and dedication of the temple, notwithstanding the hindrances from the Samaritans. Note. Interim of fifty-eight years between chapters vi and vii. PART III. Chap. vii-x. Relates to the journey of Ezra to Jerusalem as a deputy from the king of Babylon, and, on his arrival, his deep mourning over the marriages of the Jews with strange women. § 3. Outline of Ezra. Part I (See preface to Part I, § 2.) Chap. i. Cyrus issues a proclamation for rebuilding the temple, and the return of the Jews to their own land. B. C. 536. Chap. ii. A register of families, showing the number who returned of the people, priests, Levites, etc. Part II. (See preface to Part II § 2). Chap. iii. The altar set up. and the foundation of the temple laid. B. C. 535. Chap. iv. The building of the temple opposed by adver- saries, and stopped by a decree of Artaxerxes. king of Persia. Chap. v. The Jews roused to engage in work on the temple by Haggai and Zechariah, but are again opposed. A letter is sent to Darius, king of Babylon. B. C. 519. Outline continued, see £ 7. 170 RETURN FROM CAPTIVITY. § 4. Introduction to the Restoration Prophets {Haggai, Zechariah and. Mala clii). Says Dr. T. V. Moore: " The prophetic office is dmded into three eras: The first ends with the age of Samuel, in which we find the office but rarely filled, because of the purely theocratic character of the period. God ruled his people without the inter- vention of an executive, hence there was little need of a succession of prophets. But in the age of Samuel a second era begins, which extends to the age of Uzziah, about B. C. 800. This is the era of the prophets of action; hence the age of the kings is the age of the prophets. . . The third era began with the age of Uzziah, and was the era of written prophecy. It was then the prophets began to turn aAvay from the present and look more to the future, and the Messianic element began to grow more distinct. This era continued about 400 years. It is with the second and third of these eras that we have- mainly to do in tracing the development of the prophetic office. At the close of the second era we find the appear- ance of a prophetic literature in the Messianic Psalms. They prepared the way for the era of the prophets of the word, or that which was to be written. Samuel was the great head of the prophetic order, and doubtless enacted rules regarding it that gave it perma- nent form. It was in his time that we first find "Schools of the Prophets." But that God did not confine himself to them is proved by the case of Amos, who informs us that he had no connection with these normal institutes for training prophets (Amos, vii: 14); and the case of Elisha, who was called directly from the plough (1 K. xix: 19). These schools of the prophets were at Bethel, Gilgal. Haniah and Jericho, all within a short distance of each other, and in the tribe of Benjamin. Ch XXIII: § 4. THE RESTORATION PROPHETS. 171 The third era, from Uzziah to the time of Malachi, is the era of written prophecy, and presents several marked divisions/ in each of which we find a group of prophets. In this era the grand division is made by the two kingdoms of Israel and Judah. We have resulting from this division three classes of prophets: (1) prophets to the ten tribes; (2) prophets to the Gentiles; (3) prophets of Judah. I. Prophets of the Ten Tribes. These are Hosea and Amos,, who, although residents of Judah, were called to prophesy in Israel. II. Prophets to the Gentiles. These were Jonah, Nahum and Obadiah, whose prophecies were directed toward the Gentiles. Jonah and Nahum directed their prophecies against Nineveh, and stand at the beginning and close of an era in Ninevite history. Obadiah directed his prophecy mainly against Edom, and hence may be classed with the prophets of the Gentiles. III. Prophets of Judah. These constitute the most im- portant division. This portion of the history of the kingdom of Judah has five distinct periods, each of which has its own peculiar prophecies. We have: 1. The Culminating Period, which was between Uzziah and Hezekiah, about B. C. 800 to B. C. 700. When com- pared with the centuries preceding and following it, it was a century of prosperity, and the highest prosperity ever reached by the kingdom of Judah. The prophets of this period are Isaiah, Joel and Micah. Their tone is more cheerful, and the light of the future seems to rest on their pages, and they are all characteristically Messianic. 2. The Declining Period. This extends from Manasseh to Zedekiah, a little more than a century. To this period belong Zephaniah and Habakkuk, on which pages rest the shadows of the setting sun. 172 RETURN FROM CAPTIVITY. 3. The Captivity. This is the mournful era, belonging to the prophet Jeremiah. 4. The Exile. To this period, when nothing' was left but hope of the future, belong the prophets of the future, Ezekiel and Daniel. 5. The Restoration. To this period belong the three last recipients of the prophetic gift during the Old Testa- ment dispensation, viz: Haggai, Zechariah and Malachi. It was the peculiar work of these prophets to sift the people, in order to extract the bitter elements contained in them, to rouse and incite them to the work before them, and to correct evils that were peculiar to that period. The historical books of Ezra and Nehemiah are the necessary counterparts of the prophecies, and they shed mutual light on each other.*' § 5. Prophecy of Haggai. {See Diagram, Chapter XXIII: § 13.) GOLDEN TOPIC, "CAPTIVITY OF JUDAH." "Haggai is the first of the three prophets that appeared after the captivity. Of him personally Ave know but little. The name means literally my feast, and throws no light on his personal history. It is supposed he was born in Baby- lon during the captivity, and came to Jerusalem when Cyrus permitted a portion of the Jews to return under Zerubbabel, B. C. 53(1. 2 Chron. xxxvi: 23; Ezra, i: 1: also ii: 1. The prophecies of Haggai are dated with an unusual accuracy. The first was delivered on the first day of the sixth month of the second year of Darius, B. C. 520, and the last on the twenty-fourth day of the ninth month, thus extending through a period of not quite four months. (a.) General Divisions. PROPHECY I. (. $. J0C 2d. fei, : Wee/liny IPio/ikei (gafulividy. " Soc sd. Sam. : ^xkie&Honb oi Sfoiicw. *' " Soo 4m, §le. : ^ncou/iaamienti '. " " 6>15 5lh. Wan.: j2o 2. Jcrl : §mdlt fudamenfa. a $00 3. ®/lmob : (galdimiu oj ^'caei. u 7*1 J>. 06a. : gwalwd 4he §dcnii4&>. t( 68^ 6. Jonah : §/o (^/Ineveh. u Mt S. ct (lie. : (ghim\ ($fmadom. u >J40 Part II "§-■ ss ■/■ ^fah. : (gomfo'idn'i . { (gaMividu?) (( fJ4S 8. $falj. : ^laaind 4 he (ghaldeam. l( M ( i- Uik. : (gafi4im4u oj fudah. It ijc 40. $ag. : id and ?d (gomina oj (gk/iid. 11 52(j 44. jfcch. : gfke (gk'ivd. (( 520 42. ®ALaL : §he $a,ji4i&4. u u n SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. Part I. What is the subject of this lesson? Why so called? This is a part of what grand division? How many books does it contain? Note. Draw brackets and place numbers on the board. 190 LESSOR XII AND XIII. What is the name of the first? Note. Call for them in order. Who was the first? Whose son was he? (Hos. i: 1.) During the reign of what kings did he prophesy? (Hos. i: 1.) In what century did these kings live? See Ref. Bible; also Ch. XVIII: § 3. What prophets were contem- porary with Hosea ? During how many years did he prophesy? Date? See Ref. Bible. Note. Class should be required to find some prophecy referring to Christ. (See %'S, a.) What is the name of the second subdivision? (Ch. XVIII: § 6.) Note. Question on this part, then call out the third (Ch. XVIII: § 4), the fourth (Ch. XXI: § 5), the fifth (Ch. XVIII: § 2), and the sixth (Ch. XVIII : § 10) in like manner. Review. Part II. What is the name of the seventh subdivision? (Ch. XVIII: § 12.) Note. Question, and then call out the eighth (Ch. XX: § 13), the ninth (Ch. XVIII: § 14), the tenth (Ch. XXIII: § 5), the eleventh (Ch. XXIII: § 6), and the twelfth (Ch. XXIII: § 12), questioning as time will admit. Then review both parts from the board. Ch. XXIII. TABULAE VIEW OF THE PROPHETS. 191 TABULAE VIEW OF THE PROPHETS. The prophets arranged in chronological order, showing where they should be read in connection with the historical books: Following 2 Kings (God's Attributes): Chapter xiv. JoitAH (B. C. 862), Hosea and Amos. " xv. Joel and Isaiah, ch. i-v. " xvi. Micah. " xix. Nahum. " xxi. Zepha^iah. Latest date in the Kings, B. C. 563. Following 2 Chronicles (Review): Chapter xxviii. Isaiah, ch. vi-xxxix. " xxxiii. Jeremiah, ch. i-xxxi. xxxv. Habakkuk, B. C. 636. Between the Chronicles and Ezra, following 2 Chronicles (Captivity): Chapter xxxvi. Jeremiah, ch. xxxii-li. " " Obadiah. " " Ezekiel. " " Daniel. Isaiah, ch. xl-lxvi. B. C. 456. Following Ezra (Restorative) : Chapter v. Haggai, B. C. 520. ".* Zechariah, B. C. 520. Following Nehemiah (Reformation): Chapter xiii. Malachi, B. C. 400. 192 DEVOTIONAL. CHAPTEE XXIY. DEVOTIONAL. § 1. Job. {See Chap.V: § 2, a; also Index.) GOLDEN TOPIC, "PATIENCE." "That Job is a real character is proved by the manner in which he is introduced by the prophet Ezekiel (xiv: 14). and the apostle James (v: 11). He was an inhabitant of Uz, in that part of Arabia bordering on Judea, and has been supposed to be descended from TTz, the eldest son of Nahor, Abraham's brother. Elihu, in reckoning the modes of divine revelation, takes no notice of the delivery of the Mosaic law; nor does there seem to be an}* allusion to Jewish history in any part of the book. Hence Job is supposed to hare lived before Moses, and this book to be the oldest in the world. As to the writer of this book, it can not be positively ascertained. Some think it to be Job, while others attrib- ute its authorship to Moses. It is interesting as containing the earliest record of patriarchal religion as it was professed by one not probably of the seed of Abraham." — Nicholls, (a.) Three General Parts. It may be divided into three parts : PART I. Chap, i. ii: 1-10. A narrative of this eminent servant of God, suddenly plunged from the greatest prosperity into dec}) affliction — the entire loss of his property, clnl- dren and health — which he bears with most exemplary " Patience." PART II. Chap, ii: 11. to close chap. xli. A controversy } which wa> a series of yet heavier trials fco Job, and which originated in the visit of his three friends. Eliphaz, Bildad and Zophar. Oh. XXIV:. g 1. job. 1913 PAllT III, Chap, xlii The issue of the narrative and the contro- versy seen in the deep repentance of Job; God's reproof of his three friends; his appointing to offer sacrifice, which, through the intercession of Job, removed from them God's anger; and his promoting Job to yet greater prosperity than he had before his affliction. (b. ) Analysis. The following i >s an analysis of this book as given by Henry: (1.) The history of Job's sufferings, and his patience under them (ch. i, ii), not without mixture of human frailty (ch. iii ). (2.) A dispute between him and his friends on his suffer- ings and frailties, in which the opponents were Eliphaz (of Teman in Idumea. This was originally the name of a prince of the posterity of Esau. Gen. xxxvi: 11-15), Bil- dad (who belonged to a people descended from Sliuah, the Last of the six sons of Keturah, the second wife of Abraham. Gen. xxv: it), and Zophar (who is called the Kaamathite; nothing is further said of his descent or place of abode). The respondent was Job. (3.) The moderators were: (a) Elihu, ch. xxxii-xxxvii; (b) God himself, ch. xxxviii-xli. (4.) The. issue of all. in Job's honor and prosperity (ch. xlii). We learn that many are the afflictions of the righteous. but the Lord delivers them out of them all. (c.) Depository of Patriarchal Religion. "This book then." says J. M. Good, supposing Moses to be the author, "becomes a depository of patriarchal religion, the best and fullest in the world, and drawn up by the pen most compe- tent to do it justice. It will then appear that the chief doctrines of the patri- archal religion, as collected from different parts of this poem, were as follows: 194 DEVOTIONAL. I. The creation of the world by one supreme and eternal intelligence. Chap, xxxviii-xli. II. Its regulation by his perpetual and superintending providence. Chap, i: 9-12, ii: 10, v: 8-27, ix: 4-13, and almost every ensuing chapter. III. The intentions of his providence carried into effect by the administration of a heavenly hierarchy. Chap, i: 6, 7; iii: 13, 19; v: 1; xxxiii: 22, 23. IV. This heavenly hierarchy composed of various ranks and orders (Col. i: 16; Dan. iv: 17), possessing different names, as servants, angels, intercessors, destroyers, the heavenly saints or hosts. Chap, iv: 18; v: 2; xv: 15; xxxiii: 22, 23. V. An apostasy or defection in some rank or order of these powers (ch. iv: 18, xv: 15), of which Satan seems to have been one, and perhaps chief. Chap, i: 6-12: ii: 2-T. VI. The good and evil powers or principles equally formed by the Creator; both employed by him in the administration of his providence; and both amenable to him at stated courts, held for the purpose of receiving an account of their respective missions. Chap, i: (!, 7; ii: 1. VII. A day of future resurrection, judgment and retri- bution to all mankind. Chap, xiv: 13-15; xix: 25-29; xxi: 30; xxxi: 14. VIII. The propitiation of (or atonement, reconciliation to) the Creator, in the case of human transgressions, by sacrifices (ch. i: 5; xlii: 8), and the mediation and inter- cession of a righteous person, ("hap. xlii: 8, 9." An Englishman said to Moody: "Job is the key to the whole, Hible; if yon understand Job yon will understand the entire Bible." Moody replies: "No; I don't understand that Job is the key to the whole Bible. How do you make that out?" He said: "1 divide -lob into seven heads. The first head is: A perfect man untried. Thai is what God said Oh. XXIV: § 2. psalms. 195 about Job; that's Adam in Eden. The second head is: Tried by (diversity; and Job fell as Adam fell in Eden. The third head is* The wisdom of the world. The world •tries to restore Job; the wisdom of the world is centred in his three friends. Then in the fourth place, in comes the days-man; that is Christ. Then in the fifth place, God speaks. And in the sixth, Job learns his lesson. Job said: 'I abhor myself, and repent in dust and ashes.' And the seventh head is this, that God restores him," § 2. Psalms. Written by King David and others. {See Index; also Ch. V: § 2, b.) GOLDEN TOPIC, " SACKED HYMNS." This is a collection of "Sacred Hymns" and prayers, most of which were composed by David. (a.) Adaptation to Worship. Home describes the book of Psalms "as an epitome of the Bible, adapted to the purposes of devotion. In the language of this book the prayers of the church have been offered up from age to age." In them there is a peculiar adaptation to us. We find language to* express our thoughts, in prayer or praise, no' matter what our circumstances in life, whether it be that of the deepest sorrow or trials, or of joy and gratitude. In some of the Psalms are expressions of praise and adora- tion, which display the majesty, power, goodness and other attributes of God; others are song-s of thanksgiving; others are prayers, pleading the mercy of God and the forgiveness of sin; and others still seek deliverance from danger and affliction; indeed, covering every conceivable condition in life. Our Savior taught his disciples how to pray. Many of these Psalms no less teach us how to pray, even putting words into our mouths whereby we may give expression to our thoughts. 196 DEVOTIONAL. (b. ) Messianic Character. Some of the Psalms are prophetical, relating to Christ and the gospel times. Thus : " Psalm xl speaks of our Lord's coming in our nature to abolish the Mosaic dispensation, of which ' sacrifices and offerings' was the distinguishing feature. See Heb. x: 5. Psalm cxxxii: 11, predicts that the Messiah should be of the family of David. See Acts, ii: 30. Psalm xlv: 6-7, declares his divine nature. See Heb. i: 8. Psalm cxviii: 22, quoted six times in the New Testament,, foretells the rejection of him by the Jews. Psalm xxii, his suffering on the cross. Psalm xvi: 9-11, his. resurrection. See Acts, ii: 2L Psalm lxviii : 18, his ascension, and sending the Holy Spirit. See Eph. iv: 8. Psalms lxix and cix, the sore judgment which should befall Judas and the Jewish nation. See Rom. xi: 9-10, and Acts, i: 20. Psalm cxvii, the call of the Gentiles (see Rom. xv: 11): and Psalm lxxii, the final triumph of the Messiah's king- dom in the earth. Nearly fifty of tin* Psalms are quoted in the New Testa- ment, which shows how frequently our Lord made use of them to instruct his disciples that he was the Christ. See Luke, xxiv: 14." — Nicfiolls. (c.) Fire Collections. "The whole consists of five dis- tinct collections, made at different times, in the order m which they now stand. The close of each is indicated bj a doxology. COLLECTION I. Psalm, ii-xli. The first collection made, almost all of which are noted as David's, and was doubtless intended to be a collection of his Psalms. There are hut three which are not noted as his. namely: the 2d, loth and 33d; and nothing in the contents forbids the supposition that he was the writer. The 1st Psalm is supposed to be written by Ezra as an introduction. Oh. XXIV: § 2. I'sauis. 197 COLLECTION II. Psalm xlii-lxxii. This is a collection of Levitical Psalms i xlii-1), seven by the sons of Korah and one by Asaph, chiefly of a national character, followed by nineteen Psalms of David, and three of which the writer is not named, closing with one from Solomon. The appended note, •The prayers of David, the son of Jesse, are ended,' was probably inserted here when the next collection was added, in order to show where the productions of the royal psalm- ist, as then collected, closed. COLLECTION III. Psalm lxxiii-lxxxix. This third collection is composed of eleven Psalms by Asaph, and one of four Psalms by the sons of Korah, and one by Ethan. Only the 86th Psalm is ascribed to David; and with this exception, the whole collection is from those connected with the temple service. COLLECTION IV. Psalm xc-cvi. This fourth includes but three whose writers are mentioned, namely: the 90th, by Moses, and the 101st and 103d, by David. Except these three, they are very general in their contents, and were apparently intended for use in the temple service and at national festivals. COLLECTION V. Psalm cv-cl. This fifth was a collection, apparently, of all the psalms extant when it was made, and not included in the previous ones. It contains fifteen psalms of David, one of Solomon, and twenty-eight of which the writers are not given. It includes smaller separate collections of an earlier date; the pilgrim songs, fifteen in number (cxx- cxxxiv), and Psalm cxi-cxviii, designed for temple service and for festival occasions. There is also a collection of David's psalms placed by themselves (cxxxviii-cxlv), and the whole is closed with songs of praise to Jehovah (Ps. cxlvi-cl). 198 DEVOTIONAL. At what time or by whom these several collections were made is unknown. In the time of Hezekiah, the psalms authorized to be sung in the temple service were those of David and of Asaph (2 Chron. xxix: 30). The last two col- lections could not have been made till after the captivity, as is shown by the subject matter in them."— Conant. § 3. Proverbs. Written by King Solomon. (See Index; also Chap. V: § 2, c.) GOLDEN TOPIC, "MAXIMS." This book is a collection of Maxims, written by Solo- mon. "We are not," says Bishop Hopkins, "generally to expect an} r connection, either of sense or sentences, in this book; but this is like a heap of pearls, loose and unstrung." The Proverbs are frequently quoted in the New Testa- ment. See Matt, xv: 4; Luke, xiv: 11; Rom. xii: 16, 17, 20; 1 Thess. v: 14; 1 Peter, iv: 8, v: 5; Jas. iv: 6, etc. (a.) Design of this Book. The design of this book is to instruct the young, at their entrance into public and active life. "It is very important," says Nicholls, "to observe that Solomon, the writer of this book, lays down this rule as the foundation of all instruction: ' The fear of the Lord is the beginning of wisdom.' " "Though we be wise, by reading this book we are made wiser. It bridles the tongue, corrects the wanton eye, and ties the unjust hand in chains. It persecutes sloth; chas- tises all absurd desires; teaches prudence; raises man's courage; and. represents temperance and chastity after such a fashion that one cannot but have them in venera- tion. "—Basil Bagster says: "These maxims are laid down so clearly, copiously, impressively, and in such variety, thai every man who wishes to be instructed may take what lie chooses, and those lie likes best." Cll. XXIV: §4. ECCLESIASTES. 199 (b.) Five General Parts. This book may be divided into five parts. PART I. Chap. i-ix. Contains a sort of preface: the teacher giv- ing his pupil a connected series of admonitions, cautions and encouragements to study wisdom. PART II. Chap, x-xx: 16. Comprises what may be strictly called proverbs, namely: unconnected maxims. PART III. Chap, xx : 17-xxiv. In which the teacher renews his connected admonitions to study wisdom. PART IV. Chap, xxv-xxix. Contains proverbs supposed to have been taken from some larger collection of Solomon, by the men of Hezekiah; that is, by the prophets whom he em- ployed, as Eliakim, Joah, Shebna, and probably Hosea, Micah, and even Isaiah. PART V. Chap, xxx-xxxi. Consists of the last two chapters; the first of which contains the wise observations and instruc- tions of Agur to his pupils Ithiel and Ueal, and the other the excellent lessons addressed to King Lemuel by his mother. § 4. Ecclesiastes. Written by King Solomon, B. C. 977. {See Index; also Chap. V: § 2, d.) GOLDEX TOPIC, " HAPPIXESS." Ecclesiastes: "That is, the preacher, or one who pro- claims to a jmblic assembly. The purpose of the book is explicitly declared in the title, namely: to demonstrate the vanity of all earthly acquisitions, and show that, when the heart is set on earthly enjoyments, all will prove to be ' vanity and vexation of spirit.' The course of the argu- 200 DEVOTIONAL. ment anticipates the objections of the licentious and the thoughtless. It is necessary to keep the eye steadily fixed on the purport of the discourse, and to discriminate what the author delivers in his own, and what in an assumed char- acter. " — Carpenter. "This book was evidently written by Solomon, and is generally considered as a penitential discourse, composed a little before his death, to warn others, by his own sad experience, of the vanity of all created things, and of the misery of sin, both here and hereafter. (a.) For the Young. Let the young, learning from it the guilt and danger of yielding to the imaginations of the heart (xi: 9), remember their Creator in the day of then- youth (xii: 1, etc.); old age, even if they reach it, being a very unfit season to begin so important a concern as the salvation of the soul." — -Nicliolls. Mr. H olden, in his attempt to illustrate this book, divides the work into two parts: I. Chap, i-vi: 10, as demonstrating the vanity of all earthly conditions, occupations and pleasures; and II. Chap, vi: 11— xii, as eulogising Wisdom, and in de- scribing its nature, excellence and beneficial effects. § 5. Song of Solomon. (See Index; also Oh. V: §2,e.) GOLDEN TOPIC, "ALLEGORY." Neither Jew nor Christian has ever doubted the canon- icity of this. book. The sacred writers were authorized to illustrate God's relation to the church by the figure of a marriage. Solomon therefore, in celebrating his marriage, was naturally led by a train of correspondent reflections; and the idea must have been the more forcibly suggested to him as he was about to build the temple, a place where God was about to meet his people. The spiritual Allegory Ch. XXIV: § 5. song of solomos. 201 was thus worked up by Solomon to its highest perfection. Solomon, in the glow of an inspired fancy, not supposing he would be misunderstood, describes God and his church, with their respective attributes and graces, under colorings familiar and agreeable to mankind, and exhibits their ardent affection under the figure of earthly love. (a.) A Poem. This poem maybe considered, as to its form, a dramatic poem. There is a succession of time, and a change of places, to different parts of the palace and royal gardens. The persons introduced as speakers are the bridegroom and bride and their respective attendants. The interchange of dialogue is carried on in a mild and digres- sive manner; but the speeches are adapted to the persons with appropriate elegance. The companions of the bride compose a kind of chorus. Solomon and his queen assume a very simple style. The poem abounds with beauties, and presents every- where a delightful display of nature, painted in its most interesting season, and described with every ornament that an inventive fancy could furnish. It is justly entitled the Song of Songs, as being superior to any that could be produced by an uninspired hand, and tending, if properly understood, to purify the mind and elevate the affections from earthly to heavenly things. Xo one can fully appre 7 ciate this beautiful poem as can he whose heart overflows with love to Glod and love to man. 202 DEVOTIONAL. LESSON XIV 4*4. fob : iPaiience. \alm* Jc6:$. & 4S20 Wamd and o4het*. Solomon, <§. (g. 4045 a a m (C u 404* 3d. HP'iov. : oMaxim*. Mh. §cci. : ^fafikine**. s4h. &. 0. : <$$Ueaoiu. SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AXD NOTES. What is the name of the second Old Testament grand division? Into how many parts is it divided? What lias been done with it? (Ch. Y: § 2.) What is the definition of devotional? How many hooks in the devotional? What is the name of the first? What is the golden topic of Job? (Jas. v: 11.) Who was the probable writer? What is the date of this book? (Eef. Bible.) This book contains the earliest record of what ? (Ch. XXIY: § 1.) Into haw many parts may it be divided? (§ 1, a.) Note. Bring out the subject of the following parts inv § 1, as time will admit. What is the name of the second subdivision? (Oh. XXIV: § 2.) What are they a collection of? (§ 2; also Ch*. V:§2.) Writers? Adaptation? (§ %, a.) Character? (b.) Divisions? (c.) What is the name of the third book in this division? What is the golden topic? (Ch. XXIV: S 3.) Writer? Design? (§ 3, a.) Divisions? (b.) What is the name of the fourth hook? See Index. What is the golden topic? (Ch. XXIV: g 4.) Writer? Date? What may it be considered? In what time of his life is it Ch. XXIV: § 6. chronology. 203 supposed to have been written? To whom was it addressed? (Eccl. xii: 1, 2, etc.) Against what does he guard the young? What is the name of the fifth book? What is the golden topic? (Ch. XXIV: § 5; also Ch. V.) What does this allegory represent ? Note. Review from the blackboard. § 6. Chronology of the Historical Books of the Old Testament. (See Diagram, Chap. XXIII: § 13.) GENESIS, " Origin." history O.K.. From the creation of man, - 4004 To the death of Joseph., - 2369 LEADING CHARACTERS. 1635 Adam and the line of Patriarchs, of which Abraham was the twelfth. Isaac, Jacob and the twelve tribes, of which Benjamin was the young- est representative. (See Chap. VII: § 5.) EXODUS, "Departure.' From the preparation to leave Egypt, - - 1635 To the building of the Tabernacle, - - 145 LEADING CHARACTERS. 1490 Moses, Aaron, Pharaoh and his daughter, Miri- am, and Jethro, the father-in-law of Moses. (See Chap. VIII: § 1.) LEVITICUS, "Duties of Levites." From the taking possession of the Tabernacle, - 1490 To the instituting of Priesthood, Sacrifices and Festivals, ------ 3 mos. LEADING CHARACTERS, Moses, Aaron and his sons. (See Ch. IX: § 1.) 204 OLD TESTAMENT CHRONOLOGY. NUMBERS, "Census Taking." Vr , of History B.C. From the numbering of Israel in the wilderness, 1490 To the renumbering in Moab, - 38 LEADING CHARACTERS. 1452 Moses, Aaron, the Spies, Caleb and Joshua, Balak and Balaam. (See Chap. X : § 1.) DEUTERONOMY, "Law Rehearsed." From the Rehearsing of the Law, - - - 145-2 To the blessing of the twelve tribes by Moses, 5 wks. leading characters. Moses, Joshua and the Levites. (See Chap. XI: %1.) JOSHUA, "Conquest." From the Lord's charge to Joshua, and crossing the Jordan, ------ 1452 To the death of Eleazar and Joshua, - 9 LEADING CHARACTERS. 1443 Joshua, Rahab and the Spies, Achan, Gibeon- ites, Caleb and Eleazar. (See Chap. XII: § 6.) JUDGES, "Government." From the tribe of Judah warring against the Canaanites, and Gideon delivering Israel, - 144:> T<> the death of Samson (history ends with ch. xvi), - - - ~ - - - - 326 LEADING CHARACTERS. 1117 Caleb, Otbniel (first judge of Israel), Ehud, Deborah, Barak, Gideon, Abimelech, Tolah and Jair, Jephtha and Samson. (See Ch. XIII: § 1.) Ch. XXIV: § 6. CHRONOLOGY. 205 RUTH, » Origin of David's Family." gfc* B.t>. From Elimelecli driven by famine into the coun- try of Moab, To the marriage of Ruth to Boaz, the grand- father of David, Note. This history covers about ten years, and is supposed to have .occurred during the time of Gideon, and is an episode in the chronology of Judges. (See Ohap. XIV: §1.) I SAMUEL. "Kings of Israel." From the birth of Samuel, - - - - 1117 To the death of Saul and his sons, - 61 LEADING CHARACTERS. 1056 Samuel (the prophet), Eli and his sons, Saul, David and Jonathan. (See Chap. XV: § 1.) II SAMUEL, " Kings of Israel." From the death of Saul, - - - - 1056 To the 38th year of the reign of David, - 38 LEADING CHARACTERS. 1018 David, king of Israel; Abner, chief captain of Saul, and Joab of David; the prophet Nathan; Uriah: Absalom and Solomon, sons of David. Note. To complete this history we must include 1 Chron. xxii-xxix, as a supplement. (See Ch. XVI. % 1.) Supplement to II Samuel. 1 Chronicles, chap, xxii-xxix, - 1018 David's preparation to build the Temple, - 3 LEADING CHARACTERS. 1015 David, Solomon, Levites, Priests, Singers, Por- ters and Captains. (See Chap. XVI: § 5.) 206 OLD TESTAMENT CHRONOLOGY. I KINGS, "Attributes of God." Prefaced with David's old age, and declaring Solomon king, - - To the death of Jehoshaphat, king of Judah, LEADING CHARACTERS. David, Solomon, Adonijah and Joab, Hiram, king of Tyre, and the Queen of Sheba. Kingdom divided, B. C. 975. Yrs. of History B.C. KINGS AND PROPHETS OF JUDAH. Eehohoam, Shemaiah, Abu ah, Iddo, Asa, Az- ariah and Hanani, Je- hoshaphat, Micaiah, Jdhaziel and Eliezer, Jehoram, Elijah. KINGS AND PROPHETS OF ISRAEL. Jeroboam, Ahaziah, Nadab, B a ash a, Jehu, Elah, Zimri, Omri, Ahab, Ahaziah, Eli- jah and Elisha. {See Ch. XVIII: §1.) Note. Kings in cafitals and prophets in itahcn. KINGS AND PROPHETS OF JUDAH. A ii a zi ah, Elijah ; At n- a li a ii (Queen), Jo ash, Zecha Halt ; A ma z i ah , A Prophet ; Uzziah. Zechariah, Amos, Jopi and Isaiah ; Jot i i a m , Isaiah and Joel ; Ahaz, 1015 126 889 Ii KINGS, "Attributes of God." From the death of Ahab and the accession of Ahazian to the throne of Israel, and Jeho- ram to Judah, To the captivity under Jehoiakim, - - 294 LEADING CHARACTERS. 889 595 KINGS AND PROPHETS OF ISRAEL. Ahaziah, Elijah and Elisha; Jehoram, Jehu, Jehoahaz, Elisha; Je- hoash (Joash, 2 Kings, xiii: 14), Jeroboam II, Jonah and Hosea ; Zech- ariah, Shallun, Men- Oh. XXIV: §6. CHRONOLOGY KINGS AND PROPHETS OF JUDAH. Obed, Isaiah and Micah; Hezekiah, Isaiah and Micah; Manasseh, Mi- cah ; Amon, Josiah, Zephaniah, Jeremiah and Habakkuk; Jehoahaz, Zeph., Jet. and Hab.; Jehoiakim,* Zeph., Jer. and Hob.; Jehoiachin, Jer. and Hob.; Zede- kiah, Obed, Jer. and Hab. Jerusalem destroyed by Nebuchadnezzar, B. 0. 577. KINGS AND PROPHETS HuL°y f . OF ISRAEL. ahem,Pekahiah, Amos and Hosea ; Pekah, Hoshea, Hosea and Na- hum. Israel taken captive into Assyria by Shalman- eser, about B. C. 700. Note. Nahum, carried away captive with Israel, prophesied and preached for the space of 50 or 60 years. (Nineveh destroyed, B. C. 613.) {See Oh. XVII) 207 B.C. Note. Thus ends the Kingdom of Judah, after it had stood from the division 398 years, and after the captivity of Israel 123 years. JEREMIAH, ' ' Captivity. " History and prophecy of the Jews just before and after being carried to Babylon, chap, xxii- xxxi, - - - - - - -.- 595 Respecting the captivity in Egypt, chap, xxxii- xliv {see Chap. XX: § 11; also XXI: § 1, note). ISAIAH, "Evangelist." History and prophecy respecting the Jew r s in cap- tivity in Babylon, chap, xl-lxvi {see Chap. XVIII: § 7; also Chap. XXII: § 2). * First captivity to Babylon. {See Diagram, Ch. XXIII: § 13; also Dan. i; 1.) 20$ old testament: chronology. EZEKIEL, "Encouragement." ,£££ b.c. History and prophecy respecting the captive Jews in Assyria, chap, xxv-xlviii (see Chap. XXI: § 6. a). DANIEL, "History" (Ch. i-vi). Erom the captivity under Jehoiakim, B. C. 595; (the exaltation of Daniel in the realm of Darius, king of Persia, B. C. 522, 73 years). (See Diagram, Chap. XXII I: § 13.) To the return from captivity, - - - - 70 LEADING CHARACTERS. 525 Nebuchadnezzar, Belshazzar, Daniel, his three friends and Isaiah. (See Ch. XXII: § 1.) EZRA^ "God's Providence. Erom the decree of Cyrus, and the return of the Jews in charge of Zerubbabel, - 525 To the dedication of the Temple, - 25 LEADING CHARACTERS. 500 Cyrus, Darius and Artaxerxes (Ahasuerus), kings of Persia ; the Jews; Ezra; Haggai and Zechariah (the restoration prophets). (See Ch. XXIII: § 4; also Ch. XXIII: § 1.) Interim between chap, vi and vii of Ezra, - - 48 ESTHER, " Special Providence." History respecting the captive Jews in Persia, chap, i-ix (see ("hap. XXIII . § 9). - - 10 442 Ch. XXV: § 1. INTER BIBLICAL HISTORY. XEHEMIAH, " Reform atiox." Interim between Ezra and Xehemiah, - From Xehemiah's coming to Jerusalem, To the last reformation and the prophecy of Malaehi, - LEADING CHARACTERS. Artaxerxes, Xehemiah, Sanballat and Tobiah, Ezra and the Leyites. (See Ch. XXIII: § 11.) Yr8. nf History. INTERIM, Coxtixued History of the Jews. From the close of prophecy (Malachi), To the birth of Christ, LEADING CHARACTERS. Period I: The Highpriests. Period II: Alex- ander the Great and the Ptolemys; Samaritans. Period III : Antiochus Ephipanes and Judas Maccabeus. Period IV : Herod and his son Archelaus. (See Chap. XXV: § 1.) U 33 397 209 B.C. 442 430 397 397 A.D. CHAPTEK XXV THE INTERIM («• C. 400). § 1. Inter Biblical History. {See Chronology, Ch. XXIV : § 6. ) As we have now finished the Old Testament, in passing to the Xew. we meet with this "Interim, 400 years B. C." The Old Testament leaves the Jews in pos- session of their own land, with Jerusalem, their capital city, rebuilt, and the temple and its service restored. It is necessary, therefore, that we should have some knowledge 210 THE INTERIM. of their political and moral history during this interval. This period, in most people's minds, is a blank; yet it represents a period in Jewish history of the deepest interest to one who wishes to understand the New Testament. The sects of the Pharisees and Sadducees, who opposed Christ; the Synagogue, in which he taught; these had no existence in the day of the prophets. They arose either duriug the captivity, or in this intermediate period. The Jews of the New Testament seem to be a different people from the Jews of the Old Testament. The student of this inter Biblical history is able to see how this change takes place. Prof. Jaegar illustrates the study of this period by saying: "A bridge thrown across a river may, to one at a distance, appear like a dam between two stagnant and unconnected bodies of water; but he who is near perceives the connec- tion, and standing upon it one has the best view of both parts of the river. So the inter Biblical period appears like a dark streak separating the two Testaments." The whole then known world experienced a political and religious change, the parallel of which is not found in history. Upon the face of this period are written, with letters of blood and fire, the words: "Prepare ye the way of the Lord." A brief epitome is here given of the chief events of Jewish history during the interval between the Old and New Testaments. § 2. Political History of the Jews. *AVo are in- debted principally for the following account to Dr. Win. Smith's History of the Bible, Students' Scries. The political history of this nation is gathered principally from the books of Maccabees and Joseph us, and may be thus briefly stated: The interval of four centuries, from the close of the record of the Old Testament to the event which heralded the birth of Christ, may be divided into four periods. Ch. XXV: § 3. THE FOUR PERIODS. 211 § 3. The Four Periods. PERIOD I. Was the continuance of the Persian power, to whom the Jews were subject, which lasted after their return to their land sixty-six years, and brings us down to B. C. 334. PERIOD II. When that power was overthrown by Alexander the Great, they became subject to him, and on his death (B. C. 321) to his successor, forming a part of the Egyp- tian Monarchy. This period lasted about one hundred and sixt} T -seven years, which point in their history brings us down to B. C. 16?. PERIOD III. During the second period the Jews were violently perse- cuted by Antiochus Epiphanes. Many thousands were carried into Egypt, and there remaining, were for three years and a half deprived of their civil and religious liber- ties; while many were put to death. This rousing them to resistance, they were restored to liberty by the piety and bravery of the family of the Maccabees. These princes continued to nourish, under the protection of the Roman power, for one hundred and twenty-seven years, up to the days of Herod the Great, an Idumean by birth, but of Jewish religion. Herod conquered and deposed the family of the Maccabees, and was appointed king of the Jews by the Romans, B. C. 10. PERIOD IV. Xow comes the rule of the house of Herod, under which, in the fortieth year, Christ was born. This rule extended on after the Christian era to the destruction of Jerusalem by Titus, A. D. 70, covering a space of one hundred and ten years, when they ceased to be a nation. First Period. During the sixty-six years, from the time of Xehemiah to the end of the Persian Empire, 212 THE INTERIM. the Jew? seemed to have been content to develop their internal resources and their religious institutions. We cannot decide how far the princes of Judah retained their patriarchal authority; but from the time of Nehemiaji, the Highpkiest became the most important person in state. The highpriests during this first period were Eliashib, Jo [ada, Jonathan and Jaddea. Eliashib, the highpriest in the time of Ezra and Nehe- miah, was succeeded by his son Joiada (see Xeh. xiii: 28), and he by his son Jonathan, of the tribe of Levi, and were entered in the chronicles of Judah, which seem, therefore, to have ended with his priesthood. (See Xeh. xii: 11, 22, 23.) Jonathan's priesthood lasted thirty-two years, and was stained by the first of those acts of murderous rivalry which afterwards brought the state into anarchy. He murdered his brother Joshua, who was suspected of want- ing the priesthood. This crime was the only memorable event in the history of Judea during this period. Jaddua was the last of the highpriests of the Old Testament, and also the last in this first period. Second Period. The second period finds this people subject to the Egyptian Monarchy, under Alexander the Great and his successors, which lasted about 167 years. In the division of the empire of Alexander. Palestine was treated, as it had always been considered by the Greeks, as a part of Syria. So it fell to the lot of Ptolemy, the son of Largus, the powerful governor of Egypt, who took Jerusalem by assaulting it on the Sabbath, when (he Jews would offer no resistance; and it was subject to the first five Ptolemies for about 104 years. 1. Tin' Samaritan Opposition. During this period the national hatred between the Samaritans and .lews was fostered and augmented. They are said to have claimed the same privileges as the Jews, which Alexander refused Ch. XXV: §3. THE FOUR PERIODS. 213 to grant; hence arose a rebellion, which resulted in the murder of their governor. It seems that the son of Joiada, called Manasseh by the Jews, had married, in Neheniiah's time, the daughter of Sanballat the Haronite, the Samaritan chief. For this offence Nehemiah expelled him from Jerusalem. He went at once to his Samaritan friends, carrying with him, it is said, a copy of the Pentateuch; and from it, though the text was frequently tampered with, the various copies of the Samaritan Pentateuch have been made. Manasseh was made the highpriest of the Samaritans by his father- in-law, Sanballat, and worship according to law established on Mount Gerizim. About 400 B. C, or perhaps later, Manasseh obtained permission to build a temple on Mount Gerizim, and the hostility between the Jews and Samaritans thenceforth was more bitter than ever. The Samaritans had fabricated traditions, which represented them as being genuine descendants of Jacob, and branded the Jews as imposters. They claimed, when it suited their purpose, to keep the law more strictly than the Jews: and once or twice defiled the temple at Jerusalem with dead men's bones. There is no limit to the hatred, leading at times to bloodshed and murder. II. Highpriests. Jaddua was succeeded by his son, Oniass I, who was highpriest, according to Eusebius, down to 300 B. C. Onias I was succeeded in the priesthood by his son Simox, surnamed The Just. Jewish tradition makes him the greatest of this later line of priests. He repaired the temple and surrounded it with a double wall, and main- tained the divine service in the highest splendor. Simon the Just was now succeeded by his brother Elea- zar. His long rule seems to have been very tranquil, under the mild government of Ptolemy I. Soter, son of Largus, and Ptolemy II, Philadelphia. 214 THE INTERIM. III. The Septuagint Translation. During the reign of this later king, and probably commencing about 277 B. C, was made the Greek translation of the Old Testament, which we know as the Septuagint; so called from the seventy or seventy-two translators said to have been em. ployed thereon. Eleazar was still the highpriest, and appears to have been interested in the undertaking, fur- nishing six men from each tribe to do the work; and also was careful to furnish for the purpose correct copies of the sacred books. Thus the Jewish Scriptures were made accessible to the heathen. This version soon came into common use among the Jews themselves, even in Palestine; the original Hebrew having now become a dead language, or a language dropped out of common use. It was no doubt a faithful representa- tion of the Hebrew text, and as such was constantly quoted by our Savior and his apostles and the early church; and in consequence of its translation and wide circulation among Jews, and proselytes of the Jewish faith in all lands (the Greek being at this time the universal language of the world), the conversion of the nations to Christianity was greatly aided. President Edwards, in his "History of the Work of Kedemption," makes special mention of this as one of the most effective means of promulgating Christianity. IV. History under Highpriests. iSleazer's long priest- hood now closes, having held the office 41 years. He is succeeded by Onias II, who endangered the friendship of Egypt by withholding the annual tribute of twenty talents. which brought upon the Jewish nation new trials in the form of invasions. Jt was under this rule that the Sadducees began to appear as a sect; the Pharisees soon after, and before the close of this period both sects became notorious m parties and contests. Ch. XXV: § 3. THE FOUR PERIODS. 215 Onias II died in 226 B. C, and was succeeded by his son Simon II. At this time the rival kingdom of Syria had reached the climax of its power, and the throne had just been ascended by Antiochus III, to whom the Jews sub- mitted, and were well treated by him, and assisted him in repelling the Egyptians; at which Ptolemy attempts to penetrate into the most holy place of the temple, but is prevented. He now requires the Jews to renounce their religion; they refuse, and about 40,000 are slain in revenge at Alexandria. Soon after this Onias II was succeeded in the priesthood by his son Onias III. The conquered provinces were restored to Ptolemy IV, king of Egypt, as a dowry to his bride, Cleopatra, who was the daughter of Antiochus III. But this Assyrian king did not give them their possession, and resumed them altogether by the treaty with Eome, B. C. 188. The Greek party is now represented not only by Simon, but by the highpriest's own brother, Joshua, who went so far as to adopt the Greek name of Jason. By an enormous bribe in money Jason obtained the highpriesthood, and Onias III was deposed. For the first time Greek customs were introduced in Judea, with a success which shows to what extent the Jews had become Greeks in spirit, and how far they had deviated from the religion of their fathers. After three years, however, Jason was in his turn under- mined by Menelaus, who held the office from B. C. 172 to 168, a term of only four years, who was the last of the highpriests of the second period. Much of cruelty arid wickedness was perpetrated during this short reign. But for all this, as says Milman: "In the darkness of this long period, Judaism, with its stern and settled aversion to all polytheism, to Gentile influences, gradually hardened into its rigid exclusiveness. * * * Conflicting opinions grew up under the Asmonaean princes into religious fac- 216 THE INTERIM. tions, those of the Pharisees and Saddueees, and which began to stir the religious mind and heart of the people." We now pass to the third period of this interesting people, viz: the time when they were governed by the Maccabean princes. Third Period. The persecutions of Antiochus Epiph- anes called forth a glorious resistance, which ended in establishing the independence of Judea under Mac- cabean, or Asmonean, princes. An aged priest named Mattathias, of the house of Eleazar, Aaron's eldest son. had escaped from Jerusalem at the beginning of the perse- cution. He had five sons, John, Simon, Judas, Eleazar and Jonathan. For a time they mourned the desolation of Jerusalem and the sanctuary. Roused to action, they returned. The father could forbear no longer. He rushed forward and slew the apostate, and next the king's com- missioner, and then made a proclamation for all those zealous of the law to follow him. With his sons and fol- lowers he fled to the mountains.. But they soon returned. and broke down the heathen altars, and killed many of the worshipers. Judas, the third son and the most warlike, and hence called Maccabeus, carried on his father's course of opera- tions. The Syrians fled before him; a victory followed, with great thanksgivings ; and he restores the temple worship, B. C. 165. T. Judas Maccabeus. The authority of Jason now being overthrown, Judas became leader and governor of Judea. He was followed by Jonathan, the fifth and youngest son of Mattathias, who "destroyed the ungodly men out of Israel." This state of tilings lasted about six years. Simon, the second son of Mattathias. and the last survivor of these brethren, was highpriest from B. C. L4d to 135. Gh. XXV: § 3. THE FOUR PERIODS. £17 With the death of the last, of the sons of Mattathias, we lose the authentic record of the First Book of Maccabees, and Josephus becomes almost our only guide. II. John Hyrcanus, the second son of §imon, succeeded his father in the priesthood and government, which he held for about 30 years, B. C. 10G. Hyrcanus left the civil government by will to his wife; but it was siezed, with the priesthood, by his eldest son, Aristobulus, who imprisoned his mother and starved her to death. He assumed the title of King of Judea, and founded a monarchy which lasted 70 years, and which was composed of a grand series of wickedness and bloodshed. The history of the Maccabees does not contain much which illustrates in detail the religious progress of the Jews. It is obvious that this period must not only have intensified old beliefs, but also have called out elements which were latent in them. The various glimpses of national life which Ave have gained show on the whole a steady adherence to the Mosaic law. Probably the law was never more rigorously fulfilled. B. C. 67 Hyrcaxus II was deposed by his brother, Aris- tobulus; and one year later Pompey restores Hyrcanus II to power, and carried Aristobulus captive to Rome. From this time Judea is subject to the Roman Empire. Axti- gonus Avas the last ruler of this period. We uoav enter that portion of JeAvish history under the government of the Herodiax family, B. 0. 40. Fourth Period. The history of this family pre- sents one side of the last development of the Jewish nation. Such were the tyrannies and oppressions that religion was adopted as a policy. Various accounts are given of the ancestry of the Herods. It seems, hoAvever, sufficiently clear that they were of Idumean descent; and though aliens by race, \vere Jews by faith. From the time 218 THE INTERIM. of their conversion they remained constant to their new religion, looking upon Jerusalem as their mother city, and claiming for themselves the name of Jews. I. The Design of Herod. The great central idea was to found a great and independent kingdom. The protection of Eome was in the first instance a necessity; but the design of Herod pointed to an independent eastern empire as his end, and not to a subject monarchy. This at first seemed to have found some measure of acceptance with the Jews; and hence there arose a party called Herodians. Reference is made to this party in Matthew, xxn: 15, 16, where the Pharisees make choice of them in endeavoring to entangle our Savior in his talk. And in Mark. xii. a similar reference is made to this party. B. C. 37 we find this Herod, called the great, established on the throne of Judea. He may be termed independent in reference to the exercise of his power, though its origin rested in the will of his Roman master. He resolved at once to show all who were opposed to him that they had a master. Massacre and confiscation were dealt to all who dared to oppose him. He brought in foreign customs Avhich were obnoxious to the Jews; lie also brought an obscure priest from Babylon, named Ananehis, to fill the 1 highpriesthood, which had been vacant since the mutila- tion of Hyrcanus. This brought out a spirit of resistance on the part of the Jews to such innovations, which brought upon them cruelties such as were meted out to the Asmon- ean (Maeeabean) family. II. The Jar* Disappointed. . One can readily see how this would affect the Jew, and induce him to pray for deliv- erance from such tyranny — tyranny indeed when viewed in contrast with the comparative freedom enjoyed under the Maeeabean rule. This, with the knowledge from the Scrip- tures of the promised Messiah or king, who was to be a deliverer of this people, broughl to the front a fresh Cli. XX V r : § 3. THE FOUR PERIODS. 219 expectancy. With disappointed hopes, they again, with Renewed energy, search the oracles of God. It was ascer- tained that the time of their deliverance was nigh at hand. Instead of the change of rulers working a deliverance, it had the opposite tendency. It was indeed hoped by some that Herod, being a Jew and professing the Jewish faith, would work out a deliverance for his people; but in this their hope was blasted, instead of being brightened by this change in the temporal power. It is difficult even to imagine just the condition of this people, as they stand trembling between hope and fear. One may endure with patience trials brought upon us by an avowed enemy; but when they come from those of our own household, the former trials bear no comparison. Despairingly they now resort to the law; and so strict in its observance are they, that they clothed themselves with it as with a garment; entirely losing sight of its spiritual import however. This was particularly true as regards the Pharisees. In the teaching of the Elders, the word of God was to none effect; they so far changing the nature of the Messiah's kingdom that it was hoav believed by the majority that he would be a temporal deliverer. Thus its true na- ture as a spiritual kingdom which he was to set up was lost to sight. Our Savior says: '"A house divided against itself cannot stand." With the many sects into which the Jews were divided among themselves, and the bitterness and hatred as found existing between these several parties, every ves- tige of worldly hope is removed, at least so far as Herod is concerned. All the adhesive qualities of this people as a nation have lost their power. Hence we are able, to a very limited extent, to see what brought about the great change in this people. III. The Extent- of the Reign of Herod. Herod was now master of a kingdom which included all the land originally 220 THE INTERIM. divided among the twelve tribes, together with Idumea. Exclusive of the latter country, the whole was divided into four districts, (I) Judea, (II) Samaria, (III) Galilee, and (IV) Peraea, the name of the region east of the Jordan and the Dead Sea. All this fair kingdom had been won by Herod, a man of ability, magnificence and taste, but utterly regardless of his people's most cherished feelings, and in- sensible to the high destiny of the nation, the peculiar people of God. IV. Herod's Public Administration. Herod's public administration was directed to increase his own royal state. But he probably acted also from the more subtle policy of "counterbalancing by a strong Grecian party the turbulent and exclusive spirit of the Jews." The Jews, who had so nobly resisted his attempts to persecute them into adoption of the religion of the Greeks, are now invited to adopt both Greek and Eoman customs. The holy hill, to which David carried up the ark of God, looked down upon a theatre in which Herod held games in honor of Augustus, with musi- cal and dramatic contests, horse and chariot races, and bloody fights of gladiators and wild beasts, while Jewish athletes took part in the contests. A few, however, viewed these proceedings with far different feelings. Hence now. as it has ever been, God has a remnant who do not bow to Baal — a remnant to be saved. Herod was ever courting the people of Greece by mag- nificent donations to the temple of Olympia, and was made a perpetual president of the Olympic games. A strange mutation of both Jews and Greeks, that a half heathen king of Judea should be the recognized head of the Hellenistic race ! V. Herod's Temple. During the year -U B. C. there was a long drought, followed by unproductive seasons; famine and pestilence were the result. This was a year of great misfortunes to Herod. The result was to remove to a. Oil. XXV: § 4. MORAL HISTORY OF THE JEWS. 221 great degree the animosity occasioned by his proceedings m the previous prosperous years. Finding himself falling into disfavor with the Jews, he regains it by the restoration of the temple, the design of which he announced to the people assembled at the Passover, B. C. 20. If we may believe Josephus, he pulled down the whole edifice to its foundations and laid them anew on an enlarged scale; but the ruins still exhibit, in some parts, Avhat seem to be the foundations laid by Zerubbabel, and beneath them the more massive structures of Solomon. The work commenced about 17 B. C, and continued afterwards with fresh additions, besides the repairs of injuries done in frequent tumults; so that, when it was visited by our Lord during his ministry (A. D. 28), the Jews said to him: "Forty and six years was this temple in building, and wilt thou rear it up in three days?" VI. Herod's Successor. Herod reigned in the kingdom of Judea forty-four years, and was succeeded by his son, Archelaus. His evil. conduct so displeased the Romans that the}' reduced Judea to a Roman province. This Herod .died, being smitten by a painful and loathsome disease, during the infancy of Jesus. We now turn to the moral history of the Jews, bearing directly on their preparation for the advent of the Messiah, and their missionary work during their dispersion among the nations of the world. § 4. Moral History of the Jews.* The moral his- tory of this nation during this interval of 400 years is of vital importance to us, bringing to light much which will aid us to interpret the words of Christ and gain a correct understanding of the New Testament. * We are indebted principally for the following account to D. S. Gregory, D. D., "Why Four Gospels," Chap. I, Section 1, Mission of the Jews. 222 THE INTERIM. (a.) State of Religion. The captivity had a striking effect on this people to cure them of idolatry, to which they had always been jirone; but it presented their deprav- ity under a new shape, that of zeal for the form of religion while they denied the power. Greatly increasing human traditions, and teaching for doctrine the commandments of men, they made the Scriptures of none effect, and neg- lected it as the standard of truth. They became thereby divided into many sects, the result of which was despising and condemning each other and all the world around them. (Eom. ii : 17-20.) Their teachers are described by our Savior as full of hypocrisy, and their doctrines such as render those who embrace them twofold more, the children of hell than before. This period will be seen to be a time in which not only this people, but the world, are preparing for the great advent of the Messiah. The captivity produced a revolu- tion in the sentiments of both Jew and Gentile. While it cured the Jew of idolatry, it acquainted the Gentile witli the true God. It also, bound the Jew as never before to the sacred records, and urged them on to make proselytes of all the world. The Jew was the cultured religious man of that age. It was during the captivity that Ezra gathered up the sacred writings of the Old Testament which form our present canon. (b.) New Religions Centre. Jerusalem now becomes a reli- gious centre. This is a marvelous provision of God, making a deep moral impression upon both Jew and Gentile, in giving this true religion the widest possible influence. The chief of this provision are the restored city and temple, the complete canon of the Scriptures, and the synagogue sys- tem; which system gave opportunity to radiate its influence throughout the world, where the Scriptures were read. I'll. XXV- § 4. MORAL HISTORY OF THE JEWS. 223 Jerusalem is now the : religious metropolis to the whole dispersed nation, from which should go forth the spiritual influences which should fashion the future of mankind. At Jerusalem, as the centre, were appointed yearly festivals, five in number, which brought-together "Jews and devout men out of every nation under heaven." While special effort was made to attend the feast of the Passover in March, and the great day of atonement in September of each year, the greatest familiarity with the Scriptures was thus secured wherever the wanderings of the Jew carried the synagogue system. We should not lose sight of one very important fact, that is, there is no more prophet to teach the people. Hence the attention of religious leaders is turned with tenfold eagerness to this centre where the festivals are 'commemo- rated, that they may be kept fresh in the memory; and for the study of the Scriptures, especially the prophecies concerning the coming of the Messiah, the time of which they understood to be fast approaching. These religious festivals were institutes of learning, not dissimilar to those held by our county superintendents for "the benefit of teach- ers; and as they returned to their respective homes, they carried back from the temple to their synagogues in all parts of the Pagan world the latest development of this study. This was continued with increasing interest through this entire period, no doubt increasing in proportion to the Hearing of the great event to which all their Scriptures pointed, namely: he who was to be born "King of the Jews." (c.) The Great Expectation. Every eye is now turned toward the coming of Christ. The vast synagogue system is made by the Jews a medium through wnich the knowl- edge of a great personage is to be born into the world, not to the Jew only, but to the Pagan. All, both Jew and Gentile,, are in expectancy. The time of the advent is 224 THE INTERIM. drawing nearer; the expectation deepens and widens; the .Jew is directed to the time designated in the prophecies; they have awakened the people of all lands. All people are looking for a great deliverer to come out of Judea. Hence we can see, in the preparation of the Jews for this event, what this has done for the other great nations of the earth. And more, if the Jews only were prepared for the coming of Christ, the work would be incomplete; for there are two other great historic races, viz: the Greek and the Roman, and prophecy Avas directed to them as well; and each was successively prepared, through their syna- gogue system, for the advent of the Messiah and the spread of his salvation. This is in accordance with Daniel's proyjhecy, as found in the second and seventh chapters of his book. Neander savs: "The three great nations had to contrib- ute,- each in its own peculiar way, to prepare the soil for the planting of Christianity. The Jew on the side of the religious element: the Greeks on the side of science and art: the Romans, as masters of the world, on the side of the political element. When the fullness of time had arrived, and Christ appeared — when the goal of history was thus reached — then it was that through him, and by the power of the Spirit that proceeded from him, the might of Christianity, all the threads, hitherto separated, of human development, were to be brought together and woven into one web." *§ 5. Synagogue System. "The word synagogue, which means a congregation, is used in the New Testa- ment to signify a recognized place of worship. A know! edge of them is of importance to the student, since they are the great characteristic institution ot tins period. According to the traditions of the rabbinical writers, a great council was appointed on the return of the Jews from Babylon to recognize the religious lite of the people. Ch. XXV: § 6. THREE PREVAILING LANGUAGES. 225 It consisted of 120 members, who were knowm as the men of the Great Synagogue, the successors of the prophets; and themselves, in their turn, succeeded by scribes prominent as teachers. Ezra was recognized as president. Among the other members, in part together or part successively, were Joshua, the highpriest, Zerubbabel, and their com- panions, Daniel and the three "children," the prophets Haggai, Zechariah and Malachi, the rulers Nehemiah and Mordecai. The aim was to restore the crown and glory of Israel. To this end they collected all the sacred writings of former ages and their own, and so completed the canon of the Old Testament. They organized the ritual of the synagogue. The narrative of Nehemiah, viii: 13, clearly implies the existence of a body of men acting as counselors under the presidency of Ezra; and these may have been an assembly of delegates from all provincial synagogues — a sort of synod of the national church." — Dr. Wm. Smith. This Great Synagogue of 120 members — which, having existed for about 150 years, was now under Simon the Just, B. C. 290 — was supplanted by w T hat is called the New Synagogue, whose office it w r as to interpret the Scriptures. Its members were made up of scribes, doctors of the law, and elders of the people. It was this august body which resulted in the Sanhedrim of our Savior's time. The services to be performed in these synagogues w T ere, first, prayers; second, reading the Scriptures and explain- ing them. Morning and evening the law w 7 as read on three days of the week, and on the Sabbath it was re-read. Besides, each day had its reading of the prophets. Each synagogue had a governor or ruler who took charge of the services. § 6. Three Prevailing Languages. This old Jew- ish religion w r as fast completing its work. Soon another dispensation is to be inaugurated, as seen from the expee- 226 THE INTEKIM. tancy of the world. All eyes are turned to Judea. Thence the magi came, and at just the right time. This was not only a period of preparation, but of expec- tancy, not only among the Jews, but the heathen. Suetonius relates that "An ancient and definite expectation had spread throughout the east, that a ruler of the world would, at about that time, arrive in Judea." Tacitus makes a similar statement. Schlegel mentions that the Boodhist mission- aries, traveling in China, met Chinese sages going to seek the Messiah, about 33 A. D. In this period there were three great prevailing languages on the earth, viz: the Hebrew, spoken by the Jew; the Greek by the Greek; and the Latin, which was the language of the Eomans. This world religion was first committed to the Hebrew, or Jew. During their dispersion and cap- tivities, it was carried to the utmost parts of the earth. Under Alexander the Great, who conquered the world, it became Hellenized. The Scriptures were translated into the Greek language, thus spreading a knowledge of this world religion among them. Lastly, Rome became mistress of the world. As this came to pass 70 years before Christ, we find the Scriptures translated into that language. Hence we are enabled to see the value of a knowledge of this interim of 400 years, and how it bears directly on a correct understanding of the New Testament. Ch. XXV. LESSON XV. LESSON XV. 227 r L ireulan irowoi, < '.' . . ,, "I 3 moan erowei, 3. woman orowe/i, $ama%i4aw>, s6f uto. ^n4iocAm. " lif @Maccaieeb ; J2>] ute. elan. 40 *' * w 4L r^' | m oi 0M 4 uon. L $ , 4a4e oj Meiiau 2. $ew> oHeUaiowb penile. t> \ 3. ( &iea4 §xkec4a4lon. Jf. fflunaaoaueb. 5. JThm SSanauaaeb. SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. Note. Place on the board the title of the lesson and the subject, followed by introductory remarks. We are still pursuing the history of what people? Ans. The Jews. Where does the Old Testament leave them? (Ch. XXV: § 1.) What is the space of time between the Old and New Testament? W T as this before or after the birth of Christ? How, then, shall we designate it? Ans. B. C. Is their history during this period generally known? 228 lessor xv. - Is there any necessity for a knowledge of this interval? What is it ? Ans. That the New Testament may be better understood. Every nation has a twofold history, what is it? Ans. Moral and political. What great moral and political changes were taking place with all the nations of the earth about this time ? To what four great political powers were the Jews subject during this interval? (§ 2.) Note. Place the numbers and powers on the board. W T here is this history found? What is the name of the first great power? Note. Here rehearse to the class the history of the return of the Jews from Persia under the decree of Cyrus, and the instituting of the priesthood and the temple worship. By whom were the Jews governed during this time? Ans. Highpriests. What is the date of the beginning of this period? Ans. About 400 B. C. Who was the first highpriest? A:n"S. Nehemiah. How loug were the Jews subject to the Persian power? (§§ 2, 3.) What was the second power to whom they were subject? In what year was the Persian .Empire overthrown by Alex- ander the Great? (§§ 2, 3, Period II.) What was the third power to whom they were subject? etc. (§§2, 3, Period III.) The fourth form or period of government? etc. (§§ 2, 3, Period IV.) Moral History. We said every nation had a twofold history; we have referred to the political; what was the other? Why should we have a knowledge of the moral history of the Jews? (§ 4.) Note. This part may be given in the form of a lecture to the class, bringing out the several topics as seen in the blackboard lesson. Place each topic upon the board when introduced, each pupil noting the same in his blank book. Review from the black- board. Cll XXVI: § 1. THE FULLJSTESS OF TIME. 229 CHAPTER XXVI. THE WORLD'S PREPARATION FOR CHRISTIANITY. PREPARED FOR THIS WORK BY REV. JAMES P. THOMS. § 1. The Fullness of Time. The progress of the world's history is a study of the deepest interest and profit. It is the unfolding of the purposes and plans of him who, seeing the end in the beginning, directs all things accord- ing to his own will. In the rise and fall of empires; in the glory and wane of kingdoms; in the supremacy and subjugation of nations; in the growth of knowledge; in the triumph of liberty; in the victory of truth; in all the gathering forces of human advancement, there is an unseen power that directs the destiny of events ; and history is the unfolding of the Divine plan. "The fullness of time" is at hand, as we see the world prepared. First : § 2. By Centralization. Rome was the centre of power. That palace of the Caesars and the Roman senate ruled from the Atlantic eastward beyond the banks of the Euphrates and Tigris, a distance of 4000 miles. The southern boundary was far into the deserts of Arabia and Africa. The northern line penetrated into the deep forests of central Europe, and ran along the briny coasts of the Black and Caspian Sea. (a. ) The Boundary. This boundary line made a circum- ference of 10,000 miles. The millions that peopled western and southern Europe, northern Africa and southwestern Asia were held in abeyance by the iron grip of the Caesars. Rival tribes, hostile nations and petty sovereigns were all '230 PREPARATION FOR CHRISTIANITY. brought into subjection to the Roman eagles. All along the centuries these nations had prowled upon each other. The wild hordes of northern Africa, and the warlike desert wanderers that had overwhelmed the throne of the Pharaohs and had baffled all the revenge of Macedonian monarchs, by the solid march of Roman legionaries were crushed, curbed and driven into the wilds. (b.) Conquest. In Asia and Syria barbarian despots, with their grinding tyranny and stupid selfishness, were swept away one after another before the resistless advance of Roman conquest. The wave of conquest reached far into the forests of central Europe. The Dacians, Germans,. Gauls and Celts all yielded in time to the Roman legions. Throughout the vast domain of the Roman empire legiens of soldiers were stationed. These barbaric tribes, these wild hordes, these tiger-like nations that had preyed upon each other in all previous ages, were brought into union and sympathy; walls of separation were demolished; jeal- ousies were buried; strifes were crushed; commerce, by its numerous ports and myriad ships on the Mediterranean, diffused knowledge throughout the realm. By this quel- ling of the nations, by this universal sway of masterly power, by this centralization of the world, by this reign of peace, the prophecies are fulfilled and the fullness of time is at hand. But Roman triumph had a deeper meaning than simply victory and centralization. It prepared for the fullness of time. Second: § 3. By Civilization. From imperial Rome her genius and civilization wont forth with her victorious soldiery. The Roman soldier was not only mighty in battle; he was a skillful artist, a peaceful laborer, a, tiller of the soil; he was bravo in war, industrious in peace. Throughout this vast empire the arts of peace were nour- Ch. XXVI: § 3. by civilization. 231 ished. Roads floored with square flinty stones, solid as adamant, radiated from Eome to the remotest bounds of the broad empire. Now they plunge through the solid rock; now they are vaulted high in air, arch above arch, pillar over pillar; now they lie along the valley, or pave a border to the Great Sahara. Barren regions and desert places were made to blossom, as artificial rivers were made to flow into them, along canals and over mighty arches that will crumble only with the pyramids. In Gaul, in Asia, in Africa, mighty aqueducts and gushing fountains were planted in dry places to refresh the weary traveler. These imperishable roads, these gigantic causeways, these stupendous bridges, these vaulted aqueducts, these arches and theatres of massive grandeur, are eternal witnesses of the power and influence of Roman civilization. . Throughout the empire, by the power of Eoman legions, the laborer in the field is safe from all invasion. The traveler or merchant is safe on the highway as he rolls along in his chariot or rides around the Mediterranean Sea. Savages were trained, wanderers were reclaimed from the forests, which fell before the march of civilization, and roving tribes were taught to love citizenship. (a.) The Eoman Art. The Roman art was displayed in the solid and lofty dwellings, in their clustering villages and flourishing cities. They raised massive temples; they reared magnificent and spacious theatres; they raised the most grand and beautiful triumphal arches; they adorned their cities with gateways of architectural splendor; they built harbors of solid masonry, against which the waves broke in their fury, while ships anchored safe near the docks. Statuary and sculpture graced every temple and city. The very grandeur of Roman ruins, as seen to-day, is the admiration of the world. These wonders of art, seen in every part of the Roman empire, were a great civilizing force to the rude, conquered nations. 232 PREPARATION FOR CHRISTIANITY. This onward march of civilization prepared a language, in the fullness of time, for the coming revelation. The teachings of the New Testament are largely subjective; they address the spiritual nature of man, his thoughts, feelings, motives, hopes, beliefs. The Old Testament teaching is more objective; it presents truth in history, temples, altars, sacrifices, dreams, visions; it conveys knowledge to man largely through his five senses. This is adaj^ted to ruder nations and an earlier stage of the world's civilization. It preserves to us truth in object lessons; truth is truth, how- ever it may be taught or illustrated. But in the teachings of Christ a deeper revelation is to be made, and a language must be prepared that will express the feelings, motives, sentiments of man — this inner life. Not only was a language to be prepared for this; these very subjective feelings and sentiments were to be defi- nitely analyzed and known. It was necessary that the race have a photograph of man's inner life, his motives, feelings and sentiments in high civilization, with little light of rev- elation. (b.) The Grecian Schools. Over yonder in Greece, for 200 years (from Pythagoras, B. C. GOO, to Socrates, B. C. 400), the Grecian philosophers (sophists) have been contin- ually discussing physical and moral truths. While Malachi is uttering the last Old Testament prophecies in Palestine (B. C. 397), in the gardens at Athens, under the shade of those trees, surrounded by his pupils, Socrates, the brightest light of Eeason, is proving the existence of a God, from providences showing his attributes, and through reason reached many principles of sublime truth. It was mind — the grasp.ings of reason — seeking after a future life, a God, an over-ruling Providence. His disciples, Plato (B. C. 389- 347) and Aristotle (B. C. 384^322), analyzed with matchless skill the feelings, sentiments and passions of men. The heart was dissected; the motives, findings and passions of Ch. XXVI: § 4. 13Y DEMORALIZATION 233 men were photographed and shown to the world in stereop- ticon views. These philosophers developed a language at once strong and flexible, expressing the finest logical dis- tinctions, the tenderest sentiments, the sweetest music in poetry, and the sublimest eloquence in oration. In the train of the conquests of Alexander (B. 0. 350- 323), the Greek language and civilization took root and flourished. Geography was better known; and after his death Greek kingdoms were formed in all parts of his vast empire, which existed for centuries. Therefore, through- out the Roman empire the Greek is the language of rank, of intelligence and of commerce. The universal empire of Rome carried the Greek language into all the countries washed by the .Mediterranean. The language of Christ, therefore, was known in every Roman province. Paul could preach throughout the known world without an interpreter. In the fullness of time the world was prepared. Third: £ 4. By Demoralization. At this point of the world's history the moral ruin of man was fully exhibited. Stand upon Mars hill, above Athens, in the golden age of Greek art and culture, and look into her streets. Those works of art, those hundreds of idols, that finished sculpture, all minister to lust and moral corruption. Raise the curtain of Rome. What scenes do you witness? There are wealth, art and culture; but what putref action in social life! Vir- tue is unknown, life is in peril. Even a heathen historian blushes to narrate the scenes on the streets of Rome. The land of promise has the same dark record. After all the revelations of divine truth, the warnings of God, and his gracious providences, the Jews are only tenfold more the children of hell. In these -4000 years, to secure man's moral recovery, every form of government had been tried — monarchy, aristocracy and democracy. Through every stage of cut- 234 PR EPA RATION FOR CHRISTIANITY. ture man had passed, in every favorable condition and circumstance lie had been placed, yet all the world was guilty before God. (a. ) Prayer for Deliverance. By this centralization the nations were wheeling into line under one sceptre; in this civilization the people were prepared in thinking, in cul- ture, in language, in intercommunication; and hy demor- alization man's moral ruin was a universal prayer for the deliverer. (b.) Coming of the Prince of Peace. The voice of prophecy has been dumb for 400 years ; the Shekinah centuries before had departed from the temple ; but now the long silence is broken by the voice of one crying in the wildernes: "Prepare ye the way of the Lord." The eyes of the nations turn towards Jerusalem. The din of battle is long ago hushed, and a universal peace prevails. In the fullness of time a child is born, a son is given; "and his name shall be called Wonderful, Counsellor, The Mighty God, The Everlasting Father, The Prince of Peace." Angels sang: "Glory to God in the highest, and on earth peace, good will toward men." Luke, ii: 14. Such is the preparation for the Prince of Peace (Christ), who is the fulfillment of the Old Testament, and the theme of the New Testament. Oh. XXVI. LESSOR XVI. 235 LESSOR XVI. %oanda'iu. JFuilnete oj §/inw. /. (gzn4ialha4i on. < 2. (givilka4ion. 3. Wmnoialbiadion. (gonauew. Ionian ) %btwm ffckook. { iPiaueb jol ffelive'oance. I iPlince oj race. SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. What do we understand by the fullness of time? (See Gal. iv: 4; compare Gen. xxii: 18.) What benefit is derived from having a knowledge of the progress of the world's history? (Oh. XXVI: § 1.) In what may it be seen? Ans. In the rise and fall of empires, etc. In what three great epochs may we see the world being prepared for the com- ing of Christ? (§§ 2, 3, 4.) What was the first? What great city was the centre of power? Who were the rulers? What was the extent of this kingdom? What was the circumference of this em- pire? {a.) How was this vast territory obtained? (b.) What was the second epoch? (§ 3. ) How was it displayed among the Romans? -(a.) How was this displayed among the Greeks? (bl) What was the third epoch? (§4.) What was the moral condition of Athens and Borne at this time? What was the result? (a.) For how many years had' the voice of prophecy been dumb? To what city were the eyes of the nations turned? Fur what were they looking (0.) 236 30W TEST .ill EXT, CHAPTER XXYII. NEW TESTAMENT. § 1. Preface. The two great grand divisions of the Scriptures represent, not the old and new wills of God, but earlier and later portions of that will; both are valid, and both are now under consideration, as presenting his love toward us. But while the former may be regarded as the main body of his will, the latter (the New Testament) may with equal propriety be regarded as codicils, duly attested and of equal validity with the previous will; while they provide for a different and greatly wider distribution of the inheritance. In the Old Testament this gift is prom- ised to the Hebrew nation. "There shall come a Star out of Jacob,'' etc. In instances like that of Isaiah, xi: 10: "In that day there shall be a root of Jesse, which shall stand for an ensign to the people; to it shall the Gentiles seek, and his rest shall be glorious;" where this extension of the kingdom is mentioned, the Jews regarded it as only signifying the accession of proselytes. "Unto us," says Isaiah, "a child is born, unto us a son is given.'' But in the New Testament we find not only that the Messiah, the Savior and King, has come, but that his chosen people have rejected this gift (inheritance), and refused to own the Messiah. A few of the Jews received him; but the greater part of the nation, including (lie rulers, reject and crucify him. The offer of this heavenly inheritance was made first to the Jew, to whom this Will and Testament was committed tor safe keeping; but on their blind and wicked refusal of Ok XXVII: § 1. preface. 237 it, God offers it to the Gentiles* in this codicil to his will, cutting off the Jews till the fullness of the Gentiles shall have been gathered into the household of faith, and made heirs of the promise. We find this expressly declared in Acts, xiii: 46, 47: " But seeing ye put it far from you, and judge yourselves unworthy of everlasting life, lo, we turn to the Gentiles. For so hath the Lord commanded us, saying, I have set thee to be a light of the Gentiles, that thou (Christ) shouldest be for salvation unto the ends of the earth." Henceforth, till the fullness of time come, the Gentiles are spiritual Israel, the heirs of the promises; Abraham is their father; and Christ, the promised seed, in whom all the nations of the earth should be blessed, is their elder brother. Some one has said: " The object for which the Old Tes- tament was given was to make man a fit subject, and restore him to his original state of purity in Eden; and to secure this object God makes a Will and Testament. Said will provides for those only who wish to be restored to said Eden, as an everlasting inheritance. It also contains certain requirements on the part of the heirs: first, faith in, and second, a patient waiting for, the death of "the Testator; at which time they are to come in full possession of said inheritance. The object of the New Testament is to declare the death of the above Testator. But, as said Testator has risen from this death and is alive again, he takes said inherit- ance in possession and beautifies it. He also becomes the advocate, or attorney, defending the rights of the heirs to said inheritance. See 1 John, ii: 1. Compare Heb. ix: 15-28." * It will be borne in mind that the Jews considered the world divided into two classes, viz: Jews and Gentiles. The Greeks say Greeks and Barbarians; while the Bomans, referring to themselves and the outside world, say citizens and strangers. 238 XEW TESTAMENT. Included in the Jewish inheritance was the remembrance of Enoch, who walked with God; of Noah, the preacher of righteousness; of "Moses, the meek but wise lawgiver of Israel; of Joshua, Samuel, David, Isaiah, Daniel, Habak- kuk and Malachi, the last of the prophets; and a host of the apostles and martyrs of the New Covenant. The whole world is thus the gainer by this enlargement of the divine will in these New Testament codicils. The resurrection and the blessed life of the righteous in heaven had been divinely foreshadowed in the Old Testa- ment, but life and immortality were- brought to light in the gospel; and not only the life beyond, but city of God above, with its jasper walls, its pearly gates, its golden streets, and light-giving throne of the Lord God and the Lamb (Kev. xxi: 1-4), are all parts of the inheritance be- queathed to those who are called to be saints by this revelation of his divine will. Let us now examine briefly into the contents of this new and later will of God, as contained in the New Testament. § 2. Grand Divisions. The New Testament, like the Old, is a compilation of books written by different inspired individuals, and arranged so as to exhibit a regu- lar account of : I. The birth, actions and death of Christ. II. The doctrines he promulgated. III. The prophecies regarding the future state of the church which he founded. We therefore find it divided into three grand divisions, viz: First, "Historical," containing the books, from Matthew to Acts" in elusive. Second, "Epistolary," with twenty-one books, from Ro- mans to Jude inclusive. Third, "Apocalyptic," comprising only one book, viz: Revelation. Ch. XXVII. §4. introduction. 239 § 3. Historical. The Historical may be divided into two parts: First. "life of Christ/' as written by four different persons, writing four separate biographies, portraying his character in four different phases; neither of them com- plete as a biography, nor one attempting to supply the deficiencies or omissions of the other. They were written at considerable distances of time and place from each other, which made any collusion impossible; and yet the four taken together give us a more comprehensive view of his life than could be given by a single individual. Second. "Church History," which will be considered in its place. § 4. Introduction to the Four Gospels. In con- sidering the life of Christ as given by the biographers, Matthew, Mark, Luke and John, the question arises, why four gospels? Four reasons may be given: First. "In the mouth of two or three witnesses every word may be established." This was the legal evidence to establish a fact. Compare Matt, xviii : 16, with Deut. xvii: 6. In case of murder, the criminal would not be convicted by one witness, even though an eye witness of the deed. Second. No one of the evangelists has written a com- plete history of his life. This is shown from internal evidence; for we find that Luke has nine long chapters — from the ninth to the eighteenth — which are not found in the other three gospels; also in John, from the fourteenth to the seventeenth inclusive, the record is not found else- where. The same is true of many other portions of the four biographies. Third., In the writings of the four evangelists we have presented to us four phases of his life. Fourth. We find these four gospels were written by four men, each having a peculiar and distinctive character, and for four distinct classes of men. 2-40 NEW TESTAMENT. (a.) Zw&e the Historian. Luke is considered the his- torian, and not a witness, for the following reasons: 1. He is the only one of the four who had a liberal education, thereby better qualified to write. 2. He is a Gentile convert to Christianity; hence un- biased, not haying any personal interests. 3. He gathers from eye witnesses and preachers of the word. Luke, i: 2. 4. He is the only one who claims to write in chronologi- cal order. 5. He is the only recorder of subsequent events; his gospel and the Acts being a continued history. Luke, xxiv: 53; Acts, i: 14. 6. His gospel partakes of the nature of history; he having taken pains to ascertain the dates and incidents. and giving them in detail, more than any other of the evangelists. 7. He is unqualified to be a witness, never having seen Christ. We are indebted for the following to a very valuable work entitled "Why Four Gospels?" by D. S. Gregory, D. D.* (b.) Theory of the Origin. "In a true theory of their origin is found the explanation of the number of the gos- pels, their peculiarities, their agreements and differences. Such a theory must evidently be based upon and con- structed out of the facts of the age and work of the apostles, as follows: (r.) Gospel for the World. The aim of the great com- mission and design of the four gospels was. to commend Jesus the Nazarene to all mankind as the great deliverer from sin and its consequences. The command is: 'Go preach my gospel to every creature.' * President of Lake Forest University, Lake Forest, 111. The work is published by the Western Methodist Book Concern, Cincinnati, Ohio. Ch. XXVII: § 4. INTRODUCTION. 241 (d.) Faces of the World. As has been seen, there are three great races, and three great phases of thought, reach- ing throughout that world with which Christianity first comes in contact: the Jewish, the Roman and the Greek. There is, in addition, the kingdom of Christ — the church constituted out of those brought out of the three races of men and made spiritual by the preaching of the gospel. (e.) Preaching to the World. The apostles went forth preaching the gospel like common-sense men, presenting Jesus to each of the three great races or classes of mankind in the way best suited to the end in view, of leading those races to submit to him as the divine Savior. Each of them had its peculiarities which must be taken into account; each of them its side to be reached; each of them its own characteristic view of the evils of the world and of the qualities of the needed deliverer, of which, so far as it was right, the gospel must take advantage. These early preachers took wise account of all this, and preached to the Jew, to the Roman and to the Greek — from the three great centres, viz: Jerusalem, Antioch and Rome, as set forth in the Acts — in a form suited to their needs. After the church had been founded and converts made in all lands, in its varied adaptation to the races, that gospel which presents Christ as the light and life, for the purpose of leading men, already Christian, to higher at- tainments in Christian life, became necessary and was preached throughout the world. (/.) Demand for Permanent Records. But the apostles could not be everywhere and always with men. Before they passed away there arose a desire in the various races of men, who had heard their gospel, to have it embodied in permanent written form, that it might be preached to them still when the early preachers were absent or dead. (1.) By the Jew. This desire expressed itself among the Jews, and. Matthew, by divine inspiration, gave them 242 XEW TESTAMENT. his gospel to meet that desire. It. was the gospel long preached to the Jews, the men of prophecy, which he had already thrown into form hest suited to commend to their acceptance Jesus as the Messiah and King. (2.) By the Roman. The same desire expressed itself among the Bomans, and Mark, by divine inspiration, gave them his gospel to meet that desire. It was the gospel which Peter, by his preaching to the Bomans, the men of poiver, had already thrown into the form best suited to commend to their acceptance Jesus as the almighty deliv- erer of men. (3.) By the Greek. The same desire expressed itself among the Greeks, and Luke, by divine inspiration, gave them his gospel to meet that desire. It had its basis in the gospel which Paul and Luke, by their long preaching to the Greeks, the men of reason and universal humanity, had already thrown into form best suited to commend to their acceptance Jesus as the perfect, divine man. These three missionary gospels were given their final shape before the fall of Jerusalem (A. 1). ?0). (4.) By the Christian. It was later that the longing came, in the church, for a spiritual gospel, which should help the Christian to develop, strengthen and perfect the life already begun; and John, by divine inspiration, gave his gospel to meet that longing. It was the gospel the materials for which he had gathered in the more intimate communion with his Master, and which, by Ids long preach- ing to the brethren, he had thrown in form best suited to commend to the faith of Christians Jesus as the light and life of all who believe. (g.) Adequacy, If this he the true theory, it may readily he ^vvn that it will furnish a most perfect and satisfactory explanation of the uumber and character of the gospels, and of their otherwise unexplained agreements and differences. Oh. XXVII: S^ introduction. 243 This will appear best in the course of the subsequent prefaces to these books; but a brief statement of some few points will help to make those prefaces more intelligible. I. There are four gospels, because Jesus was to be com- mended to four classes of men, or to four phases of human thought, the Jewish,. Roman, Greek and Christian. II. The yery striking differences seen in the three mis- sionary gospels, Matthew, Mark and Luke, and between these three and the Christian gospel, John, are fully ex- plained. III. The force of the great mass of alleged discrepancies as objections to the historical character of the gospels is removed. IV. The theory presented explains the fitness of the gospels to the world in all ages. These classes weve repre- sentative clashes for all time. There are the same needs among men to-day: one man needing, for conviction of the truth of Christianity, to hear an authoritative word of God in type or prophecy, in the Scriptures, and to be assured of its fulfillment as proclaiming the divine mission of Jesus; a second needing to see him as the divine power in his living activity confirming his own claims; a third requir- ing a manifestation of Cod addressed to reason, through the perfect ■manhood of Jesus; a fourth demanding only the spiritual presence and teaching of Jesus to recognize in him the light and life. The four gospels given to men in the apostolic times are therefore the complete Gospel of God for the world in all ages." 244 MATTHEW. CHAPTER XXVIII. MATTHEW. § 1. Introduction to Matthew's Gospel. Written "•'for the Jew," from Judea, A. I). 37. (See Index; aho (limnology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) GOLDEN TOPIC, "KHSTGSHIP." " These biographies are undoubtedly by the persons bear- ing their name. Matthew, the i publican,' from his being the chief collector of the Roman taxes at Capernaum and vicinity, was one of the twelve. He wrote in A. D. 37, with the fullness of knowledge which could be received only from personal intimacy with Christ. He wrote in Hebrew, as spoken by the Jew. His gospel has been called a Jewish gospel. It lias been also called the kingly gospel, pointing directly to the ' Kingship ' of Christ. To Mat- thew, Jesus was alway the King of Zion, the heir of David. (a.) The Promise. Above all, the Jews had the promise of the Messiah; they received the divine authority of the Old Testament Scriptures; they read in them of a coming deliverer. The promises and prophecies bad grown clearer all along the centuries. All the types and sacrifices pointed to him, and all prophecy centered in him. They also had a knowledge of the time of his coming, and were in expecta- tion. Simeon and Anna were waiting in daily expectation This expectation grew out of the assumption that the Scriptures belong to the Jew. (0.) The Character and Needs of the .lews. If the first gospel originated in the preaching <>f the apostles, espe- cially of Matthew, to the Jews, then the ehaiactcr and needs of the Jews must furnish the key Lo that gospel. Oh. XXVIII: § 1. ixtkoduction". 245 There are certain characteristics which clearly distinguish the Jews from the other great historic races. They are the chosen people of God, and were conscious that God was in a peculiar sense in their history. They had the oracles of God, the true world religion. They had the divine form of religious worship. Above all, they had the promise of the Messiah. The Jews were the chosen people of God. No other people has occupied such a position. But the mass of the Jews, through incorrect teaching, were led to narrowness and exclusiveness, which had reached their height at the time of the advent of Christ. (See Interim.) Their selfishness had become extreme and prov- erbial. While they had forgotten that they were the elect out of the world, not against it, but for it, in order that all the world might be blessed in them, they had also forgotten that the world was not theirs for them to make the most of as Jews for their own selfish end, but theirs to bring to the true faith through the oracles of God and the coming of the Messiah. The Sabbatic year, the tithes and religious festivals had long si*ice become a dead letter; and through their haste to become rich the name of Jew was becoming then, as it is now, "a by-word and a hissing." There had sprung up a party, the Herodians, doubtless numerous, who had cut loose from Jewish worship, and who saw in the power of the Herodian family the pledge of their national existence, in the face of Ecman ambition. (See Interim.) The remainder of the nation was divided into two great religious sects, the Pharisees and Sadducees, the traditionalists and the skeptics. Most of the Jews had lost sight of or perverted those great doctrines which are the proper regulators of human conduct. Their practical creed ran thus: Thou shalt love thy neighbor and hate thine enemy. Thou shalt not take interest from a Jew, but shalt exact usurious interest from all Gentiles; thus substituting error for truth. 246 MATTHEW. The evangelist who would reach and save the Jews must recognize their haying possession of the oracles of God, and seek to recall these lost principles, and correct the perverted ones. He must carry this apostatizing race back to the law of God and its requirements. For the Jew the credentials of Jesus must be drawn from Moses'and the prophets. In his origin, in the capital facts of his life, in his character, private and official, in short, in his work and his kingdom, he must be shown to meet all the requirements of the Messianic Scriptures. This work properly done, no Jew could escape the conclusion: Jesus of Nazareth is the Messiah. § 2. General Divisions. To accomplish the great work of presenting Jesus to the acceptance of the Jews, Matthew has divided his gospel into five general heads, viz: First: The advent of the Messiah, chap, i-iv: 11. Second: The public proclamation of his kingdom, to chap, xvi: 12. Third: The distinct and public claim of Messiahship, to chap, xxiii: 39. Fourth: The sacrifice of the Messiah, the priest, to chap, xxvii: 66. Fifth: The triumph of the Messiah, the Savior and King, chap, xxviii. The outline, as thus given, is its own witness that the first gospel was prepared by Matthew for the Jew. § 3. Matthew's Use of the Scriptures. Matthew brings such matter to bear upon the mind of the Jew as is most likely to interest and hold attention. He makes no less than 90 allusions, references and verbal quotations from the Scriptures. 43 of these are verbal quotations, while Mark has only 14, Luke 16, and John 14. Matthew's references to the Scriptures furnish the basis for the entire argument, and t<> correci practical errors Ch. XXVIII: § 4. omissions. 247 into which the Jews had fallen. Mark has only 14 such references, almost all of which are general. But three of them at most are fulfillments of prophecy. Luke has perhaps 30 references or allusions to the Old Testament. Most of these are simple incidental citations of fact or law, and the argument does not at all depend upon them. John has 20 references or allusions to the Old Testament. He seems to take for granted that the church is acquainted with the revelation of the Old Testament. Matthew, on the other hand, as has already been shown, rests his gospel entirely upon the basis of Scripture revelation. His is- one continued comparison of Jesus of Nazareth with the Mes- siah of the prophets, which could not fail to convince any candid Jew. §<4. Omissions of the First Gospel. Matthew, in his gospel, in writing for the Jew, characteristically omits as useless for his jmrpose whatever is distinctively Eoman, Greek or Christian. The careful reader will note the entire absence of such explanations of Jewish customs as that which Mark gives of the religious washing of the hands before eating, and of the washing of cups, pots, etc. (Mark, vii: 2-5), which were necessary for strangers of Roman birth. • There are no such explanations of Jew- ish topography as that which Luke gives of the "village called Emmaus, which was from Jerusalem about three score furlongs" (Luke, xxiv: 13), which are necessary to strangers of Greek birth and philosophic turn of mind. There is an absence of such explanations of Jewish facts as that which John gives of the ministry of the Jews to the Samaritans (John, iv: 4), and which were necessary for the Christians over the world after the destruction of Jerusa- lem, For the Jew, at home in Jerusalem, was there at the date of Matthew's writing; hence no need of these things. 248 MATTHEW. Matthew gives none of those scenic representations of events which are seen to abound in Mark, which were fitted for the Koman, the man of power. He also omits those eminently human features in which Luke's gospel abounds, and of the facts of the ministry of Jesus in Peraea. One who duly considers this omission by Matthew, will see that it constitutes the very heart of Luke's gospel. The most remarkable of all omissions by Matthew is the absence of the ministry in Judea, and those spiritual dis- courses which constitute the greater part of the fourth gospel; but on more careful consideration it will be seen that they were mainly addressed to that small class of Jews who had adopted the Christian faith. The gospel, in Matthew's view, is first a gospel for the Jew; for the twelve were sent forth first to "the lost sheep of the house of Israel," but ultimately became the gospel for all mankind. The last commission reads: "Go ye therefore and teach all nations." (Matt, xxviii: 19.) § 5. Additions of the First Gospel. Matthew has, in short, given us the most systematic of the gospels, because his plan and purpose called for it. By that me- chanical analysis which has played so prominent a part in the study of the Scriptures, it has been shown that, if this gospel of Matthew be regarded as made up of 100 parts, 42 of these are peculiar to itself, and 58 common with one or more of the other gospel's. This may be shown by passing in review the narratives, discourses and groups of events of which Matthew's addi- tions are made up. The origin of Jesus as Messiah (chap. i, ii) is peculiar to Matthew. The Jew would not listen a moment to anyone who had not the prophetic origin of the Messiah. The sermon on the mount (v, vii) is pecu- liarly adapted to the Jew, which Luke so entirely omits. Peculiar features may be traced in the other discourses of our Lord: In upbraiding the cities of Galilee (xi: 20-30); Ch. XXIX: § 1. introduction. 249 in the answer to the Scribes and Pharisees who demanded a sign (xii; 38-45); the law of church censure and forgive- ness (xviii: 10-35); in the judgment of the Scribes and Pharisees, and of Jerusalem (xxiii: 1-39); and in the de- scription of the day of judgment (xxv: 31 to end). There are many incidental variations, which will be noticed by the careful reader. Expressions also occur which are peculiarly Jewish. The first of these is "The kingdom of heaven;" Matthew uses it 33 times. He alone of all the evangelists uses it. "Repent, for the kingdom of heaven is at hand." Matt, iv: 17; compare Mark, i: 14. So throughout the gospel the phrase is used. Matthew uses the word church; the other evangelists never use it. To one casting a final glance back, from the point now reached, the Jewish adaptation of the gospel by Matthew cannot fail to appear clear, and hence it is the true key to it. CHAPTER XXIX. MARK. § 1. Introduction to Mark's Gospel. Written "for the Roman," from Rome, A. D. 65. {See Index; also Chro- nology, Chap. XXXV; § 7.) GOLDEN TOPIC, "SEKVANT. This evangelist was not, like Matthew, one of the twelve apostles. He was probably a nephew of Barnabas, and the son of Mary, a pious woman of Jerusalem, at whose house we read many were gathered, praying in behalf of Peter 250 MAKK. when cast into prison by Herod. His Hebrew name appears to have been John. The apostle Peter calls Mark his son (1 Peter, v: 13), this leading us to infer that Peter was the instrument of his conversion. (Acts, xii: 12.) "The relation of Mark to Peter," says Dr. Wm. Smith, " is of great importance for our view of his gospel. Ancient writers with one consent make Mark the interpreter of the apostle Peter. Some explain this word (the Greek word interpreter) to mean that the office of Mark was to trans- late into the Greek tongue the Hebrew discourses of the apostle; while others adopt the more probable view that Mark wrote a gospel which conformed more exactly than the others to Peter's preaching, and thus ' interpreted ' it to the church at large. The report that Mark was the companion of Peter at Rome is no "doubt of great antiquity. " "Mark probably wrote this gospel when he was residing at Eome with Peter, A. D. 65, whose familiar companion he was. In connection with the fact of his writing under the direction of Peter, it is interesting to remark that many things honorable to that apostle, and mentioned by the other evangelists, are omitted, by Mark, whilst fche failings of Peter are all recorded in this gospel. It has been already remarked that Matthew in his gospel more particularly addresses the Jews; Mark, on the contrary^ writing for the immediate use of the Christians at Pome, which was at that time the great metropolis of the world and common centre of all civilized nations." — Nicholls. A careful study of the gospel itself, with a wise reference to the age in which it was produced and fche actual history of its origin, will reveal the fact that it has a distinct aim and an independent origin of its own. From the historical point of view, it can be shown conclusively that this record was written for the Romans, the second of the three great rein-esentative races of which the civilized world of Mark's day was made up. Ch. XXIX: § 2. witnesses. 251 § 2. Witnesses. Papias recorded what he learned by inquiry from the disciples of the apostles, as quoted by Eusebius, who wrote in the close of the third century: "Mark, the interpreter of Peter, wrote carefully down all that he recollected, but not according to the ord$r (chro- nologically) of Christ's speaking or working. Hence Mark made no mistake, since he so wrote some things as he was accustomed to repeat them from memory, and since he continually sought this one thing — neither to omit any-' thing of those things which he had heard, nor to add anything false to them." Irenaeus (A. D. 200) confirms the testimony of Papias. He states that, after the departure of Peter and Paul from Rome, "Mark, the disciple and interpreter of Peter, did also hand down to us in writings what had been preached by Peter." Tertullian of Carthage, who wrote later, agrees with Irenaeus, declaring incidentally that the gospel "which Mark published may be affirmed to be Peter's, whose inter- preter Mark was." At a later date, Eusebius, the historian, sums up the unvarying testimony of those who have gone before, and gives his own endorsement to the statement that "Mark wrote his gospel under the direction of Peter, at the request of the brethren at Rome, and with a special view to circu- lation in Italy and among the Romans generally." § 3. The Character and Needs of the Romans. If the second gospel originated, as has been shown, through the agency of Mark for Roman readers, the character and needs of the Romans must furnish the key to this gospel. The Romans represent the idea of activp human power in the ancient world; they are conscious of being born to rule the world; they sieze and they "push the idea of national power to universal empire. The key to the character, career and wants of the Romans is found in the idea of 252 MARK. power. In writing to the Christians at Rome, therefore, Paul is "not ashamed of the gospel of Christ, because it is the power of God unto salvation to eyeiy one that believeth." Rom. i: 16. The Roman, as such, cared little for the spiritual power of the Jew; his was the power of will, his was the beauty of action, his was the logic of deeds. In thus pushing forward the conquest of the world, Caesar became fitted to be the great organizer into a single empire; they held him to be the ideal man of the race, a mighty worker and conqueror. If the Roman was, as thus shown, the man of action, these characteristics must furnish the key to the gospel intended for him. The gospel to the Roman must be moulded by the Roman idea. It must present the charac- ter and career of Jesus from the Roman side or point of yiew, as answering to the idea of divine power, work, law, conquest and universal sway. It must exhibit Jesus as adapted in power and mercy, in his mission and work, to the wants of the Roman nature and world. To the Roman these are the credentials of Jesus, no less essential than prophecy to the Jetv, or philosophy to the Greek. Without them there could not be a reasonable hope of arresting his attention. The Holy Spirit proposes to commend to his acceptance Jesus of Nazareth as this sovereign and deliverer, the expected Savior of the world. § 4. General Divisions. In examining the second gospel, in the light of its ascertained origin and design, its peculiar adaptation to the needs of the Roman of that age will become apparent, With the aid of its known origin and aim, it will be seen that it may be naturally and con- veniently divided into five parts. First: The advent of the King and Conqueror. Chap. i. ii: L2. Ch XXIX. § 5. ROMAN ADAPTATION. 253 Second: The conflict of the Almighty King. Chap, ii: 13-viii: 26. Third: The claim of the Almighty King. Chap, viii: 27-xiii: 37. Fourth: The sacrifice of the Almighty King. Chap, xiv, XT. Fifth: The Universal Empire established. Chap. xvi. § 5. Roman Adaptation. This gospel represents Jesus as proclaiming and establishing a kingdom; but it is a kingdom of power, and not a kingdom of prophecy. While, therefore, Mark has so much in common with Matthew, there is yet this wide difference, that whereas Matthew rests wholly on prophecy, Mark is so entirely independent of prophecy that, after the opening verses, he never even records the words of a prophet, except as he quotes from the mouth of Jesus. In part first and second Jesus appears as the Son of God, wielding almighty power in its most tangible forms. Hence the Roman, the man of power, is irresistably attracted toward him; as the Jew, the man of jwophecy, is by the genealogy of Messiah and other opening features of Matthew; and as the Greek, the world-man, is by the philosophic development of the life of the perfect divine man by Luke; and as the Christian, the man of faith, is by the different opening, concerning the eternal Word, by John. Da Casta has clearly pointed out certain peculiarly Ro- man and soldierly features that characterize this gospel as a whole; exhibiting emj)liatic repetitions, combined with the rapidity of movement, and copiousness of description with dramatic effect; so that we find the word straightway employed about forty times. Jesus calls men, and they straightway follow him. He enters the synagogue at Ca- pernaum on the Sabbath, and at once begins to teach. Men are amazed at the omnipotence of his command, and his fame immediately spreads through Galilee. Also in 254 MARK. any great design to be accomplished;, which may conflict with the interest of others and stir up opj>osition, we find that there is secrecy of those plans. This is one of the peculiar features of this gospel,, for we find the strictest secrecy is enjoined no less than twenty times. § 6. Omissions of the Second Gospel. It will be seen on examination that Mark omits Avhatever is distinc- tively Jewish, Greek or Christian, and would therefore be of little service in his work of presenting his gospel to the Roman. The peculiarities may be clearly seen, (I) in the omissions, and (II) in the parables. We find no genealogy, no birth, no Bethlehem, no wise men, as in Matthew; no childhood, no Nazareth, no sub- jection to parents, no increase in wisdom and stature, as in Luke; no reference to his pre-existence in glory, as in John. We also find no sermon on the mount, no Lord's prayer, no long discourses, and but few parables; no " Woe unto you," no sentence upon the nation or Jerusalem, no bridegroom, no Lord judging between faithful and un- faithful servants, no king enthroned in glory, separating the righteous from* the wicked, no saying that he could summon legions of angels, no promised paradise to the penitent thief, no notice of the resurrection of saints to appear when he arose leading captivity captive, no burning the chaff with unquenchable fire, as in Matthew. The disciples never call him Lord until after the resurrection; hence no "Lord! is it I?'' no "Lord! save, or I perish!" The reader of Mark's gospel will also note the absence of the numerous parables condemnatory of the Jews, found in the latter half of Matthew's gospel, as they would have been lost on the Romans. As compared with Luke, the omissions of the merely Greek features are equally appar- ent. The suggestive stages of the life of Jesus, upcu which Luke dwells, are not even mentioned bv Mark. II> Oh. XXIX: § 7. additions. 255 appears without delay in his work as the mighty victor. For the Eoman there is but one stage in his career. § 7. Additions to the Second Gospel. The por- tions usually reckoned as additions to this gospel are as follows: The parable of the seed corn (iv: 26-34); the healing of the blind man of Bethsaida (viii: 22-26); the healing of the deaf man of Decapolis (vii: 31-37); and the form of the last commission (xvi: 15-18). The longest of all these is the parable of the seed corn, occupying nine verses. Mark has altogether only four parables, viz: the sower, the seed corn, the mustard seed, and the wicked husband- man. The first three can best be understood together; these are employed in unfolding the growth of the king- dom as an outward objective thing. The first (the sower) contradicts the false Eoman idea, by putting the invisible, spiritual power of truth in the place of the visible, material power of the Caesars; the second (the seed corn) presents a development as independent of human will, and as inevit- able as that of Rome herself according to the most Eoman conception; the third (the mustard seed) completes the sketch of the development of the kingdom, showing the rapid growth into that universality which Eome, alone of all the worldly empires, had even imperfectly realized. Many are the distinctive variations and peculiarities of this gospel, as narrative changes and the slight additions. Under the head of peculiarities we have those of Eoman assumption and Eoman expressions. We find that phase of our Lord presented which represents him as the worker, one of push and activity, ever ready and willing to serve. Hence our Lord is presented as Christ the "Servant," not only to serve while on the earth,* but to aid by his Spirit. In the last verse of Mark's gospel we read: "And they went forth and preached everywhere, the Lord working with them, and confirming the word with signs following.** 256 LUKE. CHAPTER XXX. LUKE. §1. Introduction to Luke's Gospel. Written "for the Greek/' from Greece, A. D. 63. {See Index; also Chro- nology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) GOLDEK TOPIC, "HUMANITY." Luke, the name of the third evangelist, is supposed to have been a native of Antioch. Some suppose that he was the only one of all the penmen of the Scriptures that was not of the Israelites; that he was a Jewish proselyte, and was converted to Christianity by the ministry of Paul at Antioch, and after his coming into Macedonia he was his constant companiou. Nothing is known of his parentage. He employed himself in the study and practice of physic, and hence Paul called him "Luke, the beloved physician." Col. iv: 14. "Luke is supposed to have written this gospel about the year A. D. 63, before he wrote the ' Acts of the Apostles ' — which is a continuation of the former — while in Greece; while the later Church History was probably written in Rome when he was there with Paul, while he was a pris- oner, and ' preaching in his own hired house,' with which this history concludes, A. D. 64 or 5. Jerome says that Luke died when he was eighty-four years of age, and that he was never married. Dr. Cave observes that 'Ins way and manner of writing is accurate and exact, his style polite and elegant, sublime and lofty, and has a classical finish.' Luke, in his gospel, furnishes us with many para- bles, discourses, miracles and events omitted by the gospels preceding it, written for the Creek and m the Greek language. Oil. XXX: § 2. NEEDS OF THE GREEKS. 257 This third gospel was addressed to Theophilus (ch. i: 3), to whom the Acts of the Apostles was also addressed (Acts, i: 1). The name is Greek, meaning lover of God. Some have supposed, from the meaning of the name, that it was used, not to represent any particular person, but Christians in general; while most have agreed that he was only the representative of a large class to whom the gospel had been preached; yet, when the subject is investigated from the historical point of view, the statements of most trust- worthy witnesses make it sufficiently clear that Luke wrote it for the Greek, the representative of the world at large. Among these witnesses are Irenaeus, of the second century, Origen of the third, and Gregory and Jerome of the fourth. The main statements thus brought to light seem to have been received, almost without question, in the early centu- ries of the church." § 2. Character and Needs of the Greeks. If the third gospel, as prepared by Luke, was for the Greek, and for Greek readers in general, then the character and needs of the Greeks must furnish the key to this gospel. The Greeks are clearly distinguished from the other great his- toric races by certain marked characteristics. Every great race shows some part of man's nature in unusual develop- ment. In the old Jewish race, the spirit, or that part of man which links him to God, was the prominent element. In the old Roman race, the will, or that part of man which pushes to action and enables him to control and mould nature and mankind, was the predominant element. While in the old Greek race, the humanity, especially as embrac- ing intellect, taste and feeling, was the prominent feature. The Jew belonged to the race of Shem. The Greek be- longed to the family of Japheth, which has done all of what is usually regarded the world's great intellectual work; and this has given it all those grand secular literatures, ~>b$ LIKE. which contain the highest expression of the soul from its human and earthly side. The Greek looked upon himself as having the mission of perfecting man. Through all the ages, in literature and art, in state craft and gymnastics, he was working toward his one great idea of the perfect man. In his ideal, intellect and taste held the supreme place. His aim was not the beautiful in the lower sense merely, but the thinking, reasoning man, intellect full summed, farthest reaching, most gracefully working. As a worshiper of man, humanity seemed most divine to him — diviner than all physical forces, than all physical life, than empires and emperors — man diviner than all his works, and than all the world! The man on earth, with the grandest powers of thought and beauty of speech and action, was the highest man for the Greek, and nearest the place which he thought the gods ought to occupy. The Greek was a universal man; the Jew and the Roman were by nature exclusive. The Jew could mingle readily with him only who eame from Abraham and received the prophets; the Roman with him only who wielded power in the empire. The full-grown Jew was a Pharisee; the full- grown Roman was a Caesar; but the fall-grown Greek was a world-man. All men could, therefore, meet the Greek as they could not the Jew or the Roman. His religious system provided for taking out all virtue from the world. The Greek deified all of man, what was base as well as what was truly noble and God-like. It left no room for spirituality. In deifying man, it brought God down upon a level with man. His religion had in it a kind of attract- iveness, but it took all the grandeur out of the universe. Instead of seeing the Supreme God and Father everywhere and in all things, shining in beauty and glory, lie saw himself imaged there. It was man's universe, not Jeho- vah's. The altar "to the unknown god " became the only Ch. XXX: § 2. NEEDS OF THE GREEKS. 259 Greek altar winch was in any sense an altar to the true God. In short, the Greek theory hlottecl out the other and higher world, and left him utterly worldly, "having no hope, and without God in the world." This earth was his province, his home, his grave. Thus, in the character and condition of the Greek civil- ization in the apostolic age, is to be found the key to the third gospel. The Greek thought and culture had been the common possession of mankind for four centuries when Luke sent forth his gospel. The indiscriminate worship of humanity had ushered in the reign of natural- ism and sensuality. The worship of the beautiful had ended. In short, religion had become a mockery, and virtue had ended. Utter restlessness and wretchedness had siezed upon the greatest and purest minds, and the old longing for some divine man was everywhere urging toward despair, save as the Jew had quickened and made it hopeful by spreading abroad his idea of the Messiah, as the coming deliverer of the world. "When this gospel went forth for the Greek, it found the world language waiting to bear the world religion to this longing and despairing race, and to all who had been moulded by its ways of thinking and living. It is therefore evident that the Greek must be reached by a peculiar presentation of the gospel, a presentation shaped by these characteristics in his nature and condi- tion. It must present the character and career of Jesus of Nazareth from the Greek point of view, as answering to the conception of a perfect and divine humanity; must exhibit him as adapted, in his power and mercy, in his work and mission, to the wants of the Greek soul, and of humanity as represented in it. In short, the gospel must meet the true, and correct the false, in the Greek ideal. To the Greek these are the credentials of Jesus, no less essential than prophecy to the Jew or power to the Roman. 2 (JO LUKE. § 3. General Divisions. Luke's gospel may be con- veniently divided into five principal parts, presenting the successive stages of the work of Jesus as the divine man for the redemption of the world. First: The advent of the divine man. Clrap. i-iv: 13. Second: The work of the divine man for the Jewish world. Chap, iv: 14-ix: 50. Third: The work of the divine man for the Gentile world. Chap, ix: 51-xviii: 30. Fourth: The sacrifice of the divine man for all man- kind. Chap, xviii: 31-xxiii: 49. Fifth: The divine man, Savior of all nations. Chap, xxiii: 50-xxiv: 53. » § 4. Greek Adaptation. The gospel according to Luke may be regarded as having a twofold idea, internal and external. (a.) The External. The central idea of the third gospel, in its outward aspect, is found in the opening verses of the first chapter. It is a presentation of an accurate history of Jesus of Nazareth. As clearly as we recognize in the first gospel a perpetual comparing of the person of Christ with the prophecies concerning the Messiah, for the Jews; and in the second gospel the exhibition of the mighty deeds of the conqueror of the world in compressed, graphic and living form, for the Roman; so clearly do we recognize in the third gospel the presence of the Jiistorian, preparing for the accurate and philosophic Greek. The author states at once the two main objects of the historical writer: to draw up a continuous narrative, derived from a careful scrutinizing of the testimonies of " eye-witnesses and min- isters of the word;" and to commit it to writing in chro- nological order. Chap, i: 1-4. This gospel takes the form of a complete historical narrative. It opens with an expression which occurs above Ch XXX; § 4. GREEK ADAPTATION. 261 sixty times in the two compositions of Luke: there was, or it happened that. The use of this expression is significant of the historic point of view maintained throughout. Attention to dates, so requisite to history, is found everywhere in Luke. "There was in the days of Herod." Chap, i: 5. With respect to our Lord himself, it is Luke alone who speaks of his being circumcised on the eighth day. Chap, ii: 21. Jesus, at the age of twelve years, as sitting in the midst of the doctors in the temple. Chap, ii : 42. He is the only one that informs us that Jesus was "about thirty years of age" when he received the rite of baptism. Chap, iii: 23. Probably no book of antiquity contains so many varied and wide-reaching references to the institutions, customs, geography and history of their times as do the two books of Luke; so that Luke is justly and pre-eminently called the historian. (b. ) The Internal. The central idea of the third gospel, in its internal aspect, appears throughout. It is this : Jesus is the perfect divine man, the Savior of the world. Wescott says: "In the other gospels we find our King, our Lord, our God; but in Luke we see the image of our great Highpriest, made perfect through sufferings, tempted in all points as we are, but without sin." This gospel asses over the royal lineage by Solomon and Joseph; the prophetic divine origin; the coming of the magi; the massacre of the in- fants; the flight into Egypt, and the return to Nazareth: because such portions have exclusive reference to prophecy and to Jewish wants. Passing on to the public ministry of Jesus, Luke does not record the opening of the ministry in Galilee (Matt. iv), in which prophecy is fulfilled; this was a gospel for the Jew only. So the sermon on the mount finds no place in the third gospel (Matt, v-vii), it being the constitution and character of the kingdom of heaven for Jewish hearers. The portion of Luke's gospel that has sometimes been con- founded with the sermon on flic mount (Luke, vi: 17-49) is entirely without the marks of Jewish references as found in Matthew. Turning from discourses to parables, it will be found (hid Luke deals in like manner with parables aimed directly at the Jew. Of the parables of the kingdom (Matt. xiii). three out of the seven are retained, lie also omits the distinctively Roman features found in the second gospel; and no less striking is his omission of the spiritual and Christian portions of John's gospel. The nnspiritual Greek was qoI prepared for such lessons when Luke gave Ins gospel in permanent form. John's gospel, it given to Ch. XXX: § 6. additions. 263 the Greek before Luke's, would have been foolishness to him. (1 Cor. i: 23.) § 6. Additions of the Third Gospel. If this gos- pel be regarded as made up of 100 parts, 59 of these are peculiar to itself, and only 41 common with one or more of the other gospels. The important point, however, in this connection is, that all the 59 parts peculiar to Luke may be shown to be especially appropriate to the Greek soul and its needs; the 59 parts are tangible additions, and may be examined m detail. It will be seen that there are two very extensive portions of this gospel which are almost entirely its own, viz: the first and second parts. There is not the appearance of likeness between the opening chapters of Luke and those of Matthew and John. Luke's introduction is exactly suited to the Greek. It is chiefly occupied with the pre- sentation of every stage in the development of the humanity of our Lord, beginning from the counsels of God, and end- ing with the complete manhood of the Son of God, the Savior of the world. Luke alone, in the genealogy, traces his descent from Adam and God. He alone gives the infancy and youth of Jesus, including the wonderful events, natural and supernatural, accompanying his birth and cradling in the manger; the strong recognition attend- ing the circumcision and the presentation of the child in the temple; the subsequent visit of the child at twelve years of age to his Father's house; and the law of progress in his human development, in the family at Nazareth, toward the perfect manhood; then represents it as com- pleted in the baptism of John, which introduces him as the Jehovah of prophecy, teacher of the world, and the beloved Son of God. He alone gives the sermon on the plain (ch. vi: 17-49), in which he unfolds the great prin- ciples that should govern men as men of the kingdom of God. The more extensive portions peculiar to Luke (ix- 264: LIKE. xviii: 30), known as the record of Christ's gracious work for the Gentile world, chiefly across the Jordan in heathen Peraea, and on his last journey to Jerusalem, is no less characteristic. The more carefully both the omissions and the additions of the third evangelist are examined, the more clearly it will appear that they are eminently suited to commend Jesus to the Greek world of that age, and the representa- tive men of this age. Luke develops to a wonderful degree the reality of this Saviors human sympathies and affections. This element in his character is seen to the best advantage in the relation which Luke represents him as holding to those classes of humanity for which the age cared the least, to children, to women, and to the outcasts from society. § 7. Children's Gospel. The other evangelists tell us of our Lord's blessing children; but Luke commonly adds something that brings out the tenderness of his regard for them. He alone tells us that they were infants that were brought to Jesus when he so graciously and winningly presented himself as the children's Savior : "And they brought unto him also infants, that he should touch them " (xviii: 15); and the daughter of Jaims was an only child: "one only daughter, about twelve years of age" (viii: 42); that the demoniac healed at the foot of {lie mount of transfiguration was a child: ••Master. I be- seech thee, look upon my son, for he is mine only child* 3 (ix: 38). Taking such incidents in connection with Luke's remarkable presentation of the childhood of the Baptist and of Jesus, in the opening chapters of the gospel, it is easy to understand why this should have been called the children's gospel. £ S. Woman's Gospel. The affectionate regard of our Lord for woman i< an equally marked feature of tins Ch. XXX: § 9. GOSPEL FOR THE TOOK. 265 gospel. Luke tells us of "Certain women, which had been healed of evil spirits and infirmities; Mary, called Magda- lene, out of whom went seven devils; and Joanna, the wife of Chuza, Herod's steward; and Susanna, and many others, which ministered unto him of their substance*' (viii: 2-3); of the penitent woman who anointed him at the feast in the house of Simon the Pharisee (vii: 46); of certain women who lifted up their voices and blessed him (xi: 27); of his address to the women of Jerusalem who followed him to the cross weeping (xxiii: 27); of the restoration of the son of the widow of Xain (vii: 11-16). It is Luke who first introduces us to those typical women of all ages, Martha and Mary (x: 38-45). Such incidents as these, in connection with the tender regard so often exhibited for the Avidowed and bereaved, and more than all, in connection with those wonderful events in the lives of Elizabeth and Mary, unfolded only here, by bringing Jesus into closest sympathy with true womanhood, and by exalting the glory of true motherhood through her who was "blessed among Avomen " (i: 28-32), entitles this gospel to be called in a peculiar sense the gospel of woman, for whom the old Greek world had no gospel. § 9. Gospel for the Poor. More wonderful still was the affectionate sympathy of our Lord, depicted in this gospel, with the poor, despised, suffering, outcast classes of society. While he constantly rebuked and warned the hypocrites, the self-sufficient, the self-righteous, the rich, the luxurious, the frivolous and thoughtless, he is every- where presented as a friend of the poor and the needy. In Luke's gospel (done the beatitudes all become blessings to the poor and suffering (vi: 20-22); the most precious of the parables — as the great supper, the marriage feast, Laz- arus and the rich man. and the prodigal — all mark this the gospel for the poor. The experience of our Lord himself 2t>0 LUKE. is presented as that of one of the poor, since he became poor, was laid in a manger, and his parents were obliged to offer in the temple the offering of the poor (ii: 24). But Lnke makes the sympathy of Jesus with the abso- lute outcasts to stand ont more clearly. It appears in the friendly-recognition of publicans; in the parable of him Avho went up to the temple to pray, and standing afar off, with downcast eyes, smote his breast and prayed: '"God be merciful to me, a sinner*' (xviii: 13); in the story of Zaccheus (xix: 1-10); in the treatment of the sinful but penitent woman who anointed him (yii); in the parable of the lost piece of money and the lost sheep (xv: 3); in that- wonderful "gospel within a gospel,"' the parable of the prodigal (xv: 11); in the penitent malefactor on the cross (xxiii: 42, 43). It is no marvel, then, that this gospel, more than all the others, may be said to have given birth and inspiration to all the great reformatory movements — care of the poor, the deaf, the dumb, the insane, the maimed, the widowed and orphaned, the aged, even the criminal — which distinguish modern Christendom. The third gospel is in a peculiar sense the gospel of those for whom in all ages this world had no gospel. § 10. Con-elusion. It lias been shown to he a fact of history that Luke, a Greek by birth, character and culture. prepared this gospel, with the 1 aid of Paul, for (J reek read- ers, the men who were the representatives of the world at large. The adaptation to this class and its needs lias been shown to furnish the satisfactory explanation of the various peculiarities of this gospel. In distinction from Matthew. the gospel for the. lew. the man of prophecy; from Mark, the gospel for the Roman, ihe man of power; and. from John, the gospel for the Christian, the man of faith: Luke is the gospel for the Greek, tin- world-man. Ch. XXXI: § 2. ORIGIN AND DESIGN. 267 CHAPTER XXXI. JOHN. § 1. Introduction to John's Gospel. Written "for the Christians/ '•from Ephesus, A. D. 97. (See Index; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV: §7.) GOLDEX TOPIC. " DIVINITY. " John, the evangelist and apostle, was the son of Zebedee. a fisherman of Bethsaida, on the sea of Galilee. He was probably the youngest of the twelve apostles, and it is evident from his writings that he possessed a very mild and amiable and affectionate temper. He died at Ephesus at the advanced age of about one hundred years. His writings are the gospel which bears his name, three epistles and The Re relation. § 2. Origin and Design. "What is the actual origin of the gospel of John? For what class of readers was it originally designed? It is clearly a fact of history that the fourth gospel was prepared and given tothe church long- after the other three had been completed, and with a different purpose. There are able witnesses of this fact. The early church fathers have left their testimony on this point. Papias of the first century, Irenaeus and Clement of Alexandria of the second, and Eusebius of the third: the historian adopt- ing the statements of many of those who wrote before his time, and in measure summing up the past testimony. making additions of his own as well. Eusebius gives the origin of John's gospel substantially as follows: "While Matthew prepared his gospel for the Hebrews, and Mark and Luke published their gospels, they say that John in 268 .iohx. all that time preached without writing. When the books of the three evangelists were spread throughout the world, and came into his hands, he approved them and acknowl- edged them as true testimony; but wished that those things which were done at the first preaching of Christ had been made in their books." He therefore wrote his gospel, recording the ministry in Judea and the early miracles. Jerome of the fourth century, in the same passage which he declares the origin of the first three gospels, testifies no less explicitly of the fourth. Augustine, who was contem- porary with Jerome, writes: "The three former evangelists had narrated our Lord ? s temporal acts, and the savings that were of most avail for the conduct of this present life, and which especially concerned the inculcation of active life. St. John relates fewer acts of Christ, but is more full and minute in recording his sayings, particularly concerning the unity of the ever blessed trinity, and the felicity of life everlasting. " These testimonies justify the belief in the following facts: That the apostle John wrote the fourth gospel at the close of the first century; that it was substantially the embodiment of his preaching to the early church, of those spiritual doctrines and experiences which had come from his most intimate communion with Jesus, and which in an important sense supplemented the other gospels; that it was written, not for the Jew, Greek or Roman, as such, but for the church; and that it was fitted to' commend Jesus to Christians in the church as the divine Son of God, the light and life of the world. It was almost half a century after the gospel according to Luke, the last of the missionary gospels, was given t<> the Greek Gentile world that John wrote the gospel which hears his name. And during this interval all the apostles had fallen asleep except John. The first great missionary work had therefore been done, and John m writing Ilia I'll. XXXI: § 3. NEEDS OF THE CHRISTIAN. 269 gospel addressed a generation that had been taught the historical truths recorded by the other evangelists. It is evident, for example, that his declaration "for John was not yet cast into prison" (iii: 24), assumes the knowledge, on the part of his readers, of the account of the imprison- ment of the Baptist given by Matthew (xi), Mark (vi: 14-29), and Luke (iii: 20). The fourth gospel, then, was written by John in response to an appeal from the church — already possessing the other gospels — for a spiritual gospel, and written with the view of furthering the spiritual life of the church, and to answer the demand for a Christian theology from the life of Christ himself. | 3. Character and Needs of the Christian. If, as has been seen, the fourth gospel had its origin in the preaching of John, after the missionary gospels had been preached and the church established throughout the world, then the character and needs of the Christian must furnish the key to this gospel. The Christian is the man who has heard the great facts of the gospel, and who has accepted Jesus Christ as his Savior. He has attained, through faith in Christ, to a new life, which is different in its origin, motives and aims from the earthly life. He is reaching out toward that everlasting life of glory with Christ, of which this new life is the beginning. The Christian is, then, the man of the new life. The Jew lost his narrow Jewish ideas, and turned from the prophecies of Christ and the forms and ceremonies to Christ himself. The Roman ceased to care for the temporal king in finding the spiritual king and deliverer. The Greek parted with his low humanitarian ideas of perfection, in having his eyes opened to see the divine and universal man. They were all brought into one brotherhood, all alike recognizing in Jesus the elder brother, the spring and moving power of their new life, 270 johx. and being all alike linked in living union with Christ through faith. By faith he eats the broken body of Christ, and drinks his shed blood. If the character of the Christian is such as has been represented, it will furnish the key to the gospel intended for him. That gospel must be suited to meet his wants. The gospel for the Christian must present Jesus as the revelation of God, the word, the truth, the light, which the Christian needs in the new life. It is observed that the missionary gospels do not deal largely with these sub- jects, do not deal with them at all, except as they have to do with leading men to the first acceptance of Christ and the beginning of the divine life in him. They leave the Wants of this higher and peculiarly spiritual sphere for some later hand to supply. The fourth gospel must in this sense be the " Supplement" of the first three. To the Christian, then, these are the credentials of Jesus, no less essential than prophecy to the Jew. or power to the Roman, or the perfection of manhood to the Greek; for without them his most pressing needs would he left uusupplied. There could, therefore, be no gospel for the Christ inn in any production which should omit these grand themes of the divine and immortal life of faith. £ 4. The Authorship. The author of the fourth gospel was peculiarly fitted to prepare the truth of the gospel for the Christian. That he was just the man to give shape to the gospel for the Christian church may readily be shown. His birth and early history: his char- acter as transformed and exalted by the power of the gospel; his intimate union with his master, and his intense sympathy with him: his long and profound Christian ex- perience, and his wide acquaintance with the Deeds of the church, combine t<> make him the tit instrumenl for the work to which he was divinely called. Ch. XXXI: £ 4. THE A.UTHOESH1P. 271 Tlie history of John, so far as ir has been recorded, is too familiar ro require extended rehearsal. He appears to have been born in Bethsaida. of Galilee. His father. Zeb- edee. was a respectable and well-to-do fisherman on the sea of Galilee, able to possess his own boats and to have hired servants. His mother. Salome, was one of those women who ministered to Jesns of their wealth, and fol- lowed him to the cross. She went with the Marys, on the morning of the resurrection, to the sepulchre to embalm the body of Jesus. Born of such a mother, it is not surprising that John early became one of the disciples of the Baptist, nor that when the Baptist introduced him to Jesus lie at once followed him as the Messiah. He belonged to that inner circle of Christ, consisting of himself. Peter and James, to the members of which alone Jesns permitted a near view of the great crises of his life and work on earth, such as the transfiguration and the agony. Among the three he was called the beloved dis- ciple, who leaned on Jesus' breast at the table at the last supper. He was the first to follow Jesns. and he was the one to cling most closely to him to the end. To him was entrusted the mother, with whom in his earthly career Jesus had been so closely bound: and from the afflicting houT on the cross to the death of her whose heart had been pierced with many sorrows. Mary and John were as mother and son. Still another peculiar element of fitness in John, as the instrument for preparing the gospel of the Christian life, was his long, varied and profound Christian experience. In this he was alone among the apostles. If. a.- is gener- ally agreed, his gospel was not written until near the close of the first century, he was ripened for it by an experience of nearh seventy years. During nearly three-quarters of a century he lived upon the words of his Master, the eternal Word — in filial intercourse with Mary, in spiritual 272 * john". communion with the church, in living union with the ascended Christ — until those words became the thought of his thought, and the very life of his life. Hence it is that to-day men cling to the gospel of John as the very voice of the innermost soul of the divine Eedeemer. § 5. General Divisions. John's gospel may be di- vided into five parts, presenting the successive stages in the revelation of Jesus as the incarnate Word, as the light and life, to the faith of men. First: The advent and incarnation of the Word. Chap, i: 1-13. Second : The incarnate Word the only life of the world. Chap, i: 14-vi: 71. Third: The incarnate Word, the light and life, in con- flict with the spiritual darkness. Chap, vii: 1-xi: 54. Fourth: The incarnate Word securing the life of the world through his sacrificial death. Chap, xi: 55-xix: 42. Fifth: The incarnate Word, crucified and risen, the Savior and Lord of all believers. Chap, xx, xxi. § 6. Christian Adaptation. The central thought of the gospel, as stated by the evangelist himself, is found in the divine life which has its origin in faitli in Jesus as the Christ, the incarnate Son of God. He distinctly states that his selection of material was made with this end in view: "And many other signs truly did Jesus in the presence of his disciples, which are not written in this book; but these are written that ye might believe that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of God, and that believing ye might have life through his name" (xx: 30, 31). That this is the gospel of the incarnate Son in his rela- tion to the divine life in man is made manifest everywhere. Its teachings would have been unintelligible to the men of that age without the more external and elementary teach- ings of the first three evangelists. It prestipposes the Ch. XXXI: § 7. omissions. 273 previous practical acceptance of Christ as- the Savior of those to whom it was addressed. It is the gospel which gives the Christian the requisite instruction concerning the secret springs and laws of the life of faith and obedi- ence to God, and concerning the mission of the Holy G-host as man's divine helper in this new life. It is obvious that these teachings are given nowhere else in the other gospels with such fullness, clearness and strictness. In short, all the great moving and controlling principles of the Christian life are here alone given in the form needed to prepare the way for an intelligent Christian career. § 7. Omissions of the Fourth Gospel. The Chris- tian aim of the fourth gospel appears especially in its omissions of facts and truths made prominent in the other gospels. As John contemplates the wants of the church, ■in which there was properly no longer a distinction between Jew, Eoman and Greek, he had no need for the material presented in the missionary gospels, and especially designed to commend Jesus to sinners in the representative races of the age. Accordingly we have almost a clean sweep of omissions; none of the leading events detailed by the other gospels, with a single. exception, is recorded by John until he reaches the history of the sufferings and the resurrection of Christ, without which no gospel could be written. This almost entire omission of the material found in the other gospels is what would be expected in the later and sjnritual gospel. No human genealogy, no divine origin of the Messiah, no early experience and preparation for his work, no sermon on the mount, no long series of parables, no apprehensions of the cross, no delivering to the Gentiles and mocked and spitefully treated and spitted upon, no prayer in the garden or agony, no angel strengthening him, not a word of sweating as it were great drops of blood; no weakness, but power; no darkness, no commend- 274 JOHX. ing himself to God. The divine beams through the human everywhere. It passes from these fact* which appeal to the senses of the unspiritual man, to unfold that word of life which speaks to the spiritual man. § 8. Additions of the Fourth Gospel. Still more clearly does the Christian aim of John's gospel appear from the additions which lie makes to the material furnished by the other evangelists. Only six of our Lord's miracles are recorded in it, but these surpass all the rest in depth and special application. Of these six. only one is found in the other gospels. The peculiarities of the five introduced by John are very striking. He alone records the first of all the miracles which Jesus wrought, changing the water into wine (ii: 1-11), in which, without even the utterance of a word, he transforms the very nature of the substance with which he deals. He records that of the nobleman's son (iv: 48-54), cured by Jesus at a distance from Cana. Out of the many cures of the lame and the palsied by the word of Jesus, John selects that of the man who had suffered from an infirmity thirty and eight years (v), a case of the most utter friendlessness and the most abject weakness, helplessness and hopelessness. Out of the innumerable cures of the blind, he chooses the case of the person who I/ad been bom blind (ix), which was such a case as men hail never known to be cured (ix: 32). Tie gives the resurrec- tion of Lazarus to life, not from a death bed, like the daughter of Jairus; tint from a bier for the dead, like the young man of Nain; bat from the grave, when, having lain buried there for four days, he had already begun to sink into corruption (\i). Lastly, the miraculous draught of fishes on the sea of Tiberias (xxi). John docs not record these works simply because they are SO wonderful; but their extraordinary character made them so much the better signs of //><' marvelous t?dngs of God. Ch. XXXI: § 9. christian doctrines. 275 The above are no more marvelous than are his words of instruction, as in the conversation with Nieodemus (iii), the Samaritan woman (iv), with the Jews in the temple at the feast of tabernacles (vii, viii), with the Jews in the temple, in Solomon's porch, at the feast of dedication (x), and the discourses concerning the shepherd and the sheep (x), and the great series connected with the last passover (xii-xvii). § 9. Christian Doctrines. The fourth gospel may be regarded as the embodiment of the theology of the Christian church. I. God. John teaches from the lips of Jesus himself that "God is Spirit" (not a spirit), meaning this, that he is the divine life principle in itself (iv: 24). See ch. i: 18; vi: 46; v: 37. II. The Person of Christ. Jesus is the Word (the Logos), the revealer of God (i: 1). Christ claims to be the revealer of the Father (xiv: 9; Matt, ix: 27; Luke, x: 22), and this is best expressed by his title, the Word. III. The Condition of Man. Before the grace of God bestowed upon him the enabling power of the light of life, man was in darkness, unprepared to appreciate or receive the blessings which Christ came to give (i: 5, 10, 11), many even preferring darkness to light (iii: 19, 21). The state of mind which leads to such results John denotes by the word flesh (iii: 6; viii: 15, etc.). IV. The Doctrine of the Incarnation. Christ came to enlighten this darkness, and to deliver man from this living- death which it involved. "In him was life, and the life was the light of men" (i: 4). "The true light, which lighteth every man that cometh into the world" (i: 9). He is the light of the world (viii: 12; ix: 5; xii: 35, 36, 46). Such are the statements with which the gospel is filled. 276 johx. V. The Doctrine of the Holy Spirit. It has been seen that Luke's teaching concerning the Hoi)' Spirit is greatly in advance of that of Matthew or Mark; but it nowhere approaches the definiteness of John, who makes him the applier of the redemption wrought by Christ. He is sent by Christ from the Father (xv: 26; xvi: 7, 8). By John alone is he named the Comforter or helper (xiv: 16, 26; xv: 26; xvi: 7). VI. The Resurrection and Judgment. John teaches the fact and the cause of the resurrection. "The hour is com- ing in the which all that are in their graves shall hear his voice, and shall come forth" (v: 28). This is the teaching throughout the gospel (vi: 39, 40, 44, 54, etc.), "I am the resurrection and the life: he that believeth in me, though he ivere dead, yet shall he live: and whosoever liveth and believeth in me shall never die" (xi: 25, 26). The fourth gospel is equally clear on the doctrine of the judgment and of the future life. "All that are in their graves shall hear his voice, and come forth; they that have done good unto the resurrection of life; and they that have done evil unto the resurrection of damnation" (v: 29). To come forth from the grave is, therefore, to come forth to judgment; and there are two future states, right- eous and wicked. Such, in brief outline, is the doctrinal system of John's gospel. Both the omissions and additions of this gospel are thus seen to furnish evidence of the Christian aim of the evangelist. § 10. Conclusion: Four Gospels Needed. Why four gospels is plainly seen from the preceding studies of the evangelists. It entered into the purpose of God from the beginning to give the divine religion of the Christian revelation to all mankind. The great commission sent the apostles to preach the gospel to every creature. In its Ch XXXI. § 11. ELEMENT COMMON TO THE FOUR. 277 fulfillment it required just so many and just such gospels to meet the wants of the world in commending Jesus to all men as the Savior from sin. It may be profitable to direct the attention to the two main facts of the gospel, the first, the element common to all four, and the second, the element peculiar to each. § 11. The Element Common to the Four. There is a central mass of fact and truth around which Matthew, Mark, Luke and John alike grasp their material. These chief facts may be summed up in four particulars. The first is found in the incarnation of the Son of God. The four evangelists set it forth in such a way as to make it plain to every candid reader. With Matthew, Jesus is Emanuel, God with us, the fulfillment of prophecy; with Mark he is the Son of God in human form, exercising his almighty power; with Luke he is the descendant of Adam and the child of the virgin, yet the Son of the. Highest; with John he is the eternal Word made flesh. The second is found in the life of the Son of G-od on the v earth in human form, and subject to human conditions and laws. This makes up the central portion of each of the gospels. With Matthew it is the life of the Messiah; with Mark of the mighty worker and victor; with Luke of the divine and universal man; with John of the incarnate Word. The third of these common particulars is found in the death upon the cross. As this is the all essential fact, all the gospels devote large space to it, delineating also the events centering in it. In short, here is the ground which all the evangelists traverse most carefully. They all give the triumphal entry, the passover supper, the betrayal in Gethsemane, the trial and condemnation, the death and crucifixion, and the burial. The fourth and last of these common features is found in the rising of Jesus from the dead on the third day, in 278 JOHN. his subsequent intercourse with his disciples, in liis giving to the apostles their great commission to preach the gospel to all the world, and in his ascension to heaven. All these — the incarnation, the life, the death, the resur- rection — are essential facts and truths of the gospel, those which at the first made it good neivs to men. Without any one of them all it would cease to be good news; for, with- out the incarnation, the Son of God would have no part in our human nature; without the life on earth he could neither be our righteousness nor our example; without the death he could not be our sacrifice for sin; and without the resurrection and ascension his claims would have been false, and the world would have been left to perish without a Savior. § 12. The Element Peculiar to Each. There is an element of fact and truth peculiar to each of the evan- gelists. It was by means of this, as has been seen, that the fundamental and essential gos]3el truth was brought by Matthew, Mark, Luke and John favorably before the minds of the Jew, Roman, Greek and Christian, and Jesus of Nazareth commended to them all as the Savior of the world. In all ages the Jewish, Roman and Greek natures re- appear among men, and in fact make up the world of natural men; while Christian nature and wants likewise remain essentially identical. From age to age the four gospels appeal to the classes who. in temperament, mental constitution, training and modes of thought, are like those for whom of old, in obedience to the inspiring breath of God. they were prepared. For the man with nature inclined to bow to authority, to appreciate divine religious forms, to exalt the peculiar position of Cod's people, and to trace the marvelous plan of Cod in the preparation for the Messiah and in the progress of his kingdom, the gospel which Matthew wrote Ch. XXXI; § 12. ELEMENT PECULIAR TO EACH. 279 for the Jew must possess a permanent and absorbing- interest. For the man of power, reverencing law, given to action, fitted to be an actor or leader in pushing forward the conquest of the world for Christ, the gospel which Mark wrote for the Roman must retain its old significance and an ever potent inspiration as the battle call of the Almighty Conqueror. For the man of reason and taste, of philosophic and aesthetic culture, the man longing for the perfect man- hood, cherishing a world-wide sympathy for mankind, delighting to contemplate the universal reach of the grace of God the Father to sinners, the gospel which Luke wrote for the Greek must maintain an increasing reasonableness and an undying influence as the voicing of the infinite reason of the divine man. And fourth, the man of faith, saved by the incarnation and atonement of the Son of God, the man of the new and divine life of obedience and devotion to Christ, the man enlightened, guided and helped by the Holy Ghost, the gospel which John wrote for the Christian Church cannot fail to retain an immortal fascination, and to furnish a supreme satisfaction as the utterance of God's eternal Word to the believing soul. It is on this wise that the one gospel of God in fourfold form, which was exactly fitted to commend Jesus to the ancient world, is still so perfectly adapted to meet the wants of the modern world that it would require a revolu- tion in the mental structure and experience of men before any other number of gospels, or different ones from the four in the New Testament, could meet the necessities of ruined and redeemed humanity. God appears, therefore, in his Word no less than in his world, as a God of order. The same perfect and divine plan which science is finding in the latter, a rational and. reverential study finds in the former. ;>80 LESSON XVII. LESSOR XVII. hi. (daii. : " $£mybhiji, ' ' few, fudea . & 2(1. oMallc : "ifewanij" moman, ohonw. 3(1. Sake : u ^fmnanl4u, ' ' ^leetc, fleece. 4>4h. John: u W'mini4u, 11 (ghmiian, ^/ihebu*. © { 5 1 63 97 SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. Note. Review New Testament grand division from Index in introducing this lesson. How many distinct parts are there in the New Testa- ment? (Ch. XXVII: § 2.) What is the first? The second? Third? Into how many parts is the New Testament His- torical divided? (§ 3.) What are they? See Index. How- many years of history in the first? Into how many parts is the life of Christ divided? (§ 3.) Note. Draw the bracket and place the numbers. What is the name of the first? Note. Bring out something of the history of the evangelists as they are named. What is the name of the second? Third? Fourth? Why four gospels? (§ 4.) Note. State clearly — using the four fingers of the left hand — the four reasons why four gospels; then present Luke as the historian. By whom was the first gospel written? Note. Define the word gospel. Ch. XXXII: § 1. introduction to the acts. 281 What is the golden topic? (Ch. XXVIII.) For whom written? Where was it written? When? Note. State the character and needs of the Jews, and Matthew's use of the gospel, with other matter, as time will admit? What is the name of the second evangelist? (Ch. XXIX.) Note. Define the w r ord evangelist. What is the golden topic? For whom written? etc. Note. Question as above on third (Ch. XXX) and fourth (Ch. XXXI) evangelists, and conclude with review, answering the ques- tion, Why four gospels? CHAPTER XXXII. ACTS-OHUBOH HISTOEY. § 1. Introduction to the Acts of the Apostles, Written for the church by Luke, from Rome, A. I). 64. (See Index; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) GOLDEN TOPIC, " OBG AXIZATIXXN". " "Luke, as before mentioned, was the writer of the book of Acts. He was the constant and faithful attendant of Paul through the various scenes and experiences of his missionary labors; and though in his writings he modestly never refers to himself, yet Paul in his epistles speaks of him in high commendation. Col. iv: 14; 2 Tim. iv: 11. (Lesson, Prov. xxvii: 2.) The gospels close with a prophetic allusion to several facts recorded in the Acts, and with a promise of the Holy Spirit, of which this book gives the fulfillment. Luke, xxiv: 47-49; Mark, xvi: 17-18; John, xiv: 12-17.'— Xicholls. 282 ACTS: CHURCH HISTORY. "I. This history looks back to the preceding gospels; the promises there are here made good, particularly the great promise of the descent of the Holy Ghost, and his wonderful operations, both on and with the disciples. II. It looks forward to the following epistles, introduces them and is a key to them, as the history of David is a key to the Psalms. The four gospels showed us how the foundation of God's house was laid; this shows us how the superstructure began to be^reared. First, among the Jews and Samaritans, an account of which is given in the first part of the Acts. Second, among the Gentiles, narrated in the latter part. Passing on, we find the Christian church subsisting in a visible profession of faith in Christ, as the Savior of the world, made by his baptized disciples, and incorporated into religious societies." — Henry. " Luke undoubtedly intended this book as an appendix to his gospel, if not, indeed, the whole may be considered as one publication in two parts." — Home. It will be observed by the careful reader that Luke's gospel and the Acts art- one continued history; for where the former leaves off the latter begins, after the introduction contained in the first thirteen verses. "The Acts comprise a history of about thirty years, from the Savior's ascension to Paul's arrival at Rome after his appeal to Caesar. This book, being continued to the second year of Paul's imprisonment, could not have been written before A. I). 63; and as his death in $5 is not mentioned, was probably composed before (probably A. D. Uy'-r-Home. "The epistles plainly suppose that those facts had actu- ally occurred which this history relates. Hence appears the importance of the Acts, as a kind of postscript to the gospels, and as an introduction to the epistles, to the study <.f which it forms a most useful guide." — Nicholls. Oh. XXXII: § 2. TWO GENERAL PARTS. 283 * § 2. Two General Parts. The book of the Acts may, for convenience of study, be divided into two general divisions, viz: I. Chap, i-xii. In which Peter is the centre of the first great group of sayings and doings. The holder of tire keys of the kingdom of heaven becomes the prime actor under God in the founding of the church; ^unlocking the door first to the Jews (ch. ii), and afterwards to the Gentiles (ch. x). See Matt, xvi: 18, 19. II. Chap, xiii-xxviii. Saul (Paul) is introduced to the reader's notice in the eighth chapter, but is not brought forward as the main actor until the thirteenth chapter. "None of the twelve apostles,'' says Dr. Smith, "were,, humanly speaking, fitted to preach the gospel to the culti- vated Gentile world. To be by divine grace the spiritual conqueror of Asia and Europe, God raised up another instrument, from among the highly educated and zealous Pharisees. The preparation of Saul of Tarsus for the work to be done, the progress of that work in his hands, his journeys, preaching and perils, and his being brought to Eome, are the subjects of the last half of the book, of which the great central figure is the Apostle Paul.'* (a.) Analysis of the Four Particular Parts. The book may be further divided into four parts, as follows: Analysis Part I. "Chap. i-ii. Point to the great foun- dation of Christianity, the resurrection and ascension of Christ, and the descent of the Holy Spirit; facts to which alone its progress in the world can be attributed, and on which alone the hope of its final triumph can rest. Analysis Part II. Chap, iii-ix. Contain an account of the spreading of Christianity among the Jews, from A. D. 33-40. Analysis Part III. Chap, x-xii. Contain an account of the spreading of Christianity among the devout Gen- 284 ACTS: CHURCH HISTORY. tiles; that is, among those Gentiles who, like Cornelius, had before worshiped the one true God; together with its further progress among the Jews, A. D. 40-45. Analysis Part LV. Chap, xiii-xxviii. Contain an ac- count of the spreading of Christianity among the idola- trous Gentiles, together with its further progress among the Jews and Gentile proselytes, A. D. 45-62." — Nichotts. Note. Parts I, II and III should be read in this connection. The student should, in pursuing this very interesting history of the organ- ization of the church, have constantly before him some good Bible Atlas, noting the places as reference is made to them, as a knowledge of Paul's letters depends very much upon it. § 3. The Apostle Paul. The prominent place Paul holds, as the writer of fourteen of the twenty-one epistles, renders some notice of him necessary as an introduction to his epistles and his work. "His history, as collected from different parts of the New Testament, and as given by himself, is as follows: He was a Jew of Tarsus, a city of Cilicia; a freeborn Roman citizen; a Pharisee and the son of a Pharisee; circumcised the eighth day; of the tribe of Benjamin; a Hebrew of the Hebrews; brought up at the feet of Gamaliel; taught ac- cording to the perfect manner of the law of the fathers; being conversant, also, not only with Jewish but Greek literature; and thus distinguished from the rest of the apostles as a man of education and learning." — Nichotts. Paul is first introduced to the reader as consenting to the death of Stephen (viii: 1), the first martyr of the Chris- tian faith, A. D. 31.* Again we read of him "breathing out threatenings and slaughter against the disciples of the Lord," on his way to Damascus, with Letters from the high priests giying him authority to visit the synagogues, that if he found any of this way, whether they were men or * The chronology relating to Paul and his epistles is from Cony beare and Howson. Ch. XXXII: § 4. OUTLINE PAKT IV. 285 women, he might bring them bound to Jerusalem; also of his miraculous conversion, and his preaching (ch. ix), A. D. 36. We afterwards learn of his being in his native city, Tarsus, A. D. 38, where he was sought by Barnabas. " Then departed Barnabas to Tarsus to seek Saul (Paul): And when he had found him, he brought him unto Antioch (A. D. 44). And it came to pass that a whole year they assembled themselves with the church, and taught much people. And the disciples were called Christians first at Antioch." Ch. xi: 25, 26. § 4. Outline of Acts, Part IT. {See Analysis Part IV, $2.) Chap, xiii: 1. Paul and Barnabas are chosen to go to the Gentiles (at Antioch, A. D. 46-7). 7. Sergius Paulus and Elymas, the sorcerer. 14. Paul preaches at Antioch, in Pisidia, that Jesus is Christ. 42. The Gentiles believe, and the Jews gainsay and blaspheme. 46. Paul and Bar- nabas turn to the Gentiles. 48. As many as were ordained to life believe. Chap, xiv: 1. Paul and his companion are persecuted from Iconium. 8. At Lystra Paul heals a cripple, where- upon they are reported as gods; Paul is stoned. 21. They pass through different churches, confirming the disciples in faith and patience. 26. Keturning to Antioch, they report what God has done for them, A. D. 49. Chap, xv : 1. Divisions arise touching circumcision. 6. The apostles in council at Jerusalem consult about it (A. D. 50); and they send their determination by letters to the churches. 36. Paul and Barnabas, thinking of visiting the brethren together, fall into strife, and separate. Chap, xvi: 1. Paul circumcises Timothy. 7. Is called by the Spirit into Macedonia. 14. Lydia is converted. 16. He casts out a spirit of divination. 19. Paul and Silas are whipped and imprisoned at Philippi. 31. The jailor is converted, and they are dismissed, A. D. 52. 286 acts: church history, Chap, xyii: 1. Paul preaches at Thessalonica, where some believe and others persecute him. 10. Paul and Silas are sent by night to Berea, where many are converted. 13. Jews from Thessalonica persecute them ; Paul goes to Athens, and preaches the living God to them "unknown," whereby many are converted to Christ. Chap, xviii: 1. Paul comes to Corinth; labors with his hands and preaches to the Gentiles. 9. The Lord encour- ages him in a vision. 11. "And he continued there a year and six months, teaching among them the word of God." Outline of Acts continued, see § 7. Note. During this time Paul writes his first and second letters to the church at Thessalonica, from whence he had recently come, and where he organized a church. Considerable additional interest will be felt in the epistles of Paul, and light will be thrown upon their contents, by reading them in the chronological order in which they were written, with a knowledge of the place, time, occasion and cir- cumstances in which they were written. This is the object of the following introductions to Paul's letters. § 5. Introduction to Paul's First Letter to the Church at Thessalonica. Written from Corinth, A. 1). 52. (See Judex; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV ; § ?.) GOLDEN TOPIC "ENCOURAGEMENT UNDER TRIALS." (a.) Paul in Thessalonica. "Thessalonica was a very large and flourishing city, where trade was free, and the capital of Macedonia. The place is now called Salonica. Here Paul came after he had been at Philippi, and stayed there about three weeks, and preached every Sabbath. Many Jews, Greeks and chief women of the place received the glad tidings of salvation which he declared, and the foundation of a gospel church was laid. The wicked Jcavs, who despised the apostle's message, raised a mob and assaulted the house of .Jason, where Paul and Silas were, and they were sent a\va\ for safety by night out of the city. Timothy wae soon after sent by the apos- Ch. XXXII: § 5. church at thessalonica. £87 tie to comfort and instruct the converts of this city. He was pleased with what he saw, and took back to the apostle a report of the faith and charity which appeared among the Thessalonians. " — Collin. (1.) Reasons for Writing. "We now arrive at the point in the life of Paul when his first letter was written. This fact is ascertained by a comparison of the Acts and epistles with one another. Such comparison enables us to perceive that the apostle's mind on his arrival at Corinth, where he penned this letter, Avas still turning with affection and anxiety toward his converts at Thessalonica. While he 'labored, working with his own hands/ among the Cor- inthians, as he afterwards reminded them, in his heart he was praying continually, with thanksgiving, as he says to them himself in the letter (ch. i: 2) which he dictates in the interval of his labors. While thus employed — in the daily labor in the workshop and the weekly discussions in the synagogues — Timothy and Silas return from Macedonia. Timothy (as we have seen) had been sent, while Paul was still in Athens, to visit and establish the church of Thessalonica. The news he brought on his return to Paul caused him to write this first letter to these beloved converts. It seemed to have been occasioned partly by his wish to express his earnest affection for them, and to encourage them under trials and persecutions, but it was also called for ly some errors into which they had fallen. Many of the new converts Were uneasy about the state of their relatives or friends who had died since their conversion. They feared that these departed Christians would lose the happiness of witnessing their Lord's second coming, which they expected soon to behold. In this expectation others had given themselves up to a religious excitement, and neglected to work at the business of their calling, but might claim support from the richer members of the church. Others, again, had 288 ACT§: CHURCH HISTORY. yielded to the same temptations which afterwards influ- enced the Corinthian church, and despised the gift of prophesying in comparison with those other gifts which afforded more opportunity of display. These reasons, and others that will appear in the letter itself, led Paul to write to the Thessalonians." — Conybeare and Hoioson. (c.) Outline of PauVs First Letter. "Chap, i: 1. The introduction. .2-10. A thanksgiving for the grace received by the Thessalonians. Chap, ii: 1-12. A declaration of the sincerity and love of the apostle and his fellow laborers. 13-16. The effect produced at Thessalonica by their preaching. Chap, ii: 17-23; iii: 1-13. Their desire, care and joy on account of the converts. Chap, iv : 1-8. An exhortation to grow in holiness. 9-12. Exhortation to brotherly love and industry. 13-18. Declaration concerning those that sleep, and those who shall be alive, at the coming of Christ. Chap, v: 1-1.1. Concerning the times and seasons. 12- 26. Sundry exhortations. 27,28. A charge to. read this letter to all the brethren, and the usual benediction. " — Carpenter, Let a careful reading of this first letter follow here. § 6. Introduction to Paul's Second Letter to the Church at Thessalonica. Written from Corinth. A. I). 53. [See Index; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV: §7.) GOLDEN TOPIC, "ANTI-CHRIST FORETOLD/' Paul's second letter to the Thessalonians, like the first, was written during his stay at Corinth, which was about one year and a half. (a.) Why Paul Wrote Again. "He found it necessary to write again to them. The exeitement which he had endeavored to allay by his Vw^i epistle had increased, and OK. XXXII: §7. outlike of acts, part iv. 289 the fanatical portion of the church had availed themselves of the impression produced by Paul's personal teachings to increase it. It will be remembered that a subject on which he had especially dwelt while in Thessalonica, and to which he had also alluded in his first epistle, was the second advent of our Lord. Some of his disciples, on the other hand, inferred that if indeed the present world was so soon to come, to an end, it was useless to pursue their common earthly employments any longer. They forsook their work and gave themselves up to dreamy expectations of the future, so that the whole framework of society in the Thessalonian church was in danger of dissolution. Those who encouraged this delusion supported it by imaginary revelations of the Spirit; and they had recourse to forgery, and circulated a letter purporting to be written by Paul in confirmation of their views. To check this evil Paul wrote his second espistle, reminding them of certain signs which must precede the second advent." — Conybeare and Howson. This second letter is now to be carefully read, bearing in mind the above introduction, which will greatly aid the student to- understand it. It is clear that the leading topic is "Anti-Christ Foretold" (ch. iv: 4-18). The fol- lowing is an outline by Carpenter. (b.) Outline of Paul's Second Letter. Chap, i: 1-2, contains the inscription. 3-12. Thanks- giving and prayer for the Thessalonian s. Chapi ii: 1-12. The doctrine concerning the man of sin. 13-14. The Thessalonians comforted against this trial. Chap, ii: 15-iii: 5. Exhortation and prayer. 6-16. Di- rections to correct the disorder.. 17-18. Conclusion. We will now proceed with the record contained in Acts. § 7. Outline of Acts, Part IT. {Continued from § 4.) Paul leaves Corinth in the spring of A. D. 54. 290 acts: church histoey. Chap, xviii : 18. Passing from city to city, Paul strength- ens the disciples. 24. Apollos is instructed by Aquila and Priscilla, and preaches Christ with good effect. Chap, xix: 1. Paul comes to Ephesus (A. D. 55); the Holy Spirit is given by Paul's hands. 8. He occupies the synagogue three months only, but continues in the city for the space of two years. (See ver. 10.) Note. During this stay at Ephesus Paul wrote his first letter to the church at Corinth. Outline of Acts continued, see § 9. § 8. Introduction to Paul's First Letter to the Church at Corinth. Written from Ephesus, A. D. 57. {See Index; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) GOLDEX TOPIC, " RESURRECTION. v (a.) City of Corinth. Corinth was a large and flourish- ing city, situated on an isthmus of the same name, and was the capital of Achaia, one of the lower provinces of Greece. Its situation was favorable to commerce, being between two ports, the one open to the eastern and the other to the western navigation. Its situation placed it. as it were, in the centre of civilization. It is also celebrated 'for its games, to which Paul frequently alludes in his let- ters. To this city Paul came from Athens, in the autumn of 52 A. D., and founded a Christian church. One evil prevailed extensively, and threatened to corrupt the whole church. (b.) Reasons for Pa id's Writing. "'So notorious was this that it had already passed into the vocabulary of the Greek tongue, and the verb 'to Corihthianize ' meant f to play the wanton;' nay, the bad reputation of the city had become proverbial even in foreign languages. On account of this growing evil Paul now determined to visit Corinth. He has described this visit as a painful one; how he had 'mourned 5 over those who had dishonored the name of Cb. XXXII: § 8. to the church at corinth. 291 Christ by the ' : micleanness and fornication and wantonness which they had committed. ' He reminded them how at their baptism they lmcl died to sin and risen again to righteousness; but lie did not at once exclude them from the church which they had defiled. Yet he was compelled to threaten them, saying: 'If I come again I will not spare." But his censures and warnings had produced too little effect upon his converts; his mildness had been mis- taken for weakness. Then it was that he felt himself compelled to resort to harsher measures ; he wrote an epistle (which has not been preserved to us) in which, as we learn from himself, he ordered the Christians of Cor- inth, by virtue of his apostolic authority, 'to cease from all intercourse with fornicators.' To correct these abuses, and to answer some questions which the Corinthians had in a letter proposed to Paul (1 Cor. i: 11, 1*2; v: 1), was the object of this epistle. Some of them had so lost the very foundation of Chris- Han faith as to deny the resurrection of the dead. A crime recently committed by one of these pretended Christians was now reported to Paul. A member of the Corinthian church was openly living in incestuous intercourse with his stepmother, yet for this audacious act was n-ot excluded from the church. Xor were these the only evils. There was a lack of decent order of Christian worship: women had forgotten the modesty of their sex, and came forward unveiled (con- trary to the habits of the country) to address the public assembly; even the sanctity of the communion was profaned by scenes of reveling and debauch. About the same time that this distressful intelligence was brought to Paul by the household of Chloe, other messengers arrived from Corinth bearing the answer of the church to his previous letter (the one above mentioned), of which they requested an explanation, at the same time referring to his decision 292 acts: church history. several questions which caused dispute and difficulty. These questions related, first, to the controversies respect- ing meat which had been offered to idols; second, to the dispute regarding celibacy and matrimony, the right of divorce, and the perplexities which arose in the case of mixed marriages, where one of the parties was an unbe- liever; third, to the exercise of spiritual gifts in public assemblies of the church. Paul hastened to reply to these questions, and at the same time to denounce their sins. The letter which he was thus led to write is addressed not only to this metropolitan church, but also to the Christian communities established in other places in the same province. This letter is in its contents the most diversified of all Paul's epistles." — Conybeare and How ton. (c.) Outline of Paul's First Letttr. The following par- ticulars comprise the whole subject matter: "Chap, i: 1-9. The introduction. Chap, i: 10-iv: 40. Exhortations relative to dissensions. Chap. v. Concerning the incestuous person. Chap. vi. Unlawfulness of going to law before unbe- lievers. Chap. vii. Marriage and virginity. Chap. viii. Unlawfulness of eating meat offered to idols. (Jimp. ix. Paul claims the rights of a Christian minister and an apostle. Chap. x. The Jewish institutions are types of ours. Ghap. xi-xiv. Regulations about public worship, the Lord's supper, spiritual gifts and charities. Chap. xv. Concerning the resurrection. Chap. xvi. Exhortations, salutations, common duties. etc." — Carpenter. Note. Trusting the above introduction and outline will greatly aid in understanding it, let the student now take the Bible and read Paul's first letter to the Corinthian church. Then return to Acts, xix. 10, where we arc told Paul "continued by the space of two years" at Ephesus. Oh. XXXII: § 10. TO THE CHURCH AT CORINTH. 293 § 9. Outline of Acts, Part IT. {Continued from §7.) Chap, xix: 11. "God wrought special miracles by the hand of Paul." 13. The Jewish exorcists confounded, and their books burnt (worth. 8,000 dollars). 24. Deme- trius's love of gain; raises an uproar against Paul, which is appeased by town clerk. Chap, xx : 1. Paul goes into Macedonia (to Philippi, in the summer of A. D. 57; and in the autumn of the same year writes his second letter to the church of Corinth). Outline of Acts continued, see § 13. § 10. Introduction to Paul's Second Letter to the Church at Corinth. Written from Ephesus, A. D. 57. {See Index; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV : § 7.) GOLDEX TOPIC, "GLORY OE THE GOSPEL." Paul had great anxiety about this* church, knowing the trials, temptations and dangers with which it had to con- tend. His three years abode with them acquainted him with the power of their enemies. Haying written them a letter while at Ephesus. giving the church instruction concerning one of the most difficult cases, and answering certain questions which were most vital to them, it is not to be wondered at that he should be anxious to learn the result or effect of his letter. (a.) Object of Paul's Second Letter. il The whole tone of his second letter to Corinth shows the depression under which he was laboring; and he expressly tells the Cor- inthians that this state of feeling lasted not only at Troas, but also aft'er he reached Macedonia. He says: 'When first I came into Macedonia (or Philippi) my flesh had no rest; without were fightings, within were fears.' And this had continued until 'God, who comforts them who are cast down, comforted me by the coming of Titus.' At length the long expected Titus arrived, and relieved the 294 acts: church history. anxiety of his master by better tidings than he expected, the majority having submitted to his injunctions. They had passed excommunication upon the incestuous person, and they had already contributed toward the collection for the poor Christians of Palestine. But there' was still a minority whose opposition seemed to have been rather embittered than humbled by the sub- mission which the great body of the church had thus yielded. They charged Paul with craft in his design, and with selfish and mercenary motives, especially in the col- lection which he was raising. The same opponents -accuse him of vanity and cowardly weakness; they declared that he was continually threatening without striking, and prom- ising without performing; always on his way to Qorinth, but never venturing to come; and that he was as vacillating in his teaching as in his practice, refusing to circumcise Titus, yet circumcising Timothy; a Jew among Jews, and a Gentile among the Gentiles. It appears that the party who opposed Paul were headed by an emissary from Palestine (ch. iii: 1), who brought letters of commendation from some members of the church at Jerusalem, and who boasted of his pure Hebrew descent and his special connection with Christ himself. Paul calls him a false apostle, a minister of Satan disguised ;is a min- ister of righteousness, and hints that he was actuated by corrupt motives. His confident hearing was contrasted with the timidity and self distrust which had been shown by Paul. They even extolled his personal advantages over their first teacher's, comparing his rhetoric with Paul's inartful speech, his commanding appearance with the in- significance of Paul's 'bodily presence." Titus, having delivered to Paul this mixed intelligence of the state of Corinth, was immediately directed to return thither (in company with two disciples), in order to con- tinue the business of the collection. Paul made him the bearer of another letter, which is addressed not to Corinth Cll. XXXII: § 11. TO THE CHUKCH AT GALATIA. 295 only, but to all the churches in the whole province of Achaia." — Conybeare and Hoicson. The great object of the apostle seems to have been to overcome the difficulties reported to him in the Corinthian church, by presenting in a most charming manner the "Glory of the Gospel." Chap. iii. The following analysis brings out the prominent features of this letter. (b.) Outline of Paul's Second Letter. "Chap, i: 1-7. The preface. 8-14. An account of the persecution which the apostle had suffered in Asia, from which he had oeen miraculously rescued. 15-24. His pur- pose to visit Corinth. Chap, ii-vii. Concerning the sorrow the Corinthians had suffered on account of the expelling of the incestuous per- son. His own vindication against the false apostle, in which he gives an account of his doctrine, iii: 6-18; his conduct, iv: 1-6; and his bodily infirmities, iv: 7, v; exhor- tations to a holy life, vi, vii. Chap, viii-ix. The alms that had been collected and were yet to be collected. Chap, x-xii. Paul's defence against the false apostle and his calumniators in general. Chap. xiii. Miscellaneous matters.'' — Carpenter. A careful study of the above analysis and introduction will greatly aid the reader in comprehending this second letter to the church at Corinth. § 11. Introduction to Paul's Letter to the Church at Galatia. Written from Corinth, A. D. 57-8. (See Index; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) GOLDEX TOPIC, "LAW VEKSUS GOSPEL." Paul now leaves Ephesus, where he has spent the autumn of A. D. 57 and written 2 Corinthians, and returns to Cor- inth to spend the winter, where he wrote the epistle to the Galatians. 296 acts: church history. (a.) Reasons for Writing. "But a painful surprise awaited him on his arrival. He found that intelligence had reached Corinth concerning the state of the Galatian churches which excited both his astonishment and his indignation. His converts there, whom he regarded with peculiar affection, whose love and zeal for him had for- merly been - so conspicuous, were rapidly forsaking his teachings and falling an easy prey to the arts of Judaizing missionaries from Palestine. We know how great was the difficulty which Paul had to meet, with this restless party at Corinth (2 Cor. iii); and now he heard that they had been working the same mischief in Galatia, where he had least expected it. Paul, in addressing the Galatians, al- though he assumes that there were some who were familiar with the Mosaic law, yet evidently implies that the majority were converts from heathenism. At any cost of falsehood and detraction these false teachers resolved to loosen the hold of Paul upon the affections and respect of these con- verts. Thus to the Galatians they accused him of a want of uprightness in observing the law himself while among the Jews, yet persuading the Gentiles to renounce it; they declared that he was an interested flatterer, ' becoming all things to all men,' that he might make a party for himself; and, above all, the}- insisted that he falsely represented himself as an apostle of Christ, for that he had not, like the twelve, been a follower of Jesus when he was on the earth, and had not received his commission; that, on the contrary, he was only a teacher sent out by the authority of the twelve, whereas his doctrine (they alleged) was now in opposition to that of Peter and James and other 'pillars' of the church. In this letter his principal object is to show that the doctrines of these false teachers did in fact destroy the very essence of Christianity, and reduced it from an in- ward and spiritual life to an outward and ceremonial system; but, in order to remove the seeds of distrust Oh. XXXII: § 11. TO THE CHURCH AT GALATIA. 297 which had been planted in the minds of his converts, he begins by fully contradicting the falsehoods which had been propagated against himself by his opponents, and especially by vindicating his title to the apostolic office as received directly from Christ, and exercised independently of the other apostles. Snch were the circumstances and such the objects which led him to write this epistle." — Cony bear e and Howson. (b.) Three General Parts. "The epistle divides into three parts. Analysis Part I. A vindication of Paul and his doc- trine. Ghap. i. Showing that he derived his authority from Christ himself, and was in no way inferior to the other apostles. Chap. 11 1-10. That he preached the same gospel as the other apostles, and (ver. 11-21) that his practice was con- sistent with his doctrine. Analysis Part II. A series of proofs, drawn from the Old Testament, that the law had been abolished by Christ. Chap, iii: 1-5. Justification is only to be obtained by faith. 6-18. The nature of the covenant made with Abra- ham proves this. Chap, iii: 19 to iv: 8. The design of the Mosaic law was not to disannul the promise, but. to prepare men for its reception. Chap, iv: 9 to v: 12. The. Galatians reproved for their defection from the gospel. Analysis Part III. Practical inferences from the fore- going discussions. Chap, v 13-15. Cautions against abusing the doctrines of grace. Chap. v. 16-24. The works of the flesh and fruits of the Spirit contrasted. 298 ACTS: CHURCH HISTOEY. Chap, v: 25 to vl: 10. Directions to the Galatians for the regulation of conduct towards each other. Chap, vi: 11-18. The conclusion of the epistle, with Paul's usual benediction." — Carpenter. The leading topic in this letter seems to centre in the comparing of the Messiah of the Old Testament with the Christ of the New Testament,; or "Law versus Gospel." See ch. iii: 16-29. Note. Spring now opens, and we find Paul still in Corinth (A. D. 58), Having a strong desire to visit Rome (Acts, xix: 21), he decides to write to the church, of which letter the following is an introduc- tion and outline. § 12. Introduction to Paul's Letter to the Church at Rome. Written from Corinth, A. D. 58. (See Index; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) GOLDEN TOPIC, "JUSTIFICATION BY FAITH." (a.) Where Written. We find that it was written by Paul's amanuensis, Tertius (xvi: 22), and wag forwarded to the church at Rome by Phebe, a deaconess of Cenchrea, a port of Corinth (xvi: 1). It is further evident that it was written from that city, from the mention of Gaius, with whom he lodged at Corinth (ch. xvi: 23; also 1 Cor. i: 14). as well as Erastus, the chamberlain of that city (2 Tim. iy: 20). It also appears that it was written there at the time that the apostle was preparing to take the contributions of the churches to Jerusalem (oh. xv : 25-27) j and conse- quently the probable date assigned to this epistle is A. 1). 58, which is supported by Tomline, Lardner, Barrington, Benson and others. (/;.) Object in Writing. " Bis reason forwriting to thorn at this time was his intention of speedily visiting them on his way from Jerusalem to Spain. He desired, before his personal intercourse with them should begin, to give them Ch. XXXII: § 12. TO THE CHURCH AT ROME. 299 a proof of the affectionate interest which he felt for them, although they 'had not seen his face in the flesh.' We are not to suppose, however, that they were hitherto altogether unknown to him; for we see, from the very numerous salutations at the close of the epistle, that he was already well acquainted with many individual Chris- tians at Rome (xvi: 3). From the personal acquaintance he had thus formed, and the intelligence he had received, he had reason to entertain a very high opinion of the character of the church; and accordingly he tells them (xvi 14, 15) that, in entering so fully in his letter upon the doctrines and rules of Christianity, he had done it not so much to teach them as to remind them, and that he was justified in assuming the authority so to exhort them by special commission which Christ had given him to the Gentiles. The name of the original founder of the Eoman church has not been preserved to us by history, nor even celebrated by tradition. It is therefore probable that it was formed in the first instance of private Christians converted in Palestine, who had brought back Christianity with them from some of their periodical visits to Jerusalem, as the •strangers from Rome' from the great Pentecost in A. D. 29. (Acts, ii: 10.) We find, however, there were opponents to the gospel at Rome, who argued against it on the ground of the immoral consequences which followed (as they thought) the doctrine of justification by faith, and even charged Paul himself with maintaining that the greater man's sin the greater ^vas God's glory (iii: 8). Moreover, not all the Jewish members of the church could bring themselves to acknowl- edge their imcircumcised Gentile brethren as their equals in the "privileges of Christ's kingdom (iii: 9, 29; xv: 7-11). And on the other hand, the more enlightened Gentile converts were inclined to treat the lingering Jewish preju- 300 ACTS: CHUKCH HISTORY. dices with scornful contempt (xiv: 3). It was the aim of Paul to win the former of these parties to Christian truth, and the latter to Christian love." — Cony bear e and Hoivson. Two things the Jews then stumbled at: (I) justifica- tion by faith without the works of the law, and (II) the admission of the Gentiles into the church; therefore both these Paul, in his letter to the church of Eome, studied to clear and vindicate. (c.) Three General Parts. It may be divided into three parts: I, Doctrinal; II, Practical; III, Apologies for writ- ing. Analysis Part I. "The doctrinal part of the epistle instructs us concerning the way of salvation. (1.) The foundation of it is laid in justification, and not by the Gentile's works of nature (ch. i), nor by Jew's works by the'law (ch. ii to iii: 20) — both Jews and Gentiles were liable to the curse — but only by faith in Jesus Christ (ch. iii: 21 to iv: 25). (2.) The steps of this salvation are: {a) peace with God (ch. v); (b) sanctification (ch. vi, vii); (c) glorification (ch. viii); (d) concerning the persons saved, such as belong to election of grace (ch. ix), Gentiles and Jews (ch. x, xi). Analysis Part II. The practical part follows, wherein we find: (1.) Several general exhortations proper for all Chris- tians (ch. xii). (2.) Directions for our behavior as members of civil society (ch. xiii). (3.) Kules for the conduct of members of the Christian church toward each other (ch. xiv to xv: 14). Analysis Part III. As he draws toward the conclusion, he apologises for writing. Chap, xv: 14-1G, gives an account of himself and his affairs; 17-21 promises a visit; 32-29 begs their prayers; 30-33 sends particular salutation to many friends. Oh. XXXII: § 13. outline of acts, part iv. 301 Chap, xvi: 1-1 6, warns them against those who cause divisions ; 17-20 adds salutations of friends with him ; 21-23 a benediction; 24-27 a doxology to God." — Henry. (d. ) Conclusion. A knowledge of the Old Testament is requisite to an understanding of this letter of Paul, as he makes reference to it oyer seventy times, fifty of which are verbal quotations bearing directly in answer to the great question voiced by Job, and which pervades the entire Old Testament, viz: "How shall a man be just with God?" Paul having finished the above letter, it is placed' in the hands of Phebe, who sets sail for Eome, while he proposes to visit Jerusalem, that he might convey the alms which he had collected at Corinth to the poorer Christians. Accordingly he now takes leave and returns to Macedonia (Philippi). We will now return to our study of the Acts. § 13. Outline of Acts, Part IT. (Continued from §9.) Chap, xx : 3. Paul "returns through Macedonia," and arrives at Troas, where he preaches. 7. He celebrates the Lord's Supper, and departs in the morning. 17. Arrives at Miletus, where he assembles the elders of Ephesus and delivers his pastoral address to them; after prayer he de- parts on his journey toward Jerusalem. Chap, xxi: 1. Paul will not by any means be dissuaded from going to Jerusalem. 17. He arrives at Jerusalem (at Pentecost, summer of A. D. 58), is apprehended and in great danger, but rescued by the chief captain and per- mitted to speak to the people. Chap, xxii: 1. Paul declares how he was converted to the faith. 22. At the mention of the Gentiles the people exclaim against him. 24. He escapes scourging by claim- ing the privileges of a Roman. Chap, xxiii: 1. While Paul pleads hie cause, Ananias commands them to smite him. 11. God encourages him. '302 ACTS: CHUIfCH HISTORY. 14. The Jews lay in wait for Paul. 20. He is delivered unto the chief captain. 27. Claudius Lysias sends him to Felix, the governor, residing at Caesarea. Chap, xxiv: 1. Paul is accused by Tertullus, the orator. 10. He answers for himself. 24. He preaches Christ to the governor and his wife. 27. After two years (A. D. 59-00) Porcius Festus succeeds Felix, wlio leaves Paul bound. Chap, xxv : 1. The Jews accuse Paul before Festus. 8. He answers for himself, and appeals to Caesar. 14. Festus opens the matter to Agrippa, and Paul is brought out. 25. Festus clears him of having done anything worthy of death. Chap, xxvi: 1. Paul, in the presence of Agrippa, declares his life from childhood, his conversion, and call to the apostleship. 28. Agrippa almost persuaded to be a Chris- tian; Paul pronounced innocent. Chap, xxvii: 1. Paul shipped for Eome (by Festus, A. D. 60). 10. He foretells the danger of the voyage, but is not believed. 14. They are shipwrecked. 44. All are saved. Chap, xxviii: 1. Wrecked on the barbarous island of Melita (Malta, winter, A. D. 60). 5. Viper on Paul's hand does no harm. 8. Kemains on the island three months, and heals many diseases. 11. They depart by ship for Rome, touching at Syracuse ami landing at Pute- oli; from thence by way of Appi Forum to Rome (spring, A. D. 61). 17. Paul tells the Jews in Rome why he came, and preaches there. 30. Be remains in Rome, "•preaching the kingdom of God," Tor two years. § 14. When and Where Paul Wrote the Follow- ing Letters. "In the spring of A. D. 02 he writes a letter to Philemon, to the Colossians, and also to the Eph$sians. In (he autumn of the same year he writes to t he Philippian*. Ch. XXXIII: § 1. TO PHILEMON OF COLOSSE. 303 A. D. 63 (spring). He is acquitted and goes to Mace- donia (Phil, ii: 24), and Asia Minor. A. D. 64 (?) He goes to Spain. (For this and subsequent statement, see chap, xxvii.) A. D. 65(?) In Spam. A. D. 66 (summer). From Spain (?) to Asia Minor (1 Tim. i: 3). A. D. 67 (summer). Writes 1 Timothy from Macedonia; (autumn) writes TiVwsfromEphesus; (winter) at Nicopolis. A, D. 68 (spring). In prison at Rome; writes 2 Timothy; (summer) executed (Mayor June)." — Conybeare and How- son. CHAPTER XXXIII. ACTS- CHURCH HISTORY. [continued.] § l. Introduction to Paul's Letter to Philemon of Colosse. Written from Rome, A. D. 62. (See Index; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV : § 7.) GOLDEN TOPIC, "RECONCILIATION." In the chronological arrangement of Paul's letters accord- ing to Conybeare and Howson, which we have adopted, we find the next in order of time (A. D. 62) was his letter to Philemon. This man was a native of Colosse, a city on the river Meander, in Asia Minor. They say: " Of all the disciples now ministering to Paul at Rome, none has for us a greater interest than the fugi- tive Asiatic slave Onesimus. "He belonged to a Christian 304 acts: church history. named Philemon, a member of the Colossian church. But he had robbed his master and fled from Colosse, and at last found his way to Eome. It is difficult to imagine a por- tion of mankind more utterly depraved than the associates among whom a runaway pagan slave must have found himself in the capital; yet from this lowest depth Onesi- mus was dragged forth by the hand of Christian love. It is not impossible that he may have already known Paul at Ephesus, where his master Philemon had formerly been converted by the apostle. However this may be, it is certain that Onesimus was converted to the faith of Christ. He confessed to Paul his sins against his master. The apostle seems to have been particularly attracted by the character of Onesimus, and he perceived in him the indi- cations of gifts which fitted him for a more important post than any which he could hold as a slave of Philemon. He wished to keep him at Rome aud employ him in the service of the gospel. Yet he would not transgress the law, nor violate the rights of Philemon, by acting in this matter without his consent. He therefore decided that Onesimus must immediately return to his master; and to make this duty less painful, he undertook himself to discharge the sum of which Philemon had been defrauded. An oppor- tunity now offered itself to Onesimus to return in good company, for Paul was sending TycMcus to Asia Minor, charged, among other commissions, with an epistle to Colosse, the home of Philemon. Under his care, therefore, he placed the penitent slave, who was now willing to sur- render himself to his offended master. Nevertheless, he did not give up the hope of placing his new convert in a position wherein he might minister no longer to a private individual, but to the church at large. He intimated his wishes on the subject to Philemon himself, with character- istic delicacy, in a letter which he charged Onesimus to deliver on his arrival at Colosse." Oh. XXXIII: § 2. TO THE CHURCH AT COLOSSE. 305 The student, in order to receive the benefit of the above introduction, should now read this short letter of Paul to Philemon. The following is an outline : (a.) Outline. Verse 1. Salutation. 4. Thanksgiving and prayer for Philemon. 8. Bequest for the favorable reception of Ones- imus. 21. Announcement of a visit from Paul on his acquittal. 23. Salutations from Rome. 25. Concluding benediction. § 2. Introduction to Paul's Letter to the Church at Colosse. Written from Rome, A. D. 62. (See Index; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) GOLDEN TOPIC, "ADVICE TO CHRISTIANS." While Onesimus, on the arrival of the two companions at Colosse, hurried to the home of -his master with letters, Tychicus proceeds to discharge his commission likewise by delivering to the presbyters the epistle with which he was charged, that it might be read to the whole Colossian church at the next meeting. The letter to the Colossians itself gives us distinct infor- mation as to the cause which induced Paul to write it. Epaphras, the founder of that church (Col. i: 7), was now at Rome, and he had communicated to the apostle the unwelcome tidings that the faith of the Colossians was in danger of being perverted by false teaching. (a.) Outline. Chap, i: 1. Salutation. 3. Thanksgiving for their con- version. 9. Prayer for their perfection. 13. Atonement and sovereignty of Christ. 21. They had been called from heathenism and reconciled to God by Christ. 24. Paul's commission to reveal the Christian mystery of salvation to "every man." Chap, ii: 1. He prays that they may grow in all true wisdom. 4. He warns them against those who would 306 acts: church histokv. mislead them by a misnamed philosophy which depreciates Christ. 16. They unite Jewish observances with angel worship and asceticism.* Chap, iii: 1. Exhortations to heavenward affections. 5. Against heathen impurity and other vices. 9. Exhorta- tions to put on Christian character in all its Christian perfections. 16. Conduct at festive meetings. 19. Ex- hortation to fulfill the domestic duties of life. 22. Duties of slaves and masters. See iv: 1. Chap, iv: 2. Paul requests their prayers. 5. Conduct toward unbelievers. 7. Mission of Tychicus and Onesimus. 10. Greetings from Christians in Eome. 15. Messages to Colossian and Laodicean Christians. 18. Autograph, sal- utation and benediction. § 3. Introduction to Paul's Letter to the Church at Ephesus. Written from Rome, A. D. 62 (spring). (See Index; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) GOLDEN TOPIC, "DOCTRINE OF GRACE." This epistle was written Avhile Paul was yet a prisoner at Eome. It contains neither blame nor complaint, and beautifully develops the " Doctrine of Grace." See ch. ii. "We have seen that the epistles to the Colossians and that of Philemon were conveyed by Tychicus and Onesi- mus, who traveled together from Rome to Asia Minor. But these two were not the only letters with which Tychi- cus was charged. We know that he carried a third letter also. This third letter was that which is now entitled the epistle to the Ephesians. The most plausible account of the origin of this epistle seems to be as follows: Tychicus was about to take his * The state and practice of Ascetics: An Ascetic, in the early church, was one who retired from the customary business of life, and devoted himself to the duties of piety and devotion; a hermit; a recluse; such as teach the sanctity of celibacy, mortification, etc. Oh. XXXIII: § 3. to the chubch at ephesus. 307 departure from Rome to Asia Minor. Paul had already written his epistle to the Colossians, at the request of Epaphras, who informed him of their danger. But Tychi- cus was about to visit other places which, though not requiring the same warnings with Colosse, yet abounded in Christian converts." — Conybeare and Howson. Says Henry: "It may be observed the epistle is expressly inscribed, ch. i: 1, to the saints at Ephesus; and, 'in the close of it, Paul tells them that he had sent Tychicus unto them, -whom, in 2 Tim. iv: 12, he says he had sent to Ephesus." And Scott remarks: "He wrote this epistle to establish them in the great doctrines of the gospel, guard them against errors, excite them to holy conversation, and animate them in their Christian warfare." (a/) Outline. Chap, i: 1. Salutation. 3. Thanksgiving for redemp- tion, and statement of the Christian mystery. 13. Thanks for their conversion, and prayer for their enlightenment. 20. Office and dignity of Christ. Chap, ii: 1. They were awakened from heathen darkness by God's grace, and incorporated into God's Israel. 14. The law which divides Jews from Gentiles abolished. 19. They are built into the temple of God. Chap, iii: 1. The mystery of salvation proclaimed by Paul, a prisoner of it. 13. Paul prays that they may be strengthened and enlightened. Chap, iv: 1. Exhortation to unity; different gifts and offices must combine to build up the church. IT. Exhor- tation to put away heathen vice, and to moral renewal. 25. Against special vices. Chap, v: 1. Exhortation to Christ-like forgiveness and love. 3. Impurities and other sins of heathen darkness must be rebuked by the example aud watchfulness of Christians. 18. Conduct in festive meetings. 22. Duties of wives and husbands. 308 acts: church history. Chap, vi: 1. Duties of children to parents. 5. Duties of servants to masters. 10. Exhortation to put on the Christian armor. 18. To pray for the brethren and for Paul. 21. Tychicus the messenger. 23. Paul's conclud- ing benediction. § 4. Introduction to Paul's Letter to the Church at Philippi. Written from Borne, A. D. 62 (autumn). {See Index; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) GOLDEN TOPIC, " JOY IN AFFLICTION." Philippi was a city of Macedonia, and the capital city of a Eoman colony, and is distinguished as being the first place in Europe where Paul preached the gospel (about A. D. 51). Acts, xvi: 12. "It seems probable that the three letters which we have last considered were dispatched from Eome when Paul had been there about a year; that is, in the spring of the year A. D. 62. After the departure of Tychicus and Onesimus, the apostle's prison was cheered by the arrival of Epaphro- ditus, who brought a contribution from the Christians at Philippi. Epaphroditus, apparently a leading bishop among the Philippians, had brought on himself, by the fatigues or perils of his journey, a dangerous illness. Paul speaks of him with touching affection. He calls him 'brother' (ii: 25), declares that his labors in the cause of Christ had brought him near to death (ii: 30), and that he had ' haz- arded his life' in order to supply the means of communica- t i on between the Philippians and himself. And in speaking of his recovery he says: 'God had compassion on him, and not on him only, but on me also, that I might not have sorrow upon sorrow' (ii: 27). We must suppose from these expressions that Epaphroditus had exposed himself to some unusual risk in his journey. Meanwhile Epaphroditus was fully recovered from his sickness and able once more to travel, and he willingly Ch. XXXIII: § 4. to the Church at philippi. 309 prepared to comply with Paul's request that he should return to Philippi. AVe are told that he was ' filled with longing' to see his friends again, and the more so when he heard that great anxiety had been caused among them by the news of his sickness. Paul took the occasion of his return to send a letter of grateful acknowledgement to his Phijippian converts. It has often been remarked that this epistle contains less censure and more praise than any other of Paul's letters. It gives us a very high idea of the Christian state of the Philippians, and the liberality which distinguished them above other churches. They were free from doctrinal errors, and no schism had as yet been created among them by the Judaizing party. They are warned, however, against them, as they are liable to appear among them. The only blemish recorded as existing in the church of Philippi is, certain of its members were deficient in lowliness of mind, and were thus led into disputes and altercations with their brethren. Two women of consideration among them, Eu- odias and Syntyche by name, had been especially guilty of this fault; and their variance was the more to be regretted because they had labored earnestly for the propagation of the faith. Paul exhorts the church with great solemnity and earnestness to let these disgraceful bickerings cease, and to be all 'of one soul and one mind.' He also gives them very full particulars about his own condition and the spread of the gospel in Rome." — Conybeare and Hoivson. Paul wrote this epistle "weeping" with tender remem- brance, and gives expression at times of great "Joy in Affliction." (a.) Outline. "Chap, i: 1. Salutation. 3. Thanksgivings and prayers for them. 12. Intelligence of his condition at Rome. Chap, i: 27 to ii: 16. Exhortations to steadfast endur- ance, concord and lowliness. 17. Paul's expectations and intentions. 25. Return of Epaphroditus. 310 acts: church history. Chap, iii: 1. Warnings against Judaizers, and exhorta- tions to perseverance in the Christian race. Chap, i.v: 2. Euodias and Syntyche mnst be reconciled. 4. Exhortation to rejoice in tribulation, and to love and follow goodness. 10. Liberality of the Philippian church. 21. Salutations. 23. Benediction.*' — C. & II* § 5. Preface to Paul's Last Three Pastoral Letters. The following is selected from Conybeare and Howson: The great question which we have to answer concerns that long imprisonment whose history has occu- pied the preceding chapters. Luke tells us that Paul remained under military custody at Eome "for two whole years" (Acts, xxviii: 16 and 30), but he does not say what followed at the close of that period. Was it ended, we are led to ask, by theapostle's condemnation and death, or by his acquittal and liberation? It was universally believed that Paul's appeal to Caesar terminated successfully, that he was acquitted of the charges laid against him, and that he spent some years in freedom before he was again im- prisoned and condemned. The evidence on this subject, though not* copious, is yet conclusive so far as it goes; and it is all one way. The most important portion of it is supplied by Clement, the disciple of Paul mentioned in Phil, iv: 3, avIio was after- ward bishop of Eome. This author, writing from Rome to Corinth, expressly asserts that Paul had preached the gospel "in the east and in the west," that he had instructed the whole world (i. e., the Roman empire, which was com- monly so called) in righteousness, and that he "had gone to the extremity of the west" before his martyrdom. Now to the Roman the extremity of the west could mean nothing short of Spain. Here, then, we have the express * If this letter of Paul to the Philippians is read in connection with this outline, and the occasion that called it forth be borne in mind, it cannot but greatly aid the student to understand it. Ch. XXXIII: § 5. pastoral letters. 311 testimony of Paul's own disciple that lie fulfilled his origi- nal intention (mentioned Rom. xv: 24-28) of visiting the Spanish Peninsula, and consequently that he was liberated from his first imprisonment at Rome. The next evidence which we possess on the subject is contained in a New Testament compiled by an unknown Christian about A. D. 170, which is known as Muratori's Canon. In this docu- ment it is said, in the account of the Acts of the Apostles, that Luke relates to Theophilus events of which he was an eye witness, as also, in a separate place (viz: Luke, xxii: 31-33), he evidently declares the martyrdom of Peter, but omits the journey of Paul -from Rome to Spain. In the next place, Eusebius tells us: "After defending himself successfully, it is currently reported that the apostle again went forth to proclaim the gospel, and afterward came to Rome a second time, and was martyred by Nero" Next we have the statement of Chrysostom, who mentions it as an undoubted historical fact that "Paul, after his resi- dence in Rome, departed for Spain." About the same time Jerome bears the same testimony, saying that "Paul was dismissed by Nero, that he might preach Christ's gospel in the west." Against this unanimous testimony of the primitive church there is no external evidence- whatever to oppose. But further, unless Ave are prepared to dispute the genu- ineness of the pastoral epistles, we must admit not only that Paul was liberated from his Roman imprisonment, but also that he continued his apostolic labors for at least some years afterwards. As the epistles of Timothy and Titus cannot be placed in any portion of Paul's life before or daring his first imprisonment in Rome, we must ac- knowledge that after Paul's Roman imjjrisonment he was traveling at liberty in Ephesus, Crete, Macedonia, Miletus and Nicopolis, and that he was a second time in prison at Rome. 312 acts: church history. But when we have said this, we have told nearly all that we know of the apostle's personal history from his libera- tion to his death. Immediately after his liberation, it may reasonably be supposed that he fulfilled the intention which he had lately expressed (Philemon, 22, and Phil. ii : 24) of traveling eastward through Macedonia, and seeking the churches of Asia Minor, some of which, as yet, had not seen his face in the flesh. Having accomplished the objects of his visit to Asia Minor, he was at length enabled (perhaps the following year to that of his liberation) to undertake his long meditated journey to Spain. We may suppose him to have reached Spain in the year A. D. 64, and to have remained there two years. § 6. Introduction to Paul's First Pastoral Let- ter. Written from Macedonia to Timothy, at Ephesus, A. D., 67 (summer). (See Index; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) GOLDEN TOPIC, "QUALIFICATION'S OF PASTORS AND DEACONS. " From Spain, Paul seems to have returned, in A. D. 6$, to Ephesus; and here he found that the predictions which he had long ago uttered were already receiving their ful- fillment. Heretical teachers had arisen in the very bosom of the church, and were leading away the believers after themselves. Hymengeus (1 Tim. i: 20; 2 Tim. ii: 19) and Philetus were sowing in congenial soil the seed which was destined in another century to bear so ripe a crop of error. He seemed not to have remained for any long time together in Ephesus, but to have been called away from thence, first to Macedonia, and afterwards to Crete. When he departed from Ephesus to Macedonia, he left the care of the Ephesian church to Timothy, charging him espe- cially to the duty of counteracting the effects of those heretical teachers whose dangerous character we have described. When he arrived in Macedonia, he found that Cll. XXXIII: § G. FIRST PASTORAL LETTEK. 313 his absence might possibly be prolonged beyond what he expected; he probably felt that Timothy might need some more explicit credential from himself than a mere verbal commission, to enable him for a longer period to exercise the apostolic authority over the Ephesian church, where- with he had invested him. It would also be desirable that Timothy should be able, in his struggle with the heretical teachers, to exhibit documentary proof of Paul's agreement with himself. Such seems to have been the principal motive which led Paul to dispatch from Macedonia that which is known as "The First Epistle to Timothy," in which are contained various rules for the government of the Ephesian church. In the same manner it abounds with impressive denuncia- tions against the false teachers. There are also exhortations to Timothy himself. {a. ) Outline. Chap, i: 1. Salutation. 3. Timothy is reminded of the commission given him to oppose false teachers. 12. Paul relates his commission and calling. Chap, ii: 1-15. ' Directions for public worship, and the behavior of men and women thereat. Chap, iii: 1. Directions for the appointment of pres- byters (bishops). 8. Directions for the appointment of deacons. 14. Eeasons for writing these directions to Timothy. Chap, iv: 1. False teachers to be expelled; their charac- teristics, and the mode of resisting them. Chap, iv: 11 to v: 2. Duties of Timothy. 3. Widows are to be supported. 9. Qualifications of widows on the list. 17. Government of the presbyters. Chap, v: 23 to vi: 2. Particular and general cautions. 3. False teachers rebuked; their covetousness. 11. Exhort- ation to Timothy. 17. Duties of the rich. 20. Timothy again reminded of his commission. 21. Concluding bene- diction. 314 acts: church history. § 7. Introduction to Paul's Letter Written from Ephesus to Titus, on the Island of Crete.* (See In- dex; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV : §7.) GOLDEN TOPIC, "ADVICE TO PASTORS." "We must suppose that Paul returned shortly from Macedonia to Ephesus, as he hoped, though doubtfully, to be able to do when he wrote to Timothy. From Ephesus, as we have said, he soon afterward made an expedition to Crete. Paul visited there in company with Titus, whom he left in Crete as his representative on his departure. Thus Titus was left in Crete in the same position which Timothy had occupied at Ephesus during Paul's recent absence; and there would consequently be the same ad- vantage in his receiving written directions from Paul con- cerning the government and organization of the church which we have before mentioned in the case of Timothy. Accordingly, shortly after leaving Crete, Paul sent a letter to Titus. Paul's letter to Titus seems to have been still further called for to meet the strong opposition which that disciple had encountered while attempting to carry out his master's directions. This may be inferred from the very severe remarks against the Cretans which occur in the epistle, and from the statement at the commencement that the very object which its writer had in view of leaving Titus in Crete was that he might appoint presbyters in the Cretan churches, an indication that his claim to exercise this authority had been disputed. This epistle seems to have been dispatched from Ephesus (autumn A. D. 67) at the moment when Paul was on the eve of departure on a westward journey, which was to take him as far as Nicopolis (in Epirus) before the winter. n — C. and II. * In the Mediterranean Sea, south and east from Greece. Ch. XXXIII: § 8. SECOND PASTORAL LETTER. 315 (a.) Outline. Chap, i: 1. Salutation. 5. Commission to Titus to reg- ulate the Cretan churches. 10. Titus must oppose the false teachers. Chap, ii: 1. Direction to Titus how he is to instruct those of different sexes and ages. 7. His own conduct. 11. General motives of Christianity. Chap, iii: 1. Duties toward government, and toward un- believers generally. 8. Titus must enforce good works, and resist false teachers. 12. Special direction for Titus' journey to Nicopolis. 15. Salutations and concluding benedictions. § 8. Introduction to Paul's Second Pastoral Letter to Timothy. Written from Rome (in prison) to Timothy, at Ephesus, A. D. 68 (spring). (See Index; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) GOLDEN TOPIC, " PERSON A.L HOLINESS." (a.) Paul's Last Imprisonment. We see from the above letter that Titus was desired to join Paul at Nicopolis, where the apostle designed to winter. The position of Xicopolis would render it a good centre for operating upon the surrounding province; thence Paul might make excur- sions to these churches of Illyricum, which he perhaps founded at an earlier period (Rom. xv: 19). It seems most probable, however, that Paul was not permitted to spend the whole winter at Nicopolis. The Christians were far more obnoxious to the Roman authorities than for- merly. There is no improbability in supposing that, upon testimony of some informer, he was arrested aud forwarded to Rome for trial. The indications which we gather from the second epistle to Timothy render it probable that this arrest took place not later than mid-winter. Hence it is not unlikely that Paul may have arrived at Rome some time before spring. In this melancholy journey he had 316 acts: church history. but few friends to cheer him. Demas forsook him "for love of this present world," and departed to Thessalonica; Crescens went to Galatia on the same occasion. Luke, at any rate, remained faithful, accompanied his master once more over the wintry sea, and shared the dangers of his imprisonment at Rome. This imprisonment was evidently more severe than it had been five years before. Now he is not only chained, but he is treated "as a malefactor." His friends, indeed, are suffered to visit him in his confinement, but we hear nothing of his preaching. As the final stage of his trial approaches, he looks forward to death as his certain sen- tence. The alteration in the treatment of Paul exactly corresponds with that which the history of the times would have led us to expect. We have seen that his liberation took place early in A. D. 63; he was therefore far distant from Eome when the first imperial persecution of Chris- tianity broke out in consequence of the great fire in Rome in the summer of the following year* (A. D. 64). Probably no long time elapsed after Paul's arrival before his cause came to a hearing. The emperors from the first claimed judicial authority, both civil and criminal. And this jurisdiction was exercised not only by themselves, but by the delegates whom they appointed. From the above description we can realize in some meas- ure the external features of his last trial. He is now remanded to prison to wait the second stage of his trial. He certainly did not expect an acquittal, but felt no doubt that the cause would ultimately result in his condemna- tion. We are not left to conjecture his feelings; he has expressed them: "I am now ready to be offered, and the time of my departure is at hand; I have fought the good fight, I have finished my course, I have kept the faith: * For a fuller account of this persecution, read the "Life and Epistles of Paul/" by Conybeare and Howson, p. 700. Ch. XXXIII: § 8. second pastoral letter. 317 Henceforth there is laid up for me the crown of righteous- ness, which the Lord, the righteous judge, shall give me in that day. " Chap, iv : 6-8. (b.) Paul's Last Letter. Paul, in these last hours, clings to the friendships of his early years (iv: 19-21). However he may have valued his more recent friends, their society could not console him for the absence of one far dearer to him; he longed with a parental longing to see once more the face of Timothy, his beloved son. But Timothy was far distant in Asia Minor. Thither, then, he wrote to him, desiring him to come with all speed to Rome (iv: 21), yet feeling how uncertain it was whether he might not arrive too late. And lest he should be pre- vented from giving him his last instructions face to face, he urges on him very emphatically the duty of boldness in Christ's cause, and steadfastness under persecution, and taking share in the suffering of saints; impressing on him with the earnestness of a dying man the various duties of his ecclesiastical office, and especially that of opposing the heresies which now threatened to destroy the very essence of Christianity. But no summary of contents can give a notion of the pathetic tenderness and deep solemnity of this epistle. The following is an analysis: (c.) Outline. Chap, i: 1. Salutation. 3. Timothy reminded of his past history, and exhorted to perseverance and courage, by the hope of immortality. 13. Exhortation to fulfill his com- mission faithfully. 15. Conduct of certain Asiatic Chris- tians at Rome. Chap, ii: 1. Duty of Timothy on church government. 14. Must oppose false teachers and their immoralities; carefully preserve his own purity. Chap, iii: 1. Dangerous errors of the last days. 10. Ex- hortation to steadfastness in Paul's doctrine. 318 acts: church history. Chap, iv: 1. Solemn charge to perform his commission faithfully, in expectation of evil times and of Paul's death. 9. He is urged to come to Rome speedily. 14. Intelligence of the progress of Paul's trial. 19. Salutations and fare- well intelligence. 22. Concluding benediction. (d.) Paul's Last Request. We know not whether Tim- othy was able to fulfill the last request of the dying apostle. The only intimation which seems to throw any light on the question is the statement in the epistle to the Hebrews that Timothy had been liberated from imprisonment in Italy (Heb. xiii: 23). We may therefore hoj)e Paul's last earthly wish was fulfilled. Yet, if Timothy did indeed arrive before the closing scene, there could have been but a brief interval between his coming and his master's death; for the letter which summoned him could not have been dispatched from Rome till the end of winter, and Paul's martyrdom took place in the middle of summer. We only know that it resulted in a sentence of capital punishment. The privileges of Roman citizenship exempted him from death by torture, which had been inflicted on so many of his brethren. He was to die by decapitation, and lie was led out to execution beyond the city walls, upon the road to Ostia, the port of Rome. Thus died the apostle and the martyr, bequea tiling to the church, in her government and her discipline, the legacy of his apostolic labors." — Conybeare and Howson. § 9. Introduction to Paul's Letter to the He- brews. {See Index; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) GOLDEN" TOPIC, "PRIESTHOOD OF CHRIST." (a.) Author. There seems to be a diversity of opinion in regard to the authorship of this letter, not only among the early Christian fathers, but also among the more mod- ern critics. Among the early writers, some attribute it to Paul, and others to Barnabas, Luke, and Clement of Alex- andria. Oil. XXXIII: § 9. LETTEE TO THE HEBREWS. 319 " Several very able modern critics have agreed with Luther in assigning the authorship of this epistle to Apollos. We may observe, notwithstanding the doubts recorded concerning the writer, that we need not scruple to speak of this portion of the Scriptures * * * as 'The Epistle of Paul to the Hebrews.' We have seen that Jerome expresses the greatest doubts concerning its author- ship, and that Origen says 'the writer is known to God alone;' the same doubts are expressed by Eusebius and by Augustine; yet all these great writers refer to the words of the epistle as the words of Paul. In fact, whether written by Barnabas, by Luke, by Clement or by Apollos, it represented the views and was impregnated by the influ- ence of the great apostle. The advocates of the Pauline authorship urge, first, that the general plan of the epistle is similar to that of Paul's other writings; second, that its doctrinal statements are identical with Paul's; third, that there are many points of similarity between its phraseology and diction and those of Paul."— a & H. (b.) Where and When Written. "If, then, Paul was the author of this epistle, the time when, the olace where, it was written, may be easily ascertained; for the salutation from the saints in Italy (ch. xiii • 24), and the promise of seeing the Hebrews shortly (ver. 23), plainly intimate his first imprisonment at Rome was then terminated or on the point • of being so. Consequently it was written from Rome, soon after the epistles of Colossians, Ephesians and Philemon, either at the end of A. D. 62, or more probably in the beginning of the year. 63." — Bagster. Note. The reader will see there is no necessity of placing this book in chronological order, as its subject matter answers far better as a supplement; hence it should follow Paul's epistles. 320 acts: chukch history. (c.) To Whom Addressed. "It may be held certain that the epistle was addressed to Hebreiv Christians.* Through- out its pages there is not a single reference to any other class of converts. Its readers are assumed to be familiar with the Levitical worship, the temple worship, the temple services, and all the institutions of the Mosaic ritual. " We have seen that the epistle to the Hebrews was ad- dressed to Jewish converts who were tempted to apostatize from Christianity and return to Judaism.'' — C. & H. (d.) The Great Object. Another and greater object was to develop the priesthood of Christ, and to the converted Hebrew or Jew, the superiority of Christ to Moses, to Joshua or Aaron; to prove that in his priesthood and death all the work of the priests was completed, that he had made a perfect offering for sin, and that from hence, forth there was no other way in which salvation could be expected but through Christ. With this thought the reader will be better able to understand this epistle. We find that there are over ninety references to the Old Testament, forty of which are verbal quotations. The majority of them refer the reader to the book of Leviticus; hence we see the necessity, when we arrive at this point, first to read the book of Leviticus, and then read this letter as a supplement to it. Leviticus was written for the Jews only, while Paul's letter to the Hebrews was no less for the Jew, and refers to him as a Christian; hence we are enabled to see how impossible it is to be able to com- prehend this portion of the New Testament without sonic knowledge of the Old. The Old is therefore a commentary to the New. (e.) Outline. "Chap, i: 1. God lias revealed himself finally to man in the person of his Son. Ch XAXI1I £9 LETTER TO THE HEBREWS. 321 Chap, i: 5, to ii: 8. Jesus is higher than the angels. 9. His humiliation needful, that he might be consecrated by sufferings as Highpriest for man. Chap, iii: 1. Christ is higher than Moses. 7. Warning against apostasy. 12. God's judgment cannot be avoided. Chap, iii: 14, to v: 10. Christ is a Highpriest who can be touched with the feeling of our infirmities. - Chap, v: 11, to vi: 3. They are reproached for decline in spiritual understanding. 4. Warned of the danger of apostasy. 9. Reminded of the motives to perseverance. Chap. vii. The priesthood of Christ (typified by the priesthood of Melchisedec) is distinguished from the Le- vitical priesthood by its eternal duration and efficacy. Chap, viii to x: 18. The Mosaic law, with its temple and sacrifices, was an imperfect shadow of the better covenant, and the availing atonement of Christ. 19.. Renewed warn- ing against apostasy. 32. Exhortation not to let faith be conquered by fear. Chap, xi: 1. Faith defined as that principle which en- ables men to prefer things invisible to things visible. 4. Its operations historically exemplified. Chap, xii: 1. Exhortation to imitate such examples, and follow Jesus in steadfast endurance of suffering. 14. Warning against sensuality. 18. In proportion to the superiority of the gospel over the law, will be the danger of despising it. Chap, xiii: 1. Exhortation to several moral duties, espe- cially to courageous profession of faith, and obedience to the leaders of the church. 18. The writer asks their pray- ers, gives them his own, and communicates information from Italy. 24. General salutation and benediction."— - C. & H. (/..) Hebreivs a Supplement. The epistle to the He- brews, says Dr. Hales, is a masterly supplement to the epistles to the Romans and Galatians, also a luminous com- 322 acts: church history. men tar j on them, showing that all the legal was originally designed to be superseded by the new and better covenant of the Christian dispensation, in a connected chain of argument, evincing the profoundest knowledge of both. Dr. Clark says: It is an epitome of the dispensations of God to man, from the foundation of the world to the advent of Christ, It is not only the sum of the Gospel, but a sum of the Law. He further says: Without this, the Law of Moses had never been fully understood, nor God's design in giving it. With this, all is clear and plain. The apostle appears to have taken for his text: " Christ is the end of the Law for righteousness to them that believe. " Oh. XXXIII. LESSOR XVIII. LESSOR XVIII. 323 C7iiv/ect ': wAiiieA tgfei'dfoi'U. ^,{2. Wtvoui Jewb, (ghah. ili= IX. II or, <^j <§ \3. Wwovd WmtUeb, (ghafi. x=xli gf'dclafacia ^wdila (@?ai4 iv), ifiddia, $wnium t \^^4n4icch } Jeimalem, a- /» ■ ji \* ffifieMatoniam, 2 journey , wc-unih. X ' I 2 tf/heMcUcniam, f/ (goimiliianb, , hlL enwn, am, icme. ^OWM'J tuhfuam, ^Macedonia, / (tfLmoihy, I iftome, 2 §imo4hu, 33 40 45 44 44 60 52 53 Si 324 LESSON XVIII. SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. Note. Review the lesson on the four gospels; then introduce the subject of church history. "Who was the writer of this book? (Ch. XXX: § 1.) What is said of his general character? (Col. iv: 14) When was this book written? (Ch. XXXII: § 1.) Where? How many years of history does it contain? From and to what dates? What is the golden topic? Into how many general parts may it be divided? (§ 2.) Who is the centre of the first great group of savings? (§9,Tl.)- Note. Call out a sketch of Peter's life. • In what chapters may be found that which relates to Peter ? Axs. The first twelve chapters. Who is next introduced as the leading character? (§ 2, *~ II.) What chapters speak of Paul? Into how many sections may that which relates to PeteT be divided? Axs. Four. Note. First, the great foundation of Christianity, i. e., the resur- rection of Christ (Acts, i, ii). Second, spread of Christianity among devout Jews (ch. iii, iv). Third, exclusive]}' to the Jews (ch. iii-ix). Fourth to the Gentiles (ch. x-xii). The second general division pertains to what celebrated person? (§ 3.) What may be said of him? Note. In connection with Paul's nativity, education, etc., speak of his work in spreading the gospel and organizing the church) compassed in his five journeys. First journey beginning at Antiocb (§ 4), Acts, xiii. Second journey (Acts, xviii: 1), he comes to Cor. inth, where he wrote 1st and 2d Thessalonians (§ 5). Third journey, at Ephesus, he writes 1st and 2d Corinthians, Galatians and Romans (§ 8). Fourth journey, Paul at Koine, writes Philemon, Colossians, Ephesians a#d Philippians, (Ch. XXXIII). Fifth journey, gt> Macedonia (§ 6), thence to Spain (see Horn, xv: 24-28; also Ads, xxvii) and other places, when he writes 1st and 2d Timothy I Titus (§ 7), and Hebrews (§ 9). Review. '%) ■&. Ch. XXXIII. lessor xix akd xx. 325 LESSOR XIX AND XX. Part I. 4. Mom. : Jm4ljlca4lon 6u ja'dk . 2. hi (gov. : iktMViitdlon oj 4ke Sead. (gk. xi>. 3. 2d (go\. : Woiu oj 4ke ( &o6kd. (gk. til. ip. %al. : 3?aw vmtM %bjiel. (gk. id : 4S=2(j. 5. §lik.: Woduno oj %ace. (gk. II: 4=40. (. 9kll. : fou in <^ljjlidion. (gk. I : 4=4$. 1. (gol. : ' oj $>ttkofi!> and Smconb. 41. 2d §lm. : /iPmonal $fotintM. (gk. II: 4Cj=24. 42. §l4m : Advice 4o 9adov>.. 43. iPkilmnon : meconclila4lon. 44-. $fel>. : iPuedkood oj (gkud. {&ajijilmntn4^ SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. Part 1. Note. Review New Testament divisions up to this lesson. See Index. How many pastoral letters did Paul write? Note. Place bracket and numbers on the board. What is the name of the first? Second? etc. 326 LESSON XIX AND XX. What is Paul's first letter called? See Index. Why is it called Romans? (Ch. XXXII: § 12.) Where was it writ- ten? When? What is the golden topic? (Rom. i: 17.) What is the first great question asked in the Old Testa- ment Scriptures? (Ch. II: § 3.) Note. This being the first great question, we find the first book in the arrangement of the doctrinal books answers it. To whom was the next letter addressed? See Index. Where written? (Ch. XXX: §8.) When? What is the golden topic? What was the second great question raised in the Old Testament? (Ch. II: § 3.). Note. This question, being second in importance, is answered in the second letter in the New Testament (1 Cor. xv). The placing of the letters in the order of comparative importance is a rule that holds good in the following letters of Paul, and no less so in the general letters. This fact must not be lost sight of. To whom was the third letter addressed? (Ch. XXX: § 10.) What is the golden topic? (2 Cor. iii.) The fourth? (§ 11.) Golden topic? (Gal. iii: 16-22.) The fifth? (Ch. XXXIII: § 3.) Golden topic? (Eph. ii: 1-10.) The sixth? (§ 4.) Golden topic? (Phil, i: 1-18.) The seventh? (§ 2.) Golden topic? (Col. iii.) Part II. Note. Review Part I before proceeding with this lesson. To whom did Paul write the eighth letter? (Ch. XXXII: §5.) When was it written? Where? What is the golden topic? Note. State some of their trials and Paul's reasons for writing this letter. To whom did Paul write \\w ninth letter? (§ 6.) From whore? When? Golden topic? Note. State why he wrote a second letter. Ch. XXXIV: § 1. seve;n t general epistles. 327 To whom did Paul write the tenth letter? (Oh. XXXIII: § 6.) Where was Timothy? When was it written? Gold- en topic? Where was it written? Why written? Note. State some of the reasons as given in this section. To whom was the eleventh letter written? (Ch. XXXIII: §8.) When? Where? Date? Golden topic? etc. To whom was the twelfth letter written? (Ch. XXXIII: To whom the thirteenth? (Ch. XXX'IH: § 1.) To whom the fourteenth? (Ch. XXXIII: § 9.) Note. State to the class, concerning the author, where and when written, to whom addressed, the great object, and its connection with the other epistles and Leviticus. Close with review. CHAPTER XXXIV. GENERAL LETTERS. ' ' Sup plement. " See Index. § 1. Preface to the Seven General Epistles. {See Chronology, Chap. XXXV : § 7.) "The last seven epistles have, for many centuries, been termed i catholic ' or ' gene- ral ' epistles, because most of them were addressed, not to particular churches or persons, as those of Paul, but to the body either of Jewish or Gentile converts dispersed over several countries." — Nicholls. "A wicked opinion sprung up," says Augustine, "even in the apostles' day, by misunderstanding Paul's argu- ments. Peter, John, James and Jude aimed in their epistles principally to this end, to vindicate the doctrine of Paul from the false consequences charged upon it, and 328 GENERAL LETTERS. to show that faith without works is nothing worth. But indeed Paul does not speak of faith at large, but only of that living, fruitful, evangelical faith, which he himself saith worketh by love. As for that faith void of good works, which these men thought sufficient for salvation, he declareth positively against it. Peter calls it wresting (2 Peter, iii: 16), because Paul was, in truth, of the same opinion with the other apostles, and held eternal life im- possible to be obtained by any faith which had not the attestation of a holy life." Note. For a better understanding of these letters, th^ ~eader will now read Chap. VI: § 2, {b). § 2. Introduction to the Epistle of James "to the Twelve Tribes Scattered Abroad." Written from Jerusalem, A. D. 62. GOLDEN TOPIC, " FAITH AND WORKS." "The epistle of James is called ' general,' because it was not written to any particular person. It was addressed 'to the twelve tribes which are scattered abroad.' These wore 'not Christian Jews scattered abroad by persecution, but Jews who. had been scattered over all countries by the captivity, numbers of whom never returned in consequence of Cyrus's decree, but remained among the Gentiles. The author of this epistle is thought to be James, the brother of Jude, half brother to our Lord, and is known by the name of James the Less, probably because he was less in stature, or younger, than James the son of Zebedee, who was slain by Herod." — Cobbiii. "The prevailing error which attended the introduction of the gospel was, that we are justified in part by works; as opposed to this, Paul shows thai we are justified freely by faith alone. But now, where the gospel has been some time established, the tendencies of corrupt nature were to pervert it l>\ overlooking the importance of works as a Ch. XXXIV: §2, the epistle of james, 329 necessary evidence of saving faith. Here we can see the tendency in our nature to run from one extreme to another. f[any professing Christians, it appears, were guilty of partiality to the rich, contempt for the poor, censorious- ness, envy, contention, covetousness, presumptious disre- gard of God's providences, oppression and luxury, and yet -confident of salvation, because they held a speculative 'belief of doctrines of the gospel. To show them the unsoundness of such a faith is the object of the apostle's argument. He proves that it is of the very nature of saving faith to bring forth good works" (ch. ii). — Nicholls. This epistle is supposed to have been written about A. D. 62. The following analysis will assist the student in bringing out the subject as found in each chapter. (a.) Analysis. Chap. i. We are to rejoice under the cross, to ask patience of God, and in our trials, not to impute our weakness or sins unto him, but rather hearken to the word, to meditate on it, and to do thereafter. Otherwise men may seem, but never be, truly religious. Chap. ii. It is not agreeable to Christian profession to regard the rich and despise the poor brethren; rather we are to be loving and merciful, and not to boast of faith where no deeds are, which is dead faith, the faith of devils, not of Abraham and Kahab. Chap. iii. We are not rashly to reprove others, but to bridle the tongue, a little member, but a powerful instru- ment of much good or great harm. They who are truly wise will be mild and peaceable, without envying and .strife. Chap. iv. We are to strive against covetousness, intem- perance, pride, detraction and rash judgment of others; and not to be confident in the good success of worldly business, but, mindful ever of the uncertainty of life, to commit ourselves and all of our affairs to God's providence. 330 GENERAL LETTERS. Chap. v. Wicked men are to fear God's vengeance. We are to be patient in afflictions, after the example of the prophets and Job; to forbear swearing; to pray in adver- sity, to sing in prosperity; to acknowledge mutually our several faults; to pray one for another, and thereby bring back a straying brother to the truth. § 3. Introduction to Peter's First Letter, ad- dressed "to the (elect) strangers scattered throughout Pontus, Galatia, Cappadocia, Asia (Minor) and Bithynia." Written from Eome, A. D. 65. (See Index; also Chron- ology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) GOLDEN TOPIC, "OBEDIENCE AND PATIENCE." This, with the other letter of Peter, are called "general," because they Avere not addressed to any particular church or community of believers. This is supposed to have been written in a. time of violent persecution, by which the con- verts were scattered abroad. 1 Peter, i: 1; iv: 16.-19. (a.) Where Written. There is but one word which fixes the place (Babylon) from which the epistle was written (eh. v: 13). But a more important indication than that of .the place is found in the names of persons who were with Peter (S}ivanus and Mark) when he wrote this letter. Of Sylvanus we have lost sight since we saw him as the com- panion of Paul's second missionary journey, and there is nothing to show how he came to be in Peter's company. The case of Mark is clearer; for lie was with Paul in his first imprisonment at Rome, and he was (hen contemplat- ing a journey to Asia Minor (Col. iv: 10; Phile. 24). His intention was no doubt fulfilled, since we find him after- wards with Timothy .at Ephesus (2 Tim. iv: 11). The interval is just the time at which all indications concur to place Peter's first epistle, ami consequently Mark's com- panionship with him. See Introduction /<> Mark's Gospel. Cli. XXXV: § 3. peter's first letter. 331 Says Carpenter: "Many, both of ancient and modern writers, have interpreted Babylon mystically, and refer it to Borne." (b.) General Characteristic. Says Dr. "Wm. Smith: "Peter wrote this letter to the Hebrew Christians of the eastern dispersion. Two of Paul's companions were his intimate associates, and one of them the bearer of this letter. 'By Sylvanus, a faithful brother unto you, 'as I account him, I have written briefly, exhorting, and testifying that this is the true grace of God wherein ye stand' (1 Peter, v: 12). This distinctly Pauline phrase sums up what has been called the Pauline element running throughout the whole epistle. The epistle may well be designated as Peter 's testimony to the truth of the gospel taught by Paul" (c.) Analysis. Chap. i. He blesses God for his many graces, showing that the salvation of Christ is no news, but a thing proph- esied of old, and exhorts them accordingly to Godly con- versation, forasmuch as they are born anew by the word of God. Chap. ii. He exhorts them from the breach of charity, showing that Christ is the foundation whereupon they are built. He beseeches them, also, to abstain from fleshly lusts, to be obedient to magistrates, and teaches servants how to obey their masters, patiently suffering for well doing, after the example of Christ. Chap. iii. He teaches the duty of wives and husbands to each other, exhorting all men in unity and love, and to suffer persecution. He declares, also, the benefits of Christ toward the old world. Chap. iv. He exhorts them to cease from sin, by the example of Christ and the consideration of the general end that now approaches; and he comforts them against persecution. 332 • GENERAL LETTERS. Chap. y. He exhorts the elders to feed the flock, and the younger to obey, and all to be sober, watchful and constant in the faith, and to resist the cruelty of the devil, who, "as a roaring lion, walketh about, seeking whom he may devour. " § 4. Introduction to Peter's Second Letter, addressed "to them (Gentiles*) who have obtained like precious faith with us " (Jews). Written from Eome, A. D. 66. (See Index; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV: §7.) GOLDEN TOPIC, "FALSE TEACHERS." "As in his first epistle Peter exhorts to patience under the tyranny of persecution, so in this he exhorts to perse- verance in the truths of the gospel against the deceptions of heretics and the profaneness of scoffers, describing their character, and the certainty of their destruction, and urges diligence in the improvement of every Christian grace. (a.) When Written. This epistle, like Paul's second letter to Timothy, was penned when the writer knew him- self to be drawing near to martyrdom, and it deserves a solemn interest from this consideration. On reading the views which are here presented to us of the perfection of God, the glory of Christ, the tremendous judgment, we are led to ask: Whence had this poor fisherman such wis- dom, but from God? His last exhortation to the Christian church is: i Grow in grace, and in the knowledge of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ;' and his last testimony is to the divinity of his Lord: 'To whom be glory, both now and forever; Amen' (2 Peter, iii: 18)." — Nichotts. (b.) Analysis. Chap. i. Confirming them in the hope of the increase of God's graces, he exhorts them, by faith and good works, to * "Simeon (Simon Peter) hath declared how God first visited the Oe?itiles, to take from them a people for his name." Acts, xv: 14. Ch. 1 XXXIV: § 5. John's first letter. 333 make their calling and election sure; whereof he is careful to remember them, knowing that his death is at hand; and he warns them to be constant in the faith of Christ, who is the true Son of God, by the eye witness of the apostle's beholding his majesty (Matt, xvii: 1-5), and by the testimony of the Father and the prophets. Chap. ii. He foretells them of false teachers, showing the impiety and punishment both of them and their followers, from which the godly shall be delivered, as Lot was out of Sodom; and more fully describes the manners of those profane and blasphemous seducers, whereby they may be better known and avoided. Chap. iii. He assures them of the certainty of Christ's coming to judgment, against the scorners who dispute against it; warning the godly, for the long patience of God, to hasten their repentance. He describes, also, the manner how the world shall be destroyed; exhorting them, from the expectation thereof, to holiness of life; and again, to think the patience of God to tend to their salvation, as Paul wrote to them in his epistles. § 5. Introduction to John's First Letter, ad- dressed to " Christians of every denomination and country." — Macknight. Written from Ephesus, A. D. 96. GOLDEN TOPIC, "CHRIST OUR ADVOCATE." (a.) The Author. The author of this epistle was John, the son of Zebedee, the disciple whom Jesus loved. It was called "general," because it was not sent to any particular church or person. John was the youngest of the apostles, and survived them all. It is said, in some early histories, that he spent his last days in Ephesus, where he died; and that, when he was too old to walk, he was carried to the place of worship in the arms of his disciples. He could then only speak a few words very feebly, and these words always were: "Little children, love one another." 334 GENERAL LETTERS. (b.) The Design. "The design of this first epistle of John was to promote brotherly love, to warn against doc— trines that allowed men to live in sin, and to give clear notions of the nature of God and the divine glory of Jesus Christ."— Collin. In the introduction (ch. i: 1-4), the apostle states the purport of this epistle, by bearing witness that the Lord Jesus was God manifest in the flesh; presenting him as the "Word of Life," or Living Word (compare John's gos- pel, i: 1), whom he and his fellow apostles had seen with their own eyes, had heard with their own ears, and handled with their own hands; thus seeking to establish the disci- ples in the faith, that they might have like fellowship and (c.) Leading Thought. Another, the second and appar- ently the leading thought, is to present Christ as our Advocate (ch. ii: 1, 2). Says the loving apostle: "These things I write unto you, that ye sin not." As, however "there is no man which liveth and sinneth not," he adds : "But if any man sin, we have an Advocate with the Father, Jesus Christ, the righteous." And also: "He is the propitiation for our sins." It is impossible to conceive of greater comfort and consolation than unay be drawn from these passages, first, that he is our sacrificial atone- ment (propitiation, see Lev. vi : 6, 7) ; and second, our Advocate. (See Isa. liii: 10, 11; Rom. viii: 33, 34.) John particularly enlarges on the love of God in redemp- tion, urging it as a motive to holiness. The epistle is especially useful throughout, as it presents many tests by which to try the sincerity of our profession. Says Henry: "Believers themselves have yet their sins. There is a great distinction between sinners : some are converted, others are unconverted. Believers, as they have had an atonement applied to them at their entrance into a state of pardon and justification, so they have an Advocate Oh. XXXIV: § 5. John's first letter, 335 in heaven still to continue to them that state, and procure their continued pardon and forgiveness." (d.) Analysis. We will adopt the outline of this first epistle of John as given by Home, deeming it the best. It comprises six sections, and concludes with a statement of its design and value, as follows: SECTION I. Chap, i: 1-7. Asserts the true divinity and humanity of Christ, in opposition to the false teachers, and urges the union of faith and holiness of life, as absolutely necessary to enable Christians to enjoy communion with Christ. SECTION II. Chap, i : 8-10; ii : 1-2. Shows that all have sinned, and ex- plains the doctrine of Christ's propitiation. 3-17. Whence the apostle takes occasion to illustrate the works of true faith, viz: obeying the commandments of Cod and sincere love to the brethren, and shows that the love of the world is inconsistent with the love of God. SECTION III. Chap, ii: 18-29. Asserts Jesus to be the same with Christ, in opposition to the false teachers who denied it. SECTION IV. Chap. iii. On the privileges of the true believers, and their consequent happiness and duties, and the marks by which they are known as the sons of God. SECTION V. Chap. iv. Contains the criteria by which to distinguish Anti-Christ and false Christians, with an exhortation on brotherly love. SECTION VI. Chap, v: 1-16. Shows the connection between faith in Christ, regeneration, love to God and his children, obedi- ence to his commandments, and victory over the world; and that Jesus Christ is truly the Son of God, able to save us, and to hear the prayer we make for ourselves and 336 GENERAL LETTERS. others. 17-21. The conclusion, which is a summary of the preceding treaties; shows that a sinful life is inconsis- tent with true Christianity, asserts the divinity of Christ, and cautions believers against idolatry. The above is an outline of this admirable epistle, which, being designed to promote right principles of doctrine and practical piety in conduct, abounds, more than any book of the New Testament, with criteria by which Christians may soberly examine themselves whether they be in the faith. See 2 Cor. xiii: 5. § 6. Introduction to John's Second Letter, ad- dressed to a noble Christian mother and her children. Written from Ephesus, A. D, 96. GOLDEN TOPIC, "TO CHRISTIAN MOTHERS. " (a. ) To Christian Mothers. This epistle, it is the com- mon opinion, was addressed to a woman and a mother, particularly (I) to commend her for her virtues and reli- gious education of her children, and (II) to carefully avoid the delusions of false teachers; but chiefly (III) to practice Christian love and charity. "An apostolic epistle, so addressed, and on such a sub- ject, would seem to imply the importance in the sight of God of the station of a Christian mother, the earnestness with which she should interest herself in the religious welfare of her children, and the encouragement which, by so doing, she will give to Christian mothers and to the progress of truth." — Nicholls. § 7. Introduction to John's Third Letter, ad- dressed to Gaius, supposed to be the treasurer of the city of Corinth. Written from Ephesus, A. D. 97. (See Index; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) GOLDEN TOPIC, " HOSPITALITY." (a.) To Whom Addressed. This third epistle of John is addressed to a person called Gaius, a member of some Ch. XXXIV: §8. jude's letter. 337 Christian church; most probably Gains of Corinth, who had been baptized by Paul (1 Cor. i: 14), and whom he calls his host, and the host of the whole chnrcli (Rom. xvi: 23). Paul speaks of him as an eminent Christian, distinguished for his Hospitality to those who went about preaching the gospel. « The apostle John expresses his affectionate joy at this and other evidences of his piety, and cautions him against the ambitious and turbulent practices of Diotrephes, and strongly recommends Demetrius to his friendship, deferring what he further had to say to a personal interview. § 8. Introduction to Jude's Letter, addressed "to the called, beloved in God the Father, and kept by Jesus Christ. " — Conaat. (See Index; also Chronology, Chapter XXXV: §7.) GOLDEN" TOPIC, "AGAINST SCHISM." Jude (ver. 1) was one of the apostles, and brother of James the Less. He is called Judas Matt, xiii: 55; John, xiv: 22; Acts, i: 13; and elsewhere Lebbeus (Matt, x: 3), and Thaddeus (Mark, iii: 18). As to the time and place of the writing of his epistle, all is conjecture. It is supposed, however, to have been writ- ten soon after that of 2 Peter, as a large portion, from ver. 3 to 16, is almost identical with 2 Peter, ii: 1-19, and which was written A. D. 67. (a.) " The Design of this epistle is to guard the church against those false teachers who had insinuated themselves into it, and to contend with the utmost earnestness for the true faith, against the dangerous tenets which they dissem- inated, resolving the whole of Christianity into a specula- tive belief and outward profession of the gospel. It will be observed that nearly all of the general letters, and those written in the last half of the first century, have 338 GENERAL LETTERS. much to say about false teachers, guarding the early Chris- tians against being led away by them. Hence we see the great design in them, and they are of no less value to us. With them, too, we can better understand the history of the church down along the ages to the present time. (b. ) Sure Punishment of the Wicked. One of the perverse things which these corrupt teachers spoke, for the purpose of alluring the wicked, was that God was so good that he will not punish men for indulging those natural appetites which he has himself implanted in them, nor be displeased with them for committing a few sins, which can do him no harm, but which are necessary to their present happi- ness. Wherefore, to show the impiety and falsehood of that doctrine, and to secure the disciples from being seduced by it, the apostle, by facts recorded in Scripture, proved that, as God already punished the angels who sinned, notwithstand- ding their dignity, and the antediluvians, notwithstanding their number, so will he at length most assuredly punish all obstinate sinners in the severest manner." — Nicholls. This epistle seems to have been written to guard the early disciples against what seems to have been introduced about this time, namely: universal salvation based on the love of God. From the great danger of the early Chris- tians adopting this doctrine, this apostle makes very clear the fallacy of it. First, he states in ver. 4 what they are guilty of who hold to this doctrine: "turning the grace of God into lasciviousness, and denying the Lord;" and sec- ond, citing no less than three cases to illustrate how Gk)d did not spare: (I) the Egyptians, ver. 5; (II) the angels, ver. 6; (III) Sodom and Gomorrah, ver. 7, which were destroyed by fire from heaven, and their inhabitants eon- signed to the same "everlasting fire prepared for the devil and his angels." Upon all such Jude pronounces a woe (ver. 11). He says: "These are spots in your feasts of Oh. XXXIV. lesson xxi. 339 charity." * The conversation of men who held such doc- trine were spots or blemishes ; that is, a disgrace and reproach. (c.) Last Admonition. The apostle now admonishes them, further, to remember the prophecy of Enoch spoken of by the apostles: "How * * * there should come mockers in the last time, who should walk after their own ungodly lusts; " then concludes with a prayer and doxology. LESSOR XXL /. famu : Mcuik and Woik. @£ W. 62 2. id Mel : Hedience and @Pa£ence. " 6d 3. 2d 9t'kl : JFahe ^eache-to. " 66 \ Jf. hi John : (ghiid oia ^idvocaie. " (j6 5. 2d John: §o (gkiiMLan eModhm. u (j6 6. 3d John: ^o^fwlatUxf. " (jj H. fade : ^laaind ifch'mn. " 66 ^ SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. What is theMiame of the fourth New Testament division? What relation do these letters sustain to Paul's doctrinal epistles? (Oh. XXXIV: § 1.) How many are there of these general letters? By whom was the first one written? The second? etc. Who was this James? (§2.) What is the golden topic of his epistle? (Jas. ii: 14-26.) To whom was it addressed? * These, according to Dr. Benson, were frugal meals provided by the richer Christians to entertain the poor, the fatherless, the widow and stranger. 340 future: revelation. (Jas. i: .1.) Where were the twelve tribes? (Acts, ii: 5.) About what time was it written? What was the prevailing error of the times? Where was it written? By whom was the second letter written? To whom was it addressed? (§ 3.) It was written from Avhere? (§ 3, a.) About when was it written? What is the golden topic? What is the general characteristic? (§ 3, b.) Who wrote the third epistle? (§ 4.) Note. This and the following letters should be treated as the above, bringing out the golden topic, the writer, when and where written, and the occasion. Review. CHAPTER XXXV. FUTURE - RE V EL ATIOK § 1. Introduction to the Revelation of Jesus Christ to John, on Patinos, A. I). !)?. Addressed "to the seven churches which are in Asia." (See Index; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) (a.) The Writer. The apostle John wrote this book when "in the isle that is called Patmos." Thither he was banished by Home's cruel emperor, Domitian, "for the word of God, and for the testimony of Jesus Christ." This island is in the iEgean Sea, about thirty miles west of Miletus; a small, rocky island, about eighteen miles in cir- cumference, which, on account of its dreary and desolate character, was u^cd by the Roman emperors as a place of confinement for criminals. Eere it was that John, aboul 1)7 A. D., in his old age, and perhaps 30 years after the other apostles had gone to their rest, had the revelation recorded in this book. Oil. XXXV: § 2. THREE GOLDEN" TOPICS. 341 (b.) To Whom Addressed. Says Fausset: "The inscrip- tion states that it was addressed to the seven churches of Asia. John's reason for fixing on the number seven was, doubtless, because seven is the sacred number implying totality and universality; so it is implied that John, through the medium of the seven churches, addresses in the spirit the church of all places and ages. The church, in its various states of spiritual life or deadness, in all ages and places, is represented by the seven churches, and is ad- dressed with words of consolation or warning accordingly." (c.) The Object. It begins with admonitory addresses to the seven churches from the Divine Son of Man, whom John saw in vision; after a brief introduction which sets forth the main subject of the book, viz: to "show unto his servants things which must shortly come to pass " (ch. i-iii). Chap, iv describes the throne of God; and following to the end is mainly prophecy, with practical exhortations and consolations similar to those addressed to the seven churches. The Jews had a succession of prophets who guided them with the light of prophecy; what their prophets were to them, that the apocalyptic Scriptures have been and are to us. ' Says Gilpin: "We, in the same manner, look to these prophecies of the apocalypse for the full consummation of the great scheme of the gospel." § 2. Three Golden Topics. I. "Christ Seen in Glory." Chap. i. II. "Letters to the Seven Churches." Chap, ii, iii. III. Prophecy, "From Pentecost to Christ's Second Coming," or end of the world. Chap, iv-xxii. See Index. (a.) Introduction to Topic I. "Christ Seen in Glory." Christ appears to have been seen three times after his ascension. First, by the martyr Stephen, A. D. 33. Under 342 future: revelation. the cruel hand of persecution, "he, being full of the Holy Ghost, looked up steadfastly into heaven;" and with coun- tenance radiant with glory he says: "Behold, I see the heavens opened, and the Son of Man standing on the right hand of God. " Second, by the young man at whose feet the witnesses laid down their clothes when they stoned Stephen, "whose name was Saul," about three years after- wards as he was on a journey of persecution to Damascus (Acts, ix: 1-9). And third, about sixty years thereafter, he appears in his glory and majesty to the apostle John, in his lonely rock-bound island home in the Grecian Archipelago. "It was fitting that, when forbidden to go beyond certain bounds of the earth's lands, he was permitted to penetrate the secrets of heaven." Outline Topic I (Chap. i). Chap, i : 1. John writes his revelation to the seven churches of Asia (Proconsular Asia), signified by the seven golden candlesticks. 7. Assurance is given of the second coming of Christ in majesty and power. 13. Christ appears in person to John and talks with him, and a description is given of the glorious majesty of his appearance. (b.) Introduction to Topic II. "Letters to the Seven Churches." This part contains the messages to the seven churches of Asia, as "descriptive of the state of those seven as they tuere then, and as designed to furnish encourage- ment, reproofs, warnings and counsels to alt other churches and Christians in all future ages, as their cases are found to resemble theirs; for every one in every age, * that hat h an ear to hear/ is called to 'hear what the Spirit saith to the churches." — A Fuller. Christ seemed desirous to append to what had already been written in the gospels and epistles that which is found in the two chapters of this division, for the benefit of the churches established throughout the world: while Topic III refers to prophecy, relating more to the future of the seven Ch. XXXV: § 3. introduction to topic hi. 343 representatiye churches. This topic relates to "the things which are." The things which the apostle was commanded to write were of a threefold nature, the first being those which he had seen, the second those which icere, and third those which should be hereafter. Thus is designed to be given a bird's-eye view, as it were, of the state of religion and the fortunes of the church, not merely from the time when the vision came to John, but from the time when the church was established to the end of the world. I. Outline Topic II (Chap, ii, iii). Chap. ii. "What is commanded to be written to the angels, that is, to the ministers, of the churches of Ephesus, Smyr- na, Pergamos, Thyatira; and what is commended or found wanting in them. Chap. iii. The minister of the church of Sardis is re- proved, exhorted to repent, and threatened if he does not repent. The minister of the church of Philadelphia is approved for his diligence and patience. The minister of the church of Laodicea is rebuked for being neither hot nor cold, and is admonished to repent and to be more zealous. Christ is willing to restore on repentance. Glori- ous promises are made to overcomers. § 3. Introduction to Topic III. "The whole of chapter iv is introductory to what follows. The scene of the vision is the throne of God and the heavenly world. A door being opened, the apostle is invited to enter in. Having entered, he finds himself under prophetic inspira- tion. He was still in the isle of Patmos, while wrapped up by divine inspiration, and introduced into the immediate presence of God. In this state of mind he beheld the ' Throne,' and one 'sitting upon it, who was the supreme disposer of all the concerns of creatures. Such a sight would impress him with the conviction that whatever should befall the church, or the world, it was all according 344 future: revelation. to his will who ruled in the armies of heaven and among the inhabitants of the earth. No description is given of God, only that his glory seemed to resemble the' luster of precious stones. A rainbow was around the throne, in appearance like an emerald. Having spoken of the King Eternal, sitting on his throne, he next describes his retinue: the four and twenty elders, clothed in white, with crowns of gold on their heads; the lightnings and thunderings and voices. Be- sides these, there were 'seven lamps of fire before the throne/ which are said to be 'the seven Spirits of God.' Following this is what he saw before the throne, which was a 'sea of glass clear as crystal.' Four beasts (or living- creatures) are now introduced in the scene. The descrip- tion of the living creatures as bearing resemblance to certain animals, and as having each six wings which were full of eyes within, would naturally express their useful properties, particularly the union of zeal with knowledge, and their unceasing ascriptions of glory to God. The elders were crowned, but they cast their crowns before the throne. Such appears to be the scene ami scenery of this preparatory vision." — A. Fuller. (a.) "From Pentecost to Chrisfs S<><'. (gkiid ifeen in Wont. Mev., (gli. i. SBzMm 4o 4ke Sfev-en (ghuicheb. (gh. ii=iii. (^nitoduciim 4o HPiokhecu. (gh. iv. Jfoom ®Pen4tcod 4o fudgmen4. (gin. v=xxii. Third Golden Topic, ifmtn ifeaL f/iened. (gh. v=viii : /. Seven §imnjie4^ Sounded, (gh. viii : ?=ri. §hiee §nemwb oi 4he (ghmeh. (gh. xii=xtv. ifeven Tiah iPomed tu4. till, xv-=xvi. mee (pnemm 'em 0vet4/i k nown. wven< 'AMalem xrtt^x.r. //. xxi-xxu. a -SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. ^ Note. Review. Call out the several divisions up to this lesson. Who was the writer of the book of Revelation? (Rev. i: 4.) To whom was it written? (Rev. i: 4.) Where? When? (Ref. Bible.) How many golden topios are found in this Ch. XXXV. lessor xxii. 353 book? (Ch. XXXV: § 2.) What is the first? Where found? The second? Where found? The third? Where found? Note. Chapter iv is an introduction to the prophecy which fol- lows, and cannot be understood without it, as many references are made to it. How came John on Patmos? Why banished? (Key. i : 9. ) Where and what kind of an island was it? (§ 1, a.) Whom did he see there? On what day of the week? (Rev. i: 10.) Do we read of his haying been seen in glory by any other persons? (§ 2, a.) How many churches were addressed? Why do you think the number seven was used? (§ 1, ft.) What do the seven churches represent? What particular use is made of chapter iv of Revelation? (§ 3.) What are the leading topics of this chapter? Note. Have the class read the analysis as found in the Reference Bible. Of what does the third golden topic consist? Axs. Revelation. (§ 3, a.) Into how many general parts may it be divided? (§4.) Note. Place bracket and numbers on the board. Have the class read the analysis of the chapters in Part I, and from it decide as to the leading thought, "Seven Seals Opened," etc. The following parts may be treated the same way. Close the lesson with what is said of the Illustrated Index in the following chapter. 354 ILLUSTRATED INDEX CONCLUDED. CHAPTER XXXVI. ILLUSTRATED INDEX CONCLUDED. "We will now return to the Index, to where we find the word " Meridian." Moving upward from thence, we find a reference to Malachi, iv: 2: "Unto you that fear my name shall the Sun of Righteousness arise with healing in his wings." As we now pass up this line, our attention is arrested by " Interim 400 Years. 5 ' The significance of this term will he seen by referring to the date of the book of Malachi. We find that nearly 400 years elapsed between the close of the Old Testament Scriptures and its fulfill- ment in the New. Notwithstanding this lapse of years, where the Old concludes the New Testament begins. Mal- achi and Luke (the historian) are linked together in their subjects. Compare Mai. iv: 5, with Luke, ch. i. We now pass up the meridian line to the Index Hand, pointing to the reference "John, i: 29- 37." We here find the Savior formally introduced to the world by John the Baptist, as we would introduce friend to friend, with the words: "Behold the Lamb of God, which taketh away the sin of the world." Again, the next day after this, while the Baptist is at Bethabara surrounded by his disciples, Christ, as he approaches, is introduced to than as the one of whom he is the forerunner, and he says: "Behold the Lamb of God.'' It was then that the disciples followed him. We have now reached the objet I for which the Bible was given to the world, viz: the introduction of Christ, the Oh. XXXVI. ILLUSTRATED INDEX CONCLUDED. 355 Savior, to fallen man. In accordance with this thought, and the thought as brought out in the quotation from Malachi, the sphere is now surmounted with an emblem- atical presentation of the " Sun of Righteousness," with radiations represent- ing Christ as the "Light, which lighteth every man that cometh into the world." John, i: 9. Within this may be seen a Cross, upon which the "Lamb of Cod" was slain as the world's Kedeemer. This redemption, sufficient for the ivhole world, is yet only beneficial to those who are willing to acknowledge him as their Savior. (Matt, x: 38.) Just here we are carried back to the scenes of Calvary. We behold him as he is suspended upon the cross. We recall the three days of sadness and gloom, when hope sank within the hearts of that little band of disciples, and the finger of scorn and derision everywhere pointing to them, taunting' them with: "Where is he now in whom you trusted?" Disintegration immediately takes place among the disci- ples. We find one going this way, another that. Disheart- ened as they were, they cared not to meet even a fellow disciple. The place where they were wont to meet had lost its attractions. Some are found on their way to Emmaus, and, when in conversation with one whom they supposed to be a stranger, say: "But we trusted that it had been he which should have redeemed Israel. " But soon the glorious light of the (i Resurrection " dispels the darkness. On the morn- ing of the third day joy fills their hearts, and we hear them say one to another as they meet: The Lord is risen! The Lord is risen from the dead! ! Now we remember how he told us, when we were alone with him in that upper room in the evening of the fifth day of last week: 356 ILLUSTRATED INDEX CONCLUDED. "A little while, and ye shall not see me; and again a little while, and ye shall see me." And we remember, too, how he said that "Ye shall weep and lament, but the world shall rejoice." Also: "Behold, the hour cometh, yea is now come, that ye shall be scattered, every man to his own, and shall leave me alone" (John, xvi: 17, 20, 32). We also remember how* he said: "But these things have I told you, that when the ftime shall come you may remember that I told you of them" (ver. 4). "How that he must go up to Jerusalem, and suffer many things of the elders and chief priests and scribes, and be killed, and be raised again the third day" (Matt, xvi: 21). The tomb could hold its victim no longer. Death and the grave are vanquished. The "Sun of Righteousness" has arisen over the sin-fettered world "with healing in his wings." The last and crowning act in the drama of redemption's work is now accomplished. Hence light can emanate from the cross only as it radiates through the resurrection, which is the ground of our faith. So Paul considered it; for, in writing from Ephesus to the church at Corinth, he said: "And if Christ be not raised, your faith is vain; ye are yet in your sins" (1 Cor. xv: 17). Not till the resurrection morning did light radiate from the cross. The early disciples met on the first day of the week to celebrate this greatest of all events, the resurrection of Christ from the dead. It has been handed down through all the ages to us. May we bear in mind this great fact, that it is the Lord's day. And, "like as Christ was raised up from the dead by the glory of the Father," even so may we "walk in newness of life," that at the last we may assuredly " KNOW THE POWER OF Ills RESURRECTION. " Ch. XXXVII: § 1. LNHEKITA^CE DESCRIBED. 35? CHAPTER XXXVII.* ABSTRACT OF THE TITLE OF A CHKISTIAis T JTO HIS HEAVENLY INHERITANCE. § 1. The Inheritance Described. (See Preface to New Testament, Chap. XX VII: § 1.) It is in the city of the Xew Jerusalem, which city is described as having a great wall surrounding it, 144 cubits high, and haying 12 gates and 12 foundations. The city is square, and meas- ures 12,000 furlongs in length on each side. Its streets are of pure gold, it is brilliantly lighted, its gates are of pearl, its magnificence is inexpressible, and all its appoint- ments perfect. Read Rev. xxi: 10-24. This city has many mansions, and the inheritance is an everlasting home among them. John, xiv: 2. The Ruler and Governor of this city is so pure and holy, the city itself so honorable, and its inhabitants so exemplary and select, that nothing can enter the city that may in any way dishonor or defile it, notwithstanding its gates are always open. Read Rev. xxi: 23-27. The. names of those entitled to enter and occupy the several palaces and mansions are all entered and registered in a book entitled "The Lamb's Book of Life." Rev. xxi: 27. Through .the city there flows a river of pure water, com- mencing at the Governor's abode. It is well supplied with * The importance of having the reader know whether he is entitled to a share in this inheritance, spoken of in the last two chapters of Revelation, is the object of this concluding chapter. It is gathered from a tract published by the American Tract Society many years ago, and long since out of print; but from its real worth as & rule by which the Christian may compare or measure his life, it is invaluable. 358 ABSTKACT OF THE TITLE. fruit, for among others a peculiar tree, called the "tree of life," bears twelve kinds of fruit monthly, and its leaves are medicinal. Rev. xxii: 1, 2. The city is exceedingly healthy, so much so that death is never known, and neither sickness nor disease occurs. Happiness is so continual and universal that neither weep- ing nor sorrow is known. Eev. xxi: -1. § 2. The Inheritance is Imperishable, and held in reserve for the one entitled to it. "An inheritance incorruptible, undefiled, and that fadeth not away, reserved in heaven for you. " 1 Peter, i : 4. § 3. The Title to this Inheritance is derived by gift, from the One who was the entire and absolute owner thereof. He gave it to his only Son. (a.) A memorandum from the record of this gift is as follows: "His Sok", whom he hath appointed heir of all things." Read Heb. i: 2-10. (#.) This Son's name was Jesus Chkist; and it pleased his Father, for his Son's sake, to adopt certain children and make them joint heirs with his Son. This is clear from satisfactory record thereof, as will now be shown: Rom. viii: 15-17. "Ye have received the spirit of adop- tion, whereby we cry Abba, Father. The Spiril itself beareth witness with our spirits that Ave are the children of God; and if children, then heirs; heirs of God and joint heirs with Christ." See also Gal. iii: 26. "For ye are all the children of God by faith in Christ Jesus." iv: 5-7. "Thai ye might re- ceive the adoption of sons. And because ye are sons, God hath sent forth the Spirit of his Son into your hearts, crying Abba, Father. And if a son. then an heir of God through Christ." Oh. XXXVII: § 4. adoption and heikship. 359 See also 1 John, iii: 1. "Behold what manner of love the Father hath bestowed upon us r that we should be called the sons of God." See also John, i: 12. " To them gave he power to become the sons of God, even to them that believe on his name." § 4. Adoption and Heirship. A Christian is an adopted child, and therefore a joint heir to this inherit- ance. Proof thereof, to show that he has the requisites necessary to identify him as an adopted child: (a.) A new birth is necessary. John, iii: 3. "Except a man be born again, he cannot see the kingdom of God." (b. ) A belief on the name of his Son is necessary. John, i: 12. "As many as received him, to them gave he power to become the sons of God, even to them that believe on his name." See also John, iii: 16. " Whosoever believeth on him should not perish, but have everlasting life." (c.) A Christian does believe on his name, and has the new birth. (I.) He has so given himself up to Jesus Christ as to become identified with him in all moral characteristics. (II. ) He cherishes no desires, hopes or aspirations except such as are in accordance with his wishes and interests. (III.) He bears the fruits of the Spirit, such as love, gentleness, etc. (IV.) "He visits the widow and fatherless in their afflic- tion, and keeps himself unspotted from the world." (V.) His entire life is in unison with the wishes and will of his Father. He dreads his displeasure and desires his favor, has a regard for his excellency, submits to his will, is grateful for his benefits, sincere in devotion to him, and conscientious in obeying his commands. Wherefore it clearly appears that a Christian is an adopted son and joint heir with Jesus Christ, and as such entitled to the inheritance. 360 ABSTEACT OF THE TITLE. § 5. Surety of Possession. Is a Christian certain of receiving the possession of this inheritance? Yes; it is "held in reserve" for him. 1 Peter, i: 4. "Reserved in heaven for yon." When ~ an estate is held in reserve, then such estate is kept for the future use of those entitled to its possession. Where heirs are mutually interested, then the occupancy and enjoyment of the estate by some of them cannot by lapse of time create a possession adverse to the other heirs. The Heavenly Inheritance is held in reserve for the future use of a Christian by Jesus Christ, who so preserves the same that no waste, decay nor time can depreciate the estate. It is well understood that the will of the Son is all- powerful. He said, "Let there be light," and there was light. All things were made by the word of his power, and were given into his hands. Read the record: John, i: 2, 3; xiii: 3; Heb. i: 2-10. Jesus Christ, as joint heir, is now in possession: and that he exercises his will and power on behalf of every Chris- tian is evident from the record. "Father, I will that they also whom thou hast given me may be with me where I am." John, xvii: 24. Also the record says: "He that overcometh shall inherit all things; and I will be his God, and he shall be my son." Rev. xxi: 7. § 6. Is the Inheritance Real ! Yes. The follow- ing are proofs: John saw it from Patmos. See Rev. i: 9. kk 1 was in the Spirit on the Lord's day. and heard a voice saving. k What, thou seest write.'" Head Rev. i: 10. 11. And he "showed me the groat city, the Holy Jerusa- lem." Rev. xxi: 10. Ch. XXXVII: § 7. signatures and witnesses. 361 Paul saw it, and says he was "caught up into the third heavens (paradise) and heard unspeakable words, which it was not lawful (possible) for a man to utter." 2 Cor. xii: 4. Eead Luke, xxiii: 43; also 1 Cor. ii: 9. Elisha caught a glimpse thereof when he cried, "Lo, the chariot of Israel and the horsemen thereof," while Elijah was caught up into it by a whirlwind and a fiery chariot. 2 K. ii: 12. ' ' For the Lord called unto him (Moses) out of the midst of the cloud, and the sight of the glory of God was like devouring fire/' etc. Read Exodus, xxiv: 16-18. Abraham sojourned in the land of promise, dwelling in tabernacles, "For he looked for a city which hath founda- tions, whose builder and maker is Cod." Heb. xi: 10. When the Seed of Abraham lay in the Bethlehem man- ger, the shepherds on the plains of Judea saw and heard of and from this inheritance; for as they were abiding in the fields, keeping watch over their flocks by night, "the angel of the Lord came upon them;" and suddenly there was with the angel a heavenly host, praising God and saying: "Peace on earth, and good- will to men." Read Luke, ii: 8-15. Peter and James and John had a glimpse thereof when Moses and Elias talked with Christ and he was transfigured before them. Read Matt, xvii: 1-5. Stephen saw it, and was received up into it. Read Acts, vii: 55, 56, 59. Above all, the Son himself, "the image of the invisible God," by his own incarnation, and the disclosures he made while on earth, has demonstrated its existence. Read John, i: 1-14; also Eph. iv: 10. § 7. Signatures and Witnesses. Wherefore it clearly appears that the Christian's title to his heavenly inheritance is certain and undisputed. It is a gift by the Owner to his 362 ABSTRACT OF THE TITLE. adopted child, for the consideration of the love and affec- tion which the Owner has and bears to his only Son. And the Son is the Mediator of a new covenant, in which the Father binds himself to bestow this inheritance on Christians. It is an "everlasting" covenant, confirmed by a solemn oath registered in heaven. Eead Heb. viii: 6-12. The inheritance is real, and is held in reserve, under guarantee of all the divine attributes and pledges, that the Christian may in due time be in the full possession and everlasting enjoyment thereof. Read Heb. vi: 17-20. Wherefore the title is certified to be perfect. Three that bear ( THE FATHER. record in heaven. < THE WORD. 1 John, v: 7. ( THE SPIRIT. Three that bear i THE SPIRIT. witness on earth. •] THE WATER. 1 John, v: 8. ( THE BLOOD. Read 1 John, v: 9-11. " These three are one." "These three agree in one." Ck. XXXVII. lesson xxiii. 363 LESSOR XXIII. . ( dwijiemhaUe, 4 @P. i : Jp. /. Wemihiion, mev. xxi: 40=2Jf. \ i • 1 ! I oldie, <$eb. t : 2-40 \®fldoji4ion, Mom. mii : 45. 2. memhik, mom. mil: 44. \ a • j r -j \ Me one. y ojhe ¥fmi4. J Wdneue*. (ofhe SJiitil 1 " Mhm ilnee 6. $n @al4h, 4 John, v: L\ of he 'W'edu, \ afiee yofhe $j>locd. J in one." >j. (^jijfilieaivon, 4 John, v : (j=44. SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. What is the subject of Chapter XXXVII? Where in the Bible do yon find a description of it? (§ 1.) Who gives this description ? Who was this John ? Where was he when he saw it ? What is said of its ruler and governor ? Who are entitled to enter this city ? What is said of the health of this city ? How enduring is this inheritance ? (§ 2.) What is said in the record about it? (1 P. i: 4.) How is the right secured to this inheritance? (§3.) Note. Bring before the class the subject of this section. 364 LESSON XXIII. What is the subject of § 4? What requirement is neces- sary? Where in the record is this requirement found ? (John iii: 3.) How may we become the sons of God? (§ 4, b.) What are some of the characteristics of a Chris- tian? (§ 4, c.) Where is the certainty of the Christian receiving this inheritance ? (§5.) Where in the record is this found? Note. State who it is that holds this inheritance, his power, and his request of his Father. What proof is there that this inheritance is real? (§ 6.) Who is said to be the first who saw it? (Acts, vii: 56.) What did Stephen see? Who else saw it? (2 Cor. xii: 4.) Note. State to the class what Elisha, Moses and Abraham saw as- proofs. What is the conclusion as regards the certainty to the Christian of this inheritance? (§ 6.) Where is it regis- tered? By whom is it certified? Where are the witnesses?" What are they? How may we knoiv that we are heirs to this inheritance? (1 John, v: 9-11.) Ans. From the testimony. INDEX. 365 INDEX Abstract of Christian title to Inheritance, 357. Acts, introduction to, 281; divi- sions of, 283; outline of, 285; part iv, 289, 293, 301. Adoption and Heirship, 359. American Bible Society, 13. Amos, 115; outline of, 116. Apocalyptic, what it pertains to, 63. Apocrypha, not inspired, 16. Areas of seas and lakes, 3. B Bible, various names of, 1 ; lands, 1 ; division into chapter and verse, 4; punctuation, 5; age, 6; preservation, 7; unchang- ed, 8; translations, 9; our English or King James, 12; societies, 13; first printed in United States, 14 ; ancient versions, 20; inspiration of, 23; doctrines proof of divine origin, 25; writers, 27; inter- pretation, 29 ; taught as a sci- ence, 36; two grand themes, 36; two great questions in, 37; two great parts of, 38; two Gr. Gr. Divisions, 44; number of books, 47. Books, construction of ancient, 3; sealing of, 4. British and Foreign Bible Society, 13. o Canon, history of, 23. Captivity, of Israel, 124; of Ju- dah, 127; return from, 168; diagram of, 184. Christ, character of, 26; corre- sponding references in Old and New Testament, 45; four phases of his life, 61; the great expectation, 223. Christian, gospel for, 242; char- acter and needs of, 269; in- heritance, 236, 357. Christianity, preparation for, 229. I Chronicles, chapter xxii-xxix, 103; introduction, 129; divi- sions and outline, 131-133. II Chronicles, two general parts, 136; outline, 137, 142, 145, 146, 149, 151. Chronology, of O. T. books, 203 ; of N. T. 349 ; Bible, 44. Church, history of, 61, 69; estab- lished in Canaan, 90; govern- ment theocratic, 90; apostol- ic, 281. 366 INDEX. Colossians, introduction and out- line, 305. Corinth, description of, 290. I Corinthians and why written, 290; outline, 292. II Corinthians, object of, 293; outline, 295. Creation, scientific view of, 70. D Daniel, prophecy of, 161; out- line, 163. David, anointed and persecuted, 99; Psalms of, 101; king at Jerusalem, 102; prepares to build temple, 103; old age and death, 105. Deuteronomy, meaning of and writer, 83; a rehearsal, 84; outline, 85. Diagram of Kings and Prophets, 184. Distances from Jerusalem, 2; other distances, 2. Divisions, two great grand, 44; three O. T. grand, 47, 48, 49 ; three N. T. grand, 52; Josh- ua, 92. Doctrines, Bible. 25; of future state, 91; Christian, 275. E Ecclesiastes, object of, 56, 199. Edomites, account of, 156. Elevations above the sea, 3. EPHESIANS, Paul's letter to, 306; outline, 307. Epistles, doctrinal and general, 62. Esther, 176; analysis, 179. Executive, 55, 88; compilers of, 89. Exodus, meaning and writer, 72; outline, 73. Ezekiel, prophecy of and out- line, 158. Ezra, book of, 168; outline, 169, 176, 180. Fathers, quoted from Bible, 22 ; time of church fathers, 23. Festivals, religious, 76. Future, revelation of, 340. Future State, doctrine of, 91; punishment, 338. G- Galatians, Paul's letter to, 295; why written, 296; analysis, 297. General Letters, 327. Genesis, book of, 68; outline, 71 ; writer, 70. God, his being, 25. Gospel, Matthew's, 244; Mark's, 249; Luke's, 256; John's, 267; children's, 264; woman's, 264; for the poor, 265, Gospels, introduction to, 2:>9; why four, 239; demand for, 241; need of four, 276; ele- ment common to the four. 277; element peculiar to each. 278. GREEK, gospel for the, 212; char- acter and needs, 257. IKDEX, 3g: H Habakkuk, prophecy of, 150. Haggai, prophecy of, 172; ex- plained, 173. Heaven, vision of, 343 ; the Chris- tian inheritance, 357; reality of, 360. Hebrews, author of, 318; object of, 320; outline, 320; a sup- plement, 321. Herod the great, 217; his design, 218; extent of his reign, 219; public administration, 220 ; temple of, 220; death and successor, 221. Highpriests, were Levites, 75; typified Christ, 76; of inter- im, 213, 214. History, of mankind in Genesis, 69; of church in Bible, 69; sacred denned, 88; inter-Bib lical, 209; the Jews, political, 210; the Jews, moral, 221; civil and moral of Gentile world, 229. History and Prophecy, 152, 161. Hosea, prophecy of, 112; dis- courses, 114. Index, object of Biblical, 42; why so called, 43; plan of, 45 ; Scripture illustrations, 45 ; meridian line, 47; is a beau- tiful illustration, 47; explain- ed, 44, 45, 67, 354. Inheritance, heavenly, 236; de- scribed, 357; title to, 358; a surety, 360; signatures and witnesses, 361. Inspiration of the Bible, K T. proofs, 23; O. T. proofs, 24; proofs from prophecy, 25; from originality and consis- tency, 25; from character of Christ, 26. Interim, history of, 209. Interpretation of the Bible, rules for, 29. Isaiah, prophecy of, 119; general analysis, 119; outline, 121, 142, 143, 144, 145, 164, 166. Israel, number of, 79; camp of, 82; lost tribes of, 160. James, letter of, 328; analysis 329. Jeremiah, prophecy of, 147; di- visions, 148; outline, 152, 153; lamentations of, 155. Jerome, author of the Vulgate, 21. Jerusalem, distances from, 2; becomes capital of Judea, 102; destroyed, 128; rebuilt, 181 ; a religious center, 222. Jews, descendants of Abraham, 71 (outline Gen. No. IX); de- liverance from Egypt, 73; es tablished in Canaan, 92; gov- erned by Judges, 94; ruled by kings, 99; captivity, 128; return from Babylon, 169; political history in Interim, 210; moral history in Inter- im, 221 ; gospel for, 241; Messiah promised, 244; char- acter and needs, 244. 368 IXDEX. Job, character of, 56; book of, 192; analysis, 193. Joel, prophecy of, 117; outline, 118. John, gospel of, 267; origin and design, 267; peculiar fitness of the author, 270; divisions, 272 ; Christian adaptation, 272 ; omissions, 273 ; addi- tions, 274; doctrines, 275. I John, letter to all Christians, 333; design of, 334. II John, letter to Christian moth- ers, 336. III John, letter to Gaius, 336. Jonah, prophecy of, 111. Joshua, book of, 90; divisions, 92. Jude, letter of, 337. Judges, book of, 92; names of, 93; outline, 94; importance, 95. Justification, question raised and answered, 37. K I Kings, book of, 104; outline part i, 105; outline part n, 106. II Kings, book of, 108; outline, 109, 117, 122, 124, 126, 127; tabular view of, 184. L Law of Moses, 54, 68. Lamentations of Jeremiah, 155. Languages, three prevailing, 225. Leviticus, book of, 75; author, 75. Luke, the historian, 240; gospel of, 256; divisions, 260; Greek adaptation, 260; omissions, 262; additions, 263. M Maccabees, rule of, 216. Malachi, prophecy of, 182; an- alysis, 183. Manuscripts, 8 (foot note); Old Testament, 17; number of Hebrew, 18; date of, 18; va- rious readings, 18; Greek N. T. 18; number of apostolic, 18; number of N. T. 19; dates of N. T. 19; various readings of N. T. 19; ver- sion, 20. Mark, gospel of, 249; witnesses to, 251; divisions, 252; "Ro- man adaptation, 253; omis- sions, 254; additions, 255. Matthew, gospel of, 244 ; for the Jew, 244; divisions. 24<>; omissions, 247; additions, 24s. Micah, prophecy of, 123; analy- sis, 124. Mountains, elevation of. 3. 1ST NAnuM, prophecy of, 125. NEHEMIAH, book of, ISO; out- line, 181. Numbers, book of, 79; outline, 79, SO. INDEX. 369 O Outline, of Acts, part iy, 289, 293, 301. Amos, 116. I Chronicles, 131, 132, 133. II Chronicles, 137, 142, 145, 140, 149, 151, Colossians, 305. I Corinthians, 292. II Corinthians, 295. Daniel, 163. Deuteronomy, 85. Ephesians, 307. Esther, 179. Exodus, 73. Ezekiel, 158. Ezra, 169, 176, 180. Galatians, 297. Genesis, 71. Hebrews, 320. Isaiah, 121, 142, 143, 144, 145, 166. James, 329. Jeremiah, 152, 153. Job, 193. Joel, 118. John, 272. I John, 335. Judges, 94. I Kings, 105, 106. II Kings, 109, 117, 122, 124, 127. Malachi, 183. Nehemiah, 181. Numbers, 79, 80. Obadiah, 156. I Peter, 331. II Peter, 332. Philippians, 309. Revelation, 342, 343, 345. Romans, 300. Outline, of I Samuel, 99. II Samuel, 102. I Thessalonians, 288. II Thessalonians, 289. I Timothy, 313. II Timothy, 317. Titus, 315. Zechariah, 174. Zephaniah, 127. Pastoral Letters of Paul, 310. Patriarchal Religion, 193. Paul, letters of, 61; history of, 284; in Thessalonica, 286; seven last letters, 302; last imprisonment, 315 ; death, 318. Pentateuch, defined, 54; value of, 86; Samaritan, 213. Peshito, ancient version, 20. I Peter, letter, 330; analysis, 331. II Peter, letter, 332; analysis, 332. Philemon, letter to, 303. Philippians, letter to, 308; out- line, 309. Priesthood, instituted, 73 (out- line Exodus, No. 6); conse- crated, 75; of Interim, 212. Prophets, why called major, 57; why called minor, 59; restor- ative, 170; of Israel and Ju- dab, 171; to Gentiles, 171; diagram of, 184; tabular view, 191. 370 IXDEX. Prophecies and Types of Christ: Gen. 70; Ex. 73; Lev. 76; Num. 83; Josh. 92; Jonah, 112; Hosea, 113; Isa. 120; Jer. 147; Psalms, 196. Proverbs, 56; book of, 198; de- sign, 198; divisions, 199. Providence, illustrated, 177. Psalms, use of, 56; by whom and how composed, 101; book of, 195; adaptation to worship, 195; Messianic character, 196; five collections, 196. Punctuation, history of Bible, 5. Q Qualifications for teaching, preface; necessity of, 32. R Resurrection, question raised and answered, 37; of Christ, 355. Revelation, denned, 63 (foot note); book of, 340; object, 341; three topics, 341; out line, 342, 343, 345; introduc- tion to topic in, 343 ; six parts of topic in, 345; purpose of this prophecy, 348. Rivers, length of Bible, 3. Roman, gospel for the, 242; char- acter and needs, 251; adapta- tion, 253. Romans, Paul's letter to, 298; where and why written, 21)8; analysis, 300. Roman Empire, boundary, 229; civilization, 230; demoraliza- tion, 233. Ruth, book of, 96 ; design of, 97. S Sacrifices, where to find laws of, 75. Salvation, Bible shows way of, 26; requirement for, 359. Samaritans, who they were, 124 (outline 2 K.); oppose the Jews, 181 (outline Neh.); ri- valries between Jews and, 212. Samuel, as a prophet, 10Q; eulogy on, 100; head of prophets, 170. I Samuel, book of, 98; writer, 98; outline, 99. II Samuel, book of, 101 ; outline, 102; supplement to, 103. Schools, of the prophets, 170; Grecian, 232. Scriptures, name given to Bible, 1 ; Matthew's use of, 246. Seals of ancient books, 4. Seas and Lakes, areas of, 3; depressions of, 3. Septuagint, origin of, 20; his- tory of, 214. Society, American Bible, 13 ; British and Foreign Bible, 13. Solomon, reign of, 105. Song of Solomon, object of, 57; explained, 200. Subdivisions, Bible, 66. Synagogues, history of, 224. INDEX. 371 Table, of distances, 2; seas, riv- ers, elevations, 3 ; weights, measures, moneys, 77; Jewish times and festivals, 78; kings and prophets, 184; prophets, 191. Talmud, history of, 14; defined, 22. Targums, origin of, 21. Teachers, suggestions to, ix ; rules for, x ; two questions for, 32. Teaching of Bible to youth, an- cient mode of, 84; annual festivals a means, 223. Temple, Solomon built, 105; de- stroyed, 128; rebuilt, 169; Herod's, 220. Testament, New, when written, 23; defined, 38; juxtaposition of Old and New, 38; grand divisions of Old, 47; histori- cal Old, 48, 54; poetical Old, 49, 55; prophetical Old, 49, 57; historical New, 52, 60; epistolary New, 52, 61 ; apoc- alyptic New, 53, 63; preface to New, 236; grand divisions of New, 238. Theocracy of Jews defined, 90. I Thessalonians, letter of, 286; reason for writing, 287; out- line, 288. II Thessalonians, letter of, 288 ; why Paul wrote again, 288; outline, 289. I Timothy, letter of, 312; out- line, 313. II Timothy, letter of, 315; out- line, 317. Titus, letter to, 314; outline, 315. Traditions of the elders, 14. Translations, of Bible into Eng- lish, 9; Wickliff's, 10; Tyn- dale's, 11; Coverdale's, 11; Traverner's, 11; The Great Bible, 11; Geneva Bible, 12; Bishop's Bible, 12; Catholic Bible, 12; our English or King James Bible, 12; an- cient, 20. V Versions of the Bible, ancient, 20; Septuagint, Peshito, 20; Samaritan Pentateuch, Tar- gums, Yulgate, 21; Talmud, Quotations of Fathers, 22; modern, 9. Vulgate, Latin, 21. W Will and Testament of God, 236; heirs of, 358. Zechariah, prophecy of, 174: analysis, 174. Zephaniah, prophecy of, 126; object, 126; outline, 127. 372 TESTIMONIALS. TESTIMONIALS. The following is what eminent Divines, Sunday S-chool Superintendents and the Press say about it : FROM REY. D. MOORE, D. D. Geneva, N. Y., August 2d, 1880. Mr. C. V. D. Cornell: Dear Sir:— Having examined briefly the manuscript of your Illustrated Biblical Index and Key, a work on which you have spent so many years of patient labor, I can say I am favorably impressed with it. It strikes me that it possesses real value to the average Bible student, and especially to Bible and Normal classes, in marking out a systematic and comprehensive course of Bible study, and furnishing needed helps by the way. The analyses of the several books are for the most part excellent. Placing the prophets in their proper places, chronologically, in the historical books, will, to many, present these portions of the Bible under a new aspect and render the study of them more interesting and profitable. You have also collected many choice extracts, some of them of great value, from various authors, and ar- ranged them in such a manner as to shed light on large portions of the Word —often on entire books. The questions and reviews will also lead to more careful study. Should you decide to publish the work, I have no doubt it would prove helpful to many in a better understanding of God's Holy Word. D. MOORE, Pastor Baptist Church. FROM REV. H. A. NELSON, D. D. I have examined the "Illustrated Bible Index" somewhat less thor- oughly (I believe) than Dr. Moore has done, and have received similar impressions of its character. I concur with him in the opinion that ic will be really helpful to Bible study. H. A. NELSON, Pastor 1st Presbt. Church, Geneva, N. Y. FROM REY. S. H. GRIDLEY, D. D., PRESBYTERIAN. The undersigned, having given some attention to the Index to Bible Study, by Mr. Cornell, would here say that I heartily concur in the opinions expressed by Drs. Moore and Nelson, that it is a work well adapted to facili- tate the study of the Holy Scriptures. S. H. GRIDLEY, Waterloo, N. Y. FROM REV. I). I). BCCK, D. D., OF THE M. E. CHURCH. A Nkw BIBLICAL AVork.— Having obtained from the author, as well as from his MS., a definite idea of the purpose, method and execution of a work entitled "Key to Bible Study," I am distinctly impressed with the irreat value of the work. It supplies a desideratum that thorough Bible TESTIMONIALS. 373 students have long- desired, to-wit : a comprehensive yet brief method of studying", with scientific thoroughness, the whole Bible in its completeness. The author's plan and method are remarkable for originality, simplicity and completeness. It has been with him, as we may say, a life work; and the public may, in convenient form, and at little expense, avail themselves of the ripe results of many years of patient, prayerful study of the Scrip- tures, and of the innumerable books, pamphlets, maps and charts that help to a better understanding of the sacred oracles. The author modestly aims to assist S. S. and Bible Class teachers, but I am impressed that his work will be of great value in all institutions of learning where systematic study of the Word of God is intended. D. D. BUCK, Geneva, July 28th, 1880. Geneva, N. Y. The author received the following testimonial from his Class: Waterloo, N. Y., Nov. 24th, 1878. Mr. C. V. D. CorneU : Dear Brother .-—Having taken the series of what you term " Introductory Blackboard Lessons," we deem it a pleasure as well as a duty to you, and to those who may desire a knowledge of God's Holy Word, to say that the Lessons as imparted to us are of incalculable value to the Bible student, introducing- the Bible as a science, easy to be understood and retained, each being an object lesson and thereby held in its place by association. The " Biblical Index " gives a bird's-eye view of God's word. While heretofore the Bible has been one confused mass of matter, now each book and the leading thought in the same stand out in bold relief, whereby we are able to comprehend the Bible as a whole, the system being entirely new and novel, yet so simple that a child may understand it. Mrs. N. Seely, Julia A. Johnson, Hattie Bodell, Mrs. Annie E. Bragg, Hattie Bookstaver, Thomas E. Seely, Amy Smith, Abram L. Seely, Sarah A. Smith, Fenton Seely, Allie Seely, Mrs. M. Brewer, Mrs. Francis E. Seely, Mr. S. Brewer, Elmer Smith, James Seely, Mary Clark, John E. Graw, George S. Lawrence, Martin F. Bragg, Eliza Bragg, Zalmunna Bragg, Maribla Wooden, Lina Welter, Mrs. Margaret Brewer, Alfred W. Fairweather, Mrs. Hattie Tobey, Sarah A. Travis. FEOM REV. W. HOGARTH, D. D., PRESBYTERIAN. Geneva, N. Y., August 12th, 1880. C. V. D. Cornell : Dear Sir:— You were kind enough to show to me your "Key to Bible Study." So far as time allowed I gave it a careful examination, and am persuaded fully that it would be a valuable aid to Sabbath School teachers, 374 TESTIMONIALS. and especially valuable in the family as a book of reference. It puts into brief and available form a large amount of information, and affords the very assistance that could only be had by reference to a large number of books. The matter is so condensed, also, that much time would be saved in pursuing- the study of any one subject. I hope, my dear sir, that you may see the way clear to give it to the public through the press. Yours truly, W. HOGARTH. FROM REV. J. HENDRICK. C. V. D. Cornell. Esq., I Canisteo, N. Y., August 6th, 1880. Millport, N. Y. j Dear Brother: — With the most sincere satisfaction I have examined your work entitled " Cornell's Illustrated Biblical Index and Key to Bible Study." The general reader cannot fail to be interested and profited by it. To the Sunday School Superintendent and teacher it is invaluable as a work of reference on Biblical knowledge, and especially for its suggestions in the mode of studying the Bible. You have done good service in bri aging out a system of lessons eminently practical, which will enable the young as well as others to study the Bible more effectually, and to retain what they learn. Knowledge systematized and explained is science. This you have accom- plished most successfully, and in a manner entirely new. I commend the work, together with the index, to ai/who love the study of the Scriptures. Very truly yours, J. HENDRICK, Pastor Canisteo Baptist Church. What Sunday School Superintendents Say. FROM C. B. VESCELIUS. Lodi, August, 1880. Mr. C. V. D. Cornell: After a review of your manuscript and an examination of your chart, allow me to say that in my judgment they will be among the best and most interesting aids to Bible study that it has been my pleasure to meet with in a Sunday School experience of a score of years, and I congratulate you and the Christian public on so successful a termination of your many years of labor upon the work. The very low price at which your work is to be ]>ut upon the market bears no comparison to its real worth— the chart alone being worth more than the cost of both. Yours in the cause, C. B. VESCELICs. FROM R. G. SMITH. Waterloo, N. v., Sept. 1878. After an examination of Biblical Index prepared by C. V. I). Cornell. I am satisfied thai the condensed manner of presenting subjeotswill materi- ally aid the students in the reading and study of the Bible. R. G. SMITH, Superintendent Of Presbyterian Sunday School. TESTIMONIALS. 375 FROM N. B. COVERT, M. D. Mr. C. V. D. Cornell, ) Geneva, N. Y., Sept. 17th, 1878. Waterloo, N. Y. : f Dear Bro. :— I have carefully examined the copy of your Biblical Index presented to me, and I do not hesitate to say that it must prove of inesti- mable value to every family, as well as those who are more closely allied to Bible study and Sabbath School work in the Churches. Yours in the work, N. B. COVERT, Superintendent Baptist Sunday School. FROM J. A. CASTERLIN. Waterloo, N. Y., Sept. 30, 1878. Mr. C. V. D. Cornell : Dear Bro.:— I most cheerfully recommend your Bible Index, it being as useful in the study of the Old and New Testament as our map of the world to the study of the earth's surface. Could I not obtain another, I would not part with it. Respectfully yours, J. A. CASTERLIN, Manager Western Union Telegraph Company. Notices of the Press. (From the Ontario County Times, May 21st, 1879.) AN INSTRUCTIVE DISCOURSE. The pulpit of the Baptist church was occupied last Sunday evening by C. V. D. Cornell, Esq., of Waterloo, who gave us a most interesting and instructive lecture on the study of the Scriptures. He presented a large chart, which he called a " Bible Index," and which contained more instruc- tion adapted to aid the student of God's Word in reading and understanding the Bible than I ever saw in the same space before or heard in the same time. Mr. Cornell is a business man, and prepared this work between the hours of active business. D. (From the Ovid Independent, Aug. 3d, 1878.) The monthly exercises pertaining to the town S. S. Association, at the Baptist church, 3 p. m., Sunday, proved highly interesting. All were pleased with the clearly defined system of Bible teaching as laid down by a chart and explained on the black-board in separate lessons by C. V. B. Cornell, of Waterloo. There was a large attendance, and more than usual interest manifested. In this Index Mr. Cornell presents a plain, practical method, which, it seems to us, must be of inestimable va.ue and utility to the Bible student, and of great service, particularly, in Sunday schools. No description which we could give would do this Index justice. It must be seen and examined to be fully understood and appreciated. (From Geneva Gazette.) Mr. C. V. D. Cornell, of Waterloo, gave a very interesting and instructive lecture in the Baptist church, Tuesday evening, presenting his "Biblical Index " as furnishing the subject for his lecture. His conceptions and mode of illustrating the Bible, as shown upon his Index, is new and practical, and 376 TESTIMONIALS. easily understood by those who are not thorough Bible students, and will without doubt prove a great aid in the study of different portions of God's Word. In fact, the Index is just what he represents it to be— a bird's-eye view of the Bible. <» Reviewer's Notice. BY REV. JAMES P. THOMS, CAZENOVIA, JT. Y. " Cornell's Key to Bible Study, and Biblical Index,' 1 I have reviewed for the press with special interest. In this work the author has unfolded, as fully as space permitted, the history of God's revelation to man. All the books of the Bible are analyzed and unfolded in historic and chronological order, with such surrounding events and scenery as throw side lights upon them. Thus the Prophets are pictured amid the scenery of their lives, and in their historic associations. Thus, too, the Epistles are presented and unfolded in their order of time and circumstances. The entire Bible is exhibited in its unity and development, as a revelation of God's purposes of grace in Jesus Christ. In addition to this, the author has compiled much information about the Bible that is not accessible to the general reader, viz : a history of the Bible, English translation, ancient book-making, Bible text, manuscripts, versions, evidences that the Bible is from God, statistical tables, etc., etc. Gathering materials from a wide range, with patient care, he has embraced all in a simple and compact form, and by his Illustrated Bible Index presents the analysis of the Bible to the eye, and still more f ully on the black-board by diagrams. Thus, by these lesssons, the Bible is taught and illustrated in the same manner as natural sciences, through the eye by figures and dia- grams. The work is divided into a series of lessons, to be used as a text book for teachers, students, normal classes, institutes, etc., but the division into les- sons does not interfere with the unity of the work for the general reader. "The Interim" is worthy of special mention, as giving a concise, clear and complete view of the moral and political history of the Jews, from Malachi to Christ, and with the Introduction to the New Testament, showing the preparation of the world for Christ, gives the reader a bird's-eye view of the condition of the world from the last utterances of Malachi to the an- gelic choir around Bethlehem. This period of history to many readers is \ ery little known, and often not in possession. The work has carefully prepared tables of contents, marginal notes, com- plete tables of indices, which render it invaluable as a book of reference. This book will, therefore, be of great service to student?, ministers, and all Bible readers. I therefore cheerfully commend it to the public as a timely work, much needed, and destined to be of great service. Yours truly, To C. V. I). Cornell, JAMES P. THOMS. Millport, N. V. A.gents wanted in every town; some one who desires to DO GOOD, and make money in its sale. Scud for private terms to agents. HOW TO MAKE COMPLETE REFERENCE BIBLE. Of the numerous methods presented for Bible marking, none fur- nish a practical method of handy reference, whereby the Bible reader is supplied with that desideratum which makes a complete reference Bible. It is conceded by all Biblical scholars that the Bible is its own interpreter, and can be understood only by the use of references. Much precious time is consumed finding them, they being often neglected' for this reason; and many times the interest in the reference is lost before it is found, especially by the young. Hence a system that will obviate these difficulties merits a hearty welcome. This plan is valuable above all others for three reasons: First, its simplicity; a child can perform the whole operation. Second, much valuable information is imparted by its use. And third, there is pleasure in the use of a Bible thus prepared, especially by the young. The author has made a practical test of its value for years, it being used by him in his Teachers' Meetings and Sunday School Classes. One pastor says: " I consider it invaluable in giving Bible readings." The above information will be accompanied with a beautiful engraving of a Bible, showing how it appears when complete. Sent to any address on receipt of two 3-cent postage stamps. Address C. V. D. CORNELL, Author and Publisher, Millport, K Y.